Vinareva La Ianson VV English Idioms Angliiskie Idiomy

ВАС ЖДЕТ УСПЕХ!
Л. А. ВИНАРЕВА, В. В. ЯНСОН
АНГЛИЙСКИЕ
ИДИОМЫ
ENGLISH IDIOMS
ООО «Дом Славянской книги» ООО «ИП Логос-М»

Москва Киев
ООО «Издательство
Айрис пресс»
Москва
2008
УДК 8Л 1.111*373.72(075.8)
ББК81.2 АНГЛ-5
В 48
Рецензенты: Кеннет Пейн, профессор

Фолкнеровского университета (США),
Панасенко Н. И., доктор филологических наук,
профессор Черкасского государственного
университета
Винарева Л . А., Янсон В. В.

В 00 English idioms = Английские идиомы: Учебное посо
бие. - К.: ООО «ИП Логос-М», - 2008. - 384 с.: ил. -
Англ., рус.
ISBN 978-5-8112-3305-2
Учебное пособие включает более 500 английских идиоматических
выражений и их русских эквивалентов, сгрупнированных по темати
ческому принципу, дефиниции идиом, а также задания, направленные
н а ’развитие навыков употребления идиоматических оборотов речи.
Учебное пособие предназначено для студентов высших учебных заве
дений, а также для лиц, работающих над совершенствованием знаний
английского языка.
УДК 811.111’373.72(075.8)
ББК 81.2 АНГЛ-5
Исключительные права на издание произведения принадлежат из

дательству ООО «ИП Логос-М». Любое воспроизведение текста, цели
ком или частично, без разрешения издательства запрещается и пресле
дуется в соответствии с действующим законодательством.
Издательство ООО «ИГ1 Логос-М» будет признательно своим чи
тателям за отзывы о книге, а также за уточнение помещенных в ней
материалов.
Ваши отзывы и пожелания просим направлять по адресу: 03057,
Киев, ул. Вышгородская, д. 21, офис 404.
Тел. +380 44 502 3809 (многоканальный).
E-mail: vp_logos@ukr.net
ISBN 978-5-8112-3305-2 Винарева Л. А., Янсон В. В.

ООО «ИП Логос-М»
Художественное оформление
Орлова И. Н.
Two marks o f complete mastery o f a
foreign language are the ability to use humor
appropriately and the unconscious use o f
idioms. This text is a great resource fo r
understanding and becoming comfortable
with English idioms. There is a good balance
between British and American idioms and the
sources fo r English quotations range from
classic literature to Time magazine. Because
the text is user-friendly, it will move the dili
gent student to a new level o f using the
English language. I am sure that this text will
benefit anyone who uses it.
I congratulate Ludmila Vinareva and
Valentina Yanson on the production o f this
excellent text. Their diligent work will be
repaid many times over by the increased
knowledge and competence o f those students
who engage this text.
Dr. Kenny Payne

FOREWORD
This textbook is intended primarily for students o f univer

sities and institutes for foreign languages. The aims df the text
book are to facilitate the acquisition o f oral skills by students,
promote communicative competence in language learners by
using “communicative activities” The textbook intends to
develop such language skills as reading, speaking, writing and
cultural understanding.
This book contains the idiomatic phrases and sentences that
occur frequently in British and American English. Twenty topics
are covered (Family Life. Dwelling. Daily Programme. Meals.
Shopping. Social Etiquette. Education. Weekend. Culture.
Literature. Religion. Getting about Town. Travelling/Vacation.
Nature/Weather. Medicine. Sport. Politics. Law. Business.
Miscellany).
The units are similarly organized. Each unit contains a list
o f idioms, cultural context, texts and vocabulary exercises. All
the texts are authentic and thought-provoking. The linguistic
items are introduced in meaningful situations (contexts) to
facilitate understanding. Some examples illustrate the typical
ways in which each phrase is used. The phrases in the book
come from many books by some English writers. Many have
been collected from current newspapers and magazines. Others
have come from existing dictionaries. “Standard English” is
used.
Different kinds o f exercises and activities are provided:
translation, reading, speaking and writing (composition). They
are graded to provide a progression from manipula tion to com
munication. The instructions to the exercises are appropriate.
In Stage 1 (conveying meaning), the idiomatic items are pre-
sented to the students. In Stage 2 (checking for comprehen
sion), exercises test how far the students have grasped the
meaning o f the items. In Stage 3 (consolidation), the students
deepen their understanding o f the items through use and cre
ative problem-solving activities. The postreading stage is
devoted to integrating the new stage information from the text
with what the students already know. The usual means o f doing
this is through a written assignment, but other techniques are
available, including discussions, role-plays, and project work.
Some exercises can be done independently either in class or at
home. Others need a class to look natural.
Cultural materials often cause more comprehension prob
lems than language. So to make the work more meaningful the
cultural material is given in the book. Non-native speakers
require adequate preparation for culture-tied items, along with
idioms and colloquial expressions.
The textbook contains Russian equivalents o f more than
500 English idioms. There is appealing artwork in the book.
The artwork is related to some idioms.
The textbook has a table o f contents which indicates where
to locate specific topics.
We hope the textbook will be useful for students who are

learning how to understand idiomatic English, and for all
people who want to know more about the language.
It is difficult to use idioms accurately and appropriately in
a foreign language. Before you can use them you need to be
able to recognize and understand them.
... An important fact which must be stressed is that idioms are not
only colloquial expressions, as many people believe. They can appear
in formal style and in slang. They can appear in poetry or in the lan
guage of Shakespeare and the Bible. What, then, is an idiom? We can
say that an idioms is a number of words which, taken together, mean
something different from the individual words of the idioms when
they stand alone. The way in which the words are put together is
often odd, illogical or even grammatically incorrect. These are the
special features of some vocabulary. Because of the special features
of some idioms, we have to learn the idioms as a whole and we often
cannot change any part of it (except, perhaps, only the tense of the
verb). English is very rich in idiomatic expressions. In fact it is diffi
cult to speak or write English without using idioms. An English
native speaker is very often not aware that he is using an idioms; per
haps he does not even realize that an idiom which he uses is gram
matically incorrect. A non-native learner makes the correct use of
Idiomatic English one of his main aims, and the fact that some idioms
are illogical or grammatically incorrect causes him difficulty. Only
careful study and exact learning will help.
The correct use o f idiomatic English should be the aim
o f every learner. It is an aim which is worthwhile and satisfy
ing. Mastery o f idioms comes only slowly, through carefiil
study and observation, through practice and experience, but
remember: practice makes perfect and all things are difficult
before they are easy.
(From English Idioms and How to Use Them
by J. Seidl, W. Me Mordie)
FAMILY LIFE
IDIOMS
Study the following:
A
1 . Be / look the very picture of one’s (father...), be the spitting
image of smb
2. (As) pretty as a picture
3. Keep one’s looks / lose one’s looks
4. Beauty lies in lover’s eyes; Beauty is in the eyes of the beholder
5. Appearances are deceptive
6. In the flower of life (one’s age) / in the prime of life
7. Bear / carry off one’s age well
8. You are as old as you feel
9. A chip off the old block
10. Like father like son
11. Be a character
12. Actions speak louder than words
В
1. Marriages are made in heaven
2. Wedding dress / ring / breakfast / reception / cake
3. Be head over ears in love
4. The apple of one’s eye
5. The baby of the family
6. A black sheep
7. Family circle
8. Family hearth / Hearth and home
9. Bring up / raise a family
|0 . Family skeleton = a skeleton in the cupboard / closet
11. Accidents will happen / occur in the best-regulated families
12. Marry in haste and repent at leisure
A
1. Be / look the very picture of one’s (father...) - to look like an
older relative.
E.g.: John looks the very picture o f his father.
2. (As) pretty as a picture - very pretty.
E.g.: Now, there’s that girl - she's as pretty as a picture.
You look as pretty as a picture inJhat dress.
3. Keep one’s looks - to continue to.be physically attractive.
E.g.: She kept her looks even in the old age.
4. Beauty lies in lover’s eyes (saying) - different people have dif
ferent opinions about what is beautiful.
5. Appearances are deceptive - something that is deceptive seems
to be one thing but is in fact very different.
E.g.: I t’s usually best not to judge by appearances.
They say; appearances are deceptive.
6. In the flower of life (one’s age) / in the prime of life - to be at
the time in your life when you are the strongest and most active.
E.g.: He was about 40 years old, and in the prime o f life.
7. Bear / carry off one’s age well - to look younger than one actu
ally is.
8. You are as old as you feel - a phrase often used to make some
one feel happier if they are sad because they think they are getting
too old.
9. A chip off the old block - a person very like his or her mother or
father in character / appearance.
E.g.: “That daughter o f hers”, observed the Colonel, “is a chip
off the old block. ”
10. Like father like son - used to say that a boy behaves like his
father, especially when this behaviour is bad.
E.g.: “Like father like son”, the girl said with affectionate laugh
ter, “In our family we ’re smart. ”
11. Be a character - to be an interesting and unusual person.
E.g.: H e’s quite a character - he has so many tales to tell
12. Actions speak louder than words (saying) - used to say that you
are judged by what you do, rather than by what you say you will do.
В
|. Marriages are made in heaven (proverb) - they are fated to hap
pen because mysterious force is controlling events.
E.g.: The marriage o f Manuel and Susan was perhaps average. It
was certainly not made in Heaven, nor was it a failure.
2, Wedding dress - a long usually white dress worn at a traditional
wedding.
Wedding ring - a usually gold ring used in the marriage cer
emony and worn on the third finger of the left hand to show that
one is married.
Wedding breakfast - a meal after a marriage ceremony, for the
families and guests. Although it is called a breakfast, the meal is
a lunch or dinner.
Wedding cake - a cake made for a marriage ceremony.
CULTURE CONTEXT
There are many types of wedding in Britain and the US depend
ing on whether a person is Christian, Moslem, Hindu, etc. Many
people get married in church. Other people get married at a registry
office (BrE) / office of the justice of the peace (AmE), often followed
by a party at home or in a hotel.
There are special names for some of the people in the wedding
ceremony! The woman who is getting married is called the bride and
the man is called the bridegroom or groom. The man has a male
friend with him called the best man and the bride has some female
friends called the bridesmaids. It is traditional for the bride to wear a
long white dress and a white veil and to carry flowers in a bouquet.
She is also supposed to wear “something old, something new, some
thing borrowed and something blue” because this will bring her luck.
The groom wears a suit or sometimes a tuxedo (in the US) or morn
ing suit (in Britain). Tuxedo also tux - a man’s jacket, usually black,
worn on formal occasions, e.g. weddings.
A wedding cake in Britain is usually white, often with three
levels, one on top of the other, and is cut by the bride and groom at
the wedding reception. What is left after the wedding is cut up and
sent in small boxes to people who were not at the wedding. The top
level (tier) is sometimes kept until the first child is christened. In America
the top level is saved (usually frozen) by the bride and groom and
eaten on theinfirst anniversary.
3. Be head over ears in love = madly in love = very much in love =
This is what we would say head over heels in love (AmE).
E.g.: It was obvious that they were very much in love.
4. The apple of one’s eye - to be loved very much by someone.
E.g.: Ben was always the apple o f his father s eye.
5. The baby of the family - a younger child in a family, often the
youngest.
E.g.: He s the baby o f the family.
6. A black sheep - someone who is regarded by other members of
their family or group as a failure or embarrassment.
E.g.: She’s the black sheep o f the family.
7. Family circle - the closely related members of a family.
E.g.: Don \t say anything about it outside the family circle.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Family Circle - a magazine for women containing information
about food, the family, health, with short stories, etc.
8. Family hearth / Hearth and home - the hearth is the area around
the fire in a house, especially the floor of the fireplace. The hearth
is often thought of as the centre of a family's life. Hearth and
home - your home and family.
E.g.: The joys of hearth and home.
9. Bring up / raise a family - to look after one’s children and help
them grow.
E.g.: Many women return to work after raising their families.
10. Family skeleton = a skeleton in the cupboard / closet - an
embarrassing or unpleasant secret about something that happened
to a person in the past.
E.g.: They have a skeleton or two in their closets, as well as their
neighbours.
11. Accidents will happen / occur in the best-regulated families
(saying) - a phrasevused when there has been an accident, mean-
ing that it is impossible to avoid them and so not worth worrying
about them.
E.g.: My dear friends, accidents will occur in the best-regulated
families.
12. M arry in haste and repent at leisure (proverb) - to fall in love
with smb and marry him / her soon and then to be sorry for and
wish one had not done it.
E.g.: Love at first sight is a dangerous thing. Nothing is truer than
that wise old proverb - marry in haste, repent at leisure.
TESTING VOCABULARY
/. A. Match the following English idioms to their respective die■
tionary definitions.
♦ (As) pretty as a picture ♦ Someone’s favourite person

or thing
♦ In the prime of life ♦ An interesting person
♦ A skeleton in the cup-board ♦ A younger child in the family
♦ Bring up a family ♦ Love smb dearly
♦ A chip off the old block ♦ The members of a family
♦ Family circle ♦ Be like one of his/her parents
in character and behaviour
♦ The baby of the family ♦ Look after a child, try to give
it some beliefs and attitudes
♦ Be head over ears in love ♦ Be in the best and most pro
ductive period of one’s life
♦ Be a character ♦ The worst member of a family
♦ A black sheep ♦ Behave like one’s father
♦ The apple of one’s eye ♦ A hidden and shocking secret
♦ Like father like son ♦ Very pretty
B. Use some idioms to make up a story. A student starts it

with “I have a friend named M a r y O t h e r students should
take turns building upon this sentence, turn by turn.
II. A. In the following sentences, there is an idiom. Decide what
you think is the key word, then look in your dictionary to see
if you are right Rewrite the sentences in non-idiomatic
English.
В. Expand on the sentences.
0 Model: Mary is as pretty as a picture. She has large blue eyes, a
delicate nose, exquisite teeth, and a beautiful skin. She’s not only
attractive. Mary is a wonderful person; she s friendly and reliable.
1. Sweet little Mary is as pretty as a picture. 2. John was struck
down by a heart attack in the prime of life. 3. The Browns’ new house
is pretty as a picture. 4. John looks like his father - a real chip off the
old block. 5. Maiy kept promising to get a job, John finally looked
her in the eye and said, “Actions speak louder than words!” 6. Bill
and Mary are head over heels in love with each other. 7. Nick’s car
is the apple of his eye. 8. Don is the black sheep of the family. He is
always in trouble with the police. 9. Diana’s grandmother brought her
up. 10. My brother was expelled from the university a year ago.
That’s our family’s skeleton in the closet. 11. John is the very picture
of his father. 12. My grandmother kept her looks even in her old age.
III. A. The following sentences all contain an idiom with one key
word missing. Choose one of the four alternatives to com
plete the idipm.
B. Agree or disagree with these statements. Give your own
views with reasons.
1. My friend is a chip off the o ld ___(brick, block, buck, bug).
2. You are as old as you__(figure, find, fit, feel). 3. Marriages are
made i n ___(hearth, hell, heaven, harmony). 4 . ___ (acts, actions,
abilities, accounts) speak louder than words. 5. My mother carries
off h e r ___ (ache, age, award, aim) well. 6. Beauty lies in ___
(leader’s, lady’s, lover’s, lad’s) eyes. 7. Actions__ (say, speak, sing,
screech) louder than words. 8 .1 am head over___(eyes, elbows, eye-
brows, ears) in love. 9. My brother/sister is the b lac k ___(ship,
sheep, shop, shed) of the family. 10. Without the help of the govern
ment there could be only loss o f ___(heart, health, house, hearth)
and home and starvation for workmen who lost their jobs. 11.1 don’t
have any skeleton in t t a ___(coatroom, closet, club-house, cloak-
room). 12. Marry in haste a n d ___(race, rack, rage, repent) at
leisure.
Ш. A. Read the following passages and choose the correct key

word to complete the idioms. Use a dictionary to check your
answers. Translate the passages into Russian.
B. Sum up every person mentioned in the extracts.
1. Michael was not vain of his good___(looks / legs), he knew
he was handsome and accepted compliments, not exactly with indiffer
ence, but as he might have accepted a compliment on a fine old house
that had been in his family for generations.
(From Theatre by W. S. Maugham)
2. Mrs Gosselyn was a tall, stoutish, elderly woman, much taller
than her husband, who gave you the impression that she was always
tiying to diminish her height. She had the remains of good__ (looks /
likes), so that you said to yourself that when young she must have
been beautiful. She wore her hair parted in the middle with a bun on
the nape of her neck. Her classic features and size made her at first
meeting somewhat imposing, but Julia quickly discovered that she
was very shy. Her movements were stiff and awkward. She was
dressed fussily, with a sort of old-fashioned richness which did not
suit her.
3. Julia talked to Mrs Gosselyn of Michael. She told her how
cleverly he acted and how popular he was and she praised his looks.
She saw that Mrs Gosselyn was proud of him, and with a flash of
intuition saw that it would please her if she let her see, with the
utmost delicacy as though she would have liked to keep it a secret but
betrayed herself unwittingly, that she was___(head/hand) over ears
in love with him.
4. Nan did not care to conceive that other people might be pro
foundly different from herself. Nan had, moreover, a tendency to be
hostile towards unmarried people of either sex, regarding them as in
some way abnormal and menacing. In the sacred intimacy of the
home Nan was often pleased to refer to “our marriage”; but she did
not think that this was a subject which, either in particular or in gen
eral, could be discussed or ещп mentioned in the company of
strangers - and everyone beyond tfte family___(home / hearth) was
to her a stranger.
(From The Sandcastle by I. Murdoch)
5. - He’s told Avice Crichton that he’ll get her a part in your next
play.
- Who the devil is Avice Crichton?
- Oh, she’s a young actress I know. She’s as pretty as a ___(por
trait / picture). He says he can get you to do anything he wants. He
says you just eat out of his hand.
- What nonsense! I don’t believe a word of it.
6. It’s true the boy looked so innocent and seemed even a trifle
shy, but appearances were___(deceptive / decent).
(From Then and Now by W. S. Maugham)
7. George Meadows was a man of fifty and his wife, Mrs. George
Meadows, was a year or two younger. They were both fine people in
th e___(pride / prime) of life. Their thfee daughters were lovely and
their two sons were handsome and strong. They had no notions about
being gentlemen and ladies; they knew their place, were happy and
deserved their happiness, as they were merry, industrious and kindly.
(From Home by W. S. Maugham)
8. His heir was a nephew, son of his brother killed in a motor acci
dent, not a bad boy, but not a chip off the___(old/odd) block, no, sir,
far from it...
(From Creatures o f Circumstance by W. S. Maugham)
9. - You don’t want it to come into Court?
- No, though I suppose it might be rather &n.
- That entirely depends on how many _ _ (skeletons / scalpels)
you have in your cupboard.
(From The Silver Spoon by J. Galsworthy)
10. But Sally was worried, and she still felt rather a ___(HandY
black) sheep with her sisters.
(From Golden Miles by K. S. Prichard)
К The following sentences all contain some idioms. Read and
franslate them into Engiish. Use a Russian-English dictionary
and the English-Russian Phraseological Dictionary by
A. V. Kunin.
1. Вечер был как. две капли воды похож на всякий другой
вечер с разговорами, чаем и зажженными свечами. (Л. Толстой.
Война и мир) 2. А девушка-то красавица из себя, как картинка.
(А. Писемский. Богатый жених) 3. Лева в отца, только Леве везет,
он родился в рубашке. (И. Эренбург. Буря) 4. Я знал одного
человека в цвете юных еще сил, исполненного истинного бла
городства и достоинств. (Н. Гоголь. Старосветские помещики) 5. Он
появился здесь вскоре после тебя, и, как я понимаю, он по уши
Влюблен в Кити. (Л. Толстой. Анна Каренина) 6. Вы мою дочь бе
регите, как зеницу ока, а будете обижать, - не сдобровать вам!
<ф Решетников. Ставленник) 7. Часто, по-видимому, отцом овладе
вало отчаяние, что он не сможет сам поставить на ноги всех
$етей. (В. Вересаев. В юные годы) 8. Мне гораздо неприятнее было,
|югда ты тяготился семейной жизнью, а что потеряли часть капи-
?$ала- велика важность! (А. Писемский. Взбаламученное море)
9. Аннета Петровна вдруг подумала, что она совершенно не зна
ет его, что вся его настоящая жизнь таится за семью замками.
<(Халов. Последний циклон) 10. Я исключен из духовного звания,
овца заблудшая. (М. Салтыков-Щедрин. Губернские очерки)
VI. Rewrite the following text in idiomatic Engiish.

Ann looks like her mother. She is a beautiful, interesting and
unusual person. She is good at music. Ann is a girl of a few words.
Ann never lets people down. She loves her brother and her parents
very rnuch and she likes to spend her time with them. Ann’s mother
loves her dearly. She dotes on her. Ann is the youngest child in the
family.
Ann’s mother is 45, but she is still very attractive. At this time of
her life she is active and energetic. The woman doesn’t look her age.
Ann’s brother is a light-minded person, just like his father in his
youth, rie does bad in behaviour and studies. They say, he’s a failure.
*The boy wants to leave his college.
His parents keep the fact secret. But there’s nothing to be done
about it. Things do happen.
VII. Link each of the pictures with one of the idioms (pp. 17- 18).
Comment on the meaning of each of them. Use them in situ
ations of your own.
1. Marriages are made in heaven. 3. A black sheep.
2. Family skeleton. 4. The baby of the family.
VIII. Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use

the idioms given in Unit 1.
1. Your friend wants to get married, you think he/she is too young.
Tell him / her what you think he / she ought to do.
2. Your parent doesn’t like the person you are going out with. Tell
your parent what a good person your friend is.
3. Your boyfriend/girlfriend wants to have a big wedding, but you
want to have a very small one. Discuss it.
IX. A. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.

Make up a story about Jon and Holly and their family history.
Use some idioms given in Unit 1.
When they reached the house Jon pulled out a crumpled letter
which Holly read while he was washing - a quite short letter, which
must have cost her father many pang to write.
“My Dear, - You and Val will not forget, l trust, that Jon knows
nothing. His mother and I think he is too young at present. The boy
is very dear, and the apple of her eye. “Your loving father, J.F.”
(From The Forsyte Saga. To Let by J. Galsworthy)
В. Read and translate the dialogue Into Russian. Make up a
story about Edward, his success and failures. Use idiomatic
English.
- Edward is quite an educated man, you know.
- 1 can hardly believe that.
- He was at Haversham School, I understand, and he got any
number of scholarships and prizes. He got a scholarship at Wadham
(Oxford), but he ran away to sea instead.
- He was rather a harum-scarum.
- He doesn’t look much like a sailor.
- Oh, he gave up the sea many years ago. He’s been all sorts of
things since then.
- Jack of all trades and master of none.
— Now, I understand, he’s a writer.
(From Cakes and Ale or The Skeleton
in the Cupboard by W. S. Maugham)
C. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.
Describe the Craigs' family life in idiomatic English.
I had heard a good deal of the Craigs from Miss Gray during the
previous three weeks. They had taken the cottage next to hers, and at
first she feared they would be a nuisance. She liked her own com
pany and did not want to be bothered with the trivialities of social inter
course. But she very quickly discovered that the Craigs were as plain
ly disinclined to strike up an acquaintance with her as she with
them. Though in that little place they could not but meet two or three
times a day, the Craigs never by so much as a glance gave an indica-
fion that they had ever seen her before. Miss Gray told me she
thought it very tactful of them to make no attempt to intrude upon her
|*fivacy. Craig was a handsome man, with a red, honest face, a grey
Moustache, and thick strong grey hair. He held himself well, and
there was a bluff heartiness of manner about him that suggested a
broker who had retired on a handsome fortune. His wife was a
Woman hard of visage, tall, ahd of masculine appearance, with dull,
fair hair too elaborately dressed, a large nose, a large mouse, and a
father-beaten skin. She was not only plain but grim. Her clothes,
pretty, flimsy and graceful, sat oddly upon her, for they would better
W|ve suited a girl of eighteen, and Mrs Craig was certainly forty. Miss
Cfray told me they were well cut and expensive.
They were obviously disposed to keep themselves to themselves.
Miss Gray used often to see them walking up and down the lawn of
their garden arm in arm; they not talk, as though they were so happy
to be together that conversation was unnecessary; and it warmed her
heart to observe the affection which that dour, unsympathetic woman
so obviously felt for her tall, handsome husband. And it looked as
though he loved her as mush as she loved him. Every now and then
he would give her a glance, and she would look up at smile, and he
gave her cheek a little pat. Because they were no longer young, their
fciutual devotion was peculiarly touching.
(From The Happy Couple by W. S. Maugham)
X. A. Speak on one of the following topics:
1. Almost every family has a clown. 2 .1 wish my father or moth
er would 3. About my or my friend's family. 4. About my best
friend.
B. Use the idioms given in Unit 1. Use the English-Russian
Phraseological Dictionary by A. V. Kunin and pick outcome
idioms in it, which may be grouped under the heading: a) Man's
Age, Appearance and Character; b) Family Life/ Use these
idioms in your stories.
PROJECT
1. Consult the English-Russian Phraseological Dictionary
by A. V. Kunin, copy as many idioms as possible out of it,
associated with the topic under the following headings or cat
egories: Family Life. Man's Appearance and Character. Study the
information given in the dictionary on Page 14 and classify the
idioms according to their types.
2. Use the American Idioms Dictionary by Richard A. Spears
Pick out some idiomatic phrases and sentences illustrating the
meanings of them. Group the idioms according to their types.
3. Of a book you've read copy out some idioms related to the
topic «rFamily Life». Comment on their meanings and describe
the types of these set expressions. (Consult the English-Russian
Phraseological Dictionary by A. V. Kunin. 1 Selection. - P. 14,15).
DWELLING
IDIOMS

1. Set up house / home
2. Keep house
3. Keep a good house
4. Take pains to make the house / flat as attractive as possible
5. Be in apple-pie order
6. Live in (grand) style, live in opulence
7. Be well / comfortably off; be well-to-do
Receive guests / visitors; play host to smb
9. Keep open house
10. Make oneself at home
11. Make smb feel at home
12. Home from home; Home away from home (AmE)
13. Home bird
|4. Within the walls of
15. Under the same roof
16. Answer the door
17* Show smb the door
18. Kick downstairs
19. Not enough room to swing a cat
20. Live cooped / penned up together
21. The more the merrier
22. Walls have ears
23. A / no roof over one’s head
24. A condemned house
25. For domestic reason
26. Home life
27. Home sweet home
28. Be homesick
29. An Englishman’s home is his castle
30. East or West, home is best. There’s no place like home.
***
1. Set up house / home - start to live in a house, especially with
another person.
E.g.: Helen and John are thinking o f setting up house together.
2. Keep house - to do all the cooking, cleaning (etc) in a house.
E.g.: He keeps house and 1 go out to work.
3. Keep a good house - to be good at receiving guests.
E.g.: He lives in a small cottage hut he certainly knows how to
keep a good house.
4. Take pains to make the house / flat as attractive as possible -
to make a great effort to do it.
E.g.: She takes great pains to make her house as interesting and
attractive as possible.
5. Be in £pple-pie order - to be in perfect order or perfectly
arranged.
E.g.: His house is always in apple-pie order.
CULTURE CONTEXT
A house is a building for people to live in and often has more than
one level (storey).
A cottage is a small, usually old house, especially in the country
and in the US is usually used as a holiday home.
A bungalow is a fairly modem house built on only one level.
A set of rooms (including a kitchen and bathroom) within a larg
er building is called a flat in British English or an apartment or
condominium in American English. An apartment is usually rented,
and a condominium is usually owned by the person who lives there.
A small one-room flat is a bedsitter in British English.
A large, grand house is called a mansion or (if it belongs to a king
or queen), a palace.
The place where you live is your home, whatever type of house it
is, e.g: After the party we went home to our flat. British speakers often
consider that your hqnie is the place where you belong and feel com-
lortable and is more than just a house, e.g.: Our new house is begin
ning to look more like a real home. In American English home can
Ibo be used for the actual building, e.g.: She has a beautiful home.
6. Live in (grand) style; live in opulence fopjulons] - to be
wealthy, affluent, very rich.
E.g.: They live in grand style. They have a magnificently opulent
mansion.
7. Be well / comfortably off; be well-to-do - to be rich enough to
be able to do and buy most of the things that they want.
E.g.: He came from a well-to-do family.
Well-to-do families do not live in this neighbourhood.
8. Receive guests / visitors; play host to smb - to provide the
place, food, etc for a special meeting, event; receive guests and
provide food, drink, and amusement for them.
E.g.: She only receives guests on Monday afternoons.
9. Keep open house - welcome visitors at any time.
E.g.: We keep open house at Christmas.
10. Make oneself at home - to behave freely, sit where one ljkes, etc,
as if one were in one’s own home.
E.g.: Make yourself at home. ГЧ be back in half an hour.
| l . Make smb feel at home.
E.g.: She has a way o f making everyone feet at home.
|2 . Home from home; home away from home - a place as pleas
ant, comfortable, welcoming, etc, as one’s own house.
E.g.: He doesn't mind paying handsomely for his "home from
home"
КЗ. Home bird - someone who prefers to stay at home rather than
going to parties, travelling, etc.
E.g.: He seldom goes out in the evenings. He's a home bird.
M. Within the walls of - inside a certain area and not beyond it.
E.g.: He found himself for the first time in his life, within the
walls o f a library.
IS. Under the same roof - in the same house.
E.g.: She and / can't live under the same roof.
16. Answer the door - to open the door to let someone in.
E.g.: Will you answer the door?
17. Show smb the door - to make it clear someone is not welcome
and should leave.
E.g.: When he became aggressive his host showed him the door.
18. Kick downstairs - to push someone or something downstairs
with the foot or feet.
E.g.: Be off, or /7/ kick you downstairs!
19. Not enough room to swing a cat - very little space.
E.g.: He found his friend in a little flat where there was not
enough room to swing a cat.
20. Live cooped / penned up together - to live in a building, room
that is too small.
E.g.: There is no need to coop ourselves up any longer.
21. The more the merrier - a phrase used to tell someone that you
will be happy if they join you in something you are doing.
E.g.: Let him stay in. The more the merrier.
22. Walls have ears - other people may hear us.
E.g.: Let's not discuss this matter here. Walls have ears, you know.
23. A / no roof over one’s head - somewhere to live.
E.g.: He has not any job. But at least he fs got a roof over his head.
24. A condemned house - a house which is not safe enough to be
lived in or used.
E.g.: The fire department called it a condemned house.
25. For domestic reason - concerning family relationship and life at
home.
E.g.: He had to leave for his home for domestic reason.
26. Home life - relationship with your family.
E.g.: The child has had an unhappy home life.
27. Home sweet home - used to say how pleasant it is to be in your
home.
28. Be homesick - having a great wish to be at home, when one is
away from it. People feel homesick because they miss their fam
ily and friends or places and customs that are familiar to them.
29. An Englishman’s home is his castle ( proverb) - an Englishman
can do whatever he wants in his house.
E.g.: - The neighbours don ’/ like this loud music.
- Pooh! An Englishman s home is his castle.
30. East or West, home is best / There’s no place like home
(proverbs) - a person’s own home is the best place in the world
for him.
E.g.: Occasionally we go to London, and when we return we
always say the same, “There’s no place like home”
TESTING VOCABULARY
/. A. Match the following English idioms to their respective die*
Be homesick Ask smb to leave one’s horned

office, etc because one is^
very angry with that person
.Under the same roof Any visitors are welcome at
one’s house, they don’t need;
a special invitation to come,)
Answer the door There is very little space in M
room 1
Take pains to make the Stay at home and do th^
house attractive cleaning and cooking, and
do not go out to work ;
Make yourself at home A place in which one feels*
very happy, just as if he were
in his own home
Receive guests / visitors Accept as a visitor or mem-!
ber; welcome
There’s not enough room to Be tidy
swing a cat
A home from home Go and open the door becau
se a visitor has knocked on it
or run the bell
Be in apple-pie order Do in smb’s house the things
that a person would do in his
own
♦ Keep open house ♦ Make a great effort to do
smth
♦ Keep house ♦ Be in the same building
* Show smb the doorw ♦ Feel unhappy because one is
missing his home and his
family
В. Use some idioms to make up a story. A student starts it with

"Our friends have a large beautiful house." Other students
should take turns building upon this sentence, turn by turn.
il. A. In the following sentences, there is an idiom. Decide what

English.
B. Expand on the sentences.
□ Model: It's open house tonight. We expect a lot o f quests to come
to our place. The more the merrier.
1. It’s open house tonight. 2. My grandmother keeps house.
3. Mr Brown gave his son a lot of money to set up house. 4. Betty took
great pains to conceabthe truth from her friends. 5. Maiy left every
thing in apple-pie order. 6. I was. delighted to receive my friend.
7. John made his friends feel at home. 8. The Smiths want to try and
get all their relatives all under the same roof. 9. Come in and make
yourself at home. 10. Of course you can join us. The more the merrier.
II. The Blacks’ flat was very small. There wasn’t enough room
to swing a cat. 12. Shhh, walls have ears. Someone may be listening.
13. My friend took pains to decorate the room exactly right. 14. My
friend’s family is quite well-to-do. 15. Some people have the ability
to set up home wherever they happen to find themselves. 16. The
house was condemned as unfit for people to live in.
plete the idiom.
B. Use these sentences in some meaningful context.
1. They took__ (pace, pains, paints, pails) to get there on time. 2. The
Grand Hotel is playing___(house, hostess, hospitality, host) to this
year’s sales conference. 3. The office is too small. There’s not
enough room t o ___(sway, swipe, swing, swish) a cat. 4. Walls
h a v e ___(eyes, ears, eyebrows, eyelashes). 5. We can’t live under
the sam e___(ruffle, roof, robe, rayon) or we argue all the time.
6. All last week we were___(caged, cooped, caned, captured) up in
the house by bad weather. 7. It’s a wealthy neighbourhood. Only___
(well-turned-out, well-to-do, well-thought-of well-rounded) families
live here. 8. It was an old house that had been___(condensed, con
ceded, concealed, condemned). 9. You may come with us. T he___
(much, many, more, most) the merrier. 10. He rarely goes out. He is a
hom e___(birdie, buddy, bird, buck).
IV. A. Read the following passages and choose the correct key
word to complete the idioms. Use your dictionary to check
your answers. Translate the passages into Russian.
1. About forty-two years old and a very___(well-to-do / well*
read) bachelor, Thriplow was a timid man, but his timidity took a
curious form, for it drove him, whenever he had a holiday abroad,
into, discomforts you did not connect with timidity. He couldn’t beajr
social contacts, and so he chose for the scene of his escape those parts
of the world where there were few fellow-tourists.
(From The Lottery Ticket by Gr. Greene}
2. Sallie McBride just put her head in at my door. This is what she
said: “I’m s o ___(homeless / homesick) that I simply can’t stand it;
Do you feel that way?” I smiled a little and said no. I thought I coultj
pull through. At least homesickness is one disease that I’ve escaped!
I never heard of anybody being asylumsick, did you?
(From Daddy-Long-Legs by J. Webster)
3. The house was furnished in extremely good taste, with a judi
cious mixture of the antique and the modem. Julia had insisted that
she must have her bedroom as she liked, and having had exactly the
bedroom that pleased her in the old house in Regent’s Park which
they had occupied since the end of the war she brought it over bod
ily. It was the only room in the house in which Julia___(fit / felt)
completely at home.
28
г
4. In 1912, when I was seven, we got a house of our own. It was
il a court o f ___(condemned / conduced) houses, and it had four
looms and only one door - the street door.
(From Not Like This. Childhood by J. Walsh)
5. A retired actress had built herself a sumptuous residence in his
mmediate neighbourhood and kept___(opulent / open) house.
(From The Razor *s Edge by W. S. Maugham)
6. Mr Pickwick found himself, for the first time in his life,___(in /
within) the walls of a debtor’s prison.
(From Pickwick Papers by Ch. Dickens)
7. The room in which Walter and kitty w ere___(resettled /
received) was spacious. It was furnished as was every other drawing-
room she had been in at Hong Kong in a comfortable and homely
style. It was a larg$ party. They were the last to come and as they
Entered Chinese servants in uniform were handing round cocktails
|nd olives. Mrs Townsend greeted them in her casual fashion and
looking at a list told Walter whom he was to take in to dinner.
(From The Painted Veil by W. S. Maugham)
8. The first winter of my life was spent at the magnificent, superb,
palatial new hotel, the Murray Hill. And in the following spring we
moved to the house in Tarrytown that for almost ten years was to
be our home. And what a house! What home,___(sweetish / sweet)
home that was to us.
(From It's Me О Lord! by R. Kent)
9. The address which ,the inspector had given us was that of a
good-sized house about a mile on the London side of the village.
O ur___(ring/riff) at the bell was answered by a pretty dark-haired
girl whose eyes were red with recent weeping.
(From The ABC Murders by A. Christie)
10. Will you write a note to Commander McLaren and to your
friends the Spences? I shall want to see all of them, and it is essential
that they do not at once show me the___(dorm / door).
(From The Mystery o f the Spanish Chest by A. Christie)
11. “I’ve come to the determination that no woman shall ever
sleep under m y ___(roofing / roof) again - not even a female cat!”
One looked at the roof, and wondered what it had done amiss.
Besides, it wasn’t his roof. He only rented the house. What does a
man mean, anyhow, when he says “my roof’? My roof! The only roof
1 am conscious of having, myself, is the top of my head...
If ceilings have eyes, as walls have ___ (eyes/ears), then
Rawdon had given his ceilings a new outlook, with а -new coat of
paint...
(From Rawdon's Roof by D. H. Lawrence)
12. We duly stopped at the gate of a trim villa. Poirot jumped out
and rang the bell. I saw a perplexed frown dimming the radiance of
his face. Plainly, he was not satisfied. T h e ___(bang / bell) was
answered.
(From The Kidnapped Prime Minister by A. Christie)
V. The following sentences all contain some idioms. Read апф
translate them into English. Use a Russian-English dictionary
and the English-Russian Phraseological Dictionary Щ
A. V. Kunin.
1. Когда бы мне он сделал предложение, / Я молча дверь ему
бы указала. (А. Толстой. Дон Жуан) 2. Куда ни адресовалась
бедная девушка, везде ей указывали на дверь. (А. Герцен. Кто вино
ват?) 3. - Вы, кажется, стараетесь, по обязанности хозяйки, за
нять меня? - спросил Обломов. - Напрасно! - Отчего напрасно?
Я хочу, чтоб вам не было скучно, чтоб вы были здесь как дома,
чтоб вам было свободно, легко. (И. Гончаров. Обломов) 4. Этот
мальчик был всюду как у Себя дома, говорил легко и весело.
(Ф. Достоевский. Подросток) 5. Все в ее доме дышало таким оби
лием, какого не было и прежде, когда она жила одним домом с
братом. (И. Гончаров. Обломов) 6. Жил между небом и землей ...
нет ничего. (А. Островский. Бедность не порок) 7. Часто по ночам
его выталкивали из дому, и ему приходилось ночевать под от
крытым небом. (А. Островский. Без вины виноватые) 8. В семейст
ве архитектора, жившего тогда в своем доме на широкую ногу,
затевался домашний спектакль. (Д. Григорович. Литературные во
споминания) 9. Обстановка их дома поразила девушку, до тех
пор сидевшую в четырех стенах отцовского дома и не видевшую
яего подобного. (П. Мельников-Печерский. На горах) 10. Акто-
т зал был полон, яблоку негде упасть, и еще много ребят
ш ло у дверей, в коридоре. (В. Каверин. Два капитана) 11. В ма
м к о й комнате негде было яблоку упасть. Свободное простран
но оставалось только между больной и столиком, на котором
чрели свечи. (Д. Мамин-Сибиряк. Вор)
f t Link each of the pictures (pp. 32-33) with one of the idioms
listed below. Comment on the meaning of each of them. Use
them in situations of your own.
1. Walls have ears. 3. Not enough room to swing a cat.
2. Home bird. 4. Keep open house.
yil. Rewrite the following text in idiomatic English.

Jack and Maiy are good at receiving guests. They are houseproud,
joth of them make a great effort to make their house as interesting and
attractive as possible. Everything is perfectly arranged in their house,
jack and Mary have enough money to buy everything they want. They
We wealthy. And they like to see their friends in their house. Jack and
^lary are hospitable people. They welcome visitors at any time. And
they want their guests to behave freely as if they were in their own
home. Their friends say their place is as pleasant and comfortable as
their own house. Mary prefers to stay at home. She seldom goes out in
the evening. She misses her family and her home when she’s away.
Mary says her home is the best place in the world for her.
VIII. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you

have read that will lead you to say "So as the proverb goes... ”
Proverb: East or West, home is best.IX
.
IX. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen

tences;
1. So the boy did not feel at home in such a splendid house. 2. That
is why Helen took great pains to please her guests. 3. So the hotel is
now open to receive guests. 4. You will receive a warm welcome
when you come to England. 5. This old house is unsafe. It should be
condemned.
2 Янсон В.
X. Use the following as initial sentences and expand on them.
1. During your visit, just make yourself at home. 2. Of course you
can join us. The more the merrier. 3. How can you live in a small flat
like this? There’s not enough room to swing a cat. 4. Oh, my sister is
a very quiet person, just a home bird. 5. We keep open house on
Saturdays.
XI. Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use

1. Your friends have rearranged all of the furniture in their house.
Explain to your relatives where they put the furniture and why.
2. You’ve been to a very enjoyable party. Compliment the host /
hostess on his / her house.
XII. Read and translate the following passages into Russian.
A. Make up a story about Dorothy’s house. Use some idioms
given in Unit 2.
Dorothy was conscious of her delight in the sober luxury of the
drawing-room. She sat in an arm-chair, there were lovely flowers
here and there, on the walls were pleasing pictures; the room was
shaded and cool, it was friendly and homelike.
B. Make up a story about Hilda and Edwin, their house, the
way they furnish their rooms. Use idiomatic English.
Something unfamiliar in the aspect of the breakfast-room, as
glimpsed through the open door from the hall, drew him within.
Hilda had at last begun to make it into “her” room. She had brought
an old writing-table from upstairs and put it between the fireplace and
the window. Edwin thought:
“Doesn’t she even know the light ought to fall over the left shoul
der, not over the right?” Letter-paper and envelopes and even stamps
were visible; and a miscellaneous mass of letters and bills had been
pushed into the space between the flat of the desk and the small
drawers about it. There was also an easy-chair, with a freshly covered
cushion on it; a new hearth rug that Edwin neither recognized nor
approved of; several framed prints, and other oddments. His own por
trait still dominated the mantelpiece, but it was now flanked by two
brass candlesticks. He thought: “If she’d asked me, I could have
arranged it for her much better than that.” Nevertheless the idea of her
being absolute monarch of the little room, and expressing her individu
ality in it and by it, both pleased and touched him. Nor did he at all
jesent the fact that she had executed her plan in secret. She must have
been anxious to get the room finished for the musical evening.
Then he passed into the drawing-room, - and was thunderstruck.
The arrangement of the furniture was utterly changed, and the resem
blance to a boarding-house parlour after all achieved. The piano had
crossed the room; the chairs were massed together in the most ridicu
lous way; the sofa was so placed as to be almost useless. His anger
was furious but cold. The woman had considerable taste in certain
directions, but she simply did not understand the art of fixing up a
room, whereas he did. Each room in the house had been arranged by
himself, even to small details, - and well arranged. Everyone ad
mitted that he had a talent for interiors. Her conduct was inexcusable.
(From These Twain by A. Bennett)
C. 1) Write about some advantages and disadvantages of living

in town and out of town;
2) Make up a story about Rickie. Use some idioms given in
Unit 2.
Some people spend their lives in a suburb, and not for any urgent
reason. This has been the fate of Rickie. He had opened his eyes to
filmy heavens, and taken his first walk on asphalt. He had seen civi
lization as a row of semi-detached villas, and society as a state in
which men do not know the men who live next door. He had himself
become part of the grey monotony that surrounds all cities. There was
no necessity for this - it was only rather convenient to his father.
(From The Longest Journey by E. Forster)
D. Make up a story about Eveline and her decision to leave
her home. Use idiomatic English.
Home! She looked round the room, reviewing all its familiar
objects which she had dusted once a week for so many years, won
dering where on earth all the dust came from. Perhaps she would
never see again those familiar objects from which she had never
dreamed of being divided.
She had consented to go away, to leave her home. Was that wise?
She tried to weigh each side of the question.
(From Dubliners. Eveline by J.Joyce)
E. Describe the drawing-room which Mor loved, compare it
with Mor’s home. Use idiomatic English.
Mor went into the drawing-room and closed the door softly
behind him.The room was full of yellow evening light and its three
tall windows were wide open on to the garden.
The drawing-room was empty. Mor felt some relief. He fingered
his tie again, and sat down quietly in one of the chairs. He loved this
room. In his own home, although there were few ornaments, and such
as there were were chosen carefully by Nan to harmonize with the
curtains, no part of it seemed to blend into a unity. Here, on the con
trary, although the room was overcrowded and its contents extreme
ly miscellaneous, all seemed to come together into a whirl of red and
gold wherein each thing, though contributing to the whole, became
more itself. Mor half closed his eyes and the forms about him became
hazier and more intense. He let the colours enter into him. He rested.
XIII. Speak on one of the following topics. Use some idioms
given in Unit 2.
1. My dream house. 2. Home sweet home.
PROJECT
1. Consult the English-Russian Phraseological Dictionary by
A. V. Kunin. Read about the order and structure of entries
(Introduction. II. Order and Structure of Entries. - P. 8, 15). Look
up the following idioms in the dictionary and comment on the
structure of each entry.
Turn smb out of house and home; throw the house out of the win
dows; throw open the door to smb; turn smb out of doors; shut (slam)
the door in smb’s face; next door; darken smb’s door(s).
2. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you
have read that will lead you to say the following: “Home sweet
home".
DAILY PROGRAMME
IDIOMS

1. Go to bed with the lamb and rise with the lark
2. An early bird
3. The early bird catches the worm
4. Keep late / regular, etc hours
5. Early to bed and early to rise makes a man healthy, wealthy and wise
6. Not sleep a wink / not get a wink of sleep
7. (As) regular as clockwork
8. As busy as a bee
9. Be up to one’s ears in work
10. Have one’s hands full
11. A woman’s work is never done
12. Working breakfast (lunch...)
13. Not have all day
14. Morning, noon and night
15. Go (out) for a meal
16. Time flies
17. Blow away the cobwebs
18. Business before pleasure
19. Never put off till tomorrow what you can do today
20. By doing nothing we learn to do ill
21. The work shows the workman
22. It’s (Just) one of those days
23. It’s your lucky day
24. It’s not every day (that)
25. Not your day
26. Have time to bum
27. Not do a stroke of work
28. While away the time
29. Have a tedious time
30. Not know what to do with oneself
31. AU work and no play. All work and no play makes Jack a dull boy
32. Divide one’s time between work and play
★ **
1. Go to bed with the lamb and rise with the lark (proverb) - to
go to bed in the early evening and to get up very early in the morning.
2. An early bird - someone who always gets up very early in the
morning = an early riser.
E.g.: Seven? No problem! Vm a real early bird.
3. The early bird catches the worm - used to say that someone is
successful because they were the first to do something.
E.g.: "You must have left before daylight”, she said.
"I sure did. Its the early bird that catches the worm ”
4. Keep late / regular, etc hours - to go to bed and get up at late,
regular, etc times.
E.g.: She's always sleepy because she keeps late hours.
5. Early to bed and early to rise, makes a man healthy, wealthy
and wise (saying) - a phrase used, esp. by parents to their children
to make them go to bed early.
6. Not sleep a wink / not get a wink of sleep - not be able to sleep
at all.
E.g.: He never slept a wink that night.
7. (As) regular as clockwork - very regular.
E.g.: They visit us every month, regular as clockwork.
8. As busy as a bee - very busy.
E.g.: I don’t have time to answer your questions. I ’m as busy as a bee.
9. Be up to one’s ears in work - to have a lot of work.
E.g.: I ’m up to my ears in work at the moment. Will you come
later?
10. Have one’s hands full - to be very busy or too busy.
E.g.: I ’m sorry I can’t come - I have my hands full with problems
at home.
11. A woman’s work is never done - one has always some house
work to do.
E.g.: I ’ll do the cleaning and go to bed, I ’m tired out. A woman’s
work is never done.
12. Working breakfast (lunch / dinner) - a breakfast, etc. which is
also a business meeting.
E.g.: They had a working breakfast to discuss an important matter
<3. Not have all day - to not have much time available.
E.g.: Hurry up, we don’t have all day!
14. Morning, noon and night - used to emphasize that something
happens a lot or continuously.
E.g.: My sister is on the phone morning, noon, and night.
15. Go (out) for a meal - to go to a restaurant to have lunch, etc.
E.g.: In the evening they went for a meal in a Chinese restaurant.
16. Time flies - used to say that a period of time passes or something
happens in an unexpectedly short time.
E.g.: Is it June already? How time flies!
17. Blow away the cobwebs - to do smth, especially go outside, in
order to help yourself think more clearly and have more energy.
E.g.: A walk in the fresh air will help to blow some o f the cobwebs
away.
18. Business before pleasure (saying) - you should do your work
first and then enjoy yourself afterwards.
E.g.: Let’s get down to work. Business before pleasure.
19. Never put off till tomorrow what you can do today (saying) -
necessary jobs should always be done immediately, for if they are
left till later they may be forgotten and never get done.
20. By doing nothing we learn to do ill (proverb) - an idle person
can get into trouble or get smb into trouble.
21. The work shows the workman (saying) - the result of one’s
work depends on his personal qualities.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Work can be used as a general word for all activities of the mind
or body, e.g.: H e’s at work on a new novel.
For tiring and unpleasant work, labour or (less common and more
formal) toil can be used, e.g. : Clearing the field o f stones took ten
days o f backbreaking labour / toil.
If the work is tiring, uninteresting, and not respected, drudgery
can be used.
A workaholic is a person who likes to work too hard or is unable
to stop working and does not have time in their life for anything else,
such as personal relationships, e.g.: He is a complete workaholic. He
lets nothing come between himself and his work.
Work-day / working day - the amount of time during which one
works each day. In Britain and the US most people start work at about
9 o’clock and finish at about 5 o’clock.
What you do to earn your living is your job, your work, or (more
formal) your occupation. A trade is a skilled job in which you use
your hands.
A profession is a job such as that of a doctor or lawyer, for which
you need special training and a good education. Some professions,
such as teaching and nursing, are also called vocations, which sug
gests that people do them in order to help others.
★ * *
22. Itfs (just) one of those days - used when everything seems to be
going wrong.
E.g.: Its just been one of those days.
23. It’s your lucky day - used when something very good happens
to someone.
E.g.: He just found a ten pound note in the street. It must be his
lucky day.
24. It’s not every day that - used to say that something does not
happen often and is therefore very special.
E.g.: Let's go out and celebrate. After all, it's not every day you
see your former fellow students
25. Not your day - used when several unpleasant things have hap
pened to someone in one day.
E.g.: It's really not my day - 1 overslept and my car broke down.
26. Have time to burn - to have more time than one needs.
E.g.: Stop killing time! I don't think you have time to burn.
27. Not do a stroke of work - to not do any work at all.
E.g.: They haven't done a stroke o f work.
28. While away the time - to spend time in a pleasant and lazy way.
E.g.: They whiled away their time / their evenings talking.
29. Have a tedious ['tirdios] time - to have a boring, tiring time.
E.g.: They had a tedious time / lunch party.
30. Not know what to do with oneself - to not know what to do to
spend one’s time.
E.g.: She didn't know what to do with herself in the evenings.
31. All work and no play / All work and no play makes Jack a dull
boy (saying) - a person who spends all his time working will be
a dull and uninteresting companion.
32. Divide one’s time between work and play - to separate into two
parts.
E.g.: He divided his time between working and looking after the
children.
TESTING VOCABULARY
/. A. Match the following English idioms to their respective dic
♦ Keep late hours ♦ Very regular

♦ Have one’s hands full ♦ Not sleep at all
♦ An early bird ♦ Very busy
♦ Blow away the cobwebs ♦ Have a boring time
♦ Have a tedious time ♦ Go outside in order to help
yourself think clearly
♦ As busy as a bee ♦ Be too busy
♦ As regular as clockwork ♦ A person who likes to get up
♦ Not sleep a wink early
♦ Go to bed and get up at late
♦ While away the time times
♦ Not do a stroke of work ♦ Not do any work
♦ Spend time in a lazy way

with “My working day begins at 6 o'clock in the morning”.
Other student's should take turns building upon the sen
tence, turn by turn.
U. A. In the following sentences, there is an idiom. Decide what
if you are right. Rewrite the sentences in non-idiomatic English.
□ Model: The minister s arguments were complicated. They had a
tedious time. The minister said that people had to show courage
and determination during a difficult time.
1. The minister’s arguments were complicated. They had a tedious
time. 2. How about whiling away the time by telling the child a fairy
story? 3. Peter hasn’t done a stroke of work tonight. 4. It was one of
those days: I missed the bus, lost my key, and then it rained. 5. Don’t
put it off till tomorrow. 6. Let’s go for a walk. It might help to blow
the cobwebs away. 7. It’s already May. Time flies! 8. Come on! We
don’t have all day. 9. We are having a working lunch to discuss our
plans today. 10. John won’t come. He has his hands full. 11. Put it off till
tomorrow. A woman’s work is never done. 12. My mother will get up
at six. She’s an early bird. 13. My friend is not sleeping now. 1 know,
he keeps late hours. 14. I cannot help you now. I’m up to my ears in
work. 15. Let’s finish this work first. Business before pleasure.
plete the idiom.
1. All work and no play makes Jack a ___(daft, darn, dull, dumb)
boy. 2. The students haven’t done a ___(stripe, stroke, strobe, strop)
of work. 3. The Fowleses must have time t o ___ (burst, burble,
burgle, burn). 4. Go to bed with the___(lamp, lad, lamb, ladle) and
rise with the lark. 5. Charles didn’t sleep a ___(wing, wink, wince,
wind) that night. 6. Hurry up! We don’t have___(all-in, all, all-out,
all-time) day! 7. Jack won the contest. It was h is __ (light, lucky,
large, lush) day. 8. The early bird catches the___(word, worm, whirl,
work). 9. Early to bed and early to ___(raise, rail, rise, rinse) makes
a man healthy, wealthy and wise. 10. Never put___(of on, over, off)
till tomorrow what you can do today.IV .
В. Sum up every character mentioned in the extracts.
1. “Djinn of All Deserts”, said the Horse, “is it right for any one
to be idle, with the world so new-and-all?”
“Certainly not”, said the Djinn.
“Well”, said the Horse, “there’s a thing in the middle of your
Howling Desert (and he’s a Howler himself) with a long neck and
long legs, and he hasn’t done a stroke o f ___(work / word) since
Monday morning. He won’t trot.”
“Whew!” said the Djinn, whistling, “that’s my Camel, for all the
gold in Arabia! What does he say about it?”
“He says “Humph”!” said the Dog.
(From How the Camel got his Hump by R. Kipling)
2. “Well, you want to go away. Г11 get my coat.”
The other man asked with surprise, “Don’t you want to speak to
your wife?” The thin voice was decided. “Not me. Never do today
what you can put___(off / of) till tomorrow. She’ll have her chance
later, won’t she?”
“Yes, yes”, one of the strangers said and he became very cheerful.
“Don’t you worry too much. While there’s life ”
(From 1 Spy by Gr. Greene)
3. “The day remained warm and sunny. A desire came to Mr Fer
raro to take a real holiday, and he nearly told his chauffeur to drive
to Richmond Park. But he always preferred, if it were possible, to
combine business with___(pleasantness /pleasure), and he thought
that if he drove out now to Canon Wood, Miss Saunders should be
arriving about the same time, after her lunch interval, to start the
afternoon’s work.
(From Special Duties by Gr. Greene)
4. Rigden clearly could make nothing of the line in question.
“Now, Rigden, go on.”
Rigden was beginning to look desperate. He gazed into the book,
biting his lip. “Get a move on”, said Mor, “we haven’t got___(whole/
all) day.”
(From The Sandcastle by 1. Murdoch)
5. Once a week we tortured ourselves by devoting a morning to
French. Kralefsky spoke French beautifully, and to hear me mass
acring the language was almost more than he could bear. He very
loon found that it was quite useless to try to teach me from the nor
mal text-books, so these were set aside in favour of a three-volume
set of bird books; but even with these it was up-hill going.
“I think it would freshen us up a little blow the___(cobbles /
cobwebs) away if we went for a short walk”, he would announce.
(From My Family and Other Animals by G. Durrell)
6. “I say, mum, there’s a whole crowd going on to Maidenhead to
dine and dance, and they want Tom and me to go too. You don’t
mind, do you?”
The blood rushed to Julia’s cheeks. She could not help answering
rather sharply.
“How are you to get back?”
“Oh, that’ll be all right. We’ll get someone to drop us.”
Her heart sank. It was with the greatest difficulty that she man
aged not to make a scene. But she controlled herself.
“All right, darling. But don’t be too late. Remember that Tom’s
got to rise with th e___(lark / luck))'
7. Julia and Charles dined at the Savoy. They had come late, they
dined well, and by the time Charles had finished his brandy people
were already beginning to come in for supper.
“Good gracious, are the theatres out already?” he said, glancing at his
watch. “How quickly the time___(flights / flies) when I’m with you.”
8. Julia and Gimmie had no sooner sat down to table than he went
straight to the point. “I never slept a ___(wing / wink) all night for
thinking of you”, he said.
9. The sun beat down and the glare was so awful, you felt your
eyes would shoot out of your head. The earth cracked and crumbled,
and the crops frizzled. The olives went to rack and ruin. It was sim
ply hell. I couldn’t get a wink o f ___(sleeping/sleep). The nights
were just as hot as the days. It was like living in an oven. I turned and
tossed and my bed was so hot that I couldn’t stand it.
* * *
At last I heard a little sound, the sound I knew, and I almost
laughed. I was right, it was the full moon and the attacks came as reg
ular a s ___(clock / clockwork). That was all to the good. I threw
myself over the wall into the olive grove and ran straight to the house.
(From A Man from Glasgow by W. S. Maugham)
10. How are you to-day, Sydney? You’re looking very well...
Busy as a __ (beetle/bee) as usual, 1suppose. You’re simply amazing.
(From For Services Rendered by W. S. Maugham)
V. The following sentences all contain some idioms. Read and

A. V. Kunin.
1. Снова стало скучно. Снова не знал, что делать, куда девать
себя. (Б. Горбатов. Обыкновенная Арктика) 2. Заметно было уже
по одному виду господина Голядкина, что у него хлопот полон
рот и дела страшная куча. (Ф. Достоевский. Двойник) 3. У нее был по
лон рот самых необходимых хлопот, потому что нужно было
приготовить квартиру для Привалова в ее маленьком домике.
(Д. Мамин-Сибиряк. Приваловскиемиллионы) 4. На другой день,
ни свет ни заря, Лиза уже проснулась. Весь дом еще спал. (А. Пуш
кин. Барышня-крестьянка) 5. Выехали чуть свет, на заре, а воз
вратились поздно вечером. (А. Чехов. Моя жизнь) 6. Утром, чуть
свет, когда еще отец и тетка крепко спали в соседних комнатах, я
поднялся и пошел в сад. Роса блестела всюду - и на листьях
слив, и на кругленьких темно-красных листочках барбариса, и на
больших лопухах. (В. Беляев. Старая крепость) 7. - Всю-то
ночку я глаз не смежила, - тихим голосом проговорила Варвара.
(Г. Медынский. Марья) 8. Ночью больная нога не позволяла мне
сомкнуть глаз, и я был рад, когда стало светать. (В. Арсеньев. По
Уссурийскому краю) 9. Всю неделю ничего не делал, палец о
палец не ударил. (А. Островский. Невольницы) 10. Как вышел из
университета, так и не ударил пальцем о палец, даже ни одной
книжки не прочел. (А. Чехов. Три сестры) 11. Ты же в хозяйстве
и пальцем о палец не ударишь! Какой ты мне помощник!
(М. Шолохов. Поднятая целина) 12. Послушав мотор,... Собольков
отметил, что тот работает как часы. (Л. Леонов. Взятие
Великошумска) 13. - Сам встал до свету, - ворчит он, - кажется,
после обеда имеешь право на отдых, а они и пальцем не шевель
нут, пока не выйдешь сам. (М. Пришвин. Кощеева цепь) 14.... Он,
от нечего делать, прогуливается пешком и по целым часам про
сиживает у больных. (И. Гончаров. Обыкновенная история) 15.
Как-то раз в одно из июльских воскресений я и Дмитрий Пет
рович от нечего делать поехали в большое село Клушино, чтобы
купить там к ужину закусок. (А. Чехов. Страх)
VI. Translate the following sentences into English. Use the
idioms from the list of prompts below:
Sweat one s guts out; idle away one s time; do smth carelessly / in
a slipshod manner; roll up one s sleeves and set to work; run around
like a squirrel in a cage; one can hardly keep one s eyes open; by the
sweat o f smb s brow; work indefatigably; sit twiddling one s thumbs;
nod off / be drowsy ; get out o f bed on the wrong side; twiddle one s
thum bs / waste one s time; be all thumbs; Jack of all trades; hang on
the phone; be ready to drop (with fatigue).
1. Пружинкин не замечал, что, исполняя поручения гене
ральши, он без отдыха вертится как белка в колесе. (Д. Мамин-
Сибиряк. Именинник) 2. Он без умолку говорил о походе, о то
варищах и о том, что теперь можно ни о чем не думать и бить
баклуши до сентября. (В. Осеева. Васек Трубачев и его товарищи)
3. А Аглая сидит, ничего не делает. У меня тоже дело из рук
валится: ничего не выходит. (Ф. Достоевский. Идиот) 4. Нина
Капитоновна вдруг объявила, что с ног падает, хочет спать,
сейчас же легла и заснула. (В. Каверин. Два капитана) 5. - Чего
повис на телефоне? Опять, верно, Капитолине Фоминичне
названиваешь? (В.Тендряков. Среди лесов) 6. Он у нас и ученый, и
на скрипке играет, и выпиливает разные штучки, одним словом,
мастер на все руки. (А. Чехов. Три сестры) 7. Лузина, вероятно,
встала сегодня с левой ноги, потому что сидела за столом хмурая
и сердитая. (К. Станюкович. Нянька) 8. От усталости сами закры
вались глаза, но почему-то не спалось: казалось, что мешает
уличный шум. (А. Чехов. Три года) 9. Укорял он меня за то, что
мы ничего не делаем, работаем спустя рукава. (С. Антонов. Десна)
10. Ты должен был выйти на поле, засучив рукава, работать.
(И. Тургенев. Рудин) 11. Спать было негде. Всю ночь мы проси
дели у камней и клевали носами до самого рассвета. (В. Арсеньев.
В горах Сихотэ-Алиня) 12. Ты не вправе лежать на боку, когда
можешь делать что-нибудь, пока есть силы. (В. Гончаров. Обломов)
13. Один правовед сказал мне, что самая лучшая и безвредная
специальность, это - лежать на диване и плевать в потолок.
(А. Чехов. Наивный леший) 14. Он работал не покладая рук, и
наконец увидел, что сделано уже много.... (И. Бунин. Господин из
Сан-Франциско) 15. Трудиться, как мы тут, до седьмого поту,
не будешь. (Е. Катерян. Бронзовая прялка) 16. Жители более
почтенного возраста..., засучив рукава..., трудились в поте лица...
(В. Тендряков. Тугой узел)
VII. Link each of the pictures (pp. 49-50) with one of the idioms
1. The early bird catches the worm. 3. Blow away the cobwebs.
2. As regular as clockwork. 4. As busy as a bee.
VIII. Rewrite the following text in idiomatic English.

Jack always gets up early in the morning. He comes to his office
at 9 o’clock. Jack is a very busy person. He has a lot of work.
Sometimes he has a business meeting at breakfast or lunch. Then
Jack goes to a restaurant. He does his work first and then enjoys him
self afterwards. His urgent work is never left till later. Jack likes to
work too hard. He goes out only to breathe in the fresh air and help
himself think more clearly. Towards the end of the working day he is
very tired. When he is nervous, Jack is not able to sleep at all. Jack’s
friends say that his work makes him too busy and dull.
IX. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you

have read that will lead you to say "So as the proverb goes... "
Proverb: “Go to bed with the lamb and rise with the lark.”
X. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen-

tences:
1. So you should keep regular hours. 2. Remember! The early
bird catches the worm. 3. A woman’s work is never done. 4. Never
put off till tomorrow what you can do today. 5. By doing nothing we
learn to do ill. 6. Don’t worry. It’s just one of those days. 7. So divide
your time between work and play. 8. It’s a well-known saying: “All
work and no play makes Jack a dull boy.”
XL Use the following as initial sentences and expand on them.
1. My friend is an early bird. 2 .1never slept a wink that night. 3. Our
teacher is as regular as clockwork. 4. My mother won’t go to the
party. She has her hands full. 5. My father will have a working lunch
tomorrow. 6. It’s your lucky day. 7. It’s not my day. 8. What shall we
do to while away the time? 9, Yesterday evening I had a tedious time.
10. The student hasn’t done a stroke of work. 11. Time flies! 12. We
don’t have all day! 13. Stop idling away your time. 14. You must roll
up your sleeves and set to work. 15. I could hardly keep my eyes
open. 16. I am all thumbs today.
XIL Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use

1. Your boss is constantly pressuring you to work overtime. You
need to get home to your family. Explain this to your boss.
2. Ask one of your employees why he / she is always late.
3. Complain to the manager of your block of flats that there is too
much noise at night and you can’t sleep.
4. Your neighbours are having a big party. It is 2:00 in the morn
ing. Go next door and complain about the noise.
5. You have an important exam tomorrow. A friend of yours
comes over and asks you to go to a movie with him / her.
6. Your friend never wants to go anywhere. There’s going to be a
great party tomorrow night. Convince your friend to go with you to
the party.
XIII. Read and translate the following passages into Russian.
A. Make up a story about Martha; write about her difficulties

with her baby-daughter Caroline. Use some idioms given in
Unit 3.
The two rooms at the top of the block of flats were filled with
light from the sky... Martha lay warm in the blankets, listening to
Caroline wake. She always woke the moment the child first stirred
she woke instantly if Caroline murmured in her sleep at night.
Caroline sat up. Martha, through eyes kept half closed, saw the tiny
energetic creature in its white gown rolling over and stretching, two
small rosy feet playing in the air... Then Caroline clambered re
solutely to her feet, clutched the edge of the cot, put her chin on it,
and looked out of the window at the sun...
Martha shut her eyes and tried to sleep again. She could not...
Her long day was regulated by the clock to Caroline’s needs; and
she went to bed at night exhausted by Caroline’s experience.
(From A Proper Marriage by D. Lessing)
B. Invent a story about Monica and her decision to have a job.

Use idiomatic English.
I was fed up. As I lay awake in the grey small hours of an autumn
morning, I reviewed my life. Three a. m. is not the most propitious
time for meditation, as everyone knows, and a deep depression was
settling over me.
1 had just returned from New York, where the crazy cyclone of
gaiety in which people seem to survive over there had caught me up,
whirled me blissfully round, and dropped me into a London which
seemed flat and dull. I felt restless, dissatisfied, and bad-tempered.
“Surely,” I thought, “there’s something more to life than just going
out to parties that one doesn’t enjoy, with people one doesn’t even
like? What a pointless existence it is - drifting about in the hope that
something may happen to relieve the monotony. Something has to be
done to get me out of this rut.”
In a flash it came to me:
“I’ll have a job!” I said it out loud and it sounded pretty good to
me. The more 1thought about it, the better I liked the idea, especial
ly from the point of view of making some money.
(From One Pair o f Hands by M. Dickens)
C. Make up a story about George and his daily routine. Use

idiomatic English.
George lived on the second floor of a large block of flats and
when I came to his door I heard the sound of piano playing. George
was glad to see me. He seemed in great spirits and extremely happy.
He had a lesson twice a week and for the rest of the time practised.
He told me that he worked ten hours a day. “Daddy said I was born
tired. I wasn’t really lazy. I didn’t see the use of working at things that
bored me.” I asked him how he was getting on with the piano. He
leemed to be satisfied with his progress.”
(From The Alien Corn by W. S. Maugham)
D. Invent a story about Walter; his work and his likes and dis
likes. Use some idioms given in Unit 3.
Walter had no charm. That was why he was not popular... Kitty
remained very vague about his work. It was enough for her to realize
that to be the government bacteriologist was no great fry. He seemed
to have no desire to discuss that part of his life with his wife... He put
her off with a jest.
“It’s very dull and technical,” he said on another occasion.
“And it’s grossly underpaid.”
He was very reserved... He did not know how to be open. He
was fond of reading, but he read books which seemed to Kitty very
dull. If he was not busy with some scientific treatise he would read
books about China or historical works. He never relaxed. She did not
think he could. He was fond of games: he played tennis and bridge.
She supposed he was clever, everyone seemed to think he was,
but except very occasionally when he was with two or three people
he liked and was in the mood, she had never found him entertaining...
He was a wet blanket at a party.
(From The Painted Veit by W. S. Maugham)
E. Describe Mr Skate's working day, his duties and the

Ministry. Use idiomatic English.
Richard Skate was a thin, pale man of early middle age. All his
life had been spent in keeping his nose above water, lecturing at
night-schools and acting as temporary English master at some of the
smaller public schools and in the process he had got a small house, a
wife and one child...
His whole world now was the Ministry of Propaganda... he was
happy. For his nose was now well above water: he had a permanent
job, he was a Civil Servant.
Propaganda was a means of passing the time: work was not done
for its usefulness but for its own sake - simply as an occupation...
To send a minute to anybody else in the great building and to receive
an answer took at least twenty-four hours: on an urgent matter an
exchange of three minutes might be got through in a week. Time out
side the Ministry went at quite a different pace.
(From Men at Work by Gr. Greene)
F. Invent a story about Denis, comment on the feeling he was
tormented by. What was there about his life that aroused his
distress? Use idiomatic English.
Oh, this journey! It was two hours cut clean out of his life; two
hours in which Denis might have done so much, so much - written
the perfect poem, for example, or read the one illuminating book.
Instead of which - his gorge rose at the smell of the dusty cushions
against which he was leaning.
Two hours. One hundred and twenty minutes. Anything might be
done in that time. Anything. Nothing. Oh, he had had hundreds of
hours, and what had he done with them? Wasted them, spilt the pre
cious minutes as though his reservoir were inexhaustible. Denis
groaned in the spirit, condemned himself utterly with all his works.
What right had he to sit in the .sunshine, to occupy comer seats in
third-class carriages, to be alive?
None, none, none.
Misery and a nameless nostalgic distress possessed him. He was
twenty-three, and oh! so agonizingly conscious of the fact.
(From Crome Yellow by A. Huxley)
PROJECT
1. Consult the English-Russian Phraseological Dictionary by
A. V. Kunin. Read about the system of stylistic labels given in the
dictionary (P 9, 10, 16). Pick out some idioms that can be used
for the topic “The Daily Programme”. Comment on the divergence
in their stylistic characterisation.
2. Look up in a dictionary the unknown idioms among those

listed below to make sure of their meaning. Comment on their
stylistic characterisation.
To kill time; to get down to work; hardly have time to breathe; to
talk shop; to take one’s time; to resume one’s work (studies...); to work
overtime; to get (have) time to catch one’s breath; to pass the time.
MEALS
IDIOMS
1. Appetite comes with eating
2. Have a huge / big / voracious appetite
3. Lose one’s appetite
4. Spoil / ruin one’s appetite
5. The belly has no ears
6. Bread and butter
7. Eat like a bird
8. Eat like a horse
9 . 1 could eat a horse
10.1 couldn’t eat another thing
11. Big / light / fussy / picky (AmE) eater
12. Eat smb out of house and home
13. Eat smb’s bread
14. High tea
15. Packed lunch
16. Cooked breakfast
17. Have a snack / a bite
18. Square meal
19. Home cooking
20. Wine and dine smb
21. Make one’s mouth water
22. Melt in one’s mouth
23. Smack one’s lips; Lip smacking good (AmE)
24. To my taste
25. To taste
26. Tastes differ = Everyone to his own taste
27. After dinner sit a while, after supper walk a mile
28. You are what you eat
29. Eat, drink and be merry
★ ★ *
1. Appetite comes with eating (proverb) - a person has a desire for
food (or a particular activity) when he starts eating (working).
2. Have a huge / big / voracious [vo'reijos] appetite - to have the
ability to eat a lot of food.
E.g.: Kids can have voracious appetites.
3. Lose one’s appetite - to stop having a desire for food.
E.g.: He has lost his appetite since his operation.
4. Spoil / ruin one’s appetite - to eat before a meal and then not
want to eat at the meal.
E.g.: Don’t eat these chocolates now, you'll spoil your appetite.
5. The belly has no ears (proverb) - a hungry person can think
about nothing but food.
6. The bread and butter of a person is the activity or work that pro
vides his main source of income.
E.g.: It's his living, its his bread and butter.
7. Eat like a bird - to eat very little.
E.g.: She is very thin. The girl eats like a bird.
8. Eat like a horse - to eat large amounts of food.
E.g.: He works like a horse and eats like a horse.
9 .1 could eat a horse - used to say one is very hungry.
10. 1 couldn’t eat another thing = I am full, I’m not hungry.
11. Big / light / fussy, etc. eater - someone who eats a lot, not much,
only particular things, etc.
E.g.: My sister has never been a big eater.
12. Eat smb out of house and h o m e -to eat a lot of someone’s supply
of food, so that they have to buy more.
E.g.: When her children come home, they eat her out o f house and
home.
13. Eat smb’s bread - to live on smb, to live at the cost of someone else.
E.g.: He likes to sfry that his children are all eating his bread.
М-High tea - a meat of cold food, cakes, etc. eaten in the early
evening.
E.g.: The children have high tea at about 5.30.
15. Packed lunch - food, wrapped in paper or in a container, that you
take to school or on an outing and eat for lunch.
^16. Cooked breakfast - a breakfast consisting of cooked food, usu
ally including eggs, often together with bacon, sausages, or tom
atoes. It’s usually followed by toast and tea or coffee.
17. Have a snack / a bite - to have a light, quick meal which you eat
instead of a main meal or between main meals.
E.g.: Well have a bite to eat before we go to the theatre.
18. Square meal - a good satisfying and healthy meal.
E.g.: You need to eat three square meals a day.
19. Home cooking - good food like you get in your own house.
20. Wine and dine smb - to entertain or be entertained with a meal
and wine.
E.g.: We waned and dined our guests until fate into the night.
21. Make one’s mouth water - to want to eat smth very much.
E.g.: What beautiful cakes! They realty make my mouth water.
22. Melt in one’s mouth - if food melts in your mouth, it is soft and
delicious.
E.g.: These chocolates really melt in your mouth.
23. Smack one’s lips - to make a short loud noise with your lips
because one is hungry, or to express how much you’ve enjoyed
eating some food.
E.g.: He looked at the plate and smacked his lips.
24. To my taste - in a way that I like.
E.g.: There are many, things to my taste here.
25. To taste - used in instructions for cooking; in the quantity
desired.
E.g.: Add salt and pepper to taste.
26. Tastes differ (proverb) - different people like different things.
27. After dinner sit a while, after supper walk a mile (proverb).
28. You are what you eat (saying) - your character and your physi
cal health are decided by the kind of food you eat.
29. Eat, drink, and be merry (for tomorrow we die) (saying) -
enjoy life, because it is very short. People who say this are often
criticizing people who worry about eating the right things, but do
not know how to have a good time.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Canteen - a place in a factory, school, etc where meals are pro
vided, usually quite cheaply, e.g.: Lunch in the works’canteen.
Cafeteria - a restaurant where you choose your own food and
carry it to the table, often in a factory, college, etc, e.g.: The school
cafeteria.
Cafe - a small restaurant where you can buy drinks and simple
meals.
Bar - a place where alcoholic drinks are served, e.g.: The bar was
crowded.
Pub - a building in Britain where alcohol can be bought and
drunk, e.g.: A pub lunch. Do you fancy going to the pub?
Local - a pub near where you live, especially one where you often
drink, e.g.: 1 usually have a pint or two at my local on Friday nights.
Public home (formal) = a pub.
Refectory - a large room in a school, college, etc where meals are
served and eaten.
Takeaway / take out (AmE) - a shop or restaurant that sells meals
to be eaten somewhere else, e.g.: There’s a Chinese takeaway in the
town centre.
Bistro - a small bar or restaurant, especially one that is fashion
able and popular.
0 Notes:
Cordon bleu [,ко:с!о1з'Ь1з:] - (Fr) of or practising cooking at the
highest standard, e.g.: He’s a real cordon bleu cook.
Wholemeal = whole wheat - (make from flour) containing all the
grain; made without removing the covering of the grain. Wholemeal
(made from flour) is used especially by people interested in eating
healthy foods, e.g.: Wholemeal bread (г. type of brown bread).
Bangers and mash - cooked sausages and mashed potatoes, con
sidered to be a typical British meal.
Junk food - unhealthy food, esp. chemically treated food con
taining a lot of sugar, fat, and carbohydrates [,ka:boi/haidreits]
Veg [ved3] = a vegetable, usually when cooked.
Buffet ['bufei] - a place where one can get a meal consisting usu
ally of cold food, which people serve for themselves and eat standing
up or sitting down nearby.
Restaurant ['restoront] - a place where meals are prepared, sold
and eaten, e.g.: An expensive fish restaurant.
TESTING VOCABULARY
I. A. Match the following English idioms to their respective die•
♦ Bread and butter . ♦ Eat a lot of someone’s supply

of food
♦ Fussy eater ♦ Eat very little
♦ Eat smb out of house and ♦ Live on somebody
home
♦ Eat like a horse ♦ A good satisfying meal
♦ Eat smb’s bread ♦ Entertain with a meal and
wine
♦ Square meal ♦ Someone who eats only par
ticular things
♦ Wine and dine smb ♦ Eat large amounts of food
♦ Eat like a bird ♦ The work that provides
one’s main sourse of income
B. Use idioms to make up a story. A student starts in with

“Usually I have three meals a day”. Other students should
take turns building upon the sentence, turn by turn.I.
If you are right. Rewrite the sentences in non-idiomatic
English.
Q Model: My friend is trying to lose weight by eating like a bird. She
wants to have a slender figure. She eats neither cakes nor sweets.
1. My friend is trying to lose weight by eating like a bird: 2. My
father eats like a horse. 3. 1 could eat a horse. 4. This was just bread-
and-butter work. 5. We have high tea at about 5 o’clock. 6. My
friends and I had a snack in a brightly lit snack bar. 7. Let’s have a
bite before going for a walk. 8. My brother cannot do without a
square meal. 9. My parents were being wined and dined by their
friends. 10. The smell made my mouth water. 11.1 looked at the dish
and smacked my lips. 12. After dinner sit a while, after supper walk
a mile. 13. You are what you eat. 14. This pie makes my mouth water.
15. My sister’s children are rather fussy eaters. 16. My cousin eats a
lot. She’s a big eater. 17. Don’t eat these sweets. It will spoil your
appetite for dinner. 18. The pie really melts in your mouth. 19. Add
sugar and milk to taste. 20. My friend has a square meal in the morn
ing. 21. The Browns wined and dined their guests on Sunday.
plete the idiom.
В. Use there sentences in some meaningful context.
1. The girl looked at the cookies a n d ___ (smirked, smacked,
slacked, snapped) her lips. 2. Let’s call at a cafe and have a ___
(snap, snack, snatch, snail), 3. The___(bell, belly, belle, belt) has no
ears. 4 . 1 could eat a ___(horseshoe, hose, horse, host). 5. My father
always has a square___(mean, meat, meal, meet) in the afternoon.
6. Eat, drink, and be___(mean, merry, meek, mercenary). 1 .1 couldn’t
e a t___(another, other, any, analogous) thing. 8. He wined and ___
{dinned, dined, dared, dated) his friend. 9. The pastry melts in
your___(mouse, mouth, mousse, mouthpiece).IV .
IV. A. Read the following sentences and choose the correct key
your answers. Translate the sentences into Russian.
1. We ate the veal-and-ham pie and Roy told me how he mixed a
palad. We drank the hock and___(snacked/ smacked) appreciative lips..
(From Cakes and Ale: or the Skeleton in the Cupboard
by W. S. Maugham)
2. John explained to Mary that it was impossible for him to throw
up his job, which after all meant h is___(brand/ bread) and butter.
(From Complete Short Stories. The Pool by W. S. Maugham)
3. I can eat like a __ (hosier / horse), did you notice? But I can
also eat like a fly if I have to.
(From The Holiday Friend by P. H. Johnson)
4. A man has to look sharp or they’ll eat him out of house and___
(hole/home).
(From The Edge o f Sadness by E. O’Connor)
5. 'Those were the days when they were buyin’ property right and
left, and none of this khaki and failin’ over one another to get out of
things: the cucumbers at twopence; and a melon - the old melons,
that made your__ (mouth / mouse) water!” Timothy thought.
(From To Let by J. Galsworthy)
6. “Everyone to h is___(task / taste)\” said Harriet, who always
delivered a platitude as if it was an epigram.
(From Where Angels Fear to Tread by E. M. Forster)
7. “Oh, my lord, no food had passed your___(limbs / lips) since
the morning of yesterday, I beseech you to take at least a few mouth
fuls,” - said the girl.
(From Catalina by W. S. Maugham)
8. “We had a real smashing___(high / hot) tea. We had cold
sliced pork with pickles and new-baked bread, our own,” - exclaimed
the woman.
(From The Big Room by S. Chaplin)
V. A. The following sentences all contain some idioms. Read and
A. V. Kunin.
B. Look up the following idioms in an English-English dic
tionary. Comment on their meanings. Use them in your own
stories.
neither food nor drink has passed his lips; tighten one s belt; the
food sticks in one s throat; earn one s living / one s daily bread; lick
your fingers; be half-starved; at one sitting; wet one s whistle.
1. Возился я целый день, не присел, маковой росинки во рту
не было. (А. Чехов. Дядя Ваня) 2. - Пахнет у вас вкусно, аж слюнки
текут! - заметил Гусаков и перешел в комнату, без стеснения
разглядывая закуски. (В. Кетлинская. Дни нашей жизни) 3. В нача
ле двенадцатого, ощущая уже аппетит, возвращались в роту и
там получали по два тонких ломтя черного хлеба, чтобы
заморить червяка перед обедом. (К. Станюкович. Маленькие моря
ки) 4. Поссорься с одним - с другим, так и придется зубы на
полку положить. (А. Островский. Шутники) 5. - А что же вы сами-
то разве не станете кушать? - спросил Антон Иванович. - И!
Мне и кусок в горло не пойдет. (И. Гончаров. Обыкновенная исто
рия) 6. У них бывают такие вкусные блинчики к кофе, что
пальчики оближешь. (А. Степанов. Порт-Артур) 7. Владимир, жи
вя теперь, как многие живут на Руси, без гроша наличного, без
постоянного занятия, питался только что не манной небесной.
(И. Тургенев. Льгов) 8. Полина Карповна стала было и его угощать
конфетами, но он съедал фунта по три в один присест.
(И. Гончаров. Обрыв) 9. Марья на ужин состряпала такие пельмени,
что язык проглотишь. (Д. Мамин-Сибиряк. Золото) 10. Иди - про
мочи горло ... Только и всего! (М. Горький. На дне) 11. Я почувст
вовал, что я просто дармоед: ничего не делаю, ем чужой хлеб...
(Успенский. Волей-неволей) 12. Тентенников был бедняком и
хорошо знал, как тяжело достается хлеб насущный. (В. Саянов.
Небо и земля) 13. - И сяду на хлеб и воду, ничего не боюсь! -
кричала Сашенька. (Ф. Достоевский. Сею Степанчиково и его
обитатели) 14. Я не привыкла есть чужой хлеб! (Л. Леонов. Обыкно
венный чеювек)
Vt. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen
tences.
1. Eat, drink, and be merry. 2. So, you are what you eat. 3. Tastes
differ, you know. 4. The proverb says: “Appetite comes with eating”
5. I couldn’t eat another thing. 6. Thus, after dinner sit a while, after
supper walk a mile.V I.
VII. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you
have read that will lead you to say “So as the proverb
goes...,f.
Proverb: “The belly has no ears.”
VIII. Link each of the pictures (see pp. 65-66) with one of the
idioms listed below. Comment on the meaning of each of
them. Use them in situations of your own.
1. Bread and butter.
2. I could eat a horse.
3. After dinner sit a while, after supper walk a mile.
4. Eat smb out of house and home.
IX. Rewrite the following text in idiomatic English.
My brother usually eats a lot of food. He has four meals a day. He
eats early in the morning, in the afternoon, in the early evening and
late at night. He always has a good satisfying meal. The boy likes
sweets and cakes most of all. When he sees them he wants to eat them
immediately. He says they are soft and delicious. When he eats he
makes a loud noise with his lips because he is hungry. At school he
has a quick meal between his main meals. The boy also takes some
food, wrapped in paper, to school to eat for lunch. My mother says, he
eats her supply of food quickly and she has to buy more food.
My sister eats very little. She eats only particular things. She
often eats a cake before a meal and then she doesn’t want to eat at the
meal. She’s in the habit of saying: “I’m full, I’m not hungry” My
mother often tells her that a person has a desire for food when he
starts eating.
As you see, different people like different things. Your character
can be decided by the kind of food you eat, too.
1. My daughter eats like a bird. 2. My father is a big eater. 3. Her
children eat her out of house and home. 4 .1 have a bite at 12 o’clock.
5. I prefer home cooking. 6. This salad makes my mouth water.
1. Your friend always embarrasses you when you go to a restau
rant because of the way he / she eats. Talk to your friend about this.
2. Explain to your friend how to cook something easy yet delicious.
3. Your roommate takes you to a Japanese restaurant for your
birthday. Explain to your roommate that you hate Japanese food.
4. You are in an airplane and the flight attendant brings you a
Heal. It has meat in it and you are a vegetarian. Explain why you
*an’t eat it.
9(11. Read and translate the following passages into Russian.

A. Comment on Mr Warburton’s likes and dislikes. Decide
whether he was a big eater or a fussy eater. Use some idioms
given in Unit 4.
(Mr Warburton made a point o f having a proper dinner served to
him every night)
A careful host, he went into the dining-room to see that the table
was properly laid. The napkins were folded into elaborate shapes.
The silver shone brightly. Shaded candles in silver candle-sticks shed
a soft light. He smiled his approval and returned to the sitting-room
to await his guests.
(From The Outstation by W. S. Maugham)
B. Make up a story about Mrs Garstin and the elaborate din-
ners she used to give. Use idiomatic English.
In twenty-five years Mrs Garstin never invited any one to dine at her
house because she liked him. She gave large dinner parties at regular
intervals. But parsimony was as strong in her as ambition. She hated to
spend money. She flattered herself that she could make as much show
as any one else at half the price. Her dinners were long and elaborate,
but thrifty, and she could never persuade herself that people when they
were eating and talking knew what they drank. She wrapped sparkling
Moselle in a napkin and thought her guests took it for champagne.
C. Sum up Julia, Michael and their guest. Comment on their

likes and dislikes. Use some idioms given in Unit 4.
Luncheon was announced and they went downstairs.
“I hope you’ll have enough to eat”, said Julia. “Michael and I
have very small appetites.” In point of fact there was grilled sole,
grilled cutlets and spinach, and stewed fruit. It 'was a meal designed
to satisfy legitimate hunger, but not to produce fat. The cook, warned
by Margery that there was a guest to luncheon had hurriedly made
some fried potatoes. They looked crisp and smelt appetizing. Only
the young man took them. Julia gave them a wistful look before she
shook her head in refusal. Michael stared at them gravely for a
moment as though he could not quite tell what they were, and then
with a little start, breaking out of a brown study, said “No, thank
you” ... Julia noticed that the young man seemed to be looking at the
sideboard and with her engaging smile, leaned forward.
“What is it?”
He blushed scarlet.
“I was wondering if 1 might have a piece of bread.”
“Of course.”
She gave the buttler a significant glance; he was at that moment
helping Michael to a glass of dry white wine, and he left the room
“Michael and 1 never eat bread. It was stupid of Jevons not to realize
that you might want some.”
“Of course bread is only a habit,” said Michael. “It’s wonderful
how soon you can break yourself of it if you set your mind to it.”
“The poor lamb’s as thin as a rail, Michael."
“I don’t eat bread because I’m afraid of getting fat. I don’t eat it
because I see no point in it. After all, with the exercise I take I can eat
anything I like.”
D. Make up a story about Evvy’s dinner. Use idiomatic English.

Dinner was announced
the places at the table were all clearly labelled Everyone
found his position The company sat down with relief and im
mediately received their soup. The place of honour was in the centre
of the table Here sat Evvy in the middle place
The soup and fish were good. The meat was only middling, but it
mattered less as there was a good deal of red wine to wash it down with.
At last came some official toasts, and the meditative glow of
cigars was to be seen appearing here and there along the table.
E. Describe the Sheridans' garden party in details. Use some
idioms given in Unit 4.
Lunch was over by half-past one. By half-past two they were all
ready for the party. The band had arrived and was placed in a corner
of the tennis-court.
Soon after that people began coming. The band began to play.
Waiters ran from the house to the tent. Everywhere were guests look
ing at flowers, greeting, moving on over the lawn. They were like
bright birds that had flown into the Sheridan’s garden for this one
afternoon.
“Dear Laura, how well you look!”
“What a beautiful hat, child!”
“Laura, you look quite Spanish. I’ve never seen you look so
nice.”
And Laura, very pleased, answered pleasantly, “Have you had
tea? Won’t you have an ice?” Then she helped her mother with the
good-bye. They stood side by side in the garden till it was all over.
“All over, all over”, sais Mrs Sheridan. “Call the others, Laura. Let’s
go and have some coffee. I’m tired ” And they all sat down in the
tent.
(From The Garden Party by K. Mansfield)
XIII. Speak on one of the following topics, using some idioms given
in Unit 4.
1. My favourite dishes.
2. My meals on week-days and on Sundays.
3. A full meal.
PROJECT
Consult the English-Russian Phraseological Dictionary by
A. V: Kunin. Read about various types of translation of the
English idioms given in the dictionary (P. 10, 17).
Comment on the type of translation of the following set ex
pressions:
Bread and circuses; break bread with smb; daily bread, earn one’s
bread; eat the bread of idleness; have one’s bread buttered on both
sides; quarrel with one’s bread and butter; take the bread out of smb’s
mouth; be on the bread-line; butter to butter is no relish; (as) fat as
butter; cakes and ale; the fatted calf; like taking candy from a baby;
the fewer the better cheer.
SHOPPING
IDIOMS
1. Do the shopping
2. Shop around
3. In cash
4. Hard cash
5. Pay cash
6. Have money on oneself
7. Pay by check (AmE) / credit card
8. Cash down
9. Be a good / bad buy
10. Cash and carry
11. Pay good money for
12. A knockdown price
13. Dirt cheap
14. Cheap and nasty
15. Buy for a song
16. Above price
17. Cost a pretty penny / Cost an arm and a leg
18. Cost the earth / Cost a fortune / a bomb
19. Pin money / mad money
20. Spend money like water
21. Spending money / pocket money
22. Spendaholic / compulsive shopper
23. Be flush with money / Have money to bum / Have deep pockets
24. Bum a hole in one’s pocket
25. Hit smb’s pockets
26. Buy smth over smb’s head
27. Smth costs money
28. It’s not worth a farthing / penny
19. Buy a pig in a poke
JO. Penny wise and pound foolish
31. Cut the (one’s) coat according to the (one’s) cloth
1. Do the shopping - to go shopping to buy food and other things

you need regularly.
E.g.: I always do my shopping on Saturdays.
2. Shop around - to compare the price and quality of different
things before you decide which to buy.
E.g.: Let's shop around before deciding which car to buy:
3. In cash - money in the form of coins or notes rather than cheques,
credit cards, etc.
E.g.: I've got £100 in cash.
4. Hard cash - notes and coins only.
E.g.: They don't accept cheques - they only take hard cash.
5. Pay cash - to pay immediately using a cheque or cash, but not by
adding a debt to your account.
E.g.: Are you paying cash?
6. Have money on oneself - carry money with oneself.
E.g.: Do you have enough money on you to pay for the dress?
7. Pay by cheque / credit card
Cheque - one of a set of printed pieces of paper that you can sign
and use instead of money to pay for things, e.g: Can l pay by
cheque?
Credit card - a small plastic card that you use to buy goods or
services, e.g.: They accept all major credit cards.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Master Card - system set up by a group of banks. Access is a
nember of the Master Card system.
Visa card - a plastic card used to obtain money, goods, and ser
vices which the user pays for later.
Access card - a credit card given by British banks to their cus
tomers, who use it to obtain money, goods and services which they
pay for later.
American Express - a charge card company with offices in
many cities around the world. Well-known slogans for American
Express are “Don’t leave home without it” and “That’ll do nicely”
8. Cash down - if you pay for something cash down, you pay for it
before you receive it.
E.g.: You have to pay cash down.
9. Be a good / bad buy - to be worth or to be not worth the price
you paid.
E.g.: The wine is a good buy at £3.50.
10. Cash and carry - a shop where goods are sold at low prices if
they are bought in large quantities, paid for at once, and taken
away by the buyer.
E.g.: The number of cash and carries has recently grown.
11. Pay good money for - to spend a lot of money on smth.
E.g.: I paid good money for that car.
12. A knockdown price - very cheap.
E.g. : They couldn'/ sell them even at the knockdown price o f £3.
13. Dirt cheap - extremely low in price.
E.g.: These CDs are dirt cheap.
14. Cheap and nasty - very low in price and quality / you get what
you pay for.
E.g.: They sell cheap and nasty t-shirts.
15. Buy for a song - very cheaply.
E.g.: They bought their house for a song some years ago.
16. Above price - be extremely valuable or important = Be beyond /
without price.
E.g.: These jewels are above price.
17. Cost a pretty penny / Cost an arm and a leg - cost a lot of
money.
E.g.: That car cost a pretty penny!
Itt. Cost the earth / Cost a fortune / a bomb - cost a lot of money.
I g W hat a fa n ta s tic dress It must have cost a bomb!
19. Pin money - a small amount of money that you can spend on
yourself rather than on necessary things.
E.g.: She spent her pin money on a dress.
Mad momey - money kept aside for something unexpected or
special.
20. Spend money like water - to spend too much money.
21. Spending money / pocket money - money that you have avail
able to spend on your own personal pleasures.
E.g.: £50 a week in spending money:
22. Spendaholic / compulsive shopper - a person who is unable to
stop spending money and buying more and more things.
23. Be flush with money / Have money to burn / Have deep
pockets - to have a lot of money.
E.g.: They must have money to burn.
24. Burn a hole in one’s pocket - if money is burning a hole in your
pocket, it means you want to spend it as soon as you can.
E.g.: That £100 is burning a hole in my pocket.
25. Hit smb’s pockets (the pockets of smb) - smth will affect the
amount of money that someone has.
E.g.: Dearer petrol hits the pockets o f far more people than those
who use cars.
26. Buy smth over smb’s head - to buy smth and pay more money
than someone else in order to get it.
E.g.: He bought the house over his brother's head.
27. Smth costs money - used to remind or warn someone that they
should be careful because something is expensive.
E.g.: The car is not a toy! It costs money, you know.
28. It’s not worth a farthing / penny - about smth which is worth
less, useless.
Farthing ['fa:dig] - a former British coin worth one quarter of
an old penny.
29. Buy a pig in a poke - smth one has bought without seeing or
examining it, and that one may then find to be worthless.
E.g.: Buying a car without test-driving it is like buying a pig in a
poke.
30. Penny wise and pound foolish (proverb) - it is foolish to lose a
lot of money to save a little money.
E.g.: He drives thirty miles to buy petrol for a few pence a gallon
less than it costs here. He s really penny wise and pound
foolish.
31. Cut the (one's) coat according to the (one's) cloth - to spend
only as much money as you can afford.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Austin R eed-one of a group of British men’s clothing shops sell
ing expensive, good quality clothes, e.g.: an Austin Reed suit.
C & A - one of a group of large shops in Britain, known espe
cially for selling inexpensive clothes.
Clarks - (any of the shops owned by) a British company that
makes shoes, especially noted for its good range of children’s shoes
in different widths, e.g.: To get some shoes in/from Clarks.
Discount store / discount house - a shop where goods are sold
below the price suggested by the makers.
Dixons - (in Britain) one of a group of shops which sell electri
cal, electronic, and photographic equipment.
Foyles [foilz] - a large bookshop in the centre of London.
Harrods - a famous department store in Knightsbridge in
London.
HeaVs - a large shop in London which sells good quality modern
furniture.
Marks and Spencer - one of a group of very well-known depart
ment stores found in most large towns in Britain selling clothes, food
and other goods for the home under the name St. Michael; it is some
times just called Marks or Marks and Sparks, or abbreviated to M&S.
Their clothes are generally considered to be of good quality and at
reasonable prices, but not to include the most modem and most
extreme fashions. Many people buy underwear from there. Their
food products, especially prepared meals, are thought to be very good
quality and are popular especially with middle-class people who do
not have time to cook.
Next ~ one of a group of shops in Britain which sell fashionable
clothes for ndults and children as well as furnishings. They sell some
of their product* in n catalogue, the Next Directory.
Portobello Road (the) ['poitobelou'roud] - a street in West
London known for its Saturday market for antiques (furniture, jew
ellery, etc. made in an earlier period).
Sainsbury's - one of a group of British supermarkets selling
mainly food and drink but also other goods. Sainsbury’s has a
middle-class image and most of their shops are in the richer SE of
England and in the Midlands.
Sale - a special offering of goods in a shop at lower prices than
usual. Sales in Britain are usually held in January and in the summer,
e.g.: This dress was a bargain - only £20 in a sale.
Smith also Smith's - , WH - one of a group of shops selling
books, newspapers, cards, etc. They can be found in many towns in
Britain and in a few places in the United States.
Tesco also Tesco's - one of a group of supermarkets, selling
mainly food but also many other products for the house, found in
most large British towns and cities.
TESTING VOCABULARY
/. A. Match the following English idioms to their respective die■
♦ Buy a pig in a poke ♦ Some money someone spends

on himself rather than on
necessary things
♦ Be in the market for smth ♦ Be extremely valuable, im
portant
♦ Burn a hole in one’s pocket ♦ Cost a lot of money
♦ To be interested in buying
something
♦ Have money to bum ♦ Have a lot of money
♦ Pin money ♦ Very cheaply
♦ Cost a bomb ♦ Extremely low in price
♦ Above price ♦ Very low in price and quality
♦ Buy for a song ♦ Someone wants to spend his
♦ Dirt cheap money as soon as he can
♦ Something one has bought
♦ Cheap and nasty without seeing, and that one
may then find to be worthless.
В. Use these idioms to make up a story. A student starts it
with "Usually i buy things at the department store". Other stu
dents should take turns building upon the sentence, turn by
turn.

English.
□ Model: / '/?? going to do the shopping. We ve run out o f bread and
butter And there's hardly any sugar at home. So I'll call at the
baker s and at the grocer s and buy all the necessary things.
1. Tam going to do the shopping. 2. The prices are variable, so
shop around by all means. 3. You’re paying in cash, are you? 4. Do
you have any money on you? 5. Many oil-rich countries have money
to burn. 6. Don only gets a pound a week pocket money. 7. These
shoes were an excellent buy. 8. I got this hat for a knockdown price.
9. Plastics used to be considered cheap and nasty. 10. My friend was
wearing a dress that she had bought for a song in India. 11. Exxon
might well be in the market to buy up a competitor too. 12. You know
I’m not going to buy that kind of pig in a poke.I.
plete the idiom.
B. Use these sentences in some meaningful context
1. Penny wise and__ (pounder, pound, pounding, punt) foolish.
2. 1 bought a pig in a ___(pole, poke, poker, polo). 3. The Browns
bought the car___(onto, over, on, out) their neighbour’s head. 4. It’ll
burn a ___(whole, hole, hollow, holly) in my pocket. 5. Our neigh
bour is rich. He has money to ___(turn, burn, burst, burden). 6. My
sister spends money like___(wodge, wad, water, wafer). 7. Have
you got an y ___(pill, pin, pig, pick) money? 8. This blouse costs
a (bond, bong, bone, bomb). 9. - Was it expensive? - Oh, no! I
bought H for a __ (gong, honk, song, bong). 10. These shirts are .
(cur9, hurl, dlrl, murky) cheap.
В. Sum up every person mentioned in the extracts.
1. “Five hundred guineas!” said Mor’s wife. “Well I never!”
“It’s the market price,” said Mor...
“You must have money to ___(earn / burn)”
2. Sally and Marie liked to do their___(shop / shopping) together
on this gala afternoon after pay on the mines. It was quite exciting to
join the throng in the streets, and inspect goods in the shops, put out
at bargain prices to tempt women with money burning a __ (hole /
hall) in their pockets.
(From Golden Miles by K. S. Prichard)
3. George recollected with satisfaction that he had bought that
house__ (above / over) James's head.
(From The Man o f Property by J. Galsworthy)
4. The man of the world awoke with a sense of being lost to that
world, and a dim recollection of having been called a “limit” He
took his note case from his dress coat pocket. Four hundred pounds,
in fives and tens - the remainder of the proceeds of his half of Sleeve-
links, sold last night,___(cash /dash) down, to George Forsyte
(From In Chancery by J. Galsworthy)
5. Fleur - so far as he knew - cut her coat according to h er___
(cloth / clothes).
(From The White Monkey by J. Galsworthy)
6. Say why don’t you get married with all this money to __ (turn /
burn)! You could get the finest girl in the land.
(From Martin Eden by J. London)
7. Women were spending money lik e___(waste / water), she
could see that in every elegant shop she passed. Flowers, candy, jew
elry, seemed the principal things in which the elegant dames were
interested. And she - she had scarcely enough___(pick/pin) money
to indulge in such outings as this a few times a month.
(From Sister Carrie by Th. Dreiser)
77
8. There was Val going to the university; he never came to see
him now. He would cost a pretty___(pence/ penny) up there. It was
an extravagant age. And all the pretty pennies that his four grand
children would cost him danced before James’ eyes. He did not
grudge them the money, but he grudged terribly the risk which the
spending of that money might bring on them...
(From In Chancery by J. Galsworthy)
9. I said, “Bertha is unduly economical at times. She’s ___(pence/
penny-wise) and pound-foolish.”
(From Gold Comes in Bricks by F. S. Gardner)
10. The somebodies (I forget the name my father mentioned)
made all their money by buying up land round New York for a mere__
(gong /song).
(From Paid Kelver by J. K. Jerome)

A.V.Kunin.
1. Доказательств этому было достаточно, и самых убеди
тельных, потому что все они били купцов прямо по карману.
(Д. Мамин-Сибиряк. Хлеб) 2. России эта поездка вскочила в изряд
ную копеечку: царь пожаловал своему любимцу шесть
деревень... (В. Шишков. Емельян Пугачев) 3. Как работник этот
молодой и сильный человек не стоил и гроша ломаного. (А. Чехов.
Агафья) 4. - Желаете окружить владения? - ласково спросил
Трощенко. - Этому лесу цены нету. (К. Паустовский. Повесть о
лесах) 5. - ... Фунта никто не купит у вас. - Купят, да еще как рас-
купят-то!... - С руками оторвут! (П. Мельников-Печерский. На горах)
VI. Rewrite the following text in idiomatic English.
Mary goes shopping on Fridays. She compares the price of dif
ferent things before she decides which to buy. She usually carries
money rather than credit cards. Mary doesn’t like very cheap things.
l*hey are low in quality. She has about £50 a week in spending
money. Mary never buys anything without examining it. She spends
only n\ much money as she can afford.
Mary’s sister, Helen spends a lot of money. She is unable to stop
buying more and more things. She likes to spend her money on her
self rather than on necessary things. When she calls at a shop, she
wants to spend her money as soon as she can. Sometimes Helen buys
things which cost a lot of money. She is always interested in buying
fashionable clothes and jewels.
Mary tries to live economically. But Helen doesn’t want to spend
money carefully and sensibly. She usually wastes it on unnecessary
things.
1. To buy for a song. 3. Buy something over smb’s head.
2. Have money to burn. 4. Buy a pig in a poke.

goes..."
Proverb: “Cut the (your) coat according to the (your) cloth”

tences.
I . My friend is really penny wise and pound foolish. 2. So my sis
ter bought a pig in a poke. 3. It was not worth a farthing. 4. Re
member! The car costs money! 5. Thus, we managed to buy it over
our neighbour’s head. 6. I’m afraid, it’ll hit my pockets. 7. Mr Brown
must have money to burn. 8. It cost a fortune! 9. We were lucky to
buy it for a song. 10. Nobody wanted to buy the shirts even at the
knockdown price of £5.
I. I do my shopping on Fridays. 2. I’ll shop around before decid
ing which dress to buy. 3. I’ve got £50 in cash. 4. She had enough
money on her to pay for those shoes. 5. The hat was a good buy at
£12. 6. I paid good money for the house. 7. I don’t like these dirt
cheap shirts. 8. These books are above price. 9. The suit costs
a pretty penny! Ю. I’ve got some pin money!
1. Your friend is always in need of money. For the third time this
week he/she asks to borrow some money from you. Tell him / her
what you think he / she should do about his / her financial problems.
2. You want to sell your old bicycle. Discuss the price with a
friend who might want to buy it.
3. You buy a gold chain from a very expensive shop. After wearing
it for several weeks, it turns your neck green. Bring it back to the store.

A. Describe Nanfs visit to Tim Burke's shop. Use idiomatic
English.
Tim Burke’s shop was in the middle of a row of old shops, dark
below and white above. A black sign swung above the door. T Burke,
Jeweller and Goldsmith...
The wooden shutters which covered the shop windows at night
made it quite dark within and in the dim light of the lamp it looked
like some treasure cave or alchemist’s den...
Nan began to wander about in the back of the shop, picking up
objects here and there. Mor watched her uneasily, Tim Burke with a
curious half-concealed satisfaction. Nan had opened one of the cabi
nets and was picking over a heap of necklaces. She seemed unusually
gay and animated.
B. Make up a story about Rosemary. Say why the shopman
was fond of serving her. Use the idioms given in Unit 5.
Rosemary had been married two years... And her husband
absolutely adored her. They were rich, really rich, not just comfort
ably well off, which is odious and stuffy...
But if Rosemary wanted to shop she would go to Paris as you and
I would go to Bond Street...
One winter afternoon she had been buying something in a little
antique shop in Curzon Street. It was a shop she liked. For one thing,
one usually had it to oneself. And then the man who kept it was
ridiculously fond of serving her. He beamed whenever she came in.
He clasped his hands; he was so gratified he could scarcely speak.
Flattery, of course. All the same, there was something...
“You see, madam,” he would explain in his low respectful tones,
“I love my things. I would rather not part with them than sell them to
someone who does not appreciate them, who has not that fine feeling
which is so rare” ... And, breathing deeply, he unrolled a tiny square of
blue velvet and pressed it on the glass counter with his pale finger-tips.
To-day it was a little box. He had been keeping it for her. He had
shown it to nobody as yet. An exquisite little enamel box...
Rosemary loved it; it was a great duck. She must have it... “Charming!”
But what was the price? For a moment the shopman did not seem to
hear. Then a murmur reached her. “Twenty-eight guineas, madam.”
“Twenty-eight guineas.” Rosemary gave no sign. She laid the
little box down Twenty-eight guineas. Even if one is rich... She
looked vague. Her voice was dreamy as she answered: “Well, keep
it for me - will you?”
But the shopman had already bowed as though keeping it for her
was all any human being could ask. He would be willing, of course,
to keep it for her for ever.
(From A Cup o f Tea by K. Mansfield)
C. Make up a story about Stephen and his father. Say what the
letters reveal. Use idiomatic English.
Geneva, January 15
Dear Father,
...1 will try not to spend so much money in the future and 1will keep
accounts and send them to you...
Love, Stephen
New York, January 19

Dear Stephen:
...I will look forward to going over your accounting and I am sure you
will find that in keeping a clear record of what you spend you will be able
to cut your cloth according to the bolt and that, in turn, will help you to
develop a real regard for yourself It is a common failing, as I told you, to
spend too much money in order to compensate oneself for a lack of inner
security but you can easily see that a foolish purchase does not insure
stability and if you are chronically insolvent you can hardly hope for peace
of mind. Your allowance is more than adequate and when you team to
make both ends meet you will have taken a decisive step ahead. I have
great faith in you and I know you will find your anchor to windward in your
studies, in your sports, and in your companions...
Love, Father
(From Simple Arithmetic by V. Moricom)

83
D. invent a story which can be entitled “Aunt Judith and
Sylvia go shopping”. Use idiomatic English.
Next day they went shopping. It was a bright cloudless morning
of early summer The pavements were crowded: an immense
blurred noise filled the air like a mist. The scarlet and golden buses
looked regal and the sunlight glittered with a rich and oily radiance
on the polished flanks of the passing limousines...
Sylvia had not been in London for nearly two years, and these
crowds, this noise, this innumerable wealth of curious and lovely
things in every shining window went to her head...
For an hour they wandered through Selfridge's. "And now,
Sylvia," said Aunt Judith, when at last she had ticked off every item
on her long list, "now you can choose whichever of these frocks you
like best." She waved her hand. A display of Summer Modes for
Misses surrounded them on every side. Lilac and lavender, primrose
and pink and green, blue and mauve, white, flowery, spotted - a sort
of herbaceous border of young frocks. "Whichever you like," Aunt
Judith repeated.
(From The Clcixtons by A. Huxley)
XIII. Speak on one of the following topics, using some idioms

given in Unit 5.
1. I’d like most to buy...
2. The dearest thing I’ve ever bought...
3. The car / house I would like to own someday...
PROJECT
Consult the English-Russian Phraseological Dictionary by

A. V. Kunin. Read about various types of commentaries (P. 11,17,
18) given in the dictionary. Pick out some idioms in it illustrating
the main types of commentaries.
SOCIAL ETIQUETTE
MANNERS
IDIOMS

1. Exchange greetings
2. Pay smb a compliment
3. Return the compliment
4. Have smb to thank (for smth)
5. Make friends with smb
6. Cause / give offence
7. Take offence
8. Accept smb’s apology
9. It’s good / bad manners (to do smth)
10. She / he has no manners
11. Where are your manners?
12. Behave yourself
13. In polite society / circles / company
14. Just / only being polite
15. Table manners
16. Take leave of smb / take one’s leave
17. Play the man
18. Play the fool
19. Play the baby
20. Evil communications corrupt good manners
21. Fair and softly goes far
22. Be on one’s best behaviour
23. Civility costs nothing
24. Social life
25. Do as you would be done by
26. Manners maketh man / Manners make the man
1. Exchange greetings - to greet each other.
E.g.: He stopped at their table to exchange greetings.
2. Pay smb a compliment - to tell someone that they look nice,
have done something well, etc.
E.g.: She knew that she had just been paid a great compliment.
3. Return the compliment - to say something nice to someone
after they have said something nice to you.
E.g.: She said how nice my dress was, so / returned the compli
ment and said I liked hers.
4. Have smb to thank (for smth) - used when saying who is
responsible for something helpful or, humorously, who is respon
sible for something unhelpful.
E.g.: I have my father to thank for getting me my job.
And who do I have to thank for that mess in my room?
5. Make friends with smb - to meet people and become friendly
with them.
E.g.: She finds it easy to make friends at school.
Have you made friends with your neighbours yet?
6. Cause / give offence - to offend someone, to make someone
angry or upset; to go against people’s feelings of what is morally
right.
E.g.: Let's try to get rid o f them without causing offence.
7. Take offence - to feel offended because of something someone
has said or done.
E.g.: She’s always quick to take offence.
8. Accept smb’s apology - to forgive them after they have apolo
gized.
E.g.: Please accept my sincere apologies.
9. It’s good / bad manners (to do smth) - used to tell a child how
to behave.
E.g.: I t’s bad manners to point at people.
10. She / he has no manners - she / he doesn’t behave polite in so
cial situations.
E.g.: They just got up and left.
Some people have no manners.
11. Where are your manners? - used to tell someone, especially a
child, that they are behaving impolitely.
12. Behave yourself! - to behave in a way that people think is good or
correct, by being polite and obeying people, not causing trouble, etc.
E.g.: Will you children please behave!
13. In polite society / circles / company - (often humorous) - among
people who are considered to have a good education and correct
social behaviour.
E.g.: You can't use words like that in polite company
14. Just / only being polite - saying something you may not really
believe or think, in order to avoid offending someone.
E.g.: She said she liked his painting, but she was just being polite.
15. Table manners - the way that you behave at meals.
16. Take leave of smb / take one’s leave - to say good-bye to someone.
17. Play the man - to behave in a way, a strong, brave man behaves
himself.
E.g.: For once in his life he play>ed the man throughout.
18. Play the fool - to behave in a silly way.
E.g.: Stop playing the fool.
19. Play the baby - do not behave in a sensible way.
E.g.: Don Уplay the baby! Take your medicine.
20. Evil communications corrupt good manners (proverb) - the
group of people that you are friends with or that you spend time
with usually influence your behaviour.
21. Fair and softly goes far (proverb) - a polite person can succeed
in doing something good.
22. Be on one’s best behaviour - to behave as well and politely as
you can, especially in order to please someone.
E.g.: / want you to be on your best behaviour at their place.
£3. Civility costs nothing (proverb) - polite behaviour which most
people consider normal.
14. Social life - activities with your friends.
E.g.: We are having a busy social life these days.
15. Do as you would be done by - to treat someone well.
26. Manners maketh man / Manners make the man (proverb) - to
judge people by their behaviour.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Etiquette ['et i lot] - the formal rules of proper (social) behaviour.
In Britain, the rules of social behaviour are not as severe as they were
in the past, but there are still many rules about formal behaviour in
upper-class society. People who move up in society sometimes look
at etiquette books to learn how they are expected to behave.
TESTING VOCABULARY
I. A. Match the following English idioms to their respective dic
Social life Say good-bye to someone |

Be on one’s best behaviour Greet each other J
Play the baby Become friendly with smb
Play the fool Feel upset, offended, angry
Take leave of smb Activities with your friends
In polite society Behave as well as one can
He has no manners Do not behave in a sensible
way
Take offence Behave in a silly way
Make friends with smb Among people having cor
rect social behaviour
Exchange greetings He doesn’t behave polite
B. Use some idioms to make up a story. A student starts it with

“I don't like people who have no manners". Other students
should take turns building upon the sentence, turn by turn.I.

if you are right. Rewrite the sentences in non-idiomatic
Engiish.
G Moctol: My friend has a very busy social life. He is a good mixer,
a m i hf has a lot of friends. He s always on the go. He attends all
\o rtx o f partht.% a n d meetings
1. My friend has a very busy social life. 2. My sister was on her
best behaviour. 3. I try tries to be on her best behaviour all the time.
4. One by one, the guests took their leave. 5. My mother took leave
of the host at an early hour. 6. I took offence at my brather for his
thoughtless behaviour. 7. My younger sister finds it hard to make
friends. 8. When someone says something nice, it is polite to return
Ihe compliment. 9. I thanked my colleague for paying me a compli
ment. 10.1 called at my friends’ office to exchange greetings. 11. Fair
and softly goes far. 12. Manners make the man.
plete the idiom.
B. Use sentences in some meaningful context.
1. The child was on h is __ (better, best, bad, becoming) behav
iour. 2. Evil communications__ (correct, corrupt, correlate, culti
vate) good manners. 3. Fair and__ (costly, bossy, softly, lofty) goes
far. 4. Manners__ (mean, make, mould, maintain) the man. 5. Ci
vility costs__ (none, nothing, nobody, no one). 6. Helen compli
mented her friend on her new hairstyle. And she __ (repaid,
revealed, returned, repeated) the compliment.IV .
(Passage 1 comes from Caravan by J. Galsworthy, passage 2 is
from The Heart of Mid-Lothian by W. Scott, passage 3 is from The
Winter o f Our Discontent by J. Steinbeck, passage 4 comes from The
fVater-Babies by Ch. Kingsley, passages 5-9 are from Cakes and Ale
by W. S. Maugham, passage 10 is from Ten Thousand a Year by
p. Warren, passage 11 comes from Live with Lightning by M. Wilson,
passage 12 is from The Ant and the Grasshopper by W. S. Maugham)
1. Suddenly, to my horror, Dan growled. “Play th e __ (mum /
an)\.. “I don’t want your advice anyway,” he said. ‘Til not be die
C ted to.”
2. “Fair and___(soft / softly) goes far,” said Meiklehose.
3. Remember the old boy who said, “M anners___ (maketh /
mould) man”? Well, that’s changed now. Tailors make men in an\
image they want.
4. “Be a good boy, and do as you___(will / would) be done by,'
he father said.
5. Roy novel had a considerable success. I t___(met / made) him
many friends in literary circles and in a very short while you could
not go to a tea party in Bloomsbury, Campden Hill, or Westminster
without finding him handing round bread and butter...
6 .1 lived with an uncle and aunt on the outskirts of a little Kentish
town by the sea. It was called Blackstable and my uncle was the
vicar. My aunt was a German. She came of a very noble but impov
erished family When a rich banker from London, with a name that
in these days is famous in financial circles, took a neighbouring
house for the summer holidays she refused to call on him because
he was in trade I asked if I might bring him (the banker’s son) to
the vicarage; permission was reluctantly given me, but I was not
allowed to go in return to his house. My aunt said I’d be wanting to
go to the coal merchant’s next, and my uncle said: “ ___(Evil/ even)
communications corrupt good manners.”
7. I remembered vividly the luncheon to which she referred. I
happened to be staying for a long weekend not far from Tercanbur\
with a certain Lady Hodmarsh, the clever and handsome American
wife of a sporting baronet with no intelligence and charming__
(manner / manners). Perhaps to relieve the tedium of domestic life
she was in the habit of entertaining persons connected with the arts
Her parties were mixed and gay.
8. My uncle had not a consecutive mind and the suggestion that
Ted Driffield should pay foi my paper and w ax___(offended/ oc
cupied) him so much that he quite forgot his intention to forbid me to
go at all.
“He can quite well get his own paper and wax,” he said. “He has
plenty of (pocket / pin) money, and he’d much better spend it on
something like that than on sweets and make himself sick.”
9. I began to like Lord George. At first I was very cold with him
and scrupulously polite but he seemed so unconscious of the social
difference between us that I was forced to conclude that my haughty
courtesy failed to put him in his place He was blatant and vulgar
and the way he dressed was always a shock to me and h is __
(table / tabloid) manners were___(offensive / offending) but I found
myself less and less affronted by him.
10. “It may be as well to acknowledge the fellow’s note___
i(civility / civics) costs nothing,” the woman said.
11. Everyone was on h is__ (bad/ best) behaviour, but there
was a pleasant air of friendliness waiting to be released...
12. He made a steady income from his friends and he___(made /
bade) friends easily.
A. V. Kunin.
1. Она бывает у него каждый день, картина подвигается быст
ро. Как она себя ведет? Скромно, с достоинством. Всегда мол
чит. (В. Гаршин. Надежда Николаевна) 2. Клоун, совсем клоун! И
что это у тебя за манера дурака из себя ломать... (Н. Лейкин. Наши
'за границей) 3. [Он] при виде вас впадает в детство. (Б. Полевой.
Современники) 4. Все дышало в нем обаянием: и его облик -
чуть-чуть простоватый - и манера держать себя, и самый голос
его и речь. (Юрьев. Записки) 5. Вы не умеете держать себя в
женском обществе. (А. Чехов. Медведь) 6. Все же в столовой гос
пода офицеры держали себя в рамках (приличия)... (И. Гончаров.
Наш корреспондент) 7. Я уже просил вас держать себя в свете
так, чтоб и злые языки не могли ничего сказать против вас. Вы
неприлично держали себя. (Л. Толстой. Анна Каренина) 8. Вы же
за добро платите нам злом. Вы несправедливы Подумайте об
этом Мы относимся к вам по-человечески, платите и вы нам
тою же монетою. (А. Чехов. Новая дача) 9. Конструктор, что это
такое?.. Это ни на что не похоже... (А. Серафимович. На заводе)
10. А ведь вот, - хриплым и резким голосом промолвил Лучков, -
вот ты умный человек, ты ученый человек, а ведь тоже иногда, с
позволения сказать, дичь порешь. (И. Тургенев. Бретёр)V I.
VI. Link each of the pictures on pages 92-93 with one of the
them.
1. Social life. 3. Be on one’s best behaviour..
2. Play the baby. 4. Evil communications corrupt good manners.
VII. Rewrite the following text in idiomatic English.
Helen is a very polite girl. She is a sociable girl too. Helen
becomes friendly with people easily. She enjoys socializing with her
friends. The girl is kind and she is always ready to tell someone
something nice. She is not jealous. Helen is sincere. She never
behaves in a silly way. Helen treats people well. She tries to behave
as well as she can. She knows that a polite person can succeed in
doing something good. And polite behaviour costs nothing. Helen has
a lot of nice, kind friends. She never mixes with a bad crowd. Helen
never lets bad people influence her behaviour.
Helen’s younger sister, Ann has no manners. She behaves ai
meals badly. Often she is naughty and does not behave in a sensible
way. Sometimes she makes her parents and her sister angry and
upset. They often ask her to be polite. They usually say: '‘People
should treat each other well.” We always judge people by their
behaviour.

goes..."
Proverbs: Manners make the man.
Civility costs nothing.
Fair and softly goes far.
Evil communications corrupt good manners.IX
.

tences.
1. Do as you would be done by. 2. He was just being polite. 3. He
has no manners. 4. They accepted her apology. 5. He made friends
with his neighbours. 6. She returned the compliment. 7. Manners
make the man. 8. She has a busy social life. 9. He played the fool.
10. Some people have no manners.

1. The friends stopped and exchanged greetings. 2. Everybody
paid the hostess a compliment. 3. I have my friend to thank for help
ing me. 4. Where are your manners? 5. Behave yourself! 6. Don’t
use slang in polite company. 7. Play the man. 8. Stop playing the
♦•by! 9. You’d better accept your friend’s apology. 10. It’s bad man
ners to whisper in company.
■0. Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use

1. You are in a movie theatre and the person in front of you is
gearing a very large hat / is talking to his / her neighbour. Ask the
person to take the hat off / to stop talking.
2. Your “friend” has been talking about you behind your back.
Confront him / her about this.
3. Your friends are making a lot of noise at a party. Tell them to
Ibe quiet.
4. A good friend of yours just cut her hair. You think she looks
awful. What do you tell her?
Jfll. Read and translate the following passages into Russian.
A. Discuss what is usually referred to as a “problem child”.
Use the idioms given in Unit 6.
Life shows that if the child only “consumes” joy without working
for it, without putting forth spiritual effort, his heart may become cold,
callous, and indifferent. The sourse of the child’s conscience, a will
ingness to do good for others, is empathy for the feelings of those people
who are filled with grief and adversity. Parents should teach their
children empathy for the feelings of other people and try to the child
to put himself onto the other fellow’s shoes, to experience his need for
help and care. The child that does not know all the sides of human life -
both joy and sorrow - will never become sensitive and sympathetic.
John says: “My parents gave me every material benefit, pocket
money any time I asked. I had my own car when I was seventeen. 1
wanted for nothing except their time. They were always busy. I real
ity don’t know why they had a child. So I started hanging about with
a bunch of “yobbos” I thought “Why not? Who cares?”
В Note: Yob/ yobbo - a rude or troublesome young man.

B. Comment on Felicity's state of mind, her behaviour. Use
idiomatic English.
“You can’t behave anyhow to people and expect them to love you
just the same!” said Nan to Felicity.
“That’s just what I do expect,” said Felicity sulkily, and went back
into her bedroom. Mor, overhearing this exchange from downstairs,
thought, she is right, that is just what we do expect. He looked at his
watch. He was teaching at two-fifteen. It was time to go. He called
goodbye, and as no one answered, left the house, banging the from
door behind him. л , . . t mж , ,
(From The Sandcastle by I. Murdoch '
C. Comment on Nan’s behaviour. Use the idioms given in Unit 6.

1) They looked at each other. Mor turned away his eyes. He suf
fered deeply from the discovery that his wife was the stronger...
“Sorry,” said Mor. Mor had made it a rule to apologize, whether oi
not he thought himself in the wrong. Nan was prepared to sulk for days
He was always the one who crawled back. Her strength was endless.
2) The meeting was breaking up... Nan was pulling her gloves on
in a very slow way which Mor knew she adopted when she wished to
detach herself in a superior manner from the surrounding scene. Mor
had hoped that Nan might make some friends at this class, and had
originally imagined that perhaps this was why she came. But Nan had
steadfastly refused to get to know anyone or to pay any attention at ali
to her fellow-students. She behaved as one surrounded by her inferiors.
(From The Sandcastle by I. Murdoch^
D, Comment on the characters’ behaviour, their feelings. Use
some idioms given in Unit 6.
The Forestiers entertained a good deal. Captain Forestier was a
connoisseur of wines and was proud of his cellar.
“His father was well known to have the best palate in England”
said Eleanor, “and he’s inherited it”
Most of their friends were Americans, French, and Russians.
Robert found them on the whole more interesting than the English,
and Eleanor liked everybody he liked. Robert did not think the
English quite up to their mark. Most of the people he had known in
the old days belonged to the shooting, hunting, and Fishing set; they,
poor devils, were all broke now, and though, thank God, he wasn’t a
snob, he didn’t half like the idea of his wife getting herself mixed up
with a lot of nouveaux riches no one had ever heard of. Mrs Forestier
was not nearly so particular, but she respected his prejudices and
admired his exclusiveness.
“Of course he has his whims and fancies”, she said, “but I think it’s
Mily loyal on my part to defer to them. When you know the sort of people
ie comes from you can’t help seeing how natural it is he should have
them. The only time I’ve ever seen him vexed in all the years we’ve
been married was when once a gigolo came up to me in the Casino and
asked me to dance. Robert nearly knocked him down. I told him the
poor little thing was only doing his job, but he said he wasn’t going
to have a damned swine like that even asking his wife to dance.”
Captain Forestier had high moral standards. He thanked God that
lie was not narrow-minded, but one had to draw the line somewhere;
and just because he lived on the Riviera he didn’t see why he should
hob-nob with drunks, wastrels, and perverts.
“You see”, said Eleanor, “he’s a man of complete integrity; he’s
the cleanest man I’ve ever known; and if sometimes he seems a little
intolerant you must always remember that he never asks of others
what he isn’t prepared to do himself. After all, one can’t help admir
ing a man whose principles are so high and who’s prepared to stick
to them at any cost.”
(From The Lions Skin by W. S. Maugham)
E. Give your own opinion of the foliowing utterances. Use
...And then, suddenly, after a few minutes of silence my mother
said to me: “I really cannot understand the conduct of your friend. I
do not like this leaving without a word all those to whom she is so
dear. The gesture is theatrical and offends my taste. A well-bred
woman does nothing which shall make people talk of her. I hope that
if ever you caused us the great sorrow of leaving us you would not
take flight as though you were committing a crime.”
F. Describe the young man's state of mind. Comment on
Julia's behaviour. Use idiomatic English.
At that moment the young man appeared. In the car Julia had done
all she could to put him at his ease, but he was still very shy. The cock
tails were waiting and Michael poured them out. Julia took a cigarette
and the young man struck a match for her, but his hand was trembling
so much that she thought he would never be able to hold the light near
enough to her cigarette, so she took his hand and held it.
4 Янсон В.
“Poor Iamb,” she thought, “I suppose this is the most wonderful
moment in his whole life. What fun itMl be for him when he tells his
people. I expect he’ll be a blasted little hero in his office.”
Julia talked very differently to herself and to other people: when
she talked to herself her language was racy. She inhaled the first
whiff of her cigarette with delight. It was really rather wonderful,
when you came to think of it, that just to have lunch with her and talk
to her for three quarters of an hour, perhaps, could make a man quite
important in his own scrubby little circle.
XIII. Speak on one of the following topics, using some idioms given
in Unit 6.
1. People can hurt my feelings most by...
2. I get angry when...
3. lam at my best when...
4. To be grown up is...
XIV. Describe some people you know very well from the emo
tional viewpoint. Use the idioms from Unit € and the following
expressions to say exactly what you think of them, their
behaviour.
To be not exactly calm; to be a fairly emotional person; to express
one’s emotions easily; never let one’s emotions build up inside some
body; to get over the bad times more quickly when one talks or
shouts or cries about them; to know what kind of mood somebody is
in; to allow one’s heart to rule one’s head; to try to disguise one’s
feelings; to be easy-going and sociable; to be rather nervous and irri
table; to be enthusiastic; to be fun to be with; to let small things upset
one very much.
XV. Comment on the following sentence:
Keep your three C’s: keep Cool, Calm and Collected.
XVI. Read the following rhyme and say how it can be applied to the
topic “Social Etiquette. Manners”.
Every time you want to make a joke
Just make sure it sounds nice.
Choose your words.
Please remember my advice.
What sounds funny in your native tongue
And makes other people laugh
May be wrong, may be wrong
If translation sounds rough.
Humour is a very precious thing
Very easy to abuse.
Choose your words,
Choose the words you want to use.
Foreign language is a tricky thing,
If you want to be polite
Choose your words
And make sure they sound right.
There are certain things that you may not know.
It is never late to ask.
Choose your words.
It is not an easy task.
PROJECT
Comment on the structural patterns of the following Phraseo
logical Units. Consult the English-Russian Phraseological
Dictionary by A. V. Kunin. Pick out some idioms in it having the
game structural patterns. Supply their Russian equivalents and
use them in situations of your own.
A. First and foremost; house and home; pains and punishment;
safe and sound; now or never; spick and span.
B. As silent as the grave; as cool as a cucumber; as surly as a bear;
as cold as ice; as busy as a bee.
EDUCATION
IDIOMS
1. Learn smth at one’s mother’s knee
2. Intellectual / mental food
3. Be very quick in / on the uptake
4. Follow in smb’s footsteps
5. Go one’s own way
6. In doing we learn
7. An idle brain is the devil’s workshop
8. Work in / by fits and starts
9. Be head and / over ears in work
10. Busy one’s brains about smth / Rack one’s brains
11. Stuff smb’s head with smth
12. Stuff smb’s memory with smth
13. From cover to cover
14. Hammer into smb’s head
15. Show promise
16. Smb will / should go far
17. A walking dictionary / encyclopaedia
18. Bear / reap the fruits of smth
19. Under pressure
20. Turn a deaf ear to smth
21. In (at) one ear and out (at) the other
22. It’s never too late to learn
23. He who makes no mistake, makes nothing
24. Live and learn
25. Little knowledge is a dangerous thing / A little learning is a
dangerous thing
?t\ Knowledge is power
V Belter untaught than ill taught
28. Like teacher, like pupil
29. Study under smb
30. Money spent on the brain is never spent in vain
***
1. Learn smth at one’s mother’s knee - to learn something as a
very young child.
E.g.: He had learned to count at his mother s knee.
2. Intellectual / mental food - something that makes you think.
3. Be very quick in / on the uptake - to understand things quickly.
Be slow in / on the uptake - to have difficulty understanding
simple or obvious things.
E.g.: She was quick on the uptake and good-looking.
4. Follow in smb’s footsteps - to do the same things as somebody
did earlier.
E.g.: She is following in her mother s footsteps.
5. Go one’s own way - to do what you want rather than what every
one else does or expects.
E.g.: / believe in going my own way:
6. In doing we learn (proverb) - to gain knowledge of a subject, or
skill in an activity by experience, by doing smth.
7. An idle brain is the devil’s workshop (proverb) - laziness leads
to a person’s downfall.
8. Work in /by fits and starts - repeatedly starting and stopping.
E.g.: He tends to do things in fits and starts.
9. Be head and / over ears in work - to have much work to do.
E.g.: He is too busy now. He is head and ears in work.
10. Busy one’s brains about smth / Rack one’s br&ins - to try very
hard to think of something.
E.g.: He racked his brains all afternoon but couldn't remember
his telephone number.
11. Stuff smb’s head with smth - to give someone ideas about some
thing. Teach someone (usually something useless or wrong).
E.g.: Don \t stuff his head with this nonsense.
12. Stuff smb’s memory with smth - to load smb’s (or one’s) mem
ory with smth.
E.g.: / don’t want to stuff your memory with too many details
13. From cover to cover - from beginning to end.
E.g.: He read the hook from cover to cover
14. Hammer into smb’s head - to keep repeating something force
fully so that it will have an effect on people.
E.g.: He went on hammering at the same point.
The teacher has been trying to hammer into them the import
ance o f writ ing clearly.
15. Show promise - to be likely to become very good.
E.g.: When she was young, she showed considerable promise as
a tennis player.
16. Smb will / should go far - to be successful.
E.g.: This young man will go far.
17. A walking dictionary / encyclopaedia - someone who knows a
lot, and always has the information that you want.
18. Bear / reap the fruits of smth - to have a result of something.
E.g.: He died before he could bear the fruits o f all his hard work
19. Under pressure-to be persuaded very strongly that you must do
something.
E.g.: He only agreed to study under pressure from his parents.
20. Turn a deaf ear to smth - to ignore what someone says.
E.g.: The pupil has turned a deaf ear.
Young people sometimes seem to turn a deaf ear to the words
o f their parents and teachers.
21. In (at) one ear and out (at) the other - what has been said is
forgotten immediately.
E.g.: It just goes in one ear and out the other.
22. It’s never too late to learn (proverb) - there’s always room foi
improvement, getting knowledge of some subject, or skills.
E.g.: A man (one) is never too old to learn (proverb).
23. He who makes no mistake, makes nothing (proverb)
24. Live and learn - to increase one’s knowledge by experience
Usually said when one is surprised to learn something.
E.g.: Did you know that one in four animals is a beetle'*
Well, you live and learn.
25. Little knowledge is a dangerous thing (proverb) - incomplete
knowledge can embarrass or harm someone or something.
E.g.: **/'ni afraid I've much less knowledge than you have, he
answered. 44Well, don ft forget that a little knowledge is a
dangerous thing.
26. Knowledge is power (proverb) - the greater our knowledge is
the easier we can influence other people.
27. Better untaught than ill taught (proverb) - a little knowledge is
a dangerous thing.
28. Like teacher, like pupil (proverb) - a pupil behaves like his
teacher.
29. Study under smb - to be trained by a famous teacher.
E.g.: He studied under Brown in Zurich.
30. Money spent on the brain is never spent in vain (proverb) - if
one spends money on education one gains knowledge. One needs
education to be successful in life.
CULTURE CONTEXT
\
SOCIAL CLASS IN BRITAIN
Education
Upper class Middle class Working class
Eton, Harrow grammar school comprehensive
public school state school
prep school
finishing school technical college
Oxford
Cambridge
university
polytechnic
4 _______________ J
Eton ['i:tn] also Eton College - a very expensive British public
school (= independent school) for boys to which upper class and
leaders of society send their sons. Eton is generally considered to be
the top British public school and a place which produces many of the
nation’s leaders. Men who have been educated at Eton are known as
Old Etonians [i:'tounionz] and many like their sons to be educated at
Eton too.
Harrow ['haerou] also Harrow School - a British public school
for boys, at Harrow-on-the-Hill, NW London. It is one of the most
expensive and prestigious public schools in Britain. Men who have
been educated at Harrow are known as Old Harrovians.
Public school - a private fee-paying British and especially
English secondary school where children usually live as well as
study. Public schools are known for their high academic standards
and are considered prestigious. They are expensive and attended usu
ally by people of high social status or with a lot of money.
Prep school - preparatory school (in Britain) - a private school
for children between the ages of 8 and 13, where they are made ready
to attend a school for older pupils, usually a public school. Only a
small percentage of school-age children attend these schools. Most
preparatpry schools are for boys only or girls only.
Finishing school - a private school where rich young girls learn
social skills.
Grammar school (in Britain, especially formerly) - a school for
children over the age of 11, who are specially chosen to study for
examinations which may lead to higher education.
Slate school - a British school which receives money from the
government and provides free education. Most British children attend
state schools at all levels from the age of 5 to the age of 16 or 18.
These are usually called primary school (often divided into infant and
junior) and secondary school. There are also some state nursery
schools for children under 5.
Oxford University ['oksfod]
Cambridge University ['keimbrid 3 ]
Oxbridge ['Dks,brid3] - the universities of Oxford and/or Cam
bridge. Oxbridge students.
Oxford and Cambridge are the two oldest and most highly-re
garded universities in Britain. Although both have tried in recent
years to take more students from state schools, many Oxbridge students
come from private or public schools, and Oxbridge graduates often
go on to become influential and powerful in British society. Because
of this, people regard the two universities as being part of the British
establishment and class system, and use the word Oxbridge to refer
to values and beliefs which they consider exclusive, elitist, and out of
louch with ordinary people. Others use the word to refer to tradi
tional values and high standards in learning and teaching.
Polytechnic (especially in Britain) - a college of higher educa
tion, similar to a university, providing training and degrees in many
Subjects, especially those which prepare people for particular jobs in
science, industry, etc. Although degrees from polytechnics are as
good as those from universities, they are considered by some people
to be less prestigious than university degrees.
Comprehensive [, kompri'hensiv] school (in Britain) - a school
for pupils over the age of 11 which teaches children of all abilities.
The comprehensive system was introduced in 1965 and largely
replaced the old system of grammar schools and secondary modems,
which took pupils depending on whether they had passed or failed an
exam called the eleven-plus. There was great public argument about
the change. Some people were afraid that the standard of education
in Britain would fall. Others felt strongly that it was unfair to sep
arate children out at the age of 11. Over 80% of British pupils now
attend comprehensive schools. Although in most parts of Britain
there is now no examination at 11, children are often put in groups
according to their level of ability at a comprehensive.
Technical college also tech (especially in Britain) - a college
providing courses (usually not to degree level) in practical subjects,
art, social studies, etc., for students who have left school.
TESTING VOCABULARY
♦ Learn smth at one’s mother’s ♦ To have much work to do

knee
♦ Study under smb ♦ To do the same things as
smb did earlier
♦ Live and learn ♦ To try very hard to think of
smth
♦ Be very quick on the uptake ♦ Repeatedly starting and stop
ping
♦ Follow in smb’s footsteps ♦ From beginning to end
♦ Be head and ears in work ♦ To be likely to become suc
cessful
♦ From cover to cover ♦ Someone who knows a lot
♦ Show promise ♦ To ignore what someone says
♦ Rack one’s brains ♦ Increase one’s knowledge by
experience
♦ Work by fits and starts ♦ To learn smth as a very
young child
♦ A walking dictionary ♦ To understand things quickly
♦ Turn a deaf ear to smth ♦ To be trained by a famous
teacher

with “My friend studies a foreign language”. Other students
should take turns building upon the sentence, turn by turn.
II. A. In the following sentences there is an idiom. Decide what
English.
□ Model: John is lucky to study under such a famous teacher. The
young man is very gifted. His teacher says he 41 go far.
1. The young man is lucky to study under such a famous singer.
2. Are British public schools really private fee-paying schools? Well,
you live and learn. 3. The teacher told the children to do their home
work, but it went in one ear and out out the other. 4. My friend’s hus
band turned a deaf ear to her requests for money. 5. Our friends’ son
only agreed to study under pressure. 6. Our teacher knows so many
words that he’s a walking dictionary. 7. My brother will go far, see if
I’m not right! 8. My sister is showing great promise as a ballet
dancer. 9. I read the book from cover to cover. 10. The teacher has
been trying to hammer in the facts. II. Who’s been stuffing these
children’s heads with this nonsense? 12. Don’t waste any more time
racking your brain. Look it up in the encyclopaedia. 13. Like teacher,
like pupil. 14. My father will not come. He’s head over ears in work.
I s You won’t make much progress if you work by fits and starts.
16. Better untaught than ill taught. 17. I decided to follow in my
mother’s footsteps and became a teacher. 18. The child is very quick
on the uptake. 19. Money spent on the brain is never spent in vain.
plete the idiom.
B. Use the sentences in some meaningful context
1. The factory owners turned a __ (dead, deaf, deep, deft) ear to
the demands of the workers. 2. Work hard and you’l l __ (bar, bare,
bear, beard) the fruits of your work. 3. She agreed to do it under___
(presage, press, pressing, pressure). 4. My friend knows a lot, she’s a
__(working, waking, walking, wanting) dictionary. 5. Money spent
on the brain is never spent in ___(vane, vein, veil, vain). 6. Our fel
low student is an able person. 1 think he’ll g o ___(farther, fast, far,
further). 7 .1tried to ___(ham, hamper, hammer, hamstring) the facts
into my sister’s head. 8. Who ___ (stumbled, stumped, stuffed,
stunned) the child’s head with this nonsense?
№ A. Read the following passages and choose the correct key
1. But Kitty was a beauty. She gave___(prominence / promise)
:>f being so when she was still a child, for she had large, dark eyes,
liquid and vivacious, brown, curling hair in which there was a reddish
tint, exquisite teeth and a lovely skin.
2. Walter had seemed then a young man of promise and her father
*aid he would g o ___(farther / far). He hadn’t. He was painstaking,
industrious, and capable, but he had not the will to advance himself.
Mrs Garstin despised him.
3. Mr Forestier used to say: “I’m not the sort of chap to say any
thing against another chap behind his back. I can only ask you to take
my word for it that he isn’t a proper person for you to know " t his
was an appeal to which Mrs Forestier was incapable of turning a __
(deaf / deft) ear.
4. In a brown coat and grey flannel trousers, even without make
up, Michael was so handsome it took your breath away. He had an
easy manner and he talked like a gentleman. While Michael
explained the purpose of his visit Jimmie Langton observed him
shrewdly. If he could act at all, with those looks that young man
ought to g o ___(fast / far),
5. The English tutor is reporting on a man called Dingle. He says,
“Mr Dingle is a very estimable man." When the English tutor describes
a man as estimable, trouble is looming.
“... ful of zeal, but a little wooden, perhaps, if he will forgive my
saying so... It is not perhaps too late to make a change, and I cannot
help wondering whether even at this comparatively late stage
Mr Dingle might perhaps be well advised ... to concentrate his attention
on the language side of the school, on which his work is reported
t o ___(show /shower) quite considerable promise."
(From Oxford Life by D. Balsden)
6. I was working in __ (fits /fists) and starts... 1 wrote one short
story, then another: neither, I thought, was much good.
(From All in the Family by E. O’Connor)
7. They did not even pretend to like the lad, and their generosity
towards him showed itself chiefly in providing him with lavish supplies
of pocket money and allowing him to go his own__ (wave / way).
(From The Gadfly by E. L. Voinich)
8. She was not at all shy, she asked me to call her Sally before
we’d known one another ten minutes, and she was quick in th e __
(uptake / upturn).
(From The Book-Bag by W. S. Maugham)
9. She had a bad memory for names, and it irritated her not to be
able to think of them, so that she would pause in the middle of some
story t o __ (rack / race) her brains.
(From O f Human Bondage by W. S. Maugham)
10. She is a ___(working / walking) encyclopaedia, not only of
Jterature but of Moscow and Russian and Soviet History.
(From Holidays among the Russians by D. Cusack)
11. Soames Forsyte made almost mechanically for his Uncle
Hmothy’s in the Bayswater Road... In this practice of taking family
patters to Timothy’s in the Bayswater Road, Soames was but fol-
Owing in th e___(footwear / footsteps) of his father, who had been
II the habit of going at least once a week to see his sisters at
Timothy’s, and had only given it up when he lost his nerve at eighty-
4x, and could not go out without Emily.
(From In Chanceiy by J. Galsworthy)
12. There’s a lot o’things you don’t think of, lad, till the time
Comes you__ (leave / live) and learn.
(From Wonder Hero by J. B. Priestley)

A. V. Kunin.
I. Серж, пожалей хоть ты меня. Ведь я в цвете лет, господа, я
подаю большие надежды. (А. Островский. Бесприданница) 2. Мы
Ведь с ним вместе в консерватории учились. Он подавал надеж
ды. (С. Михалков. Илья Гonовин) 3. Ваш сын надежду подает быть
офицером, из ряду выходящим по своим занятиям, твердости и
Исполнительности. (Л. Толстой. Война и мир) 4. Вы, если бы за
хотели, могли бы пойти очень далеко. (А. Куприн. Маюх) 5. Кукуш
кин врал про себя бессовестно, и ему не то чтобы не верили, а
Как-то мимо ушей пропускали все его небылицы. (А. Чехов.
Рассказ неизвестного человека) 6. Матвей сделал вид, что про
пустил рассуждения отца мимо ушей. (К. Федин. Костер) 7. Денис
ка наш вбил себе в голову, что деревня пустая стоит. (В. Вересаев.
В мышеловке) 8. Явившись тогда с визитом к Раскольникову, он
вошел с чувством благодетеля, готовящегося пожать плоды и
Выслушать весьма сладкие комплименты. (Ф. Достоевский. Пре
ступление и наказание) 9. Невежда так же в ослепленьи / Бранит
науки и ученье, / И все ученые труды / Не чувствуя, что он вку
шает их плоды. (И. Крылов. Свинья под дубам) 10. Я невольно увле-
кался его страстями; но был слишком горд, чтобы идти по еп
следам, и слишком молод и несамостоятелен, чтобы избирав
новую дорогу. (Л.Толстой. Отрочество) 11. Тысячи вскружил»
ему голову. Он потерял под собой почву и пошел по стопам отца.
Он поехал в Париж. (А. Чехов. Ненужная победа) 12. Откуда ть
взял, что я льщу Рылееву? Очень знаю, что я его учитель i.
стихотворном языке - но он идет своею дорогою. (А. Пушкин
Письмо к Бестужеву; 24 марта 1825 г.) 13. Весь этот наро;:
работал из-под палки... Все они собрались сюда не своей волей
(Ф. Достоевский. Записки из Мертвого дама) 14. Я знал учеб
ники от корки до корки, да сверх того мог решать все задачи в них
(М. Павлов. Воспоминанияметащрга) 15. С ним хорошо говорить,
мысль с лету ловит. (С. Бородин. Дмитрий Донской) 16. Цель
жизни нашей для него / Была заманчивой загадкой / Над ней он
голову ломал... (А. Пушкин. Евгений Онегин) 17. Я братьям напи
сал: двадцать два года, мол, ошибался, теперь я нашел себя, могу
играть. (А. Толстой. Трагик) 18. Мама советовала мне почаще
беседовать со Становером. - Это кладезь всяких познаний,
говорила мама. - Ходячий университет. Тебе очень полезно по
чаще встречаться с ним. (К. Паустовский. Повесть о жизни)V I.

When Mary was young, she was likely to become a very good
teacher. She learned to read, write and count when she was a very
young child. The girl understood things quickly.
Mary’s mother was a doctor. So she wanted her daughter to
become a doctor too. But Mary did what she wanted.
Now she is an experienced teacher. She is always busy and she
has much work to do. Mary teaches English. Some of her students are
bright and clever. Some of them have difficulty understanding simple
things. Some of them read books from beginning to end. Some boys
rarely look at their books. Mary tells them to read more books. But
they ignore what she says and they forget immediately her words.
They do their homework only because she makes them do it. Mary
says that there’s always room for improvement and that incomplete
knowledge can harm someone or something.
Mary herself knows a lot. She’s a talented teacher. Most of her
students study well. So she bears the fruits of her work.
MO
w Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you
goes...”
Proverbs: It’s never too late to learn.
Money spent on the brain is never spent in vain.
inn. Link each of the pictures (pp. 112-113) with one of the
idioms. Comment on the meaning of each of them. Use them
in situations of your own.
1. A walking dictionary.
2. Learn smth at one’s mother’s knee.
3. Like teacher, like pupil.
4. It’s never too late to learn.
V . Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen

tences.
I. So in doing we learn. 2. I think, he will go far. 3. That’s why
they called her a walking encyclopaedia. 4. Unfortunately, he couldn’t
Ireap the fruits of his work. 5. He did it only under pressure. 6. You
know, he who makes no mistake, makes nothing. 7. They say, a little
knowledge is a dangerous thing. 8. Better untaught than ill taught.
9. She made progress because she studied under Mr Brown. Ю. Like
teacher, like pupil.

I. My sister is clever and quick on the uptake. 2. My brother fol
lowed in his father’s footsteps. 3. My friend decided to go her own
*ay. 4. In doing we learn. 5. You won’t go far if you work by fits and
Marts. 6. My mother is head and ears in work. 7. Don’t stuff your
(lead with this nonsense. 8. I asked my neighbour to help me but he
bnly turned a deaf ear to my words. 9. Live and learn! Ю. An idle
brain is the devil’s workshop.

I. You are at an interview. You want to get into a very prestigious
*chool. Explain to the Dean of Admissions why you think you should
be accepted.Il
Ill
2. Your friend has been accepted to the school / college of his / her
choice. You were rejected. Tell him / her how you feel.
3. You have an important exam tomorrow. A friend of yours
comes over and asks you to go to a movie with him / her.
4. Have a talk about some of the students at college with a student
who is new.
5. Your teacher is angry with your friend because he / she con
stantly forgets to do his / her homework. Let him / her go to the
teacher and try to explain why he / she forgets to do it.
XII. A. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.

Dwell on George as a teacher, relying on the information of
the text Comment upon the boy's interests, his likes and d/s-
likes. Use the idioms given in Unit 7.
Gravely George set about the task of teaching me. He was
undeterred by the fact that there were no school-books available
on the island; he simply ransacked his own library and appeared
on the appointed day armed with a most unorthodox selection of
tomes. .Sombrely and patiently he taught me the rudiments of
geography from the maps in the back of an ancient copy of
Pearsons’ Cyclopaedia, English from books that ranged from
Wilde to Gibbon, French from a fat and exciting book called Le
Petit Larousse, and mathematics from memory. From my point of
view, however, the most important thing was that we devoted
some of our time to natural history, and George meticulously and
carefully taught me how to observe and how to note down observa
tions in a diary. At once my enthusiastic but haphazard interest in
nature became focused, for I found that by writing things down I
could learn and remember much more. The only mornings that 1was
ever on time for my lessons were those which were given up to nat
ural history.
George, hampered by inadequate books and a reluctant pupil,
would strive to make his teaching interesting, so that the lessons did
not drag.
George wisely instituted the novel system of out-door lessons.
(From Л/г Family and Other Animals by G. Durrell)
B. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.
Sum up the boy and his uncle. Comment on the uncle's view
of literature. Dwell on the boy as a student, relying on the
information of the text. Use some idioms given in Unit 7.
I had never known a writer before; I was interested.
“What does he write?” I asked. “Books?”
“I believe so,” said the curate, “and articles. He had a novel pub
lished last spring. He’s promised to lend it me.”
“I wouldn’t waste my time on rubbish in your place,” said my
uncle, who never read anything but The Times and The Guardian.
“What’s it called?” I asked.
“He told me the title, but I forget it.”
“Anyhow, it’s quite unnecessary that you should know,” said my
uncle. “I should very much object to your reading trashy novels.
During your holidays the best thing you can do is to keep out in the
open air. And you have a holiday task, I presume?”
I had. It was Ivanhoe. I had read it when I was ten, and the notion
of reading it again and writing an essay on it bored me to distraction.
When I consider the greatness that Edward Driffield afterward
achieved I cannot but smile as I remember the fashion in which he
was discussed at my uncle’s table.
(From Cakes and Ale by W. S. Maugham)
В Note: Ivanhoe ['aivonhou] - “Айвенго” (1819), исторический
роман В. Скотта (1771-1832).
C. Sum up Мог and his son. Describe Donald's intellectual

and leisure time interests. Use idiomatic English.
Donald was long in growing up - too long. Мог felt with some
sadness. He could not but grieve over his son’s strange lack of matur
ity. At an age when he himself had been devouring books of every
kind in an insatiable hunger for knowledge, Donald appeared to have
no intellectual interests at all. He worked at his chemistry in a desul
tory fashion, sufficiently to keep himself out of positive disgrace; but
apart from this Donald seemed to do, as far as Mor could see, noth
ing whatever. He spent a lot of time hanging about, talking to Carde
and others, or even, what seemed to Mor odder still, alone. He was to
be seen for half an hour on end just leaning out of his window, or else
sitting on the grass in the lower garden beyond the wood, his arms
about his knees, doing absolutely nothing... Donald’s reading, such as
it was, seemed to consist mainly of Three Men in a Boat, which he
read over and over again, always laughing immoderately, and various
books on climbing... During the holidays he was a tireless and indis
criminate cinema-goer.
D. Sum up Martin, his principles, his thirst for knowledge. Use

It seemed to Martin, by the end of the week, that he had lived cen
turies, so far behind were the old life and outlook. He attempted to
read books that required years of preliminary specialization. One day
he would read a book of antiquated philosophy, and the next day one
that was ultramodern, so that his head would be whirling with the
conflict and contradiction of ideas. He would sit up in bed, and the
dictionary was in front of him more often than the book. He looked
up so many new words that, when they recurred, he had forgotten
their meaning, and had to look them up again. He devised the plan of
writing definitions in a note-book, and filled page after page with
them. And still he could not always understand what he read.
He read much poetry, finding his greatest joy in the simpler poets,
who were more understandable. He loved beauty, and there he found
beauty. Poetry, like music, stirred him profoundly; and though he did
not know it, he was preparing his mind for the heavier work that
would come later. ^ ., „, , , f , 4
(From Martin Eden by J. London)
E. Sum up Andrew and his niece. Comment on Andrew's view
of education. Use idiomatic English.
Although kindness itself to me, my uncle Andrew had certain
peculiar and deeply-rooted ideas as to the upbringing of women.
Himself a man of little or no education, though possessing remark
able shrewdness, he placed little value on what he called “book
knowledge” He was especially opposed to the education of women.
In his opinion, girls should learn practical housework and dairy-
work, be useful about the home, and have as little to do with book
learning as possible. He proposed to bring me up on those lines, to
my bitter disappointment and annoyance. I rebelled frankly. I knew
that I possessed a good brain, and had absolutely no talent for domes
tic duties. My uncle and I had many bitter arguments on the subject,
for, though much attached to each other, we were both self-willed. I
was lucky enough to win a scholarship, and up to a certain point was
successful in getting my own way.
(From The Case o f the Missing Will by A. Christie)
F. Sum up the author of the article, his principles of a school

master. Comment on his view of school morality. Use some
One of the most important tasks of the primary school is to give
the students a specific sphere of solid knowledge and skills. The abil
ity to study contains within itself a host of other skills connected with
the mastery of knowledge: the ability to read, write, observe phe
nomena from the surrounding world, think and express one’s
thoughts in words. It is impossible to master knowledge without
these abilities.
During this period, the child must not only prepare for further
studies, accumulating the baggage of knowledge and abilities which
will enable him to study successfully in the future, but he must also
live a rich inner life. The primary school years are a whole period of
moral, intellectual, emotional, physical, and esthetic development.
There are many excellent primary school teachers. And each of
them should be not just a light to knowledge for the child, but a tutor,
a teacher of life.
G. Dwell on Mor as a teacher, his view of teaching. Use some

Mor was giving his WEA class... He felt again that sad guilty feel
ing which he had whenever he caught himself going through the
motions of being a teacher without really caring to make his pupils
understand. How well he knew that many teachers, including some
who got high reputations by doing so, contented themselves with put
ting up a show, often a brilliant one, in front of those who were to be
instructed - and of this performance both sides might be the dupes.
Whereas the real teacher cares only for one thing, that the matter
should be understood; and into that process he vanishes. Mor hated it
when he caught himself trying to be clever. Sometimes the tempta
tion was strong. An adult education class will often contain persons
who have come merely to parade a certain view-point, and with no
intention of learning anything. In response to this provocation it was
tempting to produce merely a counterattraction, a show, designed to
impress rather than to make anything clear. But to make anything
clear here. Mor felt with a sudden despair - how could it be done?
IE Note: WEA - Workers Educational Association; it organizes a
network of various courses for adults.
XIII. Speak on one of the following topics, using some idioms

given in Unit 7.
1. School is...
2. I like to read about...
3. A student fails his exam...
4. My favourite subject at school / University and why.:.
5. What makes an ideal student / teacher, an interesting lesson
PROJECT
Consult the EngHsh-Russian Phraseological Dictionary by
A. V. Kunin, copy as many idioms as possible out of it which may
be grouped under the heading “Education. Upbringing”. Write an
essay on the topic dwelling on your view of education, teaching
and upbringing.
WEEKEND
IDIOMS

1. A day off
2. The daily round
3. Have / take a rest
4. A well-earned rest
5. Leisure time
6. Gentleman / lady of leisure
7. Have one’s sleep out
8. Beauty sleep
9. A long weekend
10. Enjoy oneself
11. Have time on one’s hands / Have time to burn
12. A change of air /scene
13. A day out
14. (As) free as a bird
15. Free time
16. In one’s hours of ease
17. Make merry
18. Make a day of it
19. Take one’s ease
20. Have a fine time
21. Have all the time in the world
22. Have the time of one’s life
23. Bank holiday weekend
24. A busman’s holiday
25. Lost time is never found again
1. A day off - a day when you do not have to work.
E.g.: Lets take a day off next week.
2. The daily round - the things that you have to do every day.
E.g.: The daily round o f cooking and cleaning.
3. Have / take a rest - to have a period of time when you’re not
doing anything tiring and you can relax or sleep.
E.g.: I'm tired. I'd like to take a rest.
4. A well-earned rest - rest that you deserve because you have been
working hard.
E.g.: Let s take a well-earned rest.
5. Leisure time - time when you’re not working or studying and
can relax and do things you enjoy.
E.g.: In my leisure time I visit museums and galleries.
6. Gentleman / lady of leisure - humorous, someone who does not
have to work.
Leisured flejod] people - people who do not work, usually
because they are rich.
E.g.: Culture was for the leisured classes.
7. Have one’s sleep out - to continue sleeping until one wakes up
naturally.
E.g.: Don 't wake the child up - let him have his sleep out.
8. Beauty sleep - humorous, enough sleep to keep you healthy and
looking good.
E.g.: There was nothing to do and I thought I'd get in my beauty
sleep while l had the chance.
9. A long weekend - Saturday and Sunday, and also Friday or
Monday, or both.
E.g.: I'm going for a long weekend to the country.
10. Enjoy oneself - to be happy and experience pleasure in a partic
ular situation.
E.g.: They enjoyed themselves at the party.
11. Have time on one’s hands / have time to burn - to have a lot of
time because you have no work to do.
E.g.: - You have plenty o f time...
No. f have not got time to burn.
12. A change of air / scene - a stay in a different place that is pleasant.
E.g.: How about a week by the sea? A change o f air would do you
good.
13. A day out - a day spent at the beach, in the countryside, at the
zoo etc.
E.g.: It was a nice day> out.
14. (As) free as a bird - completely free.
E.g.: On my day off I feel free as a bird.
15. Free time - to have no work, and nothing else that you must do.
E.g.: She doesn'/ have enough free time during the week.
16. In one’s hours of ease - a particular part of the day when you
have nothing to do.
E.g.: In her hours o f ease she reads a book or a magazine.
17. Make merry - to enjoy oneself by drinking, singing, etc; be
cheerful, laugh, talk, sing and feast.
E.g.: It was a good excuse to make merry at somebody elses
expense.
18. Make a day of it - to choose to spend all day doing something,
usually for pleasure, when you could have spent only part of the
day doing it.
E.g.: We were going to the city for the concert anyway, so we
decided to make a day o f it.
19. Take one’s ease - to stop working or worrying.
E.g.: After supper she Hked to take her ease in a comfortable arm
chair.
20. Have a fine time - a period or part of your life when you have
good experiences. = Have a good / high time.
E.g.: We just want to have a good time.
21. Have all the time in the world - used to say that you have as
much time as you want in which to do smth.
E.g.: She has all the time in the world to write her article.
22. Have the time of one’s life - to enjoy oneself a lot.
E.g.: He had the time o f his life that night.
23. Bank holiday weekend - a weekend on which there is a bank

holiday on Friday or Monday.
Bank holiday - an official holiday when banks and most busi
nesses are closed.
E g.: We ’re going away for the bank holiday weekend’
24. A busman’s holiday - a holiday or a day off from work spem
doing the same work as you do in your job instead of resting or
doing something different.
E.g.: The painter spent a busmans holiday painting his own
house.
25. Lost time is never found again (proverb) = Lost time does not
return.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Radio 4- 3. BBC radio station which broadcasts programmes on
news and current affairs as well as plays and arts programmes. Radio 7
is considered to be a quality station and listened to by educated
people.
BBC 2 - the second of the two BBC television channels, which
broadcasts especially programmes concerning the arts and edu
cational subjects.
Channel 4 - one of Britain’s four main television stations, which
is supported by advertising and the various 1TV stations, and broad
casts programmes intended for people whose interests are shared
with relatively small numbers of others.
IT V - Independent Television; a system of British television com
panies supported by advertising.
BBC 1 - the first of the two BBC television channels. It broad
casts news and general entertainment programmes.
BBC World Service ~ the World Service - a division of the BBC
which broadcasts radio programmes, especially news, to many dif
ferent parts of the world.
Coronation Street - one of the most popular and longest running
British television programmes ever, first broadcast in 1960. It is a
soap opera set in Lancashire in the north of England and tells of
events in the lives of the working class people who live in a street
named Coronation Street. Some of its best-known characters have
been I Isie lanner, Ena Sharpies, Ben Lynch and Ken Barlow.
г N
w 3JD
сл т:
с
I со г>
С
о Е
оо>. I— оо
о о
Си
U
w. >
Н
СО
О
оо 3
о.
I</> 1
и о <U со
m ■SJ = Е с -С
-J I I Л g55 то с
5 и оо со
*о
$0 ссо g •5 JC
*2 О
CL»
>2 Е 2 и
о»
Cl
I .£СО> О
У
Wine bar - a type of bar that serves mainly wine and also usual
ly provides light meals. Wine bars are very different from pubs and
usually aim to have a more fashionable image. They are popular
especially with middle-class, professional men and women.
Working men's club - a place found in some towns, especially
towns in industrial areas, where working-class men go to drink, meet
friends, or for entertainment, and which is similar to a pub.
TESTING VOCABULARY
♦ The daily round ♦ Have a lot of time and have

no work to do
♦ Leisure time ♦ A day spent in the country
side
♦ A long weekend ♦ Laugh, talk, sing and feast
♦ Have time to burn ♦ Stop working
♦ Have all the time in the world ♦ Enjoy yourself a lot
♦ Take one’s ease ♦ Saturday, Sunday and also
Friday or Monday, or both
♦ Make merry ♦ The things that you do every
day
♦ A day out ♦ Time when you can relax
and do things you enjoy
♦ Have the time of one’s life ♦ Have as much time as you
want in which to do smth
B. Use idioms to make up a story. A student starts it with “I

spent my last weekend out of town” Other students should
take turns building upon the sentence, turn by turn.I.

English.
В. Expand on the sentences.
0 Model: My father doesn't go to work on Saturday: it s his day off
On this day he stays at home, helps my mother, works in the gar
den. Sometimes we go out o f town together or just have a walk in
the nearest park.
1. My father doesn’t go to work on Saturday: it’s his day off.
2. Take a well-earned rest. 3. I know some families with little leisure
lime to spend together. 4. Have you had your beauty sleep? 5. The
lourist is thoroughly enjoying herself. 6. We decided to have a week
or two at the seaside for a change of air. 7. We don’t have much free
lime. 8. My parents went to see their friends for the bank holiday
weekend. 9. We went to the mountains last winter and had the time
of our lives. 10. Where are you going to for a long weekend? 11. We
had a nice day out last week. 12. You look tired. You’d better have a
rest.
plete the idiom.
B. Use the sentences in some meaningful context.
1. My brother had a ___(businessman’s, busman’s, bushman 5,
busboy’s) holiday. 2. My friend is a s ___(freak, free, fresh, freakish)
as a bird. 3. A change o f ___(aim, aid, aisle, air) will do you a lot of
good. 4. Where did you spend your__ (lone, lonely, long, longish)
weekend? 5. Let him have his__ (sleepover, sleeper, sleep, slip) out.IV .
1. The problem presented to us by Miss Violet Marsh made rather
Вpleasant__ (chance / change) from our usual routine work. Poirot
had received a brisk and business-like note from the lady asking for
Bn appointment, and he had replied asking her to call upon him at
eleven o’clock the following day.
(From The Case o f the Missing Wilt by A. Christie)
2. It was quite hard to make friends with anybody in the village.
They were not unfriendly, but they were in no hurry to get closely
acquainted. They had all the time in th e __ (world / work).
(From The Landlords Daughter by M. Dickens)
3. ...The children were having th e __ (time / timing) of their
lives. They had a great big garden to play in, and trees to climb. That
was their idea of heaven.
(From Not Like This by J. Walsh)
4. By the way in which a man uses his leisure his character can be
told - more surely, in all probability, than by the way he does his
work. For most men, work is necessity in order to gain a living. Vast
numbers of men have not even been able to choose what work they
would do, but have been forced by economic necessity to take the
first job that came their way. But in their__ (leisured/ leisure) time,
they do what they really want to do and their real selves are reflect
ed in their actions.
(From Fifty Model Essay’s by J. Miller)
5. “I have come back” “But, Loveday, what a short holiday. I’m
afraid that you have hardly enjoyed yourself at all.”
“Oh, yes, sir, thank you, sir, I’ve enjoyed myself very much. I’d
been promising myself one little ___ (treat / treatment) all these
years. It was short, sir, but most enjoyable. Now I shall be able to
settle down again to my work here without any regrets.”
(From Mr Loveday s Little Outing and Other Sad Stories
by E. Waugh)
6. “I am very sorry - I have decided after all not to tell my wife
about our___(out / outing). So I beg you, Miss Carter to keep silent
about it,” Bill said.
7. Larry’s intention had been to kill the day somehow in the
streets and then dine at a restaurant, but he could not face again the
sight of cheerful people, talking, laughing, and making___(merry’ /
meritorious) .
(From Of Human Bondage by W. S. Maugham)
8. “And look here, don’t bother about the parcel for the museum
this time... You’ll have enough to bother you without running
errands.” “That will be all right,” I told him. “There won’t be any
trouble at all. I only knew too well the amount of time I’ll probably
have on m y__ (hands / head
(From The Volcanoes above Us by N. Lewis)

A. V. Kunin.
1. С работы Надежда уволилась и была теперь, как сама
сказала, вольной птицей. (Зубавин. В гостинице лесного города)
2. Особы обоего пола сидели в мягких креслах, кушали фрукты,
и от нечего делать, бранили докторов. (А. Чехов. Разговор) 3. Окна
были открыты, занавески опущены, и легкий ветерок от времени
до времени надувал их. (И. Бунин. Солнечный удар) 4. Целую ночь
она пролежала без сна, думала, размышляла... На рассвете
поднялась ни свет ни заря. (Уварова. Мытная улица) 5. Прихо
дите ко мне через часок. Посидим, поболтаем, поточим зубы.
(В. Липатов. Чужой) 6. ...Утром пришла районная газета... Он
все четыре колонки просмотрел от корки до корки. (Ф. Абрамов.
Две зимы и три лета) 7. Ему не сиделось дома, потянуло на
свежий воздух... (Салнов. Небо и земля) 8. Но Лидочка спала как
убитая и ничего ей не ответила. (Н. Лесков. Некуда)
On Friday Mary doesn’t go to work. On this day she can relax.
She deserves a good rest because she’s a hard-working person. On
this day Mary doesn’t get up early in the morning. She continues
sleeping until she wakes up naturally. On Friday she neither works
nor studies. If the weather is nice she may spend this day in the park
or at the zoo. On this day Mary feels completely free. She has as
much time as she wants in which to read a book or a magazine.
Sometimes she goes to see her friends. They often arrange parties.
They laugh, talk and feast and enjoy themselves a lot.
But sometimes Mary is busy on Friday too. She does the things
that she has to do every day. Sometimes she has a day off from work
doing the same work as she does in her job instead of resting. She dis
likes this time and looks forward to the coming weekend. Then she
goes to the countryside or some other place. Mary thinks it does her
a lot of good.
VII. Link each of the pictures (pp.129-130) with one of the idioms
1. (As) free as a bird. 3. A long weekend.
2. A busman’s holiday. 4. Bank holiday weekend.
VIII. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book

you have read that will lead you to say "So as the proverb
goes...”
Proverb: Lost time is never found again.

tences.
I. It was a very nice day off. 2..So l had a well-earned rest. 3. On
that day he had his sleep out. 4. We enjoyed our long weekend. 5. The
change of air did us good. 6. They had a nice day out. 7. It was a good
excuse to make merry. 8. All of us had a fine time. 9. So it was
a busman’s holiday. Ю. Lost time does not return.

L Tomorrow I’ll have a day off. 2. Let’s take a rest. 3. In my
leisure time l read books. 4. My sister is a lady of leisure. 5. Let
mother have her sleep out. 6. You’d better get in your beauty sleep.
7. I have time to bum today. 8. My friend is as free as a bird now. 9. In
my hours of ease I watch video. I0. After dinner we take our ease.
XI. Provide a natural conversational context for each of the fol

lowing remarks. Use the idioms given in Unit 8.
I. We shall have many days to talk things over. 2. I want a five-
day week. 3. Sunday is a day of rest for many people. 4. Let’s stop
and take a rest. 5. We rested for an hour after dinner. 6. My mother
is seldom at leisure. 7. Read this book at your leisure. 8. Time waits
for no man. 9. My friend has no time for sport. Ю. I looked forward
to this day. 11 I don’t know where my father would be at this time
of the day. 12. My grandmother was resting after a hard day’s work.
13. After dinner I could sleep there with comfort. 14. Try to sleep for
a while. 15. What do you do on weekdays? 16. My brother comes
only at weekends. 17. We walked together in the garden. 18.1couldn’t
remember a time in my life when I had felt this way. 19. It was
the happiest time of my life. 20. I don’t want to spend the whole day
indoors. 21. My grandfather spends most weekends working in the
garden. 22. My fellow-student spends a good deal of time listening
to good music. 23. 1 spent my long weekend at my sister’s. 24. My
brother enjoys spending time in the company of those clever people.
25. I spend much time on books. 26. The weekend my friend spent
with us passed too quickly. 27. In the spare time my sister plays the
violin. 28. I was invited to the garden party. 29. Fresh air is nice for
you. 30. We had the best time of our lives.
XII. Explain and expand on the following. Use the phraseological

units given in Unit 8.
1. They were all dressed up to go out to dinner. 2. I can’t keep
working all day long. 3. She worked so hard that she hardly had time
to breathe. 4. She was all dressed up in her Sunday-go-to-meeting
clothes. 5. We kept our grandmother company for a few hours. 6. The
guests struck up an interesting conversation. 7. The next time I get a
day off, we’ll go to the country. 8. We went shopping to buy some
things and then decided to make a day of it. 9. She never knows how
to pass the time when she has a day off. 10. They didn’t have a seri
ous talk. They just passed the time of day. 11. What a lovely day off!
It’s a shame that it’s drawing to a close. 12. They just dropped in to
say hello. 13. Mary is most at ease when she’s in the garden. 14. They
like to eat a meal out on their days off. 15. All’s well that ends well.
16. What a beautiful day! It makes you feel like a million. 17. I had
a good rest, and now I feel like a new person. 18. 1 don’t feel like
going to the party. 19. They didn’t feel up to making the visit. 20. Mary
didn’t feel up to going out that day. 2 1. They filled in the gap between
classes by having a bite. 22. Let’s finish up our work and have a rest.
23. Finish up your work. Go out later. First things first. 24. He dis
likes a nine-to-five job. He wants more freedom. 25. He can’t call his
time his own now. He’s too busy. 26. She couldn’t wait for her week
end. 27. Staying at home all day long is not her cup of tea. 28. Now
and again we go out to dinner and a show. 29. What he needs is a
breath of fresh air. 30. The fun and games are over. It’s time to get
down to work.
X///. Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use

1. Two friends are going away for the weekend. They’re dis
cussing their plans for this weekend.
2. Your friend tried to call you last night and you weren’t home.
Explain to him / her where you were.
3. Ask a friend to go with you to the countryside / the movies.
4. You’ve been to a very enjoyable party. Tell your friend about it.
XIV. Build up bits of text with the following as initial sentences.

1. One day I woke up late.
2. One day I decided to take a walk in the park.
XV. Read and translate the following passages into Russian.

A. Give reasons for Mor's anticipation of a pleasant evening.
Describe Mor’s ordinary day too. Use idiomatic English.
Now, as Mor emerged through the glass doors of Main School
into warm sunshine, a sense of satisfaction filled him, which was
partly a feeling of work well done and partly the anticipation of a
pleasant evening. On an ordinary day there would be the long inter
val till supper-time to be lived through, passed in reading, or correct
ing, or in desultory conversation with Nan. This was normally the
most threadbare part of the day. But this evening there would be the
strong spicy talk of Demoyte and the colour and beauty of his house.
If he hurried, Mor thought, he would be able to have one or two glasses
of sherry with Demoyte before Nan arrived.
B. Describe a garden party at Julia’s. Use some idioms given
in Unit 8.
On Sunday they had a good many people down for the day, actors
and actresses, an occasional writer, and a sprinkling of some of their
grander friends. Julia found these parties very amusing and she knew
that people liked to come to them. On the first Sunday after Roger’s
arrival there was a great mob. Roger was very polite to the guests. He
did his duty as part host like a man of the world. But it seemed to
Julia that he held himself in some curious way aloof, as though he
were playing a part in which he had not lost himself, and she had an
uneasy feeling that he was not accepting all these people, but coolly
judging them. She had an impression that he took none of them very
seriously.
C. Describe the holiday Tom spent at the Gosselyns1in the
country. Use idiomatic English.
Thus the week went by. Michael, Roger and Tom enjoyed them
selves. They bathed, they played tennis, they played golf, they
lounged about on the river. There were only four days more. There
were only three days more...
“A snip having this spell of fine weather,” said Michael. “Tom’s
been a success, hasn’t he? Pity he can’t stay another week.”
“Yes, a terrible pity.”
“1think he’s a nice friend for Roger to have. A thoroughly normal,
clean-minded English boy.”
“Oh, thoroughly.”
“To see the way they eat is a fair treat.”
“Yes, they seem to have enjoyed their food...”
Tom was up to go up to town by an early train on Monday morning.
D. Describe the Durrells’ moonlight picnic. Use some idioms
given in Unit 8.
...We decided to have a moonlight picnic down at the bay, and
sent an invitation to Theodore... The day arrived, food and wine
were prepared, the boat was cleaned out and Filled with cushions, and
everything was ready when Theodore turned up. On hearing that we
had planned a moonlight picnic and swim he reminded us that on that
particular night there was no moon. Everyone blamed everyone else
for not having checked on the moon’s progress, and the argument
went on until dusk. Eventually we decided that we would go on the
picnic in spite of everything, since all the arrangements were made,
so we staggered down to the boat, loaded down with food, wine.
towels and cigarettes, and set off down the coast. Theodore and I sat in
the bows as look-outs, and the rest took it in turn to row while Mother
steered...
Eventually we reached the bay, spread out the rugs on the sand,
arranged the food, placed the battalion of wine-bottles in a row in the
shallows to keep cool...
The phosphorescence was particularly good that night. By plung
ing your hand into the water and dragging it along you could draw a
wide golden-green ribbon of cold fire across the sea, and when you
dived as you hit the surface it seemed as though you had plunged into
a frosty furnace of glinting light. When we were tired we waded out
of the sea the water running off our bodies so that we seemed to be
on fire, and lay on the sand to eat. Then, as the wine was opened at
the end of the meal, as if by arrangement, a few fireflies appeared in
the olives behind us - a sort of overture to the show.
E. Comment upon the author's idea of spending his free time.
Use idiomatic English.
“It came upon me little by little. I came to like the life here, with
its ease and its leisure, and the people, with their good-nature and
their happy smiling faces. I began to think. I’d never had time to do
that before. I began to read.”
“You always read.”
“1read for examinations. I read in order to be able to hold my own
in conversation. 1 read for instruction. Неге 1 learned to read for
pleasure. I learned to talk. Do you know that conversation is one of
the greatest pleasures in life? But it wants leisure. Fd always been too
busy before. And gradually all the life that had seemed so important
to me began to seem rather trivial and vulgar. What the use of all this
hustle and this constant striving? I think of Chicago now and I see a
dark, grey city, all stone - it is like a prison - and a ceaseless turmoil.
And what does all that activity amount to? Does one get there the besi
out of life? Is that what we come into the world for, to hurry to an
office, and work hour after hour till night, then hurry home and dine
and go to a theatre? Is that how I must spend my youth? Youth lasts
so short a time, Bateman. And when l am old, what have I to look for
ward to? To hurry from my home in the morning to my office and
wot к hour alter hour till night, and then hurry home again, and dine
and go to a theatre? That may be worth while if you make a fortune;
I don’t know, it depends on your nature; but if you don’t, is it worth
while then? I want to make more out of my life than that, Bateman.”
“What do you value in life then?”
‘Tm afraid you’ll laugh at me. Beauty, truth and goodness.”
(From The Fall of Edward Barnard by W. S. Maugham)
F. Comment upon the following essay. Say what you think on

the subject Speak about the way people spend their leisure
time. Use some idioms given in Unit 8.
Some people are completely passive during leisure hours... If
such people go out they go to some place of entertainment where no
effort is required by them, a cinema or a dance-hall, and if the latter,
they do not dance but simply sit and watch others dancing.
A different type of person hurries home from work full of eager
ness to begin on some scheme which he has been planning for his
leisure time. Perhaps his hobby is carpentry or model engineering or
gardening; or he might wish to write, or to study some subject in
which he is interested. This is the creative type of character. For him,
his leisure hours are full of promise and he can look back on them
with satisfaction when he reviews what he has achieved in them...
Leisure should be refreshment; it should send a man out with
fresh spirits to battle with the problems of life. Sometimes this fresh
ness comes not from doing anything, but by filling one’s mind with
fresh springs of beauty. Many a man gets full value from his leisure
by contemplating nature, listening to music, or reading noble books.
By this sort of occupation he may not have made anything that he can
show, but he has none the less recreated his own source of inspiration
and made his own mind a richer and fuller treasure house. This is the
true use of leisure.
(From Fifty Mode! Essay's by J. Miller)
XVI. Speak on one of the following topics, using some idioms

given in Unit 8.
1. How not to spend a weekend.
2. The best / worst day of my life.
3. Interesting ways to entertain guests.
4. An inexpensive good time.
5. My favourite pastime.
PROJECT
A. In the passages given below substitute the phraseological
units for words and word combinations which will express
the same denotational meaning. (Make whatever structural
changes the substitution may call for). Consult Ярцева В. H.
Лингвистический энциклопедический словарь. - М.,
1990. - С. 128 (Денотат), с. 236 (Коннотация).
B. Compare the passages you have got with the original text and
say what connotational implications the phraseological units
add to the bits of text youVe analysed. (All the passages
come from “Theatre” by W. S. Maugham)
1. “He finishes today. I thought we might take him back with us
and give him a spot of lunch. He's quite a gentleman."
“Is that a sufficient reason to ask him to lunch?" “I won't ask
him if you don't want him. I merely thought it would be a treat for
him..."
2. They had no sooner sat down to table than he went straight to
the point. “I never slept a wink all night for thinking of you," he said.
3. “Oh, well, its no good crying over spilt milk." “I’ve been
thinking of the past and I'm as blue as the devil”
4. She was pleased that they liked her, these smart, idle women,
but she laughed at them up her sleeve because they were dazzled by
her glamour.
5. They talked. He seemed shy, much shyer than he had seemed
over the telephone; well, that was not to be wondered at, now she was
there he must be rather overcome, and she set herself to put him at his
ease.
6. She had never seen him in evening clothes before. He shone
like a new pin. Though he was of no more than average height his
slimness made him look tall.
7. Now and then Michael asked Tom to play golf with him on
Sundays and then if there was no party he would bring him home to dinner.
“Nice to have a young fellow like that around," he said. “It keeps
one from growing rusty” “Tom's got his head screwed on his shoul
ders the right way..."
8. She clenched her hands in order to prevent herself from telling
him to hold his silly tongue. She was in a black rage. This was the
last straw.
9. “You’re everything in the world to me. You know that. Г т so
lonely and your friendship meant a great deal to me.’1
10. “I think she’s doing a great deal too much. I don’t know
what’s come over her. All these parties she’s going to now. These
night clubs and things. After all, she's not a young woman any more;
she’ll just wear herself out."
“Oh, nonsense. She’.v as strong as a horse and she’s in the best of
health. She’s looking younger than she has for years. You’re not
going to grudge her a hit of fun when her day’s work is over... I’m
very glad that she should want to go out and amuse herself. It only
shows how much vitality she has.’’
11. She tried to sleep. She was so accustomed to sleeping in the
afternoon that she could always drop off the moment she composed
herself, but on this occasion she turned restlessly from side to side
and sleep would not come.
12. “You ought to know me well enough by now to know that I
would never let sentiment interfere with business."
He could hardly believe his ears.
13. The days passed monotonously. Soon the only thing that
recalled London to her was the arrival on Monday of the Sunday
papers. She got a batch of them and spent the whole day reading
them. Then she was a trifle restless. She walked on the ramparts and
looked at the islands that dotted the bay. The grey sky made her sick
for the grey sky of England. But by Tuesday morning she had sunk
back once more into the calmness of the provincial life.
14. Throughout the early part of the day she felt only happy and
mildly excited; it was not till late in the afternoon that she began to
feel ill at ease. She grew silent and wanted to be left alone. She also
grew irritable, and Michael, having learnt from experience, took care
to keep out of her way.
15. "‘Everything’s a success. I feel on the top o f the world. I feel
like a million dollars. I want to be alone and enjoy myself Ring up
the Berkeley and tell them to keep a table for one in the little room.
They’ll know what I mean.
“What’s the matter with you?’’
“I shall never in all my life have another moment like this. I’m not
going to share it with anyone.”
CULTURE
IDIOMS

1. Be on the air
2. Be off the air
3. Chat show
4. Dumb show
5. A gallery play / Play to the gallery
6. Black / dark comedy
7. Lay the scene / Set the scene
8. Play a part
9. Principal boy
10. The leading lady
11. In concert
12. Set / put smth to music
13. First night
14. Soap opera
15. Put up a good / poor show
16. Live the part
17. Good theatre
18. Top one’s part
19. Walk through one’s part
20. A thinking part
21. A round of applause
22. Applaud to the echo
23. Take a curtain call
24. Steal the show
25. On show
26. Sing like a nightingale
27 Rising star
28. Cultural activity
29. Popular culture
30. Cultural desert
31. Man cannot live by bread alone
32. Art for art’s sake
33. Art is long, life is short
34. Every country has its customs
1. Be on the air - if someone or something is on the air, they are

broadcasting or being broadcast on radio or television.
E.g.: The leader o f the Labour Party went on the air to make a
public statement.
2. Be off the air - if someone or something is off the air, they are no
longer broadcasting or being broadcast.
E.g.: In this country television usually goes off the air at about
midnight.
3. Chat show - a television or radio show in which an interviewer
and his or her guests talk in a friendly, informal way about differ
ent topics.
E.g.: Chat shows are very popular now.
4. Dumb show - a performance or action in which you do not say
anything, but instead use movements to express your meaning.
E.g.: She performed in dumb show.
5. A gallery play / Play to the gallery - to do or say something just
because you think it will please people and make you popular.
6. Black / dark comedy - a play, story, etc. that is funny, but also
shows the unpleasant side of human life. It’s based on black
humour.
E.g.: / don t like black comedies.
7. Lay the scene / Set the scene - to describe the situation before
you begin to tell a story.
E.g.: The scene is laid in England.
8. Play a part - to perform the actions, words, etc of a particular
character in a play, film, etc. Play the part of...
E.g.: Brannagh played the part of Henry V.
9. Principal boy - the chief male character in a pantomime, usual
ly played by a young woman.
E.g.: She looked like a principal boy in an operetta.
10. The leading lady - an actress playing the leading role.
E.g.: They greeted their enchanting leading lady.
] 1. In concert - playing or singing at a concert.
E.g.: Michael Jackson is in concert at the Palladium.
12. Set / put smth to music - to write music so that the words of a
poem, play, etc can be sung.
13. First night - the first night of a show, play or performance is the
first public performance of it.
E.g.: The first night went veiy well indeed.
14. Soap opera - a television or radio programme about the continu
ing daily life and troubles of characters in it, which is broadcast
regularly, e.g. two or three times a week, or sometimes every day.
E.g.: / dislike soap operas.
15. Put up a good / poor show - to perform well or badly.
E.g.: They pul up cjuite a good show.
16. Live the part - to be at one’s best in the role of smb.
E.g.: He was at his best in the role o f Henry V; he lived the part;
he didn 4 merely act.
17. Good theatre - effective entertainment.
E.g.: His plays are great poetry but they are not good theatre.
18. Top one’s part - to play one’s part skilfully.
E.g.: Last night she topped her part.
19. Walk through one’s part - to play one’s part badly.
E.g.: She walked through her part and left the stage.
20. A thinking part - a part in which an actor / actress does not say
anything.
E.g.: It was an easy thinking part.
21. A round of applause [o'pb:z] - an expression of enjoyment or
appreciation by a group of people in which they clap their hands.
E.g. : The play was over. There was a round of applause.
They got a big round o f applause at the end o f the concert.
22. Applaud to the echo [o'pbrd] - to applaud very loudly.
E.g.: The leading actor was applauded / cheered to the echo.
23. Take a curtain call - to come forward to the front of the stage
after a performance in order to receive the applause of the audi
ence.
E.g.: Last night they took four curtain calls.
24. Steal the show - if someone steals the show, they unexpectedly
get most of the admiration or attention in a performance or some
other event.
E.g.: The young actor stole the show.
25. On show - if smth is on show, it is in an exhibition or place where
it can be seen by the public.
E.g.: His pictures are on show at the Museum until July.
26. Sing like a nightingale - to sing very beautifully.
E.g.: He was in good voice and sang like a nightingale.
27. Rising star - someone who is becoming successful and famous.
E.g.: Shes a rising star in the music world.
28. Cultural activity - related to art, literature, music, etc.
E.g.: We enjoy cultural activities like going to the theatre and the
opera.
29. Popular culture - the music, books, films, etc that are liked by
most people in a society.
E.g.: This music is good for people who are interested in pop
culture.
30. Cultural desert - a place such as a small town where there are
no cultural activities.
E.g.: Culturally, the town has nothing to offer. Its a cultural de
sert.
31. Man cannot live by bread alone (saying from the Bible) - the
needs of a person’s spirit must be looked after as well as those of
their body. The phrase is now often used in a humorous way.
E.g.: / know we're trying to save money, but man cannot live by
bread / baked beans alone.
32. Art for a rt’s sake - art is important simply because it is art, and
not because it makes money or has any practical use.
33. Art is long, life is short (proverb) - so much to do, so little done.
“The life is short, the craft so long to learn” (G. Chaucer)
34. Every country has its customs (proverb) - every country has
some established and habitual practice, especially of a religious or
social kind.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Painting
Hogarth fhougaiG] William (169 7-1794) - an English artist.
Hogarth’s series of narrative pictures became widely known.
Reynolds ['renoldz], Sir Joshua [ d3Dfwo] (1723-1792) - an
English painter who became the first president of the Royal
Academy. He is famous especially for his portraits.
Gainsborough [ geinzboro] Thomas (1727-1788) - an English
artist best known for his portraits and landscape paintings.
Constable [ kAnstobl] John (1776-1837) - an English painter
known especially for his paintings and drawings of Suffolk scenery.
Turner Joseph Mallord William [Тз:пэ d33Uzof 'maebd
'wiljom] (1775-1851) - an English landscape painter who used large
areas of light and colour to express the effects of the forces of nature.
The National Gallery - an art gallery in Trafalgar Square,
London, which contains the largest permanent collection of western
paintings in Britain, most of which were painted between 1200 and
1900.
The Tate Gallery, Tate - an art gallery in SW London known
especially for its encouragement of modern art.
Music
Sullivan Arthur ['sAbvon Ъ:0э] (1842-1900) - an English com
poser known especially for working with W. S. Gilbert to write comic
operas.
Gilbert ['gilbot] William (1836-1911) - an English poet, libret
tist.
Britten Benjamin fbritn 'ben(d)3(o)min] (1913-1976) - an
English composer of music mainly for voices, including the operas
“Peter Grimes” and “Billy Budd”
Webber Andrew Lloyd [ webo 'aendru: 'bid] (1948-) - one of the
most popular contemporary musicians and composers. He’s famous
for his musicals and rock operas.
The Beatles fbiitlz] - a British popular music group who made
their first record in 1962 and became probably the most famous and
successful group ever (George Harrison, John Lennon, Paul
McCartney, Ringo Starr).
The Royal Albert Hall - a very large concert hall in London
known especially for its promenade concerts at which parts of the
hall have no seats and are used by listeners who stand.
The Royal Opera House (Covent Garden) - one of the two
important London theatres, where operas and ballet are performed.
Theatre
Gwynn [gwin] Nell (1650-1687) - the first English actress.
Garrick David ['gaerik 'deivid] (1717-1779) - one of the great
est actors known.
Irving [' 3 :vi 13] Henry (1838-1905) - one of the most famous
actors of the 19"1century. He was the first actor to be knighted.
Peter Hall (1930) - a modern producer and director.
Brook Peter (1925) - a modern producer and director.
The Royal National Theatre - a modern building on London’s
South Bank containing three theatres. It is the home of the Royal
National Theatre Company, who perform a wide variety of old and
new plays. The theatre is very popular and attracts many tourists.
Cinema. Television
Chaplin [tjaeplin] Charlie (1889-1977) - an English film actor
and director who worked mainly in the US in silent black and white
comedy films.
Hill Benny (1925-1992) - a British comedian best known for his
very successful television programmes made in the 1950s and 60s
which were very much liked.
Laurence Olivier [lDrons o'liviei] (1907-1989) - an English
actor thought of by many people as the greatest of the 20 th century.
He was the first director of the National Theatre, and the first actor to
be made a life peer. He appeared in the theatre and in many films.
Fawlty Towers - a funny British television programme about a
hotel called Fawlty Towers.
Breakfast television - TV programmes which are broadcast in the
early part of the morning, usually a mixture of news, sport and con
versation.
Painting. The theme of the picture; the subject of the picture; the
picture is saturated with light; It’s thought-provoking; It’s not a
coloured photograph; a study of human nature; it makes no appeal to
the spectator; originality for originality’s sake; it offends the eye; Not
my cup of tea at all; an impressive piece of art.
Music. At first, I was all at sea. It didn’t seem to make any sense.
I began to find my way through masses of sound. That tune is still
singing in my ears. Serious music appeals to our intellect as well as
to our senses. It’s above my head. I can make neither head not tail out
of it. Music creates a special spiritual world for the listener.
Theatre. The theatre is a special kind of pleasure and amusement.
It’s a magic world to which people escape from their monotonous
everyday routine. Theatre teaches people sincerity and belief in real
ity.
Cinema. To give a true portrayal of life; to have a great formative
influence on the minds of people; to aim at “public pleasures”. Films
are not an art. Screen adaptations arouse people’s interest in great lit
erature. Films present facts realistically. They arouse emotions. Like
any other art cinema reproduces real life and brings moral truth into
the world.
Television. To teach (shape) values; to manipulate thinking; to
cultivate views; to please smb’s interests; to stimulate a viewer to do
smth; the quality of the programmes; to stimulate aggressive ten
dencies; educational opportunities of modern television.
FAMOUS PEOPLE SAY:

A picture is a poem without words. (Horace)
Horace fhDris] (65-8 BC) - a Roman poet and writer of satire,
whose Latin name was Quintus Horatius Flaccus.
Music is the universal language of mankind. (Нету Longfellow)
Henry [ wodzwoG] Wadsworth Longfellow (1807-1882) - an
American poet.
The Theatre is the magical place where man meets his image.
(J. B. Priestley)
John Bointon Priestley (1894-1984) - a British writer and
broadcaster.
A movie as art objectively and vividly displays man’s good. It
brings moral truth into the world. (W. R. Robinson)
W. R. Robinson - an American film director.
Television encourages passive enjoyment. (L. /. Alexander)
L. I. Alexander - a British critic.
TESTING VOCABULARY
tionary definitions:
with ftYesterday we went to the theatre”. Other students
should take turns building upon the sentence, turn by turn.
♦ Cultural desert ♦ Effective entertainment

♦ Chat show ♦ A funny play about the un
pleasant side of human life
♦ Popular culture ♦ A performance in which
people use movements to
express their meaning
♦ Rising star ♦ Playing or singing at a con
cert
♦ First night ♦ The first public performance
of a show
♦ In concert ♦ Someone who is becoming
famous
♦ Be on the air ♦ The music, books, etc. that
are liked by most people in a
society
♦ Dumb show ♦ Be broadcast on radio or TV
♦ Black comedy ♦ A place where there are no
cultural activities
♦ Good theatre ♦ A TV show in which people
talk in a friendly way about
different topics
English.
□ Model: In some minutes the performers will be off the air It's
about midnight.
1. In some minutes the performers will be off the air. 2. The actor
was on the air for an hour. 3. My favourite actor played the lead in
the new play. It was very good, but the butler stole the show. 4. Kate
Clark is a good actress, but sometimes she plays to the gallery.
5. Every country has its customs. 6. Art is long, life is short. 7. The
band got a big round of applause at the end of the concert. 8. The
museum’s collection of Whistler engravings is on show now. 9. Round
after round of applause greeted him. 10. The actress walked
through her part.
word missing. Choose one of the four alternatives to com-
p/efe the idiom.
1. They perform in (dumpish, dull dumb, dullish) show. 2. The
first__(knight, nightie, night, knighthood) was a success. 3. Do you
like__(soup, soap, sock, soda) operas? 4. They were applauded to
the_(ache, acme, echo, ecstasy). 5. After the performance the actors
took a _(curtsy, curtain, curve, certainty) call. 6. It was a cultural__
(dessert, design, desert, descent). 7. Art for art’s (sack, sake, sect,
sec). 8. There was an interesting__(cat, chat, chap, champ) show on
TV yesterday. 9. I dislike__(dull, dark, dusky, dumb) comedies.
10. She’s not interested in __(cop, top, mop, pop) culture.
IV. Read the following passages and choose the correct key
1. “Already the news w as___(on / in) the air, it would be in the
evening papers,” said the girl. She was frightened.
(From A Gun for Sale by Or. Greene)
2. ...Then suddenly Mrs Jessup recalled that she had seen a play
given by the students at the high school, and in it by the extraordinary
verve of her acting was a girl who had “ ___(stolen / swollen) the
show"
(From Worlds End by U. Sinclair)
3. Michael happened to be watching the last two acts from the

comer of a box and at the end he came into her dressing-room.
“D’you know the prompter says we played nine minutes longer
tonight, they laughed so much."
“Seven___(curtain/curtsy) calls. I thought the public were going
on all night."
“Well, you’ve only got to blame yourself, Julia, darling. There’s
no one in the world who could have given the performance you gave
tonight."
4. Unfortunately Charles was away. But he was coming back for

the dress-rehearsal and th e __ (first /feast) night; he had not missed
these occasions for twenty years, and they had always had supper
together after the dress-rehearsal.
5. It was an auspicious beginning for the theatrical season. There
had been great___(aplomb / applause) after each act and at the end
a dozen curtain calls; Julia took two by herself, and even she was
startled by the warmth of her reception.
6. Catalina had not been a ___(leading / leaden) lady for three
years for nothing, and when she discovered that she had so little to do
in the last act she was incensed.
7. His honest opinion was ascribed to a base desire to ___(pay /

play) to the gallery. The libraries barred the book...
147
A. V. Kunin.
1. Постановка имела в Москве очень шумный успех, и тогда
уже, в связи с этим спектаклем, очень много говорили о восходя
щей звезде - в то время еще совсем молодом актере Рощине-
Инсарове. (Юрьев. Записки) 2. Он начал докладывать о
восходящих звездах музыкального мира. (Л. Серафимович. Гзрсх) в
степи) 3. За эти десять лет молодость наша дала множество
книг, которые освещают жизнь даже самых темных и отдален
ных от центров культуры “медвежьих углов". (М. Горький. О лите
ратуре) 4. “Никогда, никогда не забуду сегодняшней встречи. Я
растрогалась до слез..." “Все кричат - медвежий угол! А мы
столице не уступим. Для нас искусство - все!" (А. Толстой.
Кукушкины слезы) 5. На галерке, набитой до отказа, было душно
и шумно. (Голубева. Мальчик из Уржума) 6. ...В Париже я видел
четыре посмертные выставки: Прюдона, Пнльса, Шантряла и
Каро, все знаменитых, прославленных художников; выставки
эти произвели там сенсацию, им пелись дифирамбы на все лады.
(И. Репин. Дачекое-близкое) 7. ...Настоящие художественные произ
ведения не должны никогда сходить со сцены. (А. Островский.
О театральных школах) 8. Прежние таланты - одни умерли,
сошли со сцены, другие - состарились и потеряли энергию
задумывать и делать то, что прежде задумывали и совершали.
(В. Стасов. С парижской выставки) 9. ...Они забавляли и развле
кали общество и ... играли роль шутов. (И. Панаев. Литературные
воспоминания) 10. Он, как мне кажется, очень хороший литера
турный критик, у него есть искра божья. (С. Ковалевская.
Письмо А. Ш. Леффер, март 1888) 11. Поэтическое дарование
Кольцова признано всеми безусловно; многие из талантливых
наших музыкантов кладут его песни на музыку. (В. Белинский,
Русская литература в 1841 г.)I.V
VI. Rewrite the foliowing text in idiomatic English.

Mary likes to go to the theatre and the opera. She dislikes staying
at home in the evening. She is not fond of watching TV shows.
Popular television shows and films about daily life of characters irri-
tate her. Mary enjoys Newman’s plays. They are very entertaining.
Mary never misses the first public performance of his new play. Her
favourite actors and actresses perform well. They don’t merely act,
they do their best. After their performance they receive the applause
of the audience. Mary’s friend, Jane, lives in a small town where
there are no cultural activities. Mary often invites Jane to come to
London. They like to go to the theatre together. So as the saying goes
“the needs of a person’s spirit must be looked after as well as those
of their body”
Vti. Link each of the pictures (pp. 150-151) with one of the idioms
listed below. Use them in situations of your own.
1. Rising star. 3. Soap opera.
2. Be on the air. 4. Cakes and ale.

have read that will lead you to say "So as the proverb g o e s ”
Proverbs: Art is long, life is short.
Every country has its customs.IX
.

tences.
I. The actors got many curtain calls. 2. The leading actress
received great ovations. 3. The scenery of the last act was so remark
able that there was a round of applause. 4. She topped her pan. Her
acting evoked everybody’s admiration. 5. The play was easy to fol
low, it was good theatre. 6. He saw the dress rehearsal and the first
night as well. 7. He was singing his part beautifully. 8. They put up
a perfect show. That was the best bit of acting I’ve seen for a long
time. 9. Her acting wasn’t very impressive. Ю. They played to the
gallery.

I. I’d like to know the name of the leading lady (actress.. 2. X. is
such a promising film actor. 3. The leading actress plays the part of
the Queen. 4. I hate watching soap operas. 5. Man cannot live by
bread alofie. 6. That town is a cultural desert. 7. What cultural activ
ities do you enjoy? As for me, 8. X. is a rising star in the literatim*
world. 9. My friend sings like a nightingale. 10. Very beautiful and
rare books are on show now.
XI. Make up short conversation in the following situations. Use

1. Ask a friend to go with you to the movies. He / she agrees to
your suggestion.
2. You want to go to a ballet. Your friend makes an alternative
suggestion. She / he prefers the idea of seeing a play. You try to speak
persuasively and your friend agrees to your suggestion.
3. Your teacher asks you about your interest in opera. You take a
slight interest in opera, expressing a preference for more modern
music.
4. Your friend has come from a large city. He finds your town a
cultural desert. Have a talk about some cultural activities your friend
and you enjoy.

A. Comment on Winter's desire not to break his connection
with the arts. Apply the proverbs given in Unit 9 to the text.
Winter was an American. He was a man between forty and fifty,
with scanty black hair, grey at the temples, and a sharp-featured,
thin face. His eyes had a twinkle in them and his large horn spec
tacles gave him a demureness which was not a little diverting. He was
tall rather than otherwise and very spare. He was bom in Honolulu
and his father had a large store wich sold hosiery and all such goods,
from tennis racquets to tarpaulins, as a man of fashion could require.
It was a prosperous business and I could well understand the indig
nation of Winter pere when his son, refusing to go into it, had
announced his determination to be an actor. My friend spent twenty
years on the stage, sometimes in New York, but more often on the
road, for his gifts were small; but at last, being no fool, he came to
the conclusion that it was better to sell sock-suspenders in Honolulu
than to play small parts in Cleveland, Ohio. He left the stage and
went into the business. I think after the hazardous existence he had
lived so long, he thoroughly enjoyed the luxury of driving a large car
and living in a beautiful house near the golf-course, and I am quite
sure, since he was a man of parts, he managed the business compet-
Hitly. But he could not bring himself entirely to break his connection
vith the arts and since he might no longer act he began to paint. He
ook me to his studio and showed me his work. It was not at all bad,
nit not what I should have expected from him. He painted nothing
nit still life, very small pictures, perhaps eight by ten; and he paint-
?d very delicately, with the utmost finish. He had evidently a passion
Гог detail. While you marvelled a little at his patience, you could not
iclp being impressed by his dexterty. I imagine that he failed as an
ictor because his effects, carefully studied, were neither bold nor
jroad enough to get across the footlights.
(From Honolulu by W. S. Maugham)
B. Comment on the cultural activities Charles and Julia
enjoyed. Confirm or disprove the statement: "... art isn't real
ly waste of time". Use some idioms given in Unit 9.
He spoke of politics, of art, of books; and peace entered into her
soul... Her spirits rose. She did not want to be alone, she knew that
even though she went home after luncheon she would not sleep, so
she asked Charles if he would take her to the National Gallery. She
could give him no greater pleasure; he liked to talk about pictures and
he talked of them well. It took them back to the old days when she
had made her first success in London and they used to spend so many
afternoons together, walking in the park or sauntering through mu
seums. The day after that she had a matinee and the next a luncheon-
party, but when they separated they arranged to lunch again together
on the Friday and go to the Tate.
* * *
4kHow funny things are! You go to those museums and galleries

and think what a damned bore they are and then, when you least
expect it, you find that something you’ve seen comes in useful. It
Shows art and all that isn’t really waste of time.”
(From Honolulu by W. S. Maugham)
C. Comment on Kitty's spiritual evolution, her interests. Use
I ’m not very well educated and I’m not very clever. I’m just a
perfectly ordinary young woman. I like the things that the people like
among whom I’ve lived all my life. I like dancing and tennis and the
atres and I like the men who play games. It’s quite true that I’ve
always been bored by you and by the things you like. They mean
nothing to me and I don’t want them to. You dragged me round those
interminable galleries in Venice: I should have enjoyed myself much
more playing golf at Sandwich.”
fctl know.”
kTm sorry if I haven’t been all that you expected me to be...”
* * ★
‘T ve been foolish and wicked and hateful. I’ve been terribly pun
ished. I’m determined to save my daughter from all that. I want her
to be fearless and frank. I want her to be a person, independent of
others because she is possessed to herself, and 1 want her to take life
like a free man and make a better job of it than I have.”
D. Describe Charlie’s perception of music, use idiomatic

English,
Charlie was very fond of music. He knew the delight it gave him,
the pleasure, partly sensual, partly intellectual, when intoxicated by
the loveliness that assailed his ears, he remained yet keenly appreci
ative of the subtlety with which the composer had worked out his idea.
Looking into himself, to find out what exactly it was he felt when
he listened to one of the greater symphonies, it seemed to him that it
was a complex of emotions, excitement and at the same time peace,
love for others and a desire to do something for them, a wish to be
good and a delight in goodness, a pleasant languor and a funny
detachment as though he were floating above the world and what
ever happened there didn’t very much matter; and perhaps if you had
to combine all those feelings into one and give it a name, the name
you’d give it was happiness.
(From Christmas Holiday by W. S. Maugham)
E. Choose one of the statements given below and support it

with, the arguments given by the character and with your
arguments. Use some idioms given in Unit 9.
1. Theatre takes away people’s belief in everything.
2. Theatre teaches people sincerity and belief in reality.
The lights had been lowered, and from where she sat it looked
more than ever like a scene in a play.
“All the world’s a stage, and all the men and women merely
players.” But there’s the illusion, through that archway; it’s we, the
actors, who are the reality... They are our raw material. We are the mean
ing of their lives. We take their silly little emotions and turn them into art,
out of them we create beauty, and their significance is that they form
the audience we must have to fulfil ourselves. They are the instru
ments on which we play, and what is an instrument without some
body to play on it?”
The notion exhilarated her, and for a moment or two she savoured
it with satisfaction. Her brain seemed miraculously lucid.
“Roger says we don’t exist. Why, it’s only we who do exist. They
are the shadows and we give them substance. We are the symbols of
all this confused, aimless struggling that they call life, and it’s only
the symbol which is real. They say acting is only make-believe. That
make-believe is the only reality.”
F. Read and translate the following passage into Russian. Say

a) what made the narrator’s heart melt; b) what made Maria’s
singing beautiful. Use some idioms given in Unit 9.
“Let us go outside,” Maria said.
We went out and sat on the veranda. Miss Glaser did not come
with us. There was a magnificent cedar in the garden, and its dark
branches were silhouetted against the starry sky. The sea, almost at
our feet, was marvellously still.
“I want to sing, Glaser, play an accompaniment.” In moment Miss
Glaser began to play the opening bars of one of Schumann's songs.
It was no strain on the voice, and I guessed that Miss Glaser knew
what she was doing when she chose it. Maria began to sing, in an
undertone, but as she heard the sounds come from her lips and found
that they were clear and pure she let herself go. The song finished.
There was silence. Miss Glaser had heard that Maria was in magnifi
cent voice, and she sensed that she wished to sing again. The prima
donna was standing in the window, with her back to the lighted room,
and she looked out at the darkly shining sea. The cedar made a love
ly pattern against the sky. The night was soft and balmy. Miss Glaser
played a couple of bars. A cold shiver ran down my spine. Maria gave
a little start as she recognized the music, and 1 left her gather herself
together. It was Isolde’s death song. She had never sung in Wagner,
fearing the strain on her voice, but this, I suppose, she had often sung
in concerts. It did not matter now that instead of an orchestral accom
paniment she had only the thin tinkle of a piano. The notes of the
heavenly melody fell upon the still air and travelled over the water.
In that too romantic scene, in that starry night, the effect was shatter
ing. Maria’s voice, even now, was exquisite in its quality, mellow and
crystalline; and she sang with wonderful emotion, so tenderly, with
such tragic, beautiful anguish that my heart melted within me. I had
a most awkward lump in my throat when she fineshed, and looking
at her I saw that tears were streaming down her face. I did not want
to speak. She stood quite still looking out at that ageless sea.
(From The Voice o f the Turtle by W. S. Maugham)
X///. Speak on one of the following topics.
1. The music I prefer. 2. An inexpensive good time. 3. It’s necess
ary to teach appreciation of painting. 4. This wonderful world of
music. 5. What is it that is special about the theatre? 6. Cinema and
TV in our life. 7. Cultural activities. Their role in people’s life.
PROJECT
1. Read the following proverbs. If possible find their Russian
equivalents or correlates. Use them in situations of your
own.
1. No gains without pains. 2. Praise is not pudding. 3. Hear twice
before you speak once. 4. Seeing is believing. 5. Honours change
manners. 6. What is worth doing at all is worth doing well. 7. Who
has ears to hear, let him hear. 8. Nothing seek, nothing find.
9. Nothing is so good but it might have been better. Ю. Nothing suc
ceeds like success.
2. Write a favourable or unfavourable review of a play (film,
TV programme, concert) which you have seen. Use the idioms
given in Unit 9.
LITERATURE
IDIOMS

1. Have the makings of (a writer)
2. Of great (high) promise
3. Have come to stay
4. Out of the common
5. Break (fresh / new) ground
6. Have an impact (on)
7. Prove a success
8. Powers of observation
9. Vivid imagination
10. A flight of fancy / imagination
11. Brevity is the soul of wit
12. Of special / particular interest
13. Be impressed with / by
14. Capture / catch smb’s imagination
15. Read with unflagging interest
16. Be a best-seller
17. Be light reading
18. A fast / slow reader
19. Read between the lines
20. Dip into a book
21. Make good / interesting / boring reading
22. Chapter and verse
23. Devour a book
24. A good / excellent read
25. A coffee-table book
26. A pirated book
27. Beneath criticism
28. Choose an author as you choose a friend
1. Have the makings of (a writer) - to have the qualities or skills
needed to become a certain kind of person.
E.g.: He has the makings o f a first-rate writer.
2. Of great (high) promise - signs that something or someone will

be good or successful.
E.g.: He is a young man of great promise.
Show promise = to be likely to become very good.
E.g.: This young man shows great promise as a first-rate writer.
3. Have come to stay - to be / remain popular, successful; become
generally accepted.
E.g.: His books have become popular. He has come to stay all
right.
4. Out of the common - unusual.
E.g.: His talent is something out o f the common.
5. Break (fresh / new) ground - to do smth completely new that no
one has ever done before.
E.g.: This work endeavours to break new ground.
6. Have an impact (on) - the effect or influence that an event, situ
ation, etc has on someone or something.
E.g.: His books had a great impact on young people.
7. Prove a success - to become successful.
E.g.: His new book proved a success.
8. Powers of observation - a natural ability to notice what is hap
pening around you.
E.g.: His powers of observation are wonderful.
9. Vivid imagination - an ability to imagine unlikely situations very
clearly.
E.g.: His vivid imagination helps him to write his books.
10. A flight of fancy/ imagination - when you let your imagination
work in an uncontrolled way.
E.g.: She was not given to flight o f imagination.
11. Brevity is the soul of wit - the quality of expressing smth in very
few words is a nice quality.
H. Brevity is the soul of wit, so Г II be brief.
12. Of special / particular interest - a quality or feature of smth that
attracts your attention.
E.g.: This hook will be o f particular interest to those studying
British Literature since 1800.
13. Be impressed with / by - to admire something because you
notice how good, clever something / someone is.
E.g.: We're very impressed with the standard of this authors
work.
14. Capture / catch smb’s imagination - to make people feel very
interested and excited.
E.g.: His hooks captured the imagination o f a whole generation
of young people.
15. Read with unflagging interest - with continuing strongly and
never becoming weak interest.
E.g.: Read the hook with unflagging interest.
16. Be a best-seller - a very popular book which many people buy.
A best-selling author.
17. Be light reading - books that are easy and enjoyable.
E.g.: Books like this are fight reading (difficult reading) for children.
18. A fast / slow reader - someone who reads in a particular way.
E.g.: He is not a fast reader, hut he likes short stories and novels.
19. Read between the lines - to guess someone’s real feelings from
something they write.
E.g.: Reading between the lines he knew there was something
wrong.
20. Dip into a book - to read short parts of a book, but not the whole
thing.
E.g.: He hadn’t read the book, hut he had dipped into it occa
sionally.
21. Make good / interesting / boring reading - to be enjoyable,
interesting, etc to read.
E.g.: His article made interesting reading.
£2. Chapter and verse - Give / quote (smb) chapter and verse - the
exact details of where to find a piece of information.
E.g.: Tojustify her statement, she quoted chapter and verse
23. Devour [di'vauo] a book - to read a book quickly and with great
eagerness.
E.g.: As a boy he devoured Doyles stories.
24. A good / excellent read - a book which is very enjoyable to read.
E.g.: This book is a good read.
25. A coffee-table book - a large expensive book that usually has a
lot of pictures in it and is meant to be looked at rather than read.
E.g.: I ’ve bought a coffee-table book.
26. A pirated book - a book copied and sold without permission or
payment, when the copyright belongs to someone else.
E.g.: It is against the law to sell pirated books.
27. Beneath criticism - not worthy of.
E.g.: Her book is beneath criticism.
28. Choose an author as you choose a friend (proverb) - books and
friends should be few but good.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Learn to write well, or not to write at all.
Dryden fdraidsn] John (1631-1700) - an English writer of po
etry and plays.
Reading is to the mind what exercise is to the body.
Steele [sti:l], Sir Richard (1672-1729) - an Irish writer who
established the magazine The Tatter, for which his friend Joseph
Addison wrote.
What is written without effort is in general read without pleasure.
Johnson Samuel ['saemjuol] (1709-1784) - an English critic and
dictionary writer, and a well-known figure in London society in the
18th century.
Truth is always strange, - stranger than fiction.
Byron [Ъаюгэп], Lord (1788-1824) an English writer of
romantic and satirical poetry.
No man was ever a great poet, without being at the same time a
profound philosopher.
Coleridge ['кэи!эгк1з] Samuel Taylor (1772-1834) - an English
poet and critic. He and William Wordsworth were the leaders of the
Romantic movement in England.
There are books of which the backs and covers are by far the best
parts Dickens Charles (1812-1870) - an English novelist, con-
sidered by many to be the greatest one of all. His many famous books
describe life in Victorian England and show how hard it was, espec
ially for the poor and for children.
Take care of the sense, and the sounds will take care of them
selves.
Carroll fkaerol] Lewis (1832-1898) - an English writer who
wrote two well-known children’s stories, Alices Adventures in
Wonderland and Through the Looking Glass. His real name was
Charles Dodgson.
All books are divisible into two classes: the books of the hour, and
the books of all time.
Ruskin John (1819-1900) - an English pamphleteer, critic.
One mark of a writer’s greatness is that different minds can find
in him different inspirations.
Maugham [mo:m] William Somerset (1874-1965) - a British
writer considered to be one of the best short story writers in English.
The British Library
The British Library, established in 1973, is the national library for
the United Kingdom under the control and management of the British
Library Board. It consists of the Reference Division, the
Bibliographic Services Division, the National Sound Archive and the
Research and Development Department in London, and the Lending
Division in Yorkshire.
The Reference Division has its origins in the library departments
of the British Museum and includes the Department of Printed
Books, the Department of Manuscripts and the Preservation Service
which are in the British Museum building; and, elsewhere in London,
the Department of Oriental Manuscripts and Printed Books, the
Science Reference Library and the India Office Library and Records.
The British Museum was founded by Act of Parliament in 1753
to bring together the collections of Sir Robert Cotton, which were
already national property, and those formed by the two Harleys, first
and second Earls of Oxford, and by Sir Hans Sloane; both collections
were on offer to the nation for sale on favourable terms. Under the
terms of the Act, which closely followed lines laid down in the will
Of Sir Hans Sloane, a government lottery was held to provide a build
ing to all these collections and future additions to them, and to pay
for the Sloane and Harley collections.
# Яисон В.
Montagu House, a seventeenth-century building, standing on the
present site of the Museum, was bought, and in 1759 it was opened
as the British Museum. It stood until 1845, but the present King's
Library, the first part of a new building on the site, was finished in
1826, and the new south wing, with the entrance portico in its pres
ent form, was completed in 1847. The architect was Sir Robert
Smirke and the sculptured tympanum was designed by Sir Richard
Westmacott.
The Royal Library, containing the books of the kings of England
from Edward IV onwards, was presented to the nation by George II
in 1757 and added to the collections. The library of George III, pre
sented to the nation by his son in 1823, was transferred to the
Museum and housed in the King's Library, mentioned above, which
had been designed to hold it.
In 1973 the library departments were separated from the Museum
and joined with other institutions to form the British Library.
TESTING VOCABULARY
♦ Coffee-table book ♦ Unusual

♦ Devour a book ♦ Not worthy of
♦ Dip into a book ♦ Be a popular book which
many people buy
♦ Out of the common ♦ Be an easy, enjoyable book
♦ Of great promise ♦ Read short parts of a book
♦ Beneath criticism ♦ Have the qualities needed to
become a writer
♦ Be a best-seller ♦ Someone who reads fast
♦ Have the makings of a writer ♦ A large expensive book which
has a lot of pictures
♦ Be light reading ♦ Signs that someone will be
successful
♦ Л fast reader ♦ To read a book quickly and
with eagerness
В. Use idioms to make up a story. A student starts it with “I am
a fast reader” Other students should take turns building
upon the sentence, turn by turn.

English.
□ Model: The writer is quite young, hut he shows great promise. He

has a gift o f observation and a fine sence o f humour.
I. The writer is quite young, but he shows great promise. 2. Learn
to read between the lines. 3. X. is a writer of outstanding promise.
4. It’s a very enjoyable book. It’s a good read. 5. This novel makes
good reading. 6. I read the book with unflagging interest. 7. The nar
rator has a vivid imagination. 8. The author has a fluent pen. 9. This
story is beneath criticism. 10. Fonles’ books capture the imagination
of all young people.
plete the idiom.
I. The book is not worth reading. It’s ___ (below, behind.
beneath, by) criticism. 2. Have a look at this beautiful__ (tea-table,
writing desk, coffee-table, dining table) book. 3. I ___(slip, skip, dip,
sink) into this book occasionally. 4 . 1read the story with___(unflag
ging, unfailing, unfaltering, unflinching) interest. 5. The story___
(brought, caught, besought, bought) his imagination. 6 .___(bravu
ra, bravery, brevity, bravado) is the soul of wit. 7. He is not given to__
(flick, flight, flood, flow) of fancy. 8. His poems are___(bright, right,
night, light) reading.IV .
1. She wanted to be able to talk to David, to have discussions, real
^discussions upon the subjects which interested him... With this in
mind sh e ___(slipped/ dipped) into his books once or twice to el
evate her intellectual plane and bring grist to the mills of philosophi
cal discussion.
(From The Stars Look Down by A. J. Cronin)
2. Any books there were came from the public library except
for “The Old Curiosity Shop” and “David Copperfield”, which the
boy read, as people used to read The Bible, over and over again til!
he could have quoted___(chapter / charter) and verse...
(From The Ministry of Fear by Gr. Greene)
3. Driffield wasn’t anything like that. The collected edition of his
works is in thirty-seven volumes and the last set that came up at
Sotheby’s sold for seventy-eight pounds. That speaks for itself. His
sales have increased steadily every year and last year was the best he
ever had. You can take my word for that... Driffield has come to __
(say /stay) all right.
4. If you can read between th e__ (lanes / lines) of these last let
ters of his he’s always at that club of his, and playing billiard matches...
(From Hatters Castle by A. J. Cronin)
5. It may be that some great masterpiece which deserves immor
tality has fallen still-born from the press, but posterity will never hear
of it; it may be that posterity will scrap all the best___(sailors / sell
ers) of our day, but it is among them that it must choose.
6. No one who read Driffield’s books could fail to be ___
(impressed / expressed) by those swelling periods, which reminded
one of the noble prose of Jeremy Taylor, by that reverence and piety,
by all those high sentiments, in short, expressed in a style that was
ornate without excess and dulcet without effeminacy. It was itself a
thing of beauty.
164
A. V. Kunin.
1. Я читал между строчками, старался находить таинст
венный смысл, намеки. (Ф. Достоевский. Записки из Мертвого до
ма) 2. С одной стороны, появились аллегории, искусство читать
между строчками. (М. Салтыков-Щедрин. Незаконченные беседы)
3. Скажу тебе просто..., что они (стихи) так плохи, что ниже вся
кой критики. (В. Белинский. Письмо К Г, А. Г и Н. Г Белинским,
29 сентября 1831 г.) 4. Желал бы я тебе указать на что-нибудь из
ряда вон выходящее, поэтическое в английской литературе или
во французской... Но не могу. (И. Тургенев. Письмо Л. П. Польс
кому, 17 октября 1872 г.) 5. В эту рукопись я вложил двадцать
три года любовного труда. Она не могла надеяться увидеть свет
потому, что в ней я рассказал правду о Пушкине. (Б. Лавренев.
Комендант Пушкин) 6. Наконец вышел в свет так давно и так не
терпеливо ожидаемый перевод Илиады. (А. Пушкин. Илиада Гз-
мерова, переведенная Н. Гнедичем) 7. После выхода в свет “Пест
рых рассказов” имя Антона Павловича сразу стало известным...
(В. Короленко. Антон Павлович Чехов) 8. Я не умею писать ничего,
кроме беллетристики. Вы же вполне владеете и пером журналь
ного человека. (А. Чехов. Письмо А. М. Пешкову; 15 февраля 1900)
9. Какой спор! С вами спорить не стоит. Вы ничего не смыс
лите... Вы просто мараете бумагу. (В. Некрасов. Утро в редакции)
10. Трепещите и кланяйтесь, читатели! Вы готовитесь иметь де
ло с книгою, которая - бездна премудрости... (В. Белинский. Сла
вянский сборник И. В. Савельева-Ростиславича)V I.

John Brown is a gifted young man. He has the qualities needed to
become a great author. His gift is unusual. John has a natural ability
to notice what is happening around him. He is able to imagine unlike
ly situations very clearly. When he invents a new story John lets his
imagination work in an uncontrolled way. John likes to write short
stories. He says that the quality of expressing one’s thoughts in very
few words is a very nice quality. John’s stories make readers feel very
interested and excited. When 1 read them my interest never becomes
weak. All his stories are enjoyable. I simply devour them. John’s
stories are not only interesting. They are instructive too. Read his
books! You’re sure to like them.
1. Devour a book. 3. A pirated book.
2. A coffee-table book. 4. Dip into a book.
Vlii. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you

goes...n.
Proverb: Choose an author as you choose a friend.
tences.
I. Brevity is the soul of wit. 2. So the book is beneath criticism.
3. It’s an excellent read. 4. That story made boring reading. 5. I can
read between the lines. 6. My friend is a fast reader. 7. This book
became a best-seller. 8 .1read the novel with unflagging interest. 9. The
story captured my imagination at once. Ю. We were impressed with
his book.
I. I think, my friend has the makings of a writer. 2. My sister is a
young girl of promise. 3. This writer has come to stay. 4. My friend’s
gift is out of the common. 5. S. Maugham’s prose had a great
impact on our generation. 6. I. Mardoch’s new book proved a suc
cess. 7. G. Greene has a vivid imagination. 8. You’ll be impressed
with J. Fonles’s new book. 9. A. Christie is a best-selling author.
Ю. J. Fowles’ books are difficult reading.

lowing remarks.
I. My friend is a great novel reader. 2. The name of this author is
on everybody’s lips. 3. The writer has his ups and downs. 4. He is not
in the public eye. 5. His last novel had a considerable success. 6. This
writer can create characters that ring true. 7. We talked of this and
that, of our common friends and the latest books. 8. His books stood
the test of time. 9. He was able to carry on for many years, writing
book after book, and he was able to hold an ever-increasing public.
Ю. Most of his plots are melodramatic. II. All the books in his
library were so neatly arranged, they were so clean, that I had the
impression they were very seldom read. 12. He is a real book worm.
XII. Explain and expand on the following:
1. Insensibly he formed the most delightful habit in the world, the
habit of reading: he did not know that thus he was providing himself
with a refuge from all the distress of life; he did not know either that
he was creating for himself an unreal world which would make the
real world of every day a source of bitter disappointment.
2. Beauty is something wonderful and strange that the artist
fashions out of the chaos of the world in the torment of his soul. And
when he has made it, it is not given to all to know it. To recognize it
you must repeat the adventure of the artist. It is a melody that he sings
to you, and to hear it again in your own heart you want knowledge
and sensitiveness and imagination.
(From The Moon and Sixpence by W. S. Maugham)
XIII. Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use

1. Your friend is fond of reading. As a matter of fact she / he spends
all her / his leisure time reading. You wish she / he watched TV some
time or went out, for a change.
2. Your friend is not at all a great reader, but likes a good detec
tive story. He considers serious fiction to be boring stuff. Disapprove
of him but do it mildly.
XIV. Read and translate the following passages into Russian.

A. Dwell on Edward Driffield as a writer, relying on the infor
mation of the passage. Use some idioms given in Unit 10.
The critics can force the world to pay attention to a very indiffer
ent writer, and the world may lose its head over one who has no mer it
at all, but the result in neither case is lasting; and I cannot help think
ing that no writer can hold the public for as long as Edward Driffield
without considerable gifts. There is in his best books the stir of life,
and in none of them can you fail to be aware of the author’s enigmatic
personality.
B. Comment on the sort of books Donald preferred. Write

about the boy's manner and his relations with his father. Use
idiomatic English.
As Mor looked at Donald now, at his suspicious and sideways
turning face, he felt a deep sadness that he was not able to express his
love for his son...
Mor looked at the book under Donald’s arm. He knew from ex
perience that the boy hated being asked what he was reading. But
curiosity overcame his judgement. “What’s the book. Don?” he
asked.
Donald passed it over without a word. Mor looked at the title.
“Five Hundred Best Jokes and Puzzles”
“H m m m said Мог. He could think of no comment on the book.
He gave it back to his son.
(From The Sandcaslle by I. Murdoch)
C. Summarize in your own words the arguments for reading

detective novels. Say whether you share the author's views.
I find this delightful at home, and even more delightful when I am
away from home, a lost man. The fuss of the day is done with; you
are snugly installed in bed, in a little lighted place of your own; and
now to make the mind as cosy as the body! But why detective stories?
Why not some good literature? Because, with a few literature
exceptions - and there are far too few of them - good literature,
which challenges and excites the mind, will not do. In my view, it
should be read away from the bedroom...
What we want - or at least what I want, late at night; you can
please yourself - is a tale that is in its own way a picture of life but
yet has an entertaining puzzle element in it. And this the detective
story offers me.
(From The Priestley Companion: Extracts from The Writings
o f J. B. Priestley Selected by Himself)
D. Dwell on Barbecue-Smith as a writer; relying on the infor
mation of the passage. Sum up Mrs Wimbush and her man
ner. Comment on the sort of books she liked. Comment on
Denis’s reaction to her words. Use some idioms given in Unit 10.
Mrs Wimbush sat up and reached for a book that was lying on the
little table by the head of the sofa.
“Do you know him, by the way?” she asked.
“Who?”
“Mr Barbecue-Smith.”
Denis knew of him vaguely. Barbecue-Smith was a name in the
Sunday papers. He wrote about the Conduct of Life. He might even
be the author of “What a Young Girl Ought to Know”
“No, not personally,” he said.
“I’ve invited him for next week-end.” She turned over the pages
of the book. “Here’s the passage I was thinking of. I marked it. I
always mark the things I like.”
Holding the book almost at arm’s length, for she was somewhat
long-sighted, and making suitable gestures with her free hand, she
began to read, slowly, dramatically.
“What are thousand-pound fur coats, what are quarter-million
incomes?” She looked up from the page with a histrionic movement of
the head; her orange coiffure nodded portentously. Denis looked at it,
fascinated. Was it the Real Thing and henna, he wondered, or was it one
of those Complete Transformations one sees in the advertisements?
“What are Thrones and Sceptres?”
The orange Transformation - yes, it must be a Transformation -
bobbed up again.
“What are the gaieties of the Rich, the splendours of the
Powerful? What is the pride of the Great, what are the gaudy pleas
ures of High Society?”
The voice, which had risen in tone, questioningly, from sentence
to sentence, dropped suddenly and boomed reply. “They are nothing.
Vanity, fluff, dandelion seed in the wind, thin vapours of fever. The
things that matter happen in the heart. Seen things are sweet, but
those unseen are a thousand times more significant. It is the Unseen
that counts in Life.”
Mrs Wimbush lowered the book. “Beautiful, isn’t it?” she said.
Denis preferred not to hazard an opinion, but uttered a non-com
mittal “H’m”
(From Crome Yellow bv Л H u \lr\)
171
E. Comment on Demoyte’s view of books. Say whether you
share his view:
Demoyte’s books were all behind glass, so that the room was full
of reflections. Demoyte was a connoisseur of books. Mor, who was
not, had long ago been barred from the library. Mor liked to tear a
book apart as he read it, breaking the back, thumbing down the pages,
commenting and underlining. He liked to have his books close to
him, upon a table, upon the floor, at least upon shelves. Seeing them
so near and so destroyed, he could feel that they were now almost
inside his head. Demoyte’s books seemed a different kind of entity.
Yet he liked to see them too, elegant, stiff and spotless, gilded and
calved, books to be held gently in the hand and admired, and which
recalled to mind the fact of which Mor was usually oblivious that a
book is a thing and not just a collection of thoughts.
XV Here are five paragraphs of five different books. There is
a) an autobiography; b) a detective story; c) a romance; d) a fairy
story; e) a book about travei. Read them carefully and match
each passage with the correct title of the book it is from and
its author. Choose one of the books to have a talk about its
characters, its setting and its plot Use the idioms given in
Unit 10.
a) W. S. Maugham “The Summing Up”; b) A. Christie “Ten Little
Niggers”; c) W. S. Maugham “The Painted Veil”; d) O. Wilde “The
Happy Prince”; e) D. Defoe “A Tour through the Whole Island of
Great Britain”
1. They’ve done a murder and got away with it. But if the whole
thing’s going to be raked up, what’s going to happen? Ten to one, the
woman will give the show away. She hasn’t got the nerve to stand up
and brazen it out. She’s a living danger to her husband, that’s what she
is. He’s all right. He’ll lie with a straight face till kingdom comes - but
he can’t be sure of her! And if she goes to pieces, his neck’s in danger!
So he slips something into a cup of tea and makes sure that her
mouth is shut permanently.
2. From hence I came to Oxford, a name known throughout the
learned world; a city famous in our English history for several things,
besides its being a university.
A. So eminent for the goodness of its air, and healthy situation...
B. It has also several times been the retreat of our princes, when
the rest of the Kingdom has been embroiled in war and rebellion...
3. I did not want to be a doctor. I did not want to be anything but
a writer when I began to write I did so as though it were the most
natural thing in the world. I took to it as a duck takes to water. I have
never quite got over my astonishment at being a writer; there seems
no reason for my having become one except an irresistible inclina
tion, and I do not see why such an inclination should have arisen in
me. For well over a hundred years my family has practised law.
4. She went out on to the verandah and watched him leave the
house. He waved his hand to her. It gave her a little thrill as she
looked at him; he was forty-one, but he had the lithe Figure and the
springing step of a boy.
The verandah was in shadow; and lazily, her heart at ease with
satisfied love, she lingered. Their house stood in the Happy Valley, on
the side of the hill, for they could not afford to live on the more eli
gible but expensive Peak. But her abstracted gaze scarcely noticed
the blue sea and the crowded shipping in the harbour. She could think
only of her lover.
5. One night there flew over the city a little Swallow. His friends had
gone away to Egypt six weeks before, but he had stayed behind, for he
was in love with the most beautiful Reed. He had met her early in the
spring as he was flying down the river after a big yellow moth, and had
been so attracted by her slender waist that he had stopped to talk to her.
XV/. Speak on one of the following topics.
I. I like to read about... 2. A reader lives a richer life than a non
reader. 3. My favourite book / author. 4. The time spent on a good
book is never wasted.
PROJECT
Here is a brief list of literary genres: fiction, books about travel,
historical novels, biographies, memoirs, science fiction, crime
(detective) stories, poetry, dramatic works, books of essays.
Choose any of them to have a talk about Illustrate your talk with
examples. Use the idioms given in Unit 10.
RELIGION
IDIOMS

1. The Book of Books
2. Bell, book and candle
3. Enter / go into the Church
4. Faith, hope and charity
5. Father Superior
6. Mother Superior
7. Practise what one preaches
8. The (straight and) narrow path
9. Cast one’s bread upon the waters
10. God tempers the wind to the shorn lamb
11. A cross to bear
12. Peace of mind
13. The spirit is willing, but the flesh is weak
14. Man proposes, God disposes
15. Whom God would ruin, he first deprives of reason
16. All are not saints that go to church
17. A deadly / mortal sin
18. Commit a sin
19. You cannot serve both God and Mammon
20. Sell one’s soul (to the devil)
21. He that serves God for money will serve the devil for better
wages
22. God willing
23. For Christ’s sake!
24. Get religion
25. Like an angel
26. An Act of God.
1. The Book of Books = the Book of God, the divine Book, the
Good Book = the Bible ['baibol] - the holy book of the Chris
tians, consisting of the Old Testament and the New Testament.
E.g.: The sew ice included some readings from the Bible.
2. Bell, book and candle - a church bell, a reading from the Bible,
burning candles used in a Christian service. (Culture Context - I)
3. Enter / go into the Church - to become a priest. (Culture Con
text - 2)
4. Faith, hope and charity - three important good qualities in a
Christian, according to Jesus Christ in the Bible.
5. Father Superior - (a title for) the head of a religious group.
6. Mother Superior - (a title for) the head of a religious group, a
title for the woman in charge of a group of nuns.
7. Practise what one preaches - to do oneself what one advises
others to do.
E.g.: Priests must practise what they preach.
8. The (straight and) narrow path - good behaviour.
E.g.: Nobody can make, them abandon the narrow path of virtue.
9. Cast one’s bread upon the water - to be good to somebody and
do not expect anything in return. (Culture Context - 3)
E.g.: Please, consider your help as bread cast upon the water, and
believe it will be returned a thousand fold.
10. God tempers the wind to the shorn lamb (proverb) - every per
son goes through some ordeal he can stand.
E.g.: - How are you getting on?
- Oh, Tm not complaining. God tempers the wind to the
shorn lamb.
11. A cross to bear - a cause of sorrow or suffering which tests one’s
patience or goodness. (Culture Context - 4)
E.g.: Every person has a cross to bear.
12. Peace of mind - freedom from anxiety or troubling thoughts;
calmness.
E.g.: His words restored my peace o f mind.
13. The spirit is willing, but the flesh is weak - I would like to do
something but my body is not strong enough to do it.
E.g.: / stopped working daily; for though the spirit is willing, the
flesh is weak.
14. Man proposes, God disposes - an old saying, meaning that
people can make plans, but whether or not they are successful
depends on the will of God.
15. Whom God would ruin, he first deprives of reason (proverb) -
whom the Gods would destroy, they first make mad.
E.g.: He must come with us - / insist! - Well, whom the gods
would destroy they first make mad.
16. All are not saints that go to church (proverb) - not only good
people go to church. (Culture Context - 5)
17. A deadly / mortal sin - an offence against God or a religious
law.
E.g.: The Bible says adultery>is a (deadly) sin.
Which o f us is without sin ?
18. Commit a sin - to do something that breaks a religious law.
E.g.: He committed the unforgivable sin o f concealing the truth.
19. You cannot serve both God and Mammon - quote from the
Bible. You cannot serve two gods, i.e. spend all your time trying
to get rich and be a Christian. In the Bible, mammon was a word
meaning wealth, but many people thought it meant a god of
money.
E.g.: You cannot worship God and Mammon.
20. Sell one’s soul (to the devil) - to do something bad in exchange
for money, power, etc. (Culture Context - 6)
21. He that serves God for money will serve the devil for better
wages (proverb) - You cannot worship God and Mammon.
22. God willing - if all goes well.
E.g.: /7/ be back next month -G o d willing.
23. For Christ’s sake! - used when asking strongly for something;
used as an expression of annoyance. Both this expression and “for
God's sake" may offend some people, and should be used with
care. The gentlest expression is “for goodness sake" (Culture
context - 7)
E.g.: For goodness sake don t tell her the truth!
What s the matter now, for Gods sake?
24. Get religion - suddenly become interested in religion in a way
that seems strange to other people.
E.g.: They got religion when they were at college.
25. Like an angel - someone who is very kind, very good, or very
beautiful. (Culture Context - 8)
E.g.: She cooks like an angel.
26. An Act of God - an event that is caused by natural forces, such
as a storm, flood, or fire, which you cannot prevent or control.
(Culture Context - 9)
E.g.: At last they admitted that they could do nothing, ft was an
act o f God.
CULTURE CONTEXT
1. Many Christian churches have bells, and these are rung on
Sundays, to tell people that the church service is about to begin. They
are also rung, often making pleasant tunes, when people are getting
married in a church. A single bell is rung repeatedly to show that
someone has died.
In a Christian service there are usually prayers, readings from the
Bible, hymns (religious songs), and a sermon (talk by a priest). In the
Christian church, the main services are on Sundays. There are special
services for weddings and funerals, and for Christmas.
2. In Britain, few people now go to church regularly, although
more people go at the special religious times of Christmas and Easter.
Many churches are very beautiful old buildings and many people like
to visit them to admire them, even if they are not Christians.
3. In the Bible, there is a story in which Jesus performed a mir
acle by changing water into wine. There is also a story in the Bible in
which Jesus walked on water.
4. Cross - an upright post with a bar crossing it near the top, on
which people were tied or nailed and left to die as a punishment in
ancient times; this shape as the sign of the Christian faith (because
Christians believe that Jesus Christ was killed on a cross).
5. Saint - a person who is officially recognized after death by (a
branch of) the Christian church as being specially holy and worthy of
forma) honour in the church.
Saint Andrew - (first century AD) a fisherman who became a fol
lower of Jesus, the national saint of Scotland, St Andrew’s Day, 30th
November, is celebrated as the Scottish national day.
Saint David - (died ? 601) a Welsh bishop and the national saint
of Wales, St David’s Day, 1st March, is celebrated as the Welsh
national day.
Saint George - (fourth century AD?) the national saint of
England, a soldier in the Roman army who was martyred in Asia
Minor. He is said to have saved the life of a woman by killing a dragon.
St George’s Day, 23rd April, is celebrated as the English national day.
Saint Patrick - (389? -461) the national saint of Ireland. St Pat
rick’s Day, 17th March, is celebrated in Ireland and the US, where
people often wear green clothes, to honour St Patrick.
6. In the Christian religion people believe that when you die your
soul goes to Heaven if you believe in Christ or to Hell if you have
been wicked and do not believe in Christ. In the Christian religion,
Heaven is thought of as a place full of light and the home of angels,
servants of God with wings, who play musical instruments (harps).
People are said to go up to Heaven and down to Hell, and Heaven is
often thought of as high in the sky. The gates of Heaven are guarded
by Saint Peter, who holds the keys to Heaven. When people arrive at
the gates of Heaven, Saint Peter asks them questions to find out
whether they have been good enough to be let in.
Hell is thought of as a place full of darkness and fire, where
people burn for ever. Hell is often thought of as deep below the
ground. Satan [seitn], the devil, has control of the people in Hell. “Get
thee behind me, Satan” - phrase from the Bible - do not encourage
me to do something wrong.
7. Jesus Christ, Jesus - the man on whose life, death, and teach
ings Christianity is based. According to the Bible, the holy book of
the Christians, Jesus was the son of God, born on Earth to the Virgin
Mary. He died on a cross to save all men and women from their sins.
8. Angel - a servant of God, who is believed by religious people
to appear sometimes to people and bring them messages from God.
Angels are usually represented as a person with wings and dressed in
white.
9. Protestants ['protistont] - (a member of) a part of the Christian
church that separated from the Roman Catholic Church in the 16th
century. There are many divisions within the church but in general
Protestants believe in the authority of the Bible, rather than in the
authority of tradition of the Pope. They also believe in the importance
of preaching and studying God’s word in the Bible. Protestant ser
vices are rather plain compared to Catholic services. In Britain and
the US most Christians are Protestant.
TESTING VOCABULARY
♦ An act of God ♦ The head of a religious group

♦ Suffer an unpleasant or diffi
♦ God willing cult experience
♦ An event that is caused by
♦ Like an angel natural forces
♦ Very kind, good or beautiful
♦ Sell one’s soul ♦ Do something bad in exchange
♦ Get religion for money, etc.
♦ Freedom from anxiety; calm
♦. Commit a sin ness
♦ Do something that breaks a
♦ Man proposes, God disposes religious law
♦ If all goes well
♦ Peace of mind ♦ Suddenly become interested
♦ Bear one’s cross in religion
♦ People can make plans, but
♦ Mother Superior their success depends on the
will of God
B. Use the idioms to make up a story. A student starts it w ith

“I ’ll go abroad next month. God willing”. Other students
should take turns building upon the sentence, turn b y turn
11. A. In the following sentences, there is an idiom. Decide what
English.
Q Model: A fire broke out at night. They could do nothing. It was an

act o f God.
I. They could do nothing. It was an act of God. 2. She nursed
him like an angel. 3. He got religion when he was 18. 4. Stop talking,
for God’s sake. 5. We’ll finish our work tomorrow - God willing.
6. He that serves God for money will serve the devil for better wages.
7. He committed a deadly sin. 8. All are not saints that go to church.
9. The spirit is willing, but the flesh is weak. Ю. She’s teaching her
self to bear the cross. 11. He entered the Church at the age of twenty.
12. You cannot serve both God and Mammon.
III. A. the following sentences all contain an idiom with one key
plete the idiom.
I. Nothing could be done. It was a n __ (action, act, activity,
actuality) of God. 2. One should practise what h e ___ (preaches,
teaches, beseeches, reaches). 3. God tempers the wind to th e __
(torn, worn, born, shorn) lamb. 4. Whom God would ruin, he first__
(derails, depraves, deprecates, deprives) of reason. 5. Stop doing it,
for Christ’s ___(saint, sack, safety, sake)'. 6. All are not saints that go
t o ___(chapel, church, cathedral, kirk).
B. Sum up every character mentioned in the extracts.
I. Since the nuns were busy from morning till night with a hun
dred duties Kitty saw little of them but at the services in the bare,
humble chapel. On her first day the Mother__ (Super / Superior),
catching sight of her seated at the back behind the girls on the benches
according to their ages, stopped and spoke to her.
2. A Man lying at the point of death called his wife to his bedside
and said: Give me one last proof of your fidelity. In my desk you will
find a crimson___(cable / candle). Swear to me that while it is in
existence you will not remarry." She swore and he died. At the funeral
the Woman stood holding a lighted crimson candle till it was wasted
entirely away.
(From The Crimson Candle by A. Bierce)
3. ...The surgeons of the town did what their poor science sug
gested to bring life back to the girl’s paralysed limb. At last they
admitted that they could do nothing. It was an___(action / act) of God.
4. At last, in the further edge of that town I saw a small funeral
procession - just a family and a few friends following a coffin - no
priest; a funeral without bell, book o r___(candlelight / candle).
(From A Connecticut Yankee in King
Arthur's Court by M. Twain)
5. It was indeed a cause for rejoicing that in disposing of their per
sonal enemies they had done an important service to the Church.
They proved thus that it was in point of fact possible to ___(serve /
save) God and Mammon.
6. Women are subject to two defects, curiosity and vanity. They
lead fair creatures to abandon the narrow___(path / part) of virtue
more often than passion.
7. Kitty smiled and in her heart sighed. There was only one thing
she could do for Walter now and that she could not think how to. She
wanted him to forgive her, not for her sake any more, but for his own;
for she felt that this alone could give him ___ (piece / peace) of
mind...
“This is a memorable day for me, my child,” she said breaking
from a long reverie, “for this is the anniversary of the day on which
I Finally determined to ___(enter / entreat) religion...
...After I had received the Holy Communion I asked Our Lord to
give m e __ (piece / peace) of mind: Thou shalt have it only, the
answer seemed to come to me, when thou hast ceased to desire it “
181
8. I could not help seeing that none of these clergymen practised
what they___(prayed/ preached).
(From The Summing Up by W. S. Maugham)
9. Nothing saintly about Simeon Lee. The kind of man you might
say had sold his__ (soul/ sole) to the devil and enjoyed the bargain.
(From Hercule Poirots Christmas by A. Christie)
10. Since then I have written many other books; and though ceas
ing my methodical study of the old masters (for though the spirit is
willing, the __ (flesh / body) is weak), I have continued with
increasing assiduity to try to write better.
(From The Summing Up by W. S. Maugham)

A. V. Kunin.
I. Ты еще не студент, и бог знает, выдержишь ли ты экзамен.
(И. Тургенев. Первая любовь) 2. “Как хорошо, боже мой!” - поду
мал Николай Петрович, и любимые стихи пришли ему на
уста. (И. Тургенев. Отцы и дети) 3. “Ах, милый мой”, - сказала
графиня, - ради бога не рассказывай; мне страшно будет слу
шать.” (А. Пушкин. Выстрел) 4. Сама на душу греха брать не хочу, -
коли братья решат, так тому и быть! (М. Салтыков-Щедрин. Господа
Головлевы) 5. Он подозревал своих учеников во всех смертных
грехах, они, в свою очередь, всей душой ненавидели его. (С. Мар
шак. В начеие жизни) 6. Иван Васильевич громко расхохотался,
слушая письмо кардинала Кольо. Его хохот был не веселый, а
скорее страшный. Он вскочил с кресла и, дико расширив глаза,
воскликнул: - Я - заблудшая овца!.. О, как провинился я перед
папской церковью! Несчастный я! Еретик! (В. Костылев. Иван
Грозный) 7. “Злодей ты”, - прибавила она, с ненавистью глядя на
молодое свежее лицо Наума, - “ведь я душу свою для тебя загуби
ла, ведь я для тебя воровкой стала” (И. Тургенев. Постоячый
двор) 8. Деревня наша очень мила. Старинный дом на горе, сад,
озеро, рощи сосновые, все это осенью и зимой, конечно, немного
печально, но зато весной и летом должно казаться земным раем.
(A I Iniukiih Роман в письмах) 9. Какая страна, какая природа! Ви
ноград, абрикосы, персики, миндаль, грецкий орех. Всего много.
Можно бы устроить здесь рай земной. (В. Гаршин. Письмо матери,
21 июня 1877) 10. - Можно мне проводить тебя, - спросил Рома
шов, выйдя с Шурочкой из дверей на двор. - Нет, ради бога, не
нужно, милый, не делай этого. (А. Куприн. Поединок)
VI. Link each of the pictures on Pages 184-185 with one of the
1. Like an angel. 3. The straight and narrow path.
2. Bell, book and candle. 4. Cast one’s bread upon the waters.

have read that will lead you to say “So as the proverb goes... ”
Proverbs: Whom God would ruin, he first deprives of reason.
He that serves God for money will serve the devil for
better wages.
VIII. Explain and expand on the following. Use the idioms given
in Unit 11.
(Passages l-lO come from The Painted Veil by W. S. Maugham;
passages 11—12 are from The Sandcastle by I. Murdoch; passages
13-17 are from Rain by W. S. Maugham; passage 18 comes from The
Lion s Skin by W. S. Maugham)
l . There is a wall between the nuns and me... They walk in a dif
ferent world from ours and we shall always be strangers to them. 2. The
Mother Superior lived so obviously upon a plane you could not
reach. 3. It’s not enough that a religious should be continually in
prayer with Jesus; she should be herself a prayer. 4. Her conversation
was interwoven with her religion. Kitty felt that this was natural to
her and that no effort was made to influence the heretic. 5. You shall
have peace of mind only, when you have ceased to desire it... One
cannot find peace in work or in pleasure, in the world or in a convent,
but only in one’s soul. 6. There is only one way to win hearts and that
is to make oneself like those by whom you wish to be loved. 7. I have
exchanged a life that was trivial and worthless for one of sacrifice
and prayer... I have never regretted the step I took. 8. Perhaps her
faults and follies, the unhappiness she had suffered, were not entire-
ly vain if she could follow the path that now she dimly discerned
before her... the path those dear nuns at the convent followed so
humbly, the path that led to peace. 9. Beauty is also a gift of God, one
of the most rare and precious, and we should be thankful if we are
happy enough to possess it and thankful, if we are not, that others
possess it for our pleasure. 10. They were all, the human race, like the
drops of water in that river and they flowed on, each so close to the
other and yet so far apart, a nameless flood, to the sea. When all
things lasted so short a time and nothing mattered very much, it
seemed pitiful that men, attaching an absurd importance to trivial
objects, should make themselves and one another so unhappy. 11. Do
you imagine that you, or anyone, has some sort of right to happiness?
That idea is a poor guide. 12. Real freedom is a total absence of con
cern about yourself. 13. They say that vice is inevitable and con
sequently the best thing is to localise and control it. 14. She has an
immortal soul, and I must do all that is in my power to save it.
15. It’s a true rebirth. Her soul which was black as night, is now pure and
white like the new-fallen snow. 16. I want her to accept the punish
ment of man as a sacrifice to God. I want her to accept it joyfully.
God .is very good and very merciful. I want to put in her heart the
passionate desire to be punished so that at the end, even if I offered
to let her go, she would refuse. 17. The men who are in authority
speak as though evil that was out of sight ceased to be evil. 18. He’s
the cleanest man I’ve ever known. He never asks of others what he
isn’t prepared to do himself. One cannot help admiring a man whose
principles are so high and who’s prepared to stick to them at any
cost.
IX. Continue the following dialogue. Use the idioms given in Unit 11.
A: Ah, my dear child, I am very sure that you will end by becoming
religious.
В: Are you speaking seriously, my good Mother? You are laying
bare the innermost thought and desire of my heart.
C: For two years Odette has thought of nothing else. But you will not
give your permission, ma tante, you must not give your permis
sion.
Л By what right should we refuse it if it is the Will of God?
X. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.
A. Sum up Davidson. Comment on his behaviour and his
faith. Say if he was merciful or not. Use the idioms given in
Unit 11.
The most striking thing about Davidson was the feeling he gave
you of suppressed fire. He had no mercy for sin. “If the tree is rotten
it shall be cut down and cast into the flames,” he was in the habit of
saying. “Every sin had to be paid for either in money or work.” There
was something sinister about the power of that man. He was weaving
a net around the heretic carefully, systematically, and suddenly, when
everything was ready, would pull the strings tight. “I want them to
accept the punishment of man as a sacrifice to God. I want them to
accept it joyfully. God is very good and very merciful. I want to put
in their hearts the passionate desire to be punished.” The fear of per
sonal danger couldn’t stop Davidson in the performance of his duty.
He wanted to instil into people the sense of sin. He worked without
ceasing, day and night. “I must save them. I shall suffer all the pain
that they suffer,” his eyes shone with an inhuman fire.
(From Rain by W. S. Maugham)
B. Sum up the nuns, specify their best features. Speak of the
underlying motive of their behaviour, their mode of life. Use
“They are wonderful, those nuns. They make me feel utterly
worthless. They give up everything, their home, their country, love,
children, freedom; and all the little things which I sometimes think
must be harder still to give up, flowers and green fields, going for a
walk on an autumn day, books and music, comfort, everything they
give up, everything. And they do it so that they may devote them
selves to a life of sacrifice and poverty, obedience, killing work and
prayer. To all of them this world is really and truly a place of exile.
Life is a cross which they willingly bear, but in their hearts all the
time is the desire - oh, its so much stronger than desire, it’s a long
ing, an eager, passionate longing for the death which shall lead them
to life everlasting... Supposing there is no life everlasting? Think
what it means if death is really the end of all things. They’ve given
up all for nothing. They’ve been cheated. They’re dupes.”
“I wonder if it matters that what they have aimed at is illusion
Their lives are in themselves beautiful. I have an idea that the only
thing which makes it possible to regard this world we live in without
disgust is the beauty which now and then men create out of the chaos.
The pictures they paint, the music they compose, the books they
write, and the lives they lead, of all these the richest in beauty is the
beautiful life. That is the perfect work of art.”
C. Comment on Martha’s behaviour which implies that she is
not as pious and righteous as she believes she is. Use the
Martha grudged Herbert even the twopence... Her economies
were mostly on the food, and their justification was always spiritual.
Eating was gross; high living was incompatible with high thinking...
Meals would come to consist more and more exclusively of porridge,
potatoes, cabbages, bread... In a mild and spiritual way Herbert was
very fond of his food. So was Martha - darkly and violently fond of
it. That was why she had become a vegetarian, why her economies
were always at the expense of the stomach - precisely because she
liked food so much... There were occasions when, overcome by a
sudden irresistible desire, Martha would buy and, in a single day,
secretly consume a whole pound of chocolate creams...
Martha dismissed her two servants, she reduced the family food
supply to a prison ration.
“After all,” she argued, “it’s really not pleasant to have strangers
in the house to serve you. And then, why should they serve us? They
who are just as good as we are.” It was a hypocritical tribute to
Christian doctrine; they were really immeasurably inferior...
With every rise in prices Martha’s enthusiasm for ascetic spiritu
ality became more than ever fervid and profound. So too did her con
viction that the children would be spoilt and turned into worldlings if
she sent them to an expensive boarding-school... Home education
without a governess, insisted Martha... On Sylvia, her mother had to
admit to herself, this art of education was hard to practise... Aesthetic
and intellectual beauty seemed to mean as little to Sylvia as moral
beauty
“It’s really rather a blessing not to be rich,” insisted Martha. She
would develop her theme; being able to afford luxuries and actually
indulging in them had a certain coarsening, despiritualizing effect. It
was so easy to become worldly... Poverty had happily preserved the
Claxtons from the danger... Sylvia’s father was one who worked
without thought of the public, only for the sake of creating truth and
beauty.
(From The Claxtons by A. Huxley)
XI. Speak on one of the following topics.

I. People can hurt my feelings most by . 2. My children won’t
have to 3. If I could change the world 4. Something about
myself I’m trying to change 5. Charity begins at home.
PROJECT
1. Quoted below are headlines in which Phraseological Units
are used. Study the headlines and say: a) What information
(denotational and connotationaf) the phraseological unit con-
veys in the context of the headline; b) What it contributes to the
informative function of the headline. (All the headlines come
from the Daily World).
1. Education clock turned back. 2. Tories on warpath. 3. Turning
their backs on society. 4. Jobs, not pie in the sky. 5. Religion: food for
thought. 6. Students and workers “All in the same boat.” 7. New
prison - a white elephant. 8. Plan cuts no ice.
2. In the passages quoted below substitute the phraseological
units for words and word combinations which will express the
same denotational meaning. (Make whatever structural changes
the substitution may call for.)
Compare the passages you have got with the original text and
say what connotational implications the phraseological units
add to the bits of text you've analysed.
I. Starting a new job is like any other big change in your life. It’s
a time when you begin thinking about turning over new leaves,
chuckling out the bad old habits and approaching life full of con
scientiousness, vim and vigour.
(From The Watchers on the Shore by S. Bar slow)
2. Mr Ferraro looked after his salvation in a more independent
fashion. He was like his grandfather who had founded the great busi
ness of Ferraro and Smith in a foreign land. God has made man in his
image and Mr Ferraro regarded God as the director of some supreme
business which yet depended for certain operations on Ferraro and
Smith. The strength o f a chain is in its weakest link, and Mr Ferraro
didn’t forget his responsibility.
3. Mr Ferraro would walk rather as God walked in the Garden,
through his library with the correct classical books and his drawing
room, on the walls of which hung one of the most expensive art col
lections in private hands.
4. Miss Saunders came in... She was described in the firm’s
books as "assistant secretary" and her duties were “special" ones.
Even her qualifications were special: she had been head girl at the
Convent of Saint Latitudinarie. where she had won in three success
ive years the special prize for piety - a little picture of our Lady\
5. She laid a typed list on Mr Ferraro’s desk: in the first column
the date, in the second the church or the place of pilgrimage where
the indulgence was to be gained, and in the third column in red ink
the number of days saved from the temporal punishments of
Purgatory. Mr Ferraro read it carefully.
6. “I get the impression, Miss Saunders," he said, “that you are
spending too much time on such indulgences; sixty days here,
fifty days there. Are you sure you are not wasting your time on
these?"
7. You are always careful to be in a State o f Grace!
8. “I know you don’t like any repetition in the same church dur
ing the same month."
“My only point of superstition," Mr Ferraro said. “It has no basis,
of course, in the teaching of the Church."
“You wouldn’t like a repetition for a member of your family, your
wife..?"
“We are taught to pay first attention to our own souls. My wife
should be looking after her own indulgences - she has an excellent
Jesuit adviser - I employ you to look after mine."
(Passages 2-8 come from Special Duties by G. Greene)
3. Match the following quotations from the Bible (The New
Testament The Gospel according to Luke) to their Russian
equivalents. Comment on their meaning. Add some more well-
known biblical phrases to the list.
1. He хлебом одним будет жить Forgive them, for they do not know
человек, но всяким словом what they do.
Божиим.
2. Как хотите, чтобы с вами For everyone who asks receives,
поступали люди, так и вы and he who seeks finds, and to
поступайте с ними, him who knocks it will be
opened.
3 . Вынь прежде бревно из You know the commandments:
твоего глаза, и тогда уви “Do not commit adultery”, “Do
дишь, как вынуть сучек из not murder”, “Do not steal”, “Do
глаза брата твоего. not bear false witness”, “Honor
your father and your mother”
4. Нет ничего тайного, что не For whoever exalts himself will
сделалось бы явным. be humbled, and he who humbles
himself will be exalted.
5. Предоставь мертвым по First remove the plank from your
гребать своих мертвецов. own eye, and then you will see
clearly to remove the speck that
is in your brother’s eye.
6. Ибо всякий просящий по And just as you want men to do to
лучает, и ищущий находит, you, you also do to them like
и стучащему отворят. wise.
7. Душа больше пищи, и тело - Let the dead bury their own dead.
одежды.
8. Ибо всякий возвышающий Man shall not live by bread alone,
сам себя унижен будет, а but by every word of God.
унижающий себя возвысится.
9. Прости им, ибо не знают, For nothing is secret that will not
что делают. be revealed, nor anything hidden
that will not be known and come
to light.
Ю. Не прелюбодействуй; не уби Life is more than food, and the
вай; не кради; не лжесви body is more than clothing.
детельствуй; почитай отца
твоего и матерь твою.
GETTING ABOUT TOWN
IDIOMS

1. Heavy traffic
2. A safety island / a traffic island
3. Be from out of town
4. Go / be out on the town
5. Go sightseeing
6. Within walking / driving distance
7. At a snail’s pace
8. At breakneck pace / speed
9. A bird’s-eye view
10. Live in the street
11. Out of curiosity
12. Catch / get a glimpse of smth
13. Be all eyes
14. Burst upon the eye / one’s sight
15. Appear to one’s eyes
16. Eye appeal
17. Feast one’s eyes (on / upon smth)
18. Only have eyes for
19. Have one’s eyes glued on / to
20. Not to take one’s eyes from smth / smb
21. See smth with one’s own eyes
22. Answer / fit a description
23. Defy description
24. Bear / stand comparison with
25. Be imprinted on smb’s memory
26. First impression
27 First impressions are most lasting
28. Be favourably impressed with / by smth
29. Attract attention
30. No end of (a time)
1. Heavy traffic - a large amount of traffic.

E.g.: We were stuck in heavy traffic for an hour.
2. A safety island / a traffic island - a raised place in the middle of
the road where people crossing can wait for traffic to pass.
3. Be from out of town - to live in a different town that the one you
are in.
E.g.: - Do you know where the High Street is?
- 1’m from out o f town.
4. Go / be out on the town - to go to restaurants, bars, theatres etc
for entertainment in the evening.
E.g.: He often goes out on the town.
5. Go sightseeing - to visit famous, interesting places, especially as
tourists.
E.g.: Some people like to stay at home, but I prefer to go sight
seeing.
6. Within walking / driving distance - near enough to walk or
drive to.
E.g.: There is a very good department store within walking dis
tance o f my house.
7. At a snail’s pace - extremely slowly.
E.g.: The car is moving at a snail’s pace.
8. At breakneck pace / speed - extremely and often dangerously
fast.
E.g.: He likes to drive at breakneck speed.
9. A bird’s-eye view - a view of something from high above it.
E.g.: From the plane we had an amazing bird's-eye view o f the
town.
10. Live in the street - to spend much time out-of-doors.
11. Out of curiosity - the desire to know something, or to know
about a lot of different things.
E.g.: I'll go to see the sights, just out o f curiosity.
? Яисон В.
12. Catch / get a glimpse of smth - to have a sight of something for
a short time. That is why it is not complete.
E.g.: I got a glimpse o f that building from the window o f a train.
13. Be all eyes - to watch carefully what is happening.
E.g.: The tourists were all eyes. Nothing could escape their
notice.
14. Burst upon the eye / one’s sight - to come suddenly or unex
pectedly to.
E.g.: The view burst upon our sight.
15. Appear to one’s eyes - to come into view, become visible.
E.g.: When we reached the top o f the hill, the town appeared to
our eyes.
16. Eye appeal - a quality or characteristic of a place / person, etc
that they have which people find attractive.
E.g.: Modern buildings lack the eye appeal o f ancient houses.
17. Feast one’s eyes (on / upon .smth) - to look at something for a
long time with great attention because you like it very much or are
very pleased to see it.
E.g.: We feasted our eyes upon the beautiful mansion.
18. Only have eyes for - only be interested in some particular thing.
E.g.: In London / had eyes only for the National Gallery.
19. Have one’s eyes glued on / to smth - to watch something with
great attention.
E.g.: Their eyes were glued to the beautiful castle.
20. Not to take one’s eyes from smth / smb - cannot take one’s eyes
off smth = to be unable to stop looking at something, because it is
very attractive or interesting.
E.g.: The theatre was so beautiful I simply couldn't take my eyes
off it.
21. See smth with one’s own eyes - if you see something with your
own eyes you go somewhere to see something yourself.
E.g.: I'd like to see the sights with my own eyes.
22. Answer / fit a description - to be like the person or thing
described.
E.g.. He found the building fitting that description.
23. Defy description - to be so extreme or unusual that it is almost
impossible to describe or understand.
E.g.: The beauty o f the city defies description.
24. Bear / stand comparison with - compare favourably with some
one or something.
E.g.: I t’s a beautiful city, but it won’t stand comparison with Paris.
25. Be imprinted on smb’s memory - if something is imprinted on
one’s mind / memory, one can never forget it.
E.g.: The sights o f the city were forever imprinted on her mind.
26. First impression - the opinion or feeling you have about some
one or something because of the way they seem.
E.g.: First impressions can be deceptive.
27. First impressions are most lasting (saying) - one’s first impres
sion of a situation, a place, or a person is likely to be remembered.
28. Be favourably impressed with / by smth - to admire something
because it’s nice, good, etc.
E.g.: They were favourably impressed by the beautiful theatre.
29. Attract attention - if something or someone attracts attention,
people notice them, especially because they look very interesting
or unusual.
E.g.: The beautiful building attracted the tourists’ attention.
The sights o f the city attract attention o f many tourists.
30. No end of (a time) - very good time.
E.g.: She’s having no end o f a time at the seaside.
CULTURE CONTEXT
If you’re a visitor to London, don’t waste time wondering what to
do here. Seven million Londoners have no problem finding things to
do in their leisure hours.
Shopping
Londoners are dedicated weekend shoppers, for whom no
Saturday is complete without a trek to one of their favourite shopping
areas or street markets, such as South Molton Street, Camden Lock or
Portobello Road. Do as they do and you’ll enjoy browsing around for
gifts and souvenirs. You’ll find the best places to look for anything,
from antiques and contemporary art to tableware, toys and game
Eating
Restaurants
British: Rules 35 Maiden Lane, WC 2. Covent Garden under
ground. Open 12.15 -2.30 p. m., 5.30 - midnight Mon - Sat. A sump
tuous, old-fashioned restaurant serving traditional English dishes. It’s
expensive (about £20 per head) but it also offers a different class of
cuisine.
Vegetarian: The Unicom Cafe 2-6 Great Newport Street, WC 2.
Leicester Square underground. Open noon - 10.30 p. m. Mon - Sat;
11 a. m. - 5.30 p. m. Sun. This is the cheerful, basement cafe for the
Unicom Theatre. The vegetarian dishes are imaginative and cheap
(eat for about £5 per head) with such daily delights as guacamole,
savoury flans and cakes.
Cafes
British: Diana’s Diner 39 Endell Street, WC 2. Covent Garden
underground. Open 9 a. m. - 7 p. m. Mon - Fri; 9 a. m. - 2 p. m. Sat.
You can buy huge portions of delicious British pies and stodge here
for around £3.50. Their breakfast is gargantuan.
Quality Chop House 94 Farringdon Road, ЕС I. Farringdon
underground or King’s Cross underground. Open 6.30 a. m. - 3 p. m.
Mon - Fri. Buy bumper British breakfasts for £2-£4 from this
Victorian Eating House: eggs, bacon, sausages, bubble and squeak.
M useums
British Museum, Great Russell Street, W C 1. Tottenham Court
Road underground. Open 10 a. m. - 5 p. m. Mon - Sat; 2 - 5 p. m.
Sun. The most visited place in London, crammed with exquisite
exhibits and antiquities from around the world. First time visitors
should see the superb Greek and Roman displays, including the Elgin
marbles, as well as the loot from the Egyptian pyramids.
Science Museum, Exhibition Road, SW 7. South Kensington
underground. Open 10 a. m. - 6 p. m. Mon - Sat; 2.30 - 6 p. m. Sun.
Children of all ages can play with the gadgets and do-it-yourself
scientific experiments. One feature is “The Science and Art of Medi
cine”, which includes Napoleon’s toothbrush and Dr Livingstone’s
medicine chest.
Galleries
The National Gallery, Trafalgar Square, WC 2. Open 10 a. m. -
6 p. ш. Mon - Sat; 2 - 6 p. m. Sun. The National Portrait Gallery,
St Martin’s Place, WC 2. Open 10 a. m. - 5 p. m. Mon - Fri; 10 a. m. -
6 p. m. Sat; 2 - 6 p. m. Sun. Charing Cross underground.
The official homes of Britain’s official art treasures.
The National Gallery is packed with paintings by Leonardo,
Giotto, Raphael, Van Gogh and Monet, plus a few British artists.
The Portrait Gallery is more manageable and more fun. Here you
can peruse photographs and paintings of the National heroes.
Tate Gallery, Millbank, SW 1, Pimlico underground / 2, 36, 77A
buses. Open 10 a. m. - 6 p. m. Mon - Sat; 2 - 6 p. m. Sun. A popular
and diverse collection of modem and experimental art and sculpture:
Dadaism, Impressionism and Expressionism, Surrealism and, of
course, a pile of old bricks.
Children
Traipsing around London with a bunch of screaming kids
demanding food and entertainment is an experience guaranteed to
ruin any holiday. Being dragged about the streets by a clueless adult
is not much fun either. Well, don’t despair. There are a lot of ideas to
please both halves of this delicate partnership.
E.g. : Unicorn Theatre for Children, Arts Theatre, 6 Great New
port Street, WC 2. Leicester Square underground. Performances 2 p. m.
Tue, Thur, Fri; 2.30 p. m. Sat, Sun. Admission £2.50, £3.30, £4.50.
A youth theatre which presents an exciting programme of children’s
plays and puppet and magic shows.
Film
If you want to see the latest big budget movies from Pinewood
and Hollywood, head for Leicester Square and around Piccadilly
Circus, but be prepared to queue. There are usually three screenings
a day in the major cinemas. Mondays are cheap ticket days.
Parks
The leafmess of London is what makes it unique amongs metrop
olises. If you’re bored with buildings visit a park (Hyde Park W 2;
Regent’s Park NW 1; St James’s Park SW 1) (open from dawn to
dusk daily).
Boat Trips
A trip down the Regent’s Canal or the Thames (always referred to
as the River by Londoners) is a relaxing way to spend a day. Take a
cruise to Kew and see the famous gardens, or head upstream to see
the Thames Barrier. There are disco boats and restaurant boats.
Bus Tours
Culture Bus. Fee £3.50 adults, £2 under 15s. Daily tours with 38
central pick-up points including the Victoria and Albert Museum,
Harrods, Speaker’s Corner, Madame Tussaud’s, British Museum,
St Paul’s, and the Tate Galleiy. The tickets are valid for 24 hours; hop
on / hop off when you want, where you want. Open topped yellow
buses in summer.
Trips out of London
Oxford / Stratford Tickets £24 adults; £18 children. Tours depart:
8 a. m. daily; return: 6.30 p. m. in London (include entrance to one
Oxford College, Anne Hathaway’s Cottage and Shakespeare’s
Birthplace).
Cambridge / Wobum Abbey Tickets £20, £15. Tours depart: 8.30 a. m.
Sun; return: 6.30 p. m. (include entrance to one Cambridge College
and Wobum Abbey).
TESTING VOCABULARY
♦ Heavy traffic ♦ To watch carefully what’s

happening
♦ At a snail’s pace ♦ A quality of something that
it has which people find
attractive
♦ A traffic island ♦ To be like the person or
thing described
♦ Be all eyes ♦ To watch something with
great attention
♦ Eye appeal ♦ To become visible
♦ Fit a description ♦ Very good time
♦ Have one’s eyes glued on / ♦ To compare favourably with
to smth someone or something
♦ Appear to one’s eyes ♦ Extremely slowly
♦ No end of (a time) ♦ A large amount of traffic
♦ Stand comparison with ♦ A raised place in the middle
of the road where people can
wait for traffic to pass
В. Use some idioms to make up a story. A student starts it with

“Last month I went to the capitai of the country”. Other students

English.
0 Model: I live far from school and I go there by bus. It takes me
half an hour to get there. In the morning streets and buses are over-
crowded. It s difficult to get to school through heavy traffic along
busy streets. But I get up early in the morning not to be late for
classes.
1. It’s difficult to get to school through heavy traffic along crowded
streets. 2. That night we took our guests out on the town. 3. The
tourists are eager to go sightseeing. 4. We were moving at a snail’s
pace. 5. From this building you can get a bird’s eye view of the city.
6. I asked the question just out of curiosity. 7. We only got a glimpse
of the town. 8. The children were all eyes at the Zoo. 9. She feasted
her eyes upon the beautiful palace. 10. The tourists’ eyes were glued
to the scene below. 11. I’ve heard a lot about this place. I’d like to see
it with my own eyes. 12. The size of the park defies description.
13. There are one or two really good theatres that bear comparison
with this one. 14. They were favourably impressed by the size of the
stadium. 15. The writer’s first impressions of the capital are given in
her autobiography.
plete the idiom.
B. Use the sentences in some meaningful context
1. They are moving at a ___(snake's, snipe's, snail's, snapper's)
pace. 2. The tourist___(fitted, fed, feasted, fixed) his eyes upon the
tall building. 3. The c ity ___(feed, fade, fail, fit) his description.
4. That modem c ity ___(defines, defies, denies, declines) descrip
tion. 5. This town doesn’t ___(beard, bare, bear, bar) comparison
with my native town! 6. First impressions are most___(lacking, lav
ish, laughable, lasting). 7. There’s a nice cafe within___(walking,
working, warning, watching) distance.
1. Mor felt within him the quick stir of excitement which came
with the first___(light / sight) of London, always for him, as in his
country childhood, the beautiful and slightly sinister city of possibil-
ities and promises.
2. When we got to the top of the hill a wonderful view __
(appeared / appealed) to our eyes. We were favourably impressed
with it.
(From The Gentleman in the Parlour by W. S. Maugham)
3. “Have you heard from your wife yet?..” “Yes, 1 had letters by
this mail. She’s having n o ___(ending/ end) of a time.”
(From The Gentleman in the Parlour by W. S. Maugham)
4. Larry was a ll___(ears / eyes) as the train sped through the
country.
5. Philip___(feasted/fixed) his eyes on the richness of the green
leaves.
6. “But it is one thing to know about it, and another thing to see
it with your__ (owing / own) eyes,” the man said.
(From From the Terrace by J. O’Hara)
7. “Mr. Brown from England?” Marcel asked.
“Yes. Mr. Brown from England.” He went upstairs reluctantly.
The strangers on the balcony were watching me w ith__(courtesy /
curiosity). The sun was about to set. Petit asked, “You have come
from England?”
“Yes”
“From London?”
“Yes”
“How do you like it here, Mr. Brown?”
“I have only been here two hours.” The next day I had the expla
nation of his interest: there was a paragraph about me in the social
column of the local paper.”
(From Comedians by Gr. Green)
8. In London there were relatives to meet us and take us home to
stay with them. And every day to take us round to see those___
(signs / sights) that would most delight a little boy: the Horse Guards
and the Tower of London, and the Crown Jewels.
(From It's Me, О Lord by R. Kent)
A. V. Kunin.
1. “Парню и до дому рукой подать”, - сказал первый из моих
знакомых. (В. Короленко. Река играет) 2. Мы с семи часов были на
пароходе, в двух шагах от города и пристани. (Г. Успенский. На
Кавказе) 3. Он поднялся на холм... Теперь перед ним, с птичьего
полета, стлался город, змеилась река... (Бахметьев. Из плена лет)
4. Покуда паром черепашьим ходом переплывает на другую
сторону, между переправляющимися идет оживленный разго
вор. (М. Салтыков-Щедрин. Благонамеренные речи) 5. Береговые
постройки не бросаются в глаза своей восточной оригиналь
ностью. (Г. Успенский. Очерки) 6. Байрон говорил, что никогда не
возьмется описывать страну, которой не видал бы собствен
ными глазами. (А. Пушкин. Отрывки из писем, мысли и замечания)
7. Она глядела на него во все глаза... (И. Гончаров. Обрыв) 8. Я, ко
нечно, с большим интересом наблюдал на улицах и в переулках
за всем, что мне попадалось на глаза. (М. Исаковский. На Ельнинс
кой земле) 9. И Наташа сидела, не двигаясь, не сводила глаз с
купола тогда только что построенного собора... (И. Бунин. ('vxotUn)
10. С раннего детства испытал он босыми ногами все ... тропин
ки, и каждый кустик, каждый камешек навеки врезались ему в
память. (С. Антонов. Дело было в Пенькове) 11. Все, затаивши дух,
впились вдаль глазами. (Д. Бедный. Земля! Земля!) 12. Я помню, в
двух шагах от нашего дома, под горой, было озеро. (Ф. Достоевс
кий. Бедные люди) 13. Засияли огни кафе, замелькали рекламы,
бесконечный поток машин, в котором была и наша, устремился к
главным артериям, и там в первые минуты при виде таких
знакомых ... памятников, площадей, перекрестков я подумал, что
Париж совершенно не изменился и что все та же жизнь бьет
ключом в этом городе, некогда общепризнанной столице мира.
(Н. Любимов. Двадцать лет спустя) 14. Голос его, без намере
ния, был нежен, взгляд не отрывался от нее. (И. Гончаров. Обрыв)
15. Однажды он на своей машине ночью на полном газу про
скочил немецкие укрепления. (Б. Полевой. Повесть о настоящем
человеке)
Last summer I went to London. Every day of my stay there 1
visited some famous, interesting places. From the plane I had a nice
view of the city. My friends and I visited the National Gallery.
Nothing could escape our notice. We were very pleased to see some
beautiful palaces, too. To my mind, they were more attractive than
the modem buildings. But 1 was only interested in ancient buildings.
I was unable to stop looking at them, because they were very beauti
ful. I can never forget them. My friends and I admired the sights of
London. They were like the places described in the books I had read.
I watched them with great attention.
London is a busy, noisy city. We could see a large amount of traf
fic there. There were crowds of people everywhere. A lot of tourists
came to see the sights.
I was glad to be there and see the most beautiful places of the city.
I spent a very good time in London.V I.
VII. Link each of the pictures (203-204 pages) with one of the
1 Be all eyes. 3. Live in the street.
2 A safety island. 4. Heavy traffic.
have read that will lead you to say “First impressions are most
fasting”.

tences.
1. Modern buildings lack the eye appeal of ancient houses. 2. I
couldn’t take my eyes from the palace. 3. I’m glad Г11 see everything
within walking distance of this place. 4. We got a glimpse of the
centre with my own eyes. 5 . 1 found the city fitting that description.
6. The beauty of the place defies description. 7. It’s a beautiful square
but it won’t stand comparison with the main square of the city. 8. Our
tour around the city was forever imprinted on my mind. 9. I was
favourably impressed with that place. 10.1had no end of a time there.
11. Of course, first impressions can be deceptive.

1. A beautiful fountain falling into a marble basin attracted our
attention. 2. I was impressed and charmed with the neatness of that
little town. 3. We made up our minds to go sightseeing on Sunday.
4. My friends like to go out on the town. 5. There’s a very interesting
museum within walking distance of this place. 6. We got a glimpse of
the center of the town from the window of a car. 7. When the tourists
reached the square, a magnificent building appeared to their eyes.
8. The great variety of small beautiful cafes burst upon our sight. It
was an additional pleasure in seeing the town. 9. We feasted our eyes
upon the magnificent ancient church. 10. Our eyes were glued to the
unusual building,

(The passages come from A Tour through the Whole Island
o f Great Britain by D. Defoe)
l. Besides the colleges, some of which are extremely fine and
magnificent; there are some public buildings which make a most glo
rious appearance. The first and greatest of all is the theatre, a build
ing not to be equalled by any thing of its kind in the world. 2. The
antiquity of this place is doubtless very great. 3. The building will
add much to the beauty of the city. 4. It’s an ancient middling city,
tolerably built, but not fine. 5. The cathedral is an old venerable pile,
with very little ornament within or without, yet it’s well built; and
though plain, it makes together, especially the tower, a very hand
some appearance. The inhabitants boast much of its antiquity.
XII. Explain and expand on the following. Use the idioms given
in Unit 12.
(The passages come from Travel Letters by M. W. Montagu).
I. The town seems so full of people, with such busy faces, all in
motion, that I can hardly fancy it is not some celebrated fair; but I see
it is every day the same. 2. This town did not at all answer my ideas
of it; being much less than I expected to find it, the streets are very
close, and so narrow, one cannot observe the fine fronts of the palaces,
though many of them very well deserve observation, being truly mag
nificent, all built of fine white stone, and excessive high. 3. The town
is the neatest I have seen in the country; most of the houses are new
built. 4. It’s a building very well worth the curiosity of a traveller.
5. The building is situated very advantageously in the midst of the
city, and in the highest part, making a very noble show. 6. The city is
situated in a very fine bay; and being built on a rising hill, intermixed
with gardens, and beautified with the most excellent architecture,
gives a very fine prospect off at sea; though it lost much of its beauty
in my eyes, having been accustomed to that of Constantinople.
1. Your friend is interested in the sights of the city you live in.
Describe the nicest part of the city to him / her.
2. Your friend has been to London on business. He / she was there
for the first time. Ask him of his / her impression.
XIV. Here are some paragraphs of five different books. Read and
translate the following passages into Russian. Some cities /
towns are described in them: Blackstable (England., Hong
Kong (China), Oxford (England), Constantinople (Turkey),
London (England).
A. Match the title of each book with the city decribed in it.
B. What helped you to match them? Was it content (names,
details), language, or style?
C. In your opinion, which extract is a) most factual; b) most
poetic; c) most nostalgic?
D. Use your imagination to write an essay or a story about one
of the cities / towns mentioned above. Use the idioms given
in Unit 12.
1. The Asian side is covered with fruit-trees, villages, and the
most delightful landscapes in nature; on the European, stands [the
city] situated on seven hills. The unequal heights make it seem as large
again as it is (though one of the largest cities in the world), shewing
an agreeable mixture of gardens, pine and cypress-trees, palaces,
mosques, and public buildings, raised one above another, with as
much beauty and appearance of symmetry as your ladyship ever saw
in a cabinet adorned by the most skilful hands, jars shewing them
selves above jars, mixed with canisters, babies, and candle-sticks. This
is a very odd comparison, but it gives me an exact image of the thing.
(From Travel Letters by M. W. Montagu)
2. It’s a noble flourishing city, so possessed of all that can con
tribute to make the residence of the scholars easy and comfortable,
that no spot of ground in England goes beyond it. The situation is in a
delightful plain, on the bank of a fine navigable river, in a plentiful country,
and at an easy distance from the capital city, the port of the country.
(From A Tour through the Whole Island
of Great Britain by D. Defoe)
3. The bungalow stood half way down a steep hill and from her
window she saw the narrow river below her and opposite the city.
The dawn had just broken and from the river rose a white mist
shrouding the junks that lay moored close to one another like peas in
a pod. There were hundreds of them, and they were silent, mysteri
ous in that ghostly light, and you had a feeling that their crews lay
under an enchantment, for it seemed that it was not sleep, but some
thing strange and terrible, that held them so still and mute.
The morning drew on and the sun touched the mist so that it shone
whitely like the ghost of snow on a dying star. Though on the river it
was light so that you could discern palely the lines of the crowded
junks and the thick forest of their masts, in front it was a shining wall
the eye could not pierce. But suddenly from that white cloud a tall,
grim, and massive bastion emerged. It seemed not merely to be made
visible by the all-discovering sun but rather to rise out of nothing at
the touch of a magic wand. It towered, the stronghold of a cruel and
barbaric race over the river. But the magician who built worked swift
ly and now a fragment of coloured wall crowned the bastion; in a
moment, out of the mist, looming vastly and touched here and there
by a yellow ray of sun, there was seen a cluster of green and yellow
roofs. Huge they seemed and you could make out no pattern; the
order, if order there was, escaped you; wayward and extravagant but
of an unimaginable richness. This was no fortress, nor a temple, but
the magic palace of some emperor of the gods where no man might
enter. It was too airy, fantastic, and unsubstantial to be the work of
human hands; it was the fabric of a dream.
4. The town consisted of a long winding street that led to the sea,
with little two-story houses, many of them residential but with a good
many shops; and from this ran a certain number of short streets,
recently built, that ended on one side in the country and on the other
in the marshes. Round about the harbour was a congeries of narrow
winding alleys. Colliers brought coal from Newcastle to [the town]
and the harbour was animated. When I was old enough to be allowed
out by myself 1 used to spend hours wandering about there looking at
the rough grimy men in their jerseys and watching the coal being
unloaded.
5. The Roman historian Tacitus gives us the first recorded detail
of the city, which even in the year AD 62 was arriving market town,
though not as large as many other Roman settlements. Towards the
end of the Roman era the city was enclosed by a wall, but little is
known of its subsequent history until the reign of King Alfred, who
refortified the city against the Danes. The arrival of the Normans
brought a change in the fortunes of the city, for William the
Conqueror granted it a charter and began to build the Tower.
Westminster Hall was begun by William Rufus and in 1176 the first
bridge was built in the city. From about 1190 until the 14th century
the city was governed by the mayor and aldermen.
XV. Speak on one of the following topics. Use the idioms given in
Unit 12.
1. The prettiest sight I’ve ever seen.
2. A tour of a famous city.
3. Some amusements of a big city.
4. What makes city life different from life in the country.
5. A town noted for its picturesque scenery.
PROJECT
I. 1. You will read an article from “London Scene” (Jarrold
Publishing, 1995). There are 6 paragraphs in the text. Look at
each and try to summarize the main point, or points, in one,
or possibly two, sentences. Try to apply the idioms given in
Unit 12 to the text. Join the sentences with appropriate link
ing words or phrases to produce a more coherent, flowing
summary.
2. Take part of a guide. Name and describe the most interesting
London traditional ceremonies.
London’s Pageantry
1. Despite London’s prominent position in the fast-moving mod
em world, the capital has managed to retain an enormous number of
traditional ceremonies which bring colour and pageantry to the capi
tal. Many of these ceremonies involve troops which were originally
required to protect the Crown, but which now have the happier task
of enthralling the millions of visitors who come to watch them every
year. Pageantry takes many forms and, apart from infrequent elab
orate events such as royal weddings and coronations, there are daily
ceremonies to be seen in various parts of the capital. At Buckingham
Palace and St James’s Palace, and in Whitehall, guard-mounting is
carried out every day.
2. Units of the Household Division are normally stationed in or
around London. The Division consists of the Life Guards, the Blues
and Royals and the five regiments of Foot Guards: Grenadier,
Coldstream, Welsh, Irish and Scots Guards. The magnificent horses
and accoutrements of the Life Guards and the Blues and Royals are
a constant source of wonder, but it is the Household Cavalry, the
mounted regiment, which provides the Queen’s lifeguard.
3. Between Whitehall and St James’s Park lies Horse Guards,
once part of the royal palace of Whitehall, now no longer standing.
The Changing of the Mounted Guard in the forecourt of the former
palace is one of the most popular daily London ceremonies. Nearby
Horse Guards Parade is the venue for another exciting and colourful
pageant - Trooping the Colour - which takes place annually in June
on the Queen’s official birthday. This is probably the most spectacu
lar military display in the country, dating back more than 200 years
but with its roots probably stretching back to medieval times. The
Queen rides in an open carriage from Buckingham Palace, wearing
the uniform of one of the regiments of which she is Colonel-in-Chief,
to Horse Guards Palace, where the Brigade of Guards and the
Household Cavalry await her. Her Majesty takes the salute and a mar
vellous display of trooping, or carrying, of the colours of selected
regiments then follows. The Queen is then escorted by her Guards
into The Mall and back to Buckingham Palace.
4. The King’s Troop, Royal Artillery, also plays an important part
in royal and state ceremonies, as it is this troop which fires the tradi-
tional.41-gun salute at midday in Hyde Park on such occasions as the
Queen’s Accession Day (February 6), the Queen’s birthday (April
21), Coronation Day (June 2), the Duke of Edinburgh’s birthday
(June Ю). On the same days, a 62-gun salute is fired at the Tower of
London by the Honourable Artillery Company.
5. The Ceremony of the Keys at the Tower of London is steeped
in history: every evening for 700 years the main gate of the Tower has
been locked by the Chief Yeoman Warder and an escort of Guards in
this colourful ritual.
6. London has many other brilliantly colouful events, like the
dazzling displays at the Lord Mayor’s Show when the new Lord
Mayor rides to the Royal Courts of Justice in an eighteenth-century
coach with a bodyguard of Pikemen and Musketeers - a ceremony
which is at least 600 years old. From the traditional occasions, like
the distribution of Royal maundy money, and swan-upping on the
Thames, to the spectacle of the Notting Hill Carnival and the
University Boat Race, London has many colourful events to offer
throughout the year
II. 1. Read an extract from the article “New Island in the Sun” by
J. Walsh (“Time”- the weekly news-magazine, October 27,1997).
2. Pick out the idiomatic expressions in the article; comment
on their types and meanings.
3. Comment on the author's statement: “No longer is Britain
the country sulking in the corner ” Look through some news
papers and magazines to find proof that “The whole British
scene has changed enormously and the country looks much
better today than it has for a long time. ”
After 50 years of struggling against what often seemed imposs
ible odds, the United Kingdom is showing an unmistakable spring in
its step. It has the feel of a younger, fresher, getting-ahead sort of
place - not simply for wide boys pouring bubbly in brokerage houses
but for ordinary people. In a country long synonymous with rusting
mills, entrenched joblessness and class warfare, production and
employment have come roaring back. Beyond London, even such
real bywords for grit as Cardiff and Newcastle upon Tyne are turning
the corner toward prosperity, based on advanced new industries. Says
Alastair Balls, chief executive of the Newcastle region’s renewal
agency, the Tyne and Wear Development Corp.: “You arrive at
Newcastle airport, which is expanding almost as you watch it. The
BMW dealers are doing business like there’s no tomorrow and people
take two holidays abroad a year. The people who are in employ
ment and in the new industries are doing very nicely.” The arts are
flourishing, cultural exports are an international hit, and people are
exploring new horizons of the world. At the everyday level Britain is
breathing freer. Simple pleasures like dining out and cooking exotic
foods are changing the ways Britons think of their world.
Labour’s entry spelled to many millions a newfound sense of
national unity. What Blair calls “compassion with a hard edge”
strikes most Britons today as just what the doctor ordered: fiscal vigi
lance and a free market, but with a shift from the Me Decade to the
We Decade. Paradoxically, even the terrible sorrow that engulfed
Britain after the death of Diana, Princess of Wales, turned out to be
something of a healing episode when Blair, with a lump in his throat,
evinced a very able, measured show of strength.
Although he was also accused of an unseemly attempt to steal the
moment, he really did capture the yearning for a society made whole,
less divided into what Benjamin Disraeli called “the two nations” of
rich and poor.
TRAVELLING
VACATION
IDIOMS
1. Go on / take a trip
2. Make a trip
3. Day trip
4. Be off on one’s travels
5. Travel the world / country
6. Travel widely
7. Travel light
8. Live in one’s trunks
9. Here today and gone tomorrow
10. All aboard
11. For a change
12. The ends of the earth
13. At the ends of the earth
14. To the end(s) of the earth
15. Attract smb like a magnet
16. Broaden the mind
17. The chance of a lifetime
18. A dream come true
19. Bring back memories
20. Culture shock
21. So many countries, so many customs
22. When in Rome, do as the Romans do
23. Variety is the spice of life
24. The world is a small place
25. The seven wonders of the world
1. Go on / take a trip - to have a journey to a place and back again.
E.g.: They're planning o f taking a trip to the mountains.
2. Make a trip - to have a journey to a place and back again.
E.g.: He had to make another trip to the centre o f the city.
3. Day trip - a pleasure trip done in one day.
E.g.: The children are going on a day trip to the castle.
4. Be off on one’s travels - be travelling for pleasure.
E.g.: Are they off on their travels this summer?
5. Travel the world / country - to go to most parts of the world or
most parts of a particular country.
E.g.: They are travelling the world now.
6. Travel widely - to go to many different places.
E.g.: They have travelled widely.
7. Travel light - to travel without taking many bags.
E.g.: They like to travel light.
8. Live in one’s trunks - not to take things out of a box or suitcase.
E.g.: He's been living in his trunks for the past two months.
9. Here today and gone tomorrow - present for only a very short
time.
E.g.: He was here today and gone tomorrow.
10. All aboard - used to tell passengers of a ship, bus, or train that
they must get on because it will leave soon.
E.g.: The conductor shouted, “All aboard!"
11. For a change - a situation or experience that is different from
what happened before, and is usually interesting or enjoyable.
E.g.: Let's go to the mountains for a change.
12. The ends of the earth - distant places.
E.g.: They have come from the ends o f the earth.
13. At the ends of the earth = at the end of the world - far away.
E.g.: They arrived at a place that seemed to be at the end o f
the world.
14. To go to the end(s) of the earth - to go to a far-away place
E.g.: He was ready to go to the ends o f the earth.
15. Attract smb like a magnet - to make someone interested in
something.
E.g.: The river banks attract holiday-makers like a magnet.
16. Broaden the mind - if an experience broadens your mind, it
makes you more willing to accept or tolerate other people’s
beliefs and ways of doing things; to educate.
E.g.: Travel broadens the mind
17. The chance of a lifetime - an opportunity you are not likely to
get more than once.
E.g.: The offer o f a free trip round the world is the chance of
a lifetime.
18. A dream come true - something that you wanted to happen for
a long time.
E.g.: Visiting that place after all these years was a dream come
true.
19. Bring back memories - to remind you of pleasant events.
E.g.: That city brings back memories.
20. Culture shock - the feelings of shock and anxiety that someone
has when they visit a foreign country or a new place for the first
time.
E.g.: They found life in Hong Kong a bit o f a culture shock at
first.
21. So many countries, so many customs (proverb) - every country
has some established and habitual practice, especially of a relig
ious or social kind, that is typical of it, of its people.
22. When in Rome, do as the Romans do - one should follow the
customs of the people one is visiting or living with.
23. Variety is the spice of life (saying) - the chance or the ability to
do many different things, know many different people, etc., is
what makes life enjoyable.
24. The world is a small place - this phrase is used by acquaintances
when they meet each other unexpectedly.
E.g.. We meet again. The world is a small place.
25. The seven wonders of the world - the seven structures which
were considered by medieval and ancient writers to be the most
interesting in the ancient world. The structures were the Pyramids
of Egypt, the Hanging Gardens of Babylon, the statue of Zeus at
Olympia, the temple of Artemis at Ephesus, the Mausoleum (bur
ial-place) at Halicarnassus, the Colossus (a very large statue) at
Rhodes, and the Pharos (a light-house) at Alexandria.
CULTURE CONTEXT
H O L ID A Y S

walking holidays package tours
Lake District Benidorm
Mustique Devon Costa del Sol
Gstaad Cornwall Ibiza
The Caribbean France Blackpool
Tuscany British seaside
cruises caravans
camping holiday camps
Orient Express villas
gites
holiday cottages
В and В
V________________________________________________ /
В Notes:
Mustique [mu'st i: k] —a small island in the Caribbean. It’s a popu
lar place for very rich people, including members of the British Royal
family, to take holidays.
Gstaad [go'Jtard] - a town in Switzerland, famous as a place
where especially rich people go skiing.
The Caribbean [,kaerio'bi:on] - the islands in the Caribbean Sea,
the area around the Caribbean Sea.
Cruise [kru. z] - a sea voyage for pleasure, especially one on a
large ship and lasting for several days or weeks. This type of holiday
is usually expensive and many people think that only rich people go
on cruises.
The Orient Express - a railway train for the rich which became
famous for making the journey from Europe (starting in London) all
the way across Asia. It now runs regularly only between London and
Venice.
Walking holidays - holidays consisting of or done by travelling
on foot.
The Lake District - an area in NW England where there are a
number of lakes in beautiful mountain scenery which attract many
tourists. It includes England’s highest mountain, Scafell Pike
['skorfel 'paik].
Devon fdevon] - a country in SW England noted for its natural
beauty. Many British people think of cream, cider, and holidays in
connection with Devon.
Cornwall ['ko:nwD:l ] - a country in the extreme SW of England
which is a popular tourist area.
Tuscany ftAskoni] - a region in N central Italy; capital Florence,
Tuscany is a popular place for middle-class British people to go for a
holiday.
Camp - a place where people live in tents or huts, usually for a
short time.
Villa ['vilo] - a pleasant country house in its own garden, often
used for only part of the year for holidays, especially in southern
Europe; a large house on the edge of a town usually with a garden and
usually built before 1914; a large ancient Roman country house with
the buildings and (farm) land belonging to it.
Cite [3i:t] - a furnished house in a country area of France that
people can book for a holiday. They are popular with British people
because they are cheaper than hotels and more comfortable than
camping. Gites are popular especially with middle-class people in
Britain.
Package tour = package holiday - a completely planned holiday
arranged by a company at a fixed price, which includes travel, hotels,
meals etc.
Many people take package holidays abroad, and there are all
kinds of tours to suit different people. However, the popular image of
a package tour is of a cheap holiday to a place by the sea in southern
Europe (especially Spain).
Benidorm ['bemdorm] - a town on the Spanish Mediterranean
coast visited by tourists from many European countries and popular
with British people as a place to go on a package holiday.
The Costa del Sol del ' s d I ] / [ 'kousto del 'soul] -
the part of the Mediterranean coast in Spain. It is a popular place for
British people to go on holiday, but also people often think of the
Costa del Sol as a place where successful criminals go to live.
Ibiza [ i bi:0o, ai -] - a Spanish island SW of Majorca, where
many European people go on holiday.
Blackpool - a town on the N W coast of England, a popular place
for people, especially working class people, to go for the day or for a
holiday.
Caravan ['kaerovaen] - a vehicle which can be pulled by a car,
which contains cooking and sleeping equipment, and in which
people live (often on a caravan site) or travel, usually for holi
days.
Holiday camp - a place, often by the sea, where people can go for
their holidays. Holiday camps have buildings where people can sleep,
restaurants, bars, and often a funfair, all in the same area.
Usage
Compare travel(s), journey, voyage and trip.
The general activity of moving from place to place is travel. If a
person moves from place to place over a period of time we speak of
his travels.
A journey is the time spent and the distance covered in going
from one particular place to another. Л voyage lias the same meaning
but is only by sea.
A trip is a short journey, or one on which you spend only a short
time in another place, then come back.
Travel agency = travel agent's = travel bureau - a business that
arranges travel, e.g.: by buying tickets, finding hotel rooms, etc.
Traveller ys cheque a cheque bought from a bank or travel agency
that can be exchanged lor the money of the country one is in, used by
travellers abroad.
TESTING VOCABULARY
I. A. Match the following English idioms to their respective die•
♦ A day trip ♦ Travel without taking many

bags
♦ When in Rome, do as the ♦ Educate
Romans do
♦ Bring back memories ♦ An opportunity you are not
likely to get more than once
♦ Broaden the mind ♦ The feelings of shock that
someone has when they visit
a foreign country for the first
time
♦ A dream come true ♦ Go to most parts of the
world
♦ Travel light ♦ Follow the customs of the
people you’re visiting
♦ Travel widely ♦ Remind you of pleasant
events
♦ The chance of a lifetime ♦ A pleasure trip done in one
day
♦ Culture shock ♦ Go to many different places
♦ Travel the world ♦ Something that you wanted
to happen for a long time

with “Travel broadens the mind". Other students should take
turns building upon this sentence, turn by turn.I.

English.
Q Model: The Smiths took a coach trip round the island. They were
charm ed hy the sights. But the best part o f the trip was the
scenery. It was fantastic.
1. The Smiths took a coach trip round the island. 2. My father
often goes on business trips abroad. 3. I have travelled widely. 4. My
friend always travels light. 5. Mr Brown is off on his travels 6. We
were glad to leave the car parked and walk for a change. 7. The sights
of the city attract tourists like a magnet. 8. Reading broadens the
mind. 9. You may be able to win the holiday of a lifetime. 10. Variety
is the spice of life.
word missing. Choose one of the four alternatives to com-
plete the idiom.
1. We took an interesting__(trip, trimf tripper, trike) round the
place. 2. My friends never travel___(right, bright, light, alight).
3. The passengers heard his voice, “A ll__(abode, about, above,
aboard)” 4. Life there was a culture___(block, shock, chock, mock).
5. Variety is the_(space, span, spice, speck) of life. 6. Here today
and___(gone, run, come, flown) tomorrow.
1. No, you’ve got Anne all day and all night. Come with me for
a ___(charge / change).
(From Swan Song by J. Galsworthy)
2. As for dealers they have come from th e ___(ends / ending) of
the earth.
(From The Good Companions by J. B. Priestley)
3. We all travelled__ (right /light), taking with us only what we
considered to be the bare essentials of life. When we opened our lug
gage for Customs inspection, the contents of our bags were a fair
indication of character and interests.
(From My Family and Other Animals by G. Durrcll)
4. Fashion is an arbitrary mistress to whom most women arc
slaves, but though her mandates are often unreasonable ami svidum
absurd, she is followed willingly, for the reward she offers is that
sense of adventure and variety which is the___(space / spice) of life.
(From Fifty Model Essays by J. Miller)
5. They managed to cross the Channel and make the coach__
(tip / trip) to Paris without any tragedies. After a short stay in Paris
they took other horse-drawn coaches for the journey from Paris south
to Marseilles. From Marseilles the family travelled along the
Mediterranean coast to Italy, and Dickens was delighted with the
scenery, the brilliant sun, the blue and sparkling sea. No English fogs,
no drizzle, just warm sunshine!
The city of Genoa was their destination. They found th eir__
(road/way) through the narrow streets to a pink house called Villa di
Bella Vista. It was a three-storey house, with grape-vines and fig and
orange trees in its garden. The snow-capped Alps stood up high in
one direction and the Mediterranean Sea glistened in another.
(From Charles Dickens by K. Peer)
6. In the autumn of 1867, in spite of failing health, Charles
Dickens did take a ___(trip / trap) to America. It was an even greater
triumph than his first American visit, but he had to live through many
tiring leadings, banquets, balls, receptions, and meetings.
(From Charles Dickens by K. Peer)
7. “Fancy you knowing old Ponsonby...” “The world certainly is
a very small___ (pace / place) .”
(From Nature Study by N. Coward)V
.

A. V. Kunin.
I. “Так ты пойдешь за мною всюду?” - говорил он ей. -
“Всюду, на край земли”. (И. Тургенев. Накануне) 2. Я воображал се
бя на краю света, в уголке, пренебреженном просвещенными
жителями столицы. (А. Грибоедов. Письмо к издателю “Сына
Отечества”, 21 января 1819 г.) 3. Уже нигде ничего не было
слышно и ничего не видать, даже не понять было, в какой
стороне деревня. Думалось, что они ушли на край света...
(В. Ьыков. Дожить до рассвета) 4. Она вдруг получила известие о
смерти одного своего дальнего родственника, человека стран
ного, жившего затворником где-то за тридевять земель, в
захолустье. (Ф. Достоевский. Село Степанчиково и его обитатели)
5. Торопливо вбегаю на ют, осматриваюсь на все стороны, -
глазам не верю! Никогда еще не случалось видеть над собою
такого темно-голубого ... небесного свода. (Д. Григорович. Корабль
“Ретвизан ”) 6. Во все стороны хутора, куда ни кинешь взглядом,
всюду бежали ровные поля и желтела рожь, перехваченная
лугами, которые сливались с небосклоном. (Д. Григорович. Пере
селенцы) 7. А степь-то, степь какая была! Куда глазом ни кинешь -
ковыль, море седое. (И. Соколов-Микитов. В каменной степи) 8. Будь
среди этой массы людей поэт, у него глаза разбежались бы от
великого множества впечатлений. Поистине каждый человек,
двигавшийся по дороге, мог бы стать героем поэмы или повести.
(Э. Казакевич. Весна на Одере) 9. Каждое лето мимо нашей стан
ции на юг ехало много курортников. Провожая глазами зеленый
состав, дядя Павел задумчиво говорил: - Вот едут и едут. Види
мо, уж больно хорошо там. Одним бы глазком поглядеть.
(Полторацкий. В родных краях) Ю. Дожидаться московского по
езда приходилось довольно долго, а поэтому от нечего делать
стараешься убить время разными пустяками. (Д. Мамин-Сибиряк.
Настоящий) 11. На другое утро приезжие спали с дороги до де
сятого часа. (Л. Толстой. Война и мир) 12. Еще просил бы у вас,
дражайшая маменька, прислать на дорогу несколько книг каких-
нибудь новых и хороших. (Н. Гоголь. Письмо матери, 10 июня 1825 г.)
13. Закрыв глаза, предавался я страстным мечтаниям. И я уже
видел себя путешественником, искателем приключении. (И. Соко
лов-Микитов. На теплой земле) 14. Он был низкий, широкий в
плечах с полным русским лицом. При этой внешности он
был очень легок на подъем. (А. Фадеев. Молодая гвардия) 15. Мне
много о вас говорила Наташа. И хоть она горячая голова и часто
увлекается, я ей привыкла верить. Потом мы же с вами одно
кашники, я вас хорошо помню. Видите, как мир тесен. (А. Степа
нов. Семья Звонаревых)

Mr Black has gone to many different places. He has gone to most
parts of the world and most parts of his country. Last summer lie was
off travelling for pleasure, too. Now he is planning to have a journey
to some far-away place. Usually he visits some large cities of the
world. This time he wants to see something different, some distant
place where there are not many tourists. Some African countries
attract him. It’s an opportunity he is not likely to get more than once.
Mr Black thinks that his new experience will educate him in some
way, as every country has some established and habitual practice. He
has a good opportunity to join a group of scientists going there. Mr
Black hopes he’ll be able to realize his dream to go there.
Mr Black likes to do many different things, visit different coun
tries. He is sure that the ability to do it is what makes life enjoyable.
But he is always glad to return home because he finds his home to be
the nicest place.
listed below: Comment on the meaning of each of them. Use
1. Attract smb like a magnet. 3. At the ends of the earth.
2. East or West, home is best. 4. Live in one’s trunks.V
I.X

have read that will lead you to say "So as the proverb goes..."
Proverb: When in Rome, do as the Romans do.

tences.
1. So he made an interesting trip. 2. It was a nice day trip. 3. He
is off on his travels this summer. 4. They’ve almost explored the
whole world. They’ve travelled to the ends of the earth trying to learn
about our world. 5. This is a once-in-a-lifetime chance. Don’t miss it.
6. Travelling the world is a dream come true. 7. 1 always carry an
umbrella when I visit London. When in Rome do as the Romans do.
8. She travels the country. She says variety is the spice of life. 9. We
decided to go to the Lake District for a change. 10. The boat is ready
to leave. All aboard!
1 I hc Blacks live way out in the country at the ends of the earth.
2. Going to the USA is like having a dream come true. 3 .1 don’t usu-
ally eat caviar, but 1 did when 1went to Russia. When in Rome, do as
the Romans do. 4. We are going on a trip to the country next week.
5. The Smiths travel all over the world so they can learn how differ
ent people live. After all, variety is the spice of life. 6. This temple
was one of the seven Wonders of the World in ancient times. 7. We’re
going on a day trip to the country. 8. My friend going to travel round
the world for a year. 9. These photos bring back memories. 10. Their
habits left us all speechless from a culture shock.
XL Provide a natural conversational context for each of the fol
(Passage l comes from The Painted Veil by W. S. Maugham;
Passages 2-4 are from The Sandcastle by I. Murdoch; Passages 5-10
are from My Family and Other Animats by G. Durrell).
1. I feel like one of those old sailors who set sail for undiscovered
seas and l think my soul hankers for the unknown.
2. There’s nothing to spend money on in this God-forsaken back
water.
3. They turned into the green-shaded maze of roads...
4. The roar of the train died away into the distance.
5. If we’re going to Greece, let’s all go together.
6. Larry was accompanied by two trunks of books and a briefcase
containing his clothes. Mother’s luggage was sensibly divided
between clothes and various volumes on cooking and gardening. I
travelled with only those items that I thought necessary to relieve the
tedium of a long journey...
7. It has taken three husky peasant boys half an hour’s sweating
and panting to get Larry’s trunks into the villa, while Larry bustled
round them, directing operations. One of the trunks was so big it had
to be hoisted in through the window. Once they were installed, Larry
spent a happy day unpacking them, and the room was so full of books
that it was almost impossible to get in or out.
8. During these trips Roger and I came to know and be known by
a great number of people in various parts of the surrounding country
side.
9 .1 made my way back home through the darkening fields, to tell
the family of my new discovery...
Ю. We could make trips along the jagged coastline to remote and
deserted beaches golden as com...
8 Янсон В.
XII. Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use
1. Your friend has just returned from a trip. Ask him / her about it.
2. You are thinking about going away on vacation. Ask a travel
agent where he / she thinks you should go.
3. Your friend and you are talking about an exciting trip you
would like to have.
4. Your friend and you are talking about your favourite pastime.
XIII. A. Here are some paragraphs of five different books. Read

and translate them into Russian. Some countries are described
in them: Egypt, England', Greece (Corfu), Holland, China.
Match the title of each book with the country described in it.
B. What helped you to match them? Was it content (names,
details), language?
C. In your opinion, which extract is a) most factual; b) is most
poetic; c) is most nostalgic?
D. Use your imagination to write an essay or a story about one
of the countries mentioned above. Use the idioms given in
Unit 13.
1. Gradually the magic of the island settled over us as gently and
clingingly as pollen. Each day had a tranquillity, a timelessness,
about it, so that you wished it would never end. But then the dark skin
of night would peel off and there would be a fresh day waiting for us,
glossy and colourful as a child’s transfer and with the same tinge of
unreality...
Behind our villa there were a series of small hills that raised shaggy
crests above the surrounding olive-groves. They were hills covered
with great beds of green myrtle, tall heather and a patchy feathering
of cypress-trees'. This was probably the most fascinating area of the
whole garden, for it was overflowing with life.
(From My Family and Other Animals by G.Durrell)
2, One day passed after the other. The sights of the wayside
served as a background to her thoughts. She saw them as it were in
duplicate, rounded as though in a stereoscope, with an added signifi
cance because to everything she saw was added the recollection of
what she had seen when but a few short weeks before she had taken
the same journey in the contrary direction. The coolies with their
loads straggled disorderly» two or three together... Now and then they
met a string of coolies lolloping by in line with their heavy burdens...
Now and then they came across peasants in faded blue and huge hats
on their way to market... They passed up and down little hills laid out
with trim rice-fields and farm-houses nestling cosily in a grove of
bamboos; they passed through ragged villages and populous cities...
The sun of the early autumn was pleasant, and if at daybreak, when
the slimmering dawn lent the neat fields the enchantment of a fairy
tale, it was cold, the warmth later was very grateful. Kitty was filled
by it with a sense of beatitude which she made no effort to resist.
3. The whole country appears a large garden; the roads all well
paved, shaded on each side with rows of trees, and bordered with
large canals, full of boats, passing and repassing. Every twenty paces
gives you the prospect of some villa, and every four hours a large
town, so surprisingly neat, l am sure you would be charmed with
them. The place I am now at is certainly one of the finest villages in
the world. Here are several squares finely built and (what l think a
particular beauty) set with thick large trees...
Nothing can be more agreeable than travelling in this country.
(From Travel Letters by M. W. Montagu)
4. A mile farther brought us to the seat of colonel Mitford,
among the woods of Exbury. This house is no object; but the
scenery consists of a more beautiful profusion of wood, water and
varied grounds, than is commonly to be met with. Here we pro
posed to spend the evening; but not finding colonel Mitford at
home, we took a ramble into his woods, till supper, were we expected
to meet him!
The richness of the scenes had led us umperceptibly from one to
another. We had everywhere instances of the beauty of trees as indi
viduals - as uniting in clumps and as spreading into woods; for all
here is pure nature: and as they were beginning now to put on their
atumnal attire, we were entertained with the beauties of colouring, as
well as of form.
(From Remarks on Forest Scenery by W. Gilpin)
5. Beneath our feet was the golden sand of the desert. The hot sun
poured down overhead... We had arrived in Cairo and had driven out
at once to the Mena House Hotel, right in the shadow of the
Pyramids.
The charm of the country had laid hold of me.
“Look at the Sphinx,” I urged. “Even I can feel the mystery and
the charm it exhales.”
He gazed at the Pyramids thoughtfully. “It is true that they, at
least, are of a shape solid and geometrical, but their surface is of an
unevenness most unpleasing. And the palm-trees I like them not. Not
even do they plant them in rows!”
I cut short his lamentations, by suggesting that we should start for
the camp. We were to ride there on camels, and the beasts were
patiently kneeling, waiting for us to mount, in charge of several pic
turesque boys headed by a voluble dragoman.
(From The Adventure o f the Egyptian Tomb by A. Christie)
XIV. Speak on the following topics. Use the idioms given in Unit 13.
1, My best vacation. 3. A trip to the country.
2. My most vivid memory of last year. 4. Travelling the world.
PROJECT
/. Say what your idea of travelling is. Describe one of your trips
and say what your motives were to take it I.
II. Read and translate the following advertisement into Russian.

Does it convince you to go on a trip? Why? Write an advert
isement for a day trip to some place in idiomatic English.
SPECIAL SUMMER OFFER
Enjoy a wonderful break -
at a price to make you smile
Give yourself a well-earned break this Summer at any one of our
40 Lansbury hotels throughout England and Wales.
They're all located near places of interest.
Until September 1st 1999 we’re offering nightly rates starting
from £18.50 per person including a full English breakfast (that can
mean over 50% off published midweek prices), or from £30.00 per
person per night for bed and breakfast plus dinner from the fixed
price menu. All prices are for two people sharing a twin or double
room from one to any number of nights. It’s the perfect opportunity
for a break, weekend or midweek, without breaking the bank.
Each Lansbury Hotel is different; small enough to be genuinely
friendly, with its own individual character and restaurant of excellent
local reputation. Yet all offer the high standards and service you’d
expect from a big hotel.
You’ll find your bedroom is comfortably furnished and tastefully
decorated, with en suite bathroom, colour TV, radio, hair drier,
trouser press, tea and coffee-making facilities, even a choice of morn
ing paper!
(From Weekend, # 27,1998)
III. A. In the passages quoted below substitute the phraseo-

logical units for words and word combinations which will
express the same denotational meaning. Make whatever
structural changes the substitution may call for.
(Passages 1-5 come from The Sandcastle by I. Murdoch; Passages
6-10 are from The Painted Veil by W. S. Maugham)
B. Compare the passages you have got with the original text
and say what connotational implications the phraseological
units add to the bits of text you’ve analysed.
1. “In fact,” he said, “according to Mr Everard she’s a very shy,
naive girl. She led quite a cloistered life with her father.”
“Quite cloistered!” said Nan. “In France!”
2. “You always pretend people don’t know what they want when
they don’t want what you want,” said Nan. “ You live in a dream
world, Bill.”
3. His house became intolerable to him. It was always too small,
though usually it was better in summer than in winter, since open
windows could lend extra space to the rooms. But Nan could be
relied upon to turn the place topsy-turvy before a holiday, and
Felicity was being more than usually tiresome and tearful.
4. It was raining steadily. Mor had no overcoat. Rain had a small
umbrella swinging over her arm. She handed it to him in silence and
he opened it above them both. Arm in arm they made their way back
to Bond Street.
5. Courage is needed to make the great step. To delay would be
fatal. Such a chance comes but once in a lifetime. Courage he has
never lacked - nor is it likely that he will hesitate now when all his
deepest and most cherished wishes are about to find so complete a
fulfilment.
6. “Your husband is looking rather washed out. I thought he didn’t
mind the heat. Has he been working very hard?”
“He always works hard.”
“I suppose you’re going away soon?”
“Oh, yes, I think I shall go to Japan as I did last year,” she said.
“The doctor says I must get out of the heat if I don’t want to go all to
pieces.”
7. “What are you crying for?”
His voice was cold.
“You’re not obliged to go, are you?”
“No, I go of my own free will.”
8. “You had better look sharp if you want to catch Townsend at
his office. If you decide to come with me to Mei-tan-fu it would be
necessary to start the day after to-morrow.”
“Do you want me to tell him to-day?”
“They say there is no time like the present.”
9. The constant occupation distracted her mind and the glimpses
she had of other lives and other outlooks awakened her imagination.
She began to regain her spirits, she felt better and stronger.
10. One Sunday he suggested that they should take their luncheon
with them and go in chairs to a Buddhist monastery. It was situated
ten miles from the city and had some reputation as a place of pil
grimage...
They started early in order to arrive before the heat of the day and
were carried along a narrow causeway between the rice-fields. Now
and then they passed comfortable farm-houses nestling with friendly
intimacy in a grove of bamboos. Kitty enjoyed the idleness; it was
pleasant after being cooped up in the city to see about her the wide
country.
т а н ?
NATURE
WEATHER
IDIOMS

1. The break of day
2. A breath of (fresh) air
3. King’s (Queen’s or royal) weather
4. Wind and weather
5. Fine weather for the (young) ducks
6. It looks like rain
7. Pour with rain
8. It’s raining cats and dogs
9. Rain or shine
10. In all weathers
11. A break in the weather
12. Weather forecast
13. High summer
14. Green winter
15. (In) the depths of winter
16. In the dead of winter
17. The convulsion of nature
18. The course of nature
19. Holiday season
20. The call of the wild
21. Back to nature
22. Animal welfare / rights //animal rights group
23. Environment friendly environmentally friendly
24. Protected species
25. Endangered species
26. A thing of beauty is a joy for ever
1. The break of day - the time early in the morning when it starts
getting light.
E.g.: The break o f day was beautiful.
2. A breath of (fresh) air - a slight movement of air.
E.g.: There was scarcely a breath o f air.
3. King’s (Queen’s or royal) weather - very nice, beautiful weather.
E.g.: We*re having royal weather.
4. Wind and weather - bad, windy weather.
E.g.: It's a large house, proof against wind and weather.
5. Fine weather for the (young) ducks - rainy weather.
E.g.: It is fine weather for the ducks.
6. It looks like rain - it is probably going to rain.
E.g.: It looks like rain, so let's go home.
7. Pour with rain - to rain very hard.
E.g.:* It s pouring with rain.
8. It’s raining cats and dogs - it is raining very hard.
9. Rain or shine - whatever the weather is like.
E.g.: We 'll go for a walk - rain or shine.
10. In all weathers - in all types of weather.
E.g.: I walk in all weathers.
11. A break in the weather - a short period of good weather.
E.g.: There was a break in the weather.
12. Weather forecast - a report saying what the weather is expected
to be like in the near future.
E.g.: Have you read the weather forecast yet?
13. High summer - the hottest part of summer.
E.g.: I'll go on holiday in high summer.
14. Green winter - mild, snowless winter.
E.g.: Owing to the green winter, we can spend more time in the
open air
15. (In) the depths of winter - the coldest time.
E.g.: It's unpleasant to be out o f doors in the depths o f winter.
16. In the dead of winter - in the middle of winter.
E.g.. / a rriv e d there in the dead o f winter.
17. The convulsion of nature - sudden serious misfortune causing
great suffering and damage (a flood, volcanic eruptions...).
E.g.: Because o f the convulsion o f nature hundreds o f people
died.
18. The course of nature - the usual or natural way that something
happens, develops, or is done.
E.g.: In the course o f nature winter gives way to spring.
19. Holiday season - the time of year when people come to a particu
lar place for a holiday.
E.g.: Summer is a holiday season.
20. The call of the wild - the power that wildlife has to attract some
one.
E.g.: The call o f the wild is a feeling that one must get away from
cities and modern civilization.
21. Back to nature - a style of living in which people try to live
more simply.
E.g.: My motto is “Back to nature”
22. Animal welfare / rights // animal rights group - a group of people
who protest against cruel treatment of animals.
E.g.: They are campaigning for animal rights.
23. Environment friendly = environmentally friendly - not harm
ful to the environment (the air, water, and land in which people,
animals, and plants live). (Culture Context)
E.g.: More legislation is needed to protect the environment.
These containers are environmentally friendly.
24. Protected species - kept safe, especially by guarding.
E.g.: These rare animals are protected by special laws.
They are a protected species [ spi:Ji:z].
25. Endangered species is in danger of becoming extinct
[ik'stirjkt] (no longer existing).
E.g.: This rare animal has become an endangered species.
26. A thing of beauty is a joy for ever (proverb) - “Some shape of
beauty moves away the pall from our dark spirits” John Keats
“Endymion”.
CULTURE CONTEXT
1. The Environmental Health Service - a service which is pro
vided by British local authorities to prevent the spread of illnesses
and to provide services which keep the environment clean.
2. The Green Party - a British political party started in 1973
which wants a nuclear-free society and whose ideas centre around
caring for the environment. Originally it was called the Ecology
Party, changing its name in 1985 in order to get closer to similar
European parties; any of a number of European political parties
whose ideas are concerned with care of the environment.
3. Greenpeace - an international organization which actively
works to protect the environment from harm. It is known especially
for its direct non-violent actions and its desire to stop damage to the
environment caused by nuclear testing, the pouring of poisonous
waste into the sea, and the killing of whales.
4. The National Trust (NT) - a British organization (charity)
which owns and takes care of many beautiful places and historic
buildings in England and Wales, which people may visit. A similar
organization, the National Trust for Scotland, owns and takes care of
places in Scotland. Today, some 6,000 schools and colleges have
taken out Education Group Membership of the Trust. Around half a
million schoolchildren visit these historic houses and countryside
each year. The range of studies undertaken by the schools is extreme
ly wide although history, science, geography, art and environmental
studies figure prominently. The organization is undertaking a continu
ing and growing programme of work in habitat restoration, nature
conservation and species protection, envirQnmental management,
visitor management and coastal zone management and protection.
5. The Government o f Great Britain aims:
♦ to preserve and enhance Britain’s natural and cultural inheritance;
♦ to encourage the more prudent and efficient use of energy and
other resources;
♦ to make sure that Britain’s air and water are clean and safe, and
that controls over wastes and pollution are maintained and
strengthened where necessary;
to maintain Britain’s contribution to environmental research.
6. Biological diversity
By burning forests, draining wet lands, polluting water-courses
and overfishing, mankind is rapidly driving many species to extinc
tion. The Government is supporting international efforts for a global
agreement to protect species of plant and animal life (e.g.: the black
rhino and the African elephants).
7. North Sea
In the North Sea and other seas around Britain, the Government
will work to:
♦ cut inputs of dangerous substances to all coastal waters from
rivers;
♦ bring industrial waste disposal at sea to an end and stop the dump
ing of sewage sludge and incineration at sea;
♦ tighten world-wide standards for chemical and oil discharges at
sea;
♦ reduce pollution from offshore oil installations;
♦ provide greater protection for marine wildlife;
♦ support international efforts to improve research and monitoring.
8. Good Air
Good air is essential for human health and the health of the envi
ronment as a whole. Britain’s air will improve due to:
♦ strengthening of existing controls and exploring longer term
action against pulmonary disease;
♦ new advice on avoiding passive smoking;
♦ extending and improving monitoring of air pollution;
♦ press the E.C. to finalise tight emission standards for all new cars
to reduce carbon monoxide and other harmful emissions.
9. Water
In 1989 the Government created the National Rivers Authority,
one of the strongest environmental protection agencies in Europe.
Already 95% of Britain’s river length is of good or fair quality; the
European Community average is 75%. The newly privatized industry
in England and Wales will invest £28 billion by 2000.
(From A Summary of the Government’s White Paper,
Sept. I.990, London)
Ю. “Taking care o f our environment” is everyone's responsibility.
♦ Conservation o f wildlife and the land enhancement o f the land
scape - The careful preservation and protection of natural things.
such as animals, forests, rivers, and plants, to prevent them being
spoiled, wasted, or lost for ever; increase in strength or amount.
♦ Contaminate (large areas o f land)
- Make impure or bad by mixing in impure, dirty, poisonous mat
ter (e.g.: the leakage from the nuclear reactor).
♦ Hazardous waste
- Waste which contains harmful chemicals or radioactive ma
terials left over from an industrial process. They can be harmful
to people or the environment in many different ways.
♦ Beyond / past remedy
- A way of curing smth.
♦ Remedy some situation / mistake
- Put or make smth bad right.
♦ Recycling plant
- A workplace where materials such as glass or paper which have
been used once are prepared for re-use.
♦ Recyclable (plastic) bags
♦ A bag made o f recycled paper
♦ A recycling centre = place to take recyclables
11. English Climate
The outstanding features of the climate of Britain are its humid
ity, its mildness, and its variability. These characteristics are due in no
small measure to the fact that the prevailing winds blow from the
South-West. All these winds blow from the ocean, they are mild in
winter and cool in summer, and are heavily charged with moisture at
all times. Autumn and winter aie the,wettest seasons except in the
district between the Humber and the Thames where contrary to the
general impression, most rain falls in the summer half of the year.
So far as temperature is concerned, Britain is fortunate in having
warmer winters than any other district in the same latitude.
Another remarkable feature of the climate of Britain is that tem
peratures diminish not from south to north, but from east to west. The
temperature range of London is from 64° to 38° F - no less than 26°.
Though geographers have long been accustomed to take January
and July as the typical winter and summer months, they are not in the
British Isles the coldest and warmest months respectively. For many
parts of the British Isles February is the coldest month and usually
August the hottest month.
Though the westerly winds and the Gulf Stream are important
factors in the climate of Britain, her weather owes its characteristic
variability to the depressions and anticyclones which figure so fre
quently in the weather forecasts. Depressions usually travel over the
islands from west to east, bringing heavy rain to each district in turn.
A depression is an area of low atmospheric pressure in which the
winds blow in an anti-clockwise direction round the centre. In the
centre and north-west of the depression warm moist air is forced
upwards by currents of cool air and rain is thus caused.
Anticyclones are areas of high atmospheric pressure in which the
circulation of the air is in a clockwise direction. The winds are usu
ally light, and there is little upward thrusting of one current over
another, and consequently little rain. As anticyclones frequently
remain stationary for several days, or even weeks, they cause long
spells of hot, dry weather in summer, and long spells of cold, dry
weather in winter.
In the classification of climates Britain falls generally into the
cool temperate, humid type.
TESTING VOCABULARY
/. A. Match the following English idioms to their respective die-
♦ King’s weather ♦ The time early in the morning

♦ Wind and weather ♦ A slight movement of air
♦ Rain or shine ♦ Rainy weather
♦ The break of day ♦ Very nice weather
♦ Environmentally friendly ♦ Whatever the weather is like
♦ A breath of air ♦ Bad, windy weather
♦ Protected species ♦ In the middle of winter
♦ Green winter ♦ Keeping safe
♦ Fine weather for the ducks ♦ Not harmful to the environ
ment
♦ In the dead of winter ♦ Mild winter
В. Use some idioms to make up a story. A student starts it
with “On that day the weather was rainy". Other students

English.
□ Model: It s raining cats and dogs. We'd better stay at home. It л
unpleasant to walk in rainy weather.
I. A thing of beauty is a joy for ever. 2. It’s raining cats and dogs.
3. We arrived there at the break of day. 4. John felt a breath of warm
air on his face. 5. Air pollution has become a serious problem. 6. Ben
went outside for a breath of air. 7. Helen walked more than five miles
to do a job, and in all weathers. 8. Peter looks under the weather. 9. It
looks like rain. Ю. It could be raining cats and dogs on a Saturday
but they’d still go out of town. II. My grandfather gets up at six
o’clock in the morning, rain or shine. 12. My friend’s spending the
high summer in Europe. 13. We often get very mild green winters
here. 14. People must try to understand the “Back to Nature” cult.
plete the idiom.
I. It’s fine weather for th e __ (backs, buds, duns, ducks). 2. It’s
rather cold in the___(dab, dead, dark, date) of winter. 3. Because of
the ___ (convalescence, convulsion, convection, conversion) of
nature the town was ruined. 4. A thing of beauty is a ___(toy, joy,
coil, foil) for ever. 5. There are a lot of endangered___ (spaces,
spans, spares, species). 6. We’re having a ___(breach, breakage,
break, breath) in the weather. 7. We had very mild___(clean, green,
dim, dreamy) winter.IV.
В. Expand on the statements.
1. The British Government is supporting international efforts for
a global agreement to protect endangered___(spares / species).
(From A Summary o f the Government's White Paper)
2. The Government will continue to encourage tree planting in
Britain campaign for animal___(welfare / well-being).
(From A Summary of the Government's White Paper)
3. “You’ve just got to be thankful if we get a bed to sleep on and
a roof over our heads.”
The rain showed no sign of stopping. I t ___ (pored / poured)
down without ceasing...
The rain was like a deluge from heaven, and it rattled on the roof
with a steady persistence that was maddening.
4. The sun of the early autumn was pleasant, and if a t ___(day
break / shimmering / daylight), when the shimmering dawn lent the
neat fields the enchantment of a fairy tale, it was cold, the warmth
later was very grateful.
5. That blasted sun beat down and the glare was so awful, you felt
your eyes would shoot out of your head. The earth cracked and
crumbled, and the crops frizzled. The olives went to rack and ruin. It
was simply hell. One couldn’t get a wink of sleep. I went from room
to room, trying to get a ___(break/ breath) of air. Of course, I kept
the windows shut and had the floors watered, but that didn’t do any
good. The nights were just as hot as the days. It was like living in an oven.
(From A Man from Glasgow by W. S. Maugham)
6. ...What Raymond could have been doing or looking for down
in there, especially in the___(dark/ dead) of winter, nobody had the
vaguest idea,
(From Some Came Running by J. Jones)
7. Mr Swiveller observed that last week was a fine week for
the___(ducks / docks).
(From The Old Curiosity Shop by ( 'h I >u kcnt)
8. It’s a great house still, proof against__ (wind / vim) and
weather, without breaches in the roof or shuttered windows...
(From Dombey and Son by Ch. Dickens)

A. V. Kunin.
I. Громовой удар раздался в другой раз громче и ближе, и
дождь хлынул вдруг как из ведра. (Н. Гоголь. Мертвые души)
2. Ведь вам нельзя теперь ехать,... вы посмотрите-ка, дождь как
из ведра льет... (Ф. Достоевский. Бедные люди) 3. Идти было доволь
но далеко... Дождь лил как из ведра, тротуары были полны
водой, ветер выл как бешеный и вместе с потоками дождя
проникал за воротник пальто. (М. Салтыков-Щедрин. Мелочи жиз
ни) 4. Между тем наступила ясная, хорошая погода; больные
целые дни проводили на воздухе в саду. (В. Гаршин. Красный
цветок) 5. Шум понемногу стихает; люди, изморенные хлопота
ми и.зноем дня, укладываются спать на воздухе... (М. Горький.
Ярмарка в Голтве) 6. Жизнь в деревне, на лоне природы, спо
собствовала тому, что любовь к природе, образовавшаяся при
помощи чтения, находила себе пищу и в действительности. (Ар
хив братьев Тургеневых. Введение ко 2 тому) 7. А приятно ... на
лоне природы жить!.. Какой у вас тут воздух прелестный! (В. Вере
саев. На повороте) 8. Погода уже несколько дней стояла тихая,
ясная, с легкими заморозками по утрам - так называемое бабье
лето. (Л. Толстой. Война и мир) 9. Наступило “бабье лето”. Дни
стали короче. Пожелтели московские бульвары, сады, парки. За
пахло прелыми листьями. (Вьюрков. Рассказы о старой Москве)
Ю. Прошло затяжное бабье лето с седой паутиной на сухой стер
не, с прозрачным застойным воздухом, с шепотом опадавших
листьев, с инеем на крышах по утрам. Ударили первые замороз
ки. (В. Тендряков. Тугой узел) 11. В первые дни было сносно, но
потом задул холодный ветер, разверзлись хляби небесные, реки
затомили луга и дороги. (А. Чехов. Письмо А. А. Суворину, 20мая
liSVO г ) ! 2. На возвратном пути промок до костей благодаря вне
запному ливню. (И. Тургенев. Накануне)
VI. Link each of the pictures (pp. 242-243) with one of the idioms
fisted beiow. Comment on the meaning of each of them. Use
1. Royal weather. 3. Fine weather for the (young, ducks.
2. The convulsion of nature. 4. Wind and weather.
Vli. Rewrite the foliowing text in idiomatic English.

John always gets up early in the morning when it starts getting
light. He opens the window to let some fresh air in. John goes for a
walk whatever the weather is like. He never listens to reports saying
what the weather is expected to be like in the near future. John goes
out of town in all types of weather.
He spends the hottest part of summer at the seaside. In the middle
of winter he stays in town. If the winter is mild, he spends much time
in the open air. If it rains very hard, John takes his umbrella with him
when he goes for a walk. He likes rainy weather too. Of course, John
prefers fine weather. But he doesn’t lose his good spirits because of
the windy and rainy weather. It’s natural that the weather is change
able.
Wildlife attracts John. He wants to be close to nature. Sometimes
he feels he must try to live more simply. John has become a member
of the party which works to protect the environment from harm. He
buys only those things which are not harmful to the environment.
Vili. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you

Proverb: A thing of beauty is a joy for ever.

tences.
1. It was fine weather for the ducks. 2. So we used to go to the
country in all weathers. 3. That’s why we decided to go on holiday in
high summer. 4. Owing to the green winter, there were a few colds.
5. They stayed in town in the depths of winter. 6. They bought only
environmentally friendly containers. 7. Many types of animals and
birds have become endangered species. 8. They began campaigning
for animal rights. 9. He became a member of the Green Party. 10. Their
motto became “Back to nature!”
I. It looks like rain. 2. It’s pouring with rain. 3. It’s raining cats
and dogs. 4 . 1 go for a walk every evening, rain or shine. 5 .1 listened
to the weather forecast in the morning. 6 .1got up at the break of day.
7. There’s hardly a breath of air. 8. We’re having royal weather
today. 9. We’ll go to the mountains in the dead of winter. 10. In the
course of nature spring has given way to summer.
X I Provide a natural conversational context for each of the fol

(Passage l comes from The Voice o f the Turtle by W. S. Maugham;
Passage 2 is from Rain by W. S. Maugham; Passages 3-6 are from
Lord o f the Flies by W. Golding; Passages 7-Ю are from The
Sandcastle by I. Murdoch).
I. “How beautiful nature is’’, she said. 2. The rain was like a del
uge from heaven, and it rattled on the roof with a steady persistence
that was maddening. 3. The darkness was blanket-thick. 4. There was
no light left save that of the stars. 5. An interminable dawn faded the
stars out. 6. The air was thick with butterflies, lifting, fluttering, settl
ing. 7. She was trembling with cold. 8. It was quite dark now. The
moon shone out of a cloudless sky of dark blue. 9. A thunderstorm
seemed imminent. I0. The moon came out of the clouds for a
moment and suddenly the sky was seen in motion.
XII. Explain and expand on the following. Use the idioms given in
Unit 14.
1. The night was soft and balmy. The cedar made a lovely pattern
against the starry sky.
(From The Voice o f the Turtle by W. S. Maugham)
2. A river wound through the meadows of the farm and the
poplars that stood on its bank trembled in the faintest breeze.
3. They saw smiling little villages among fruit trees in the folds
of the majestic mountains, and pleasant ambling rivers that flow
kindly through lush meadows.
244
4. The mellow light of the evening was agreeable and a little
melancholy.
5. She surrendered herself to the beauty of the starry night.
6. After the brilliance of the house the garden was strange, preg
nant with trees and bushes, open to the dew and the stars.
(From The Sandcastle by l. Murdoch)
7. There was a thick wood of oak and birch, dense with fern and
undergrowth, and cut by many winding paths, deep and soft with old
leaves, the paradise of the younger boys.
8. They walked out of the sun on the one of the shadowy paths of
the wood, the ground underfoot crackling with twigs and leaves and
scattered with patches of golden light.
9. The night was brilliant and heavily perfumed. The moon was
rising, and was visible as a great source of light behind the trees, and
there was an immense concourse of stars crowding up towards the
Milky Way. It was one of those nights, so rare in England, when the
stars give positive light to the earth.
Ю. The clouds opened and let down the rain like a water-fall.
(From Lord o f the Flies by W. Golding)
11. The air was scented with the sweet-smelling flowers of a tree
that grew at the entrance to the arbour, and the fire-flies, sparkling
dimly, flew with their slow and silvery flight. The moon made a path
way on the broad river, and on the further bank a row of palm trees
was delicately silhouetted against the sky.
(From The Outstat ion by W. S. Maugham)
12. After weeks of drought everything was as dry as tinder, and
the moment a spark fell the tree, the bush, went up in flames. It was
terrifying to see a great fir-tree blazing like match-wood.
245
1. You meet a friend of yours on the way to the University. There
are heavy black clouds in the sky. Make a comment about the weather.
2. You meet your friend in the park. It’s +30°C. Make a comment
about the weather. Have a talk about your favourite season.
3. Your friend and you think that people don’t do enough to pro
tect animal life. You think that animals teach us a lot and they make
the best pets. You do not agree with keeping birds in cages, or using
animals in zoos, circuses and laboratories.
XIV. Here are some paragraphs of four different books. A south

ern uninhabited island, southern Italy, England, Alaska are
described in them.
A. Read them carefully and match each piece of description
with the place described.
B. Compare the places described in the extracts. Which of the
places do you like best of all? Would you feel happy to be
there? Give specific reasons. Decide which of the places
described in the extracts you like least? Why? Take a class
vote to see to what extent you all have the same taste.
C. Describe the main features of the climate of one of these
places.
D. Use your imagination to describe a beautiful place. Use the
I. At first glance, it may appear to be a barren wasteland. Yet, in
reality, this cold desert teems with life. Myriad plants and animals are
native to this treeless plain. In summer, the upper part of the ground
(about Юcentimeters) thaws for just a short period. Trees grow so slow
ly here that scientists have measured centuiy-old spruces with trunks no
more than 30 centimeters in diameter. The average white spruce in the
taiga is only six meters high, even after a century of growth.
In order for its animals to survive in their arid, windy, and frigid
environment, nature has equipped these creatures to find food and
shelter and to produce offspring.
Its human inhabitants have also adapted to cope with the envi
ronment. Their houses are often built on pilings to allow cold air to
с иdilate under the house.
(From Cold Desert by J. Brune, R. King)
246
2. But in the morning it is quite different. Then the sun shines
Strong on the horizontal green cloud-puffs of the pines, the sky is
clear and full of life, the water runs hastily, still browned by the last
juice of crushed olives. And there the earth’s bowl of crocuses is
amazing. You cannot believe that the flowers are really still. They are
open with such delight, and their pistilthrust is so red-orange, and
they are so many, all reaching out wide and marvellous, that it sug
gests a perfect ecstasy of radiant, thronging movement, lit up violet
and orange, and surging in some invisible rhythm of concerted
delightful movement. You cannot believe they do not move, and
make some sort of crystalline sound of delight. If you sit still and
watch, you begin to move with them, like moving with the stars, and
you feel the sound of their radiance. All the little cells of the flowers
must be leaping with flowery life and utterance.
(From Flowery Tuscany by D. H. Lawrence)
3. The world, he found, was good. The far-away blue hills, the
harvests whitening on the slopes of the ridge along which his road led
him, the treeless sky-lines that changed as he moved - yes, they were
all good. He was overcome by the beauty of those deeply embayed
combes, scooped in the flanks of the ridge beneath him. Curves,
curves... What was the word to describe the curves of those little val
leys? They were as fine as the lines of a human body, they were
informed with the subtlety of art...
(From Crome Yellow by A. Huxley)
4. They accepted the pleasures of morning, the bright sun, the
whelming sea and sweet air, as a time when play was good... Towards
noon, as the floods of light fell more nearly to the perpendicular, the
stark colours of the morning were smoothed in pearl and opal
escence; and the heat became a blow...
Strange things happened at mid-day. The glittering sea rose up,
moved apart in planes of blatant impossibility; the coral reef and the
few, stunted palms that clung to the more elevated parts would float
up into the sky, would quiver, be plucked apart, run like raindrops on
a wire or be repeated as in an odd succession of mirrors. Sometimes
land loomed where there was no land... At mid-day the illusions
merged into the sky and there the sun gazed down like an angry eye.
Then, at the end of the afternoon, the mirage subsided and the hor
izon became level and blue and clipped as the sun declined. That was
another time of comparative coolness... When the sun sank, darkness
dropped like an extinguisher...
(From Lord of the Flies by W. Golding)
XV. A. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.

Whose perception is this episode arranged through?
Comment upon the behaviour of the porpoises. What makes
them appeai to the reader? What do you know about dol
phins? Give a brief summary of the extract.
Lying spread-eagled in the silky water, gazing into the sky, only
moving my hands and feet slightly to keep afloat, I was looking at the
Milky Way stretched like a chiffon scarf across the sky and wonder
ing how many stars it contained... Drifting there, relaxed and dreamy.
I was suddenly startled to hear, quite close to me, a clop and gurgle
of water, followed by a long, deep sigh, and a series of gentle ripples
rocked me up and down. Hastily I righted myself and trod water,
looking to see how far from the beach I had drifted. To my alarm I
found that I was some considerable distance from the shore..., and I
was not at all sure what sort of creature it was swimming around in
the dark waters beneath me... I was feeling more and more uncom
fortable, and I was just about to call for assistance when, some twenty
feet away from me, the sea seemed to part with a gentle swish and
gurgle, a gleaming back appeared, gave a deep, satisfied sigh, and
sank below the surface again. I had hardly time to recognise it as a
porpoise before I found I was right in the midst of them. They rose
all around me, sighing luxuriously, their black backs shining as they
humped in the moonlight. There must have been about eight of them,
and one rose so close that I could have swum forward three strokes
and touched his ebony head. Heaving and sighing heavily, they
played across the bay, and l swam with them, watching fascinated as
they rose to the surface, crumpling the water, breathed deeply, and
then dived beneath the surface again, leaving only an expanding hoop
of foam to mark the spot. Presently, as if obeying a signal, they turned
and headed out of the bay towards the distant coast of Albania, and I
trod water and watched them go, swimming up the white chain of
moonlight, backs agleam as they rose and plunged with heavy ecstasy
in the water as warm as fresh milk. Behind them they left a trail of
great bubbles that rocked and shone briefly like miniature moons
before vanishing under the ripples.

What do we learn about Felicity's character from this extract?
What can be said about her love of nature? Render the con
tents of this extract as if told by a) Nan; b) Felicity. Use some
A figure was standing upright upon the rock, which was now sur
rounded by the incoming tide. It was Felicity. Nan called out, and
began to hurry across the rocks, stepping as quickly as she could
towards her daughter.
Amazed, Nan arrived close to the rock, and stood there looking
out at Felicity. In spite of the chill of the evening Felicity was dressed
only in a bathing-costume.
“Darling,” said Nan, “have you gone quite mad? You’ll catch
your death of cold standing there with nothing on. There’s quite a
cold wind now that the sun’s gone down. And if you don’t hurry
you’ll be stranded on that rock. Where are your clothes?”
“Here,” said Felicity dully. She produced them from a shelf on the
other side of the rock.
Felicity jumped down into the sea. She gasped at its coldness. She
began to wade across to where Nan was standing.
Nan had the towel ready for her. She began to rub her down vig
orously...
“Don’t, you’re hurting me!” said Felicity. Then, with snuffling
sobs, she began to cry.
“Dear me, dear me!” said Nan. “What a cry baby! You’re always
wailing. Now then put your vest on quick - and tell me what’s the
matter.”
Felicity was trembling with cold. She got her vest on and began
to fumble with her dress. She said, “I saw a butterfly flying out to sea.
It will get lost out there and die.” She pulled the dress on over her
head. Her tears were still falling.
“What nonsense, child!” said Nan. “It could fly back again,
couldn’t it? Anyway, they can fly for miles, they often fly over to
France. That’s nothing to cry about.”
Felicity sat down. It was quite dark now. The moon shone out of
a cloudless sky of dark blue, revealing on either side of them the
tumbled heaps of rock.
“I saw a Fish,” said Felicity, “that a man had caught. It was a big
fish. It was lying all by itself on the sand, and struggling and gasping.
I wanted to pick it up and throw it back into the sea. But 1 wasn't
brave enough to.” Her voice broke in renewed sobs.
Nan bent forward... She felt the tears rising. She could not control
them any more. She took a deep breath and her weeping began. Sitting
there, her hand still clasped about her daughter’s foot, she wept with
out restraint. The moon shone brightly down upon them both.

Say who made these utterances and under what circum
stances. Comment on the feelings that prompted the utter
ances and the moral implication they suggest Say how the
following proverb can be applied to the extract: “A thing of
beauty is a joy for ever”. What do you understand by “beauty”
“the beauties of nature”?
“What exactly is beauty?”
“What exactly is - Oh! Jon, that’s a poser.”
“Can I see it, for instance?”
His mother got up, and sat beside him.
“You do, every day. The sky is beautiful, the stars, and moonlit
nights, and then the birds, the flowers, the trees - they’re all beauti
ful. Look out of the window - there’s beauty for you, Jon.”
“Oh! yes, that’s the view. Is that all?”
“All? No. The sea is wonderfully beautiful and the waves, with
their foam flying back.”
(From Awakening by J. Galsworthy)
D. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.

Give a brief summary of the story. Comment upon the events
described in it. Use the idioms and words given in Unit 14.
Prove that taking care of the environment is everyone's
responsibility.
The northbound freight train was right on schedule as it thundered
up northern California Sacramento Valley in 1991.
Crossing over a long steel bridge, it entered a wild canyon.
Roiling and boiling 50 yards below was the upper Sacramento River -
one of the state’s finest trout streams.
But as the engineer slowed his train near a hairpin curve, he real
ized something was wrong. Too many heavy cars weighted the rear.
Lighter cars in the center started popping off the tracks.
Then disaster struck. One of the biggest tank cars plunged into the
river, dumpling its load of metam sodium - a powerful commercial
poison used by farmers - into the crystal - clear water.
The destruction was almost as complete as you could imagine. It
killed almost everything in a 38-mile stretch of river - fish, frogs,
worms, insects, water snakes and plants.
More than a million fish died. Algae disappeared from the rocks.
Trees began to die. With no insects to eat, the birds flew away. The
canyon became strangely silent.
Restoring the river fell to Fish and Game scientists, using money
from the railroad company. But where would you start when the
destruction was that complete?
Over the next few years, wildlife biologists planted thousands
of tree cuttings along the injured stream. And they destroyed
invading plants that would choke out native flora struggling to sur
vive.
Reviving the trout was tougher. Some of the flsh killed by chem
icals were raised in hatchery tanks and planted in the river for fisher
men. The problem was that these trout were bred for quick growth
and easy transport, not a long life span. In natural streams, most
wouldn’t survive more than a few weeks.
But the scientists knew that stronger, wild trout had survived in
the river’s tributaries.
They captured some of the females and hatched their eggs.
Thousands of these baby flsh were then stocked in the river.
Little by little, the wild trout population grew.
Over the next few years, most of the plants came back. The bug,
snail and frog populations also began to recover.
Nowadays the river is recovering. Fishing is popular again, and
plans are under way to make the hairpin turn less hazardous.
(f rom Rescuing a River. "Boys'Life"
Hnglish Learner’s Digest, 6, 1998)
XVI. Speak on one of the following topics. Use the idioms given
in Unit 14.
I. My favourite season and why. 2. Summer joys and cares.
3. Nature awakes in the spring. 4. Rainy weather in autumn. 5. The
first morning of winter. 6. The plant and animal world. 7. Is nuclear
energy advisable? 8. Caring for Living Things and the Beautiful.
PROJECT
1. Read the following rhymes through to yourself.
Springtime
There’s a stir’neath the oak in the green wood,
There’s a song from a bird nearby.
There are buds on the trees and the bushes,
And a laugh in the breeze passing by.
There is warmth in the yellow sunshine.

There are bleats from the lambs at play.
In the whole of the wood there’s excitement,
On this beautiful sunny, spring day.
Anne R. Dennett
Summer-time
Summer is the play-by-the-stream time,
Roll-in-the-meadow-and-dream time,
Lie-on-your-back^and-chew-grass time,
Watch-butterflies-as-they-pass time,
Try-and-pick-daisies-with-toes time,
Playing-where-nobody-knows time.
Rosemary Garland
Autumn Leaves
The leaves are dropping from the trees,
Yellow, brown, and red.
They patter softly like the rain -
One landed on my head!
But when the sleep of winter comes
They cuddle down to rest;
Then Mother Nature tucks them in
With snow as she thinks best.
Margaret P Sutphen
Snow Morning
Wake
gently this morning
to a different day.
Listen.
There is no bray
of buses,
no brake growls,
no siren howls and
no horns
blow.
The is only
the silence
of a city
hushed
by snow.
Lilian Moore
2. Recount the contents of the rhymes. Use some idioms

jlven in Unit 14.
3. Expand upon the imagery of the rhymes. Write in idiomatic
English.
4. Read the rhymes aloud. Learn them by heart. Recite the
rhymes.
MEDICINE
IDIOMS
1. Alive and kicking
2. Feel fit
3. Feel quite oneself
4. (As) fine / fit as a fiddle
5. Be a picture of health
6. Be "(as) right as rain
7. A bag of bones = skin and bone
8. Feel like a boiled / wet rag
9. Feel like death / warmed up
10. Go (all) to pieces
11. Go from bad to worse
12. Under the weather
13. Between life and death
14. Catch a cold
15. Catch a disease
16. Catch one’s death
17. Look like a death’s head
18. Cause disease
19. Smb’s days are numbered
20. Breathe one’s last (breath or gasp)
21. Die a natural death
22. Die in one’s boots / Die with one’s boots on
к ; го
3. Hope against hope

4. Be a martyr to smth / die a martyr to
( heal death
?t\ lake one’s life in one’s own hands
’7 I.ike medicine
28. I hi- lx*si medicine
29. Respond to treatment
30. Perform an operation
31. Nurse smb back to health
32. Bring smb tQ life
33. Be on call
34. Under the doctor (for)
35. Hospital bed
36. The medical profession
37. An apple a day keeps the doctor away
38. Good health is above wealth
1. Alive and kicking - if someone or something is alive and kick

ing, they are not only still living or in existence, but are also very
active and lively.
E.g.: I was alive and kicking and thinking o f you.
2. Feel fit - to be healthy.
E.g.: You ’re not feeling jit. You ’re pale.
3. Feel quite oneself - to feel fine.
E.g.: She hasn’t been feeling quite herself since their last meeting.
4. (As) fine / fit as a fiddle - completely healthy.
E.g.: He is 85, but as fit as a fiddle.
5. Be a picture of health - to look very healthy.
E.g.: He was a picture o f health.
6. Be (as) right as rain - to be completely well and healthy again,
e.g. when someone has just recovered from an illness or a shock.
E.g.: Don ’t worry! You ’ll soon be as right as rain.
7. A bag of bones = skin and bone very thin.
E.g.: He is veiy thin, just a hay of bones.
8. Feel like a boiled / wet rag very tired.
E.g.: I ’m just recovering from jlu. and I don’t think there is any
illness which makes one feel more like a wet rag than that
does.
9. Feel like death / warmed up to feel very ill.
E.g.: Much o f the time she feels like death.
10. Go (all) to pieces - to be nervous,
E.g.: His nerves had gone to pieces.
She didn't go to pieces as they feared she might.
11. Go from bad to worse - to become more difficult.
E.g.: After that things went from bad to worse.
12. Under the weather - feeling slightly ill.
E.g.: He looks a bit under the weather.
13. Between life and death - an extremely serious, dangerous situ
ation when someone may die if people do not act immediately.
E.g.: Phone an ambulance. She's between life and death. It's a
matter o f life and death.
14. Catch a cold - to become ill with a cold.
E.g.: Don 't go out. You 'll catch a cold.
15. Catch a disease - to get a disease by being infected.
E.g.: He's caught an infectious disease.
16. Catch one’s death = catch one’s death of cold - to be very cold
and probably become very ill.
E.g.: Don't go out in wet weather! You 'll catch your death o f cold.
17. Look like a death’s head = to look like death (warmed up).
18. Cause disease - to cause smth means to make it happen.
E.g.: Filthy insanitary conditions cause disease.
19. Smb’s days are numbered - there only remains a short time
before smth unpleasant will happen to someone, e.g. that some
one will die.
E.g.:He's ill. His days are numbered.
20. Breathe one’s last (breath or gasp) - to die.
E.g.: He sighed and breathed his last.
21. Die a natural death - to die quietly of old age or illness rather
than because of an accident, in war...
E.g.: He had been in action all through the war. But he died a natu
ral death.
22. Die in one’s boots / die with one’s boots on - to die while still
working.
E.g.: / '</ much rather die in my boots.
23. Hope against hope - to hope for smth that seems impossible.
E.g.: We hoped against hope that he'd become better.
24. Be a martyr to smth / die a m artyr to - to suffer greatly / die,
because of smth.
E.g.: He died a martyr to his duty:
She is a martyr to severe headaches.
25. Cheat death - to manage to avoid death even though it seemed
that someone would not be able to.
E.g.: He has cheated death by some poison.
26. Take one’s life in one’s own hands - to put oneself in danger of
death.
E.g.: Every time you cross this busy road you take your life in
your hands.
27. Take medicine - take a substance used for treating illness, espec
ially a liquid one drinks.
E.g.: Don'/forget to take your medicine.
28. The best medicine - the best way of making you feel better when
you’re sad.
E.g.: Laughter is the best medicine.
29. Respond to treatment - to get better when you’re treated.
E.g.: His illness is not responding to treatment.
30. Perform an operation - to cut into smb’s body to repair or
remove a part that is damaged.
E.g.: A vety skilled surgeon will perform this operation.
31. Nurse smb back to health - to nurse someone until they’re well
again.
E.g.: She nursed her elderly relative back to health.
32. Bring smb to life - to make someone live, regain consciousness.

E.g.: She was brought to life by the doctor
33. Be on call - if a doctor is on call, he’s ready to go and help when
ever he’s needed as part of his job.
E.g.: He's on call 24 hours a day
34. Under the doctor (for) - being treated by a doctor (for).
35. Hospital bed - a place in a hospital for a sick person.
9 Янсон В.
36. The medical profession - doctors, nurses, and other people who
treat people who are ill.
37. An apple a day keeps (he doctor away (proverb) - eating apples
does you a lot of good. They are not only a valuable source of
vitamin C, but the chewing is good for your gums and the juice
keeps your breath sweet.
38. Good health is above wealth (proverb) - good health is the most
important thing for a person.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Medicine in Britain
The NHS (National Health Service) is paid for by taxes and
national insurance.
Gp (A General Practitioner) is trained in general medicine.
To have free treatment under the NHS;
to have treatment done privately.
TESTING VOCABULARY
♦ Feel fit ♦ To be very cold and become ill

♦ Under the weather ♦ To make someone live, re
gain consciousness
♦ (As) fine as a fiddle ♦ To die
♦ Catch a cold ♦ To die while still working
♦ Alive and kicking ♦ To be healthy
♦ Catch one’s death ♦ To look very healthy
♦ Breathe one’s last ♦ To feel slightly ill
♦ Die in one’s boots ♦ To get better when you’re
treated
♦ Cheat death ♦ To be completely healthy
♦ Smb is a picture of health ♦ Being treated by a doctor
♦ Respond to treatment ♦ To be completely healthy
again
♦ Under the doctor (for) ♦ Feel very ill
♦ Be (as) right as rain ♦ To be alive, active and lively
♦ Feel like death ♦ To avoid death
♦ Bring smb to life ♦ To become ill with a cold

with “Laughter is the best medicine". Other students should
take turns building upon this sentence, turn by turn.

you think is the key word, then look in your dictionary to see if
you are right Rewrite the sentences in non-idiomatic English.
Q Model: When l saw my grandfather last time, he was alive and
kicking. He didn Уlook his age. He was still active and energetic.
I. When I saw my grandfather last time, he was alive and kicking.
2. I’m afraid, my grandmother is not feeling fit. 3. You’ll catch a cold,
if you go for a walk in cold weather. 4. It was a matter of life
and death. 5. Good health is above wealth. 6. My sister nursed her
husband back to health. 7. A famous doctor is going to perform this
operation. 8. My friend’s illness is responding to treatment. 9. My
aunt is an elderly person, but as fit as a fiddle. 10. There’s nothing to
worry about! The patient soon be as right as rain. 11. The patient feels
like death warmed up. 12. I’m a bit under the weather. 13. Walter
caught an infectious disease. His days are numbered. 14. As far as I
know, her father died a natural death. 15. My grandfather wants to die
in his boots. 16. Her grandmother managed to cheat death. 17. I took
my medicine in the morning. 18. My nerves have gone to pieces.I.
III. A. The following sentences all contain an idiom with one

key word missing. Choose one of the four alternatives to
complete the idioms.
1. My friend is as fine as a __ (kibble, fiddle, tiddler, giggle). 2. As
far as I know, my uncle is alive a n d ___(licking, picking. kicking
ticking). 3. I am feeling___ (fab, fey, fine, fit). 4 П и л \*> out
neighbour is as right a s ___(train, brain, rain, grain). 5. My friend
feels like a boiled___(rat, rag, ram, ray). 6. My grandmother looks
like a death’s ___(head, hand, hat, heart). 1. The actor died in his___
(shoes, slippers, boots, sandals).
B. Expand on these statements.
1. You’ll catch your death o f___(hold/cold) standing there with
nothing on. There’s quite a cold wind now that the sun’s gone down.
2. “Forgive me for talking about this again,” he said gently, “but

1 thought it might comfort you - I know how frightfully difficult it is
on these occasions to say anything that is of the least use - 1 thought
it might mean something to you that Walter died a ___(martyr /
barter) to science and to his duty”
3. “I think I shall go to Japan as I did last year,” she said. “The

doctor says I must get out of the heat if I don’t want to go all to ___
(pieces / parts).”
4. The summons to William Bannister’s __ (sick-bed/ bedside)

had come to Sally at a moment when she had just been thinking of
that sufferer. She was sorry he was not feeling well, though she much
doubted whether his ailment was as severe as she had been given to
understand. Men were all alike... A pain in the toe and they thought
they were dying.
(From Doctor Sally by P. G. Wodehouse)
5. I suppose if I died you’d cry a bit. That would be nice of you

and very proper. But I’m all alive and ___(licking / kicking). Don’t
you find me rather a nuisance
(From The Bread-Winner by W. S. Maugham)
6. I look like death___(warmed up / warned) and what I feel is
nobody’s business.
(From Death and Dancing Footman by N. Marsh)
7. I just kept hoping against__ (hope / hoping), that’s all.
(From Live with Lightning by M. Wilson)

A. V. Kunin.
I. Что ты за богатырь? Поглядеть, так в чем душа держится.
Сам в могилу смотришь, а других губишь. (А. Пушкин. Капитанс
кая дочка) 2. Он чувствовал такую усталость, такое изнемо
жение во всех членах, что едва волочил ноги. (Ф. Достоевский.
Хозяйка) 3. Он верил словам врача, что, судя по состоянию серд
ца, ее жизнь висела на волоске. (К. Симонов. Солдатами не
рождаются) 4, Анна бросилась помогать старику, который, по-
видимому, не терял надежды возвратить дочь к жизни.
(Д. Григорович. Рыбаки) 5. Он целых восемь дней находился
между жизнью и смертью. Доктор приезжал беспрестанно.
(И. Тургенев. Накануне) 6. Испуская последний вздох, я все-таки
буду верить, что наука - самое важное, самое прекрасное и
нужное в жизни человека. (А. Чехов. Скучная история) 7. Поутру
лекарь вошел к ней... Узнать ее нельзя: краше в гроб кладут.
(И. Тургенев. Уездный лекарь) 8. Погляди на себя: кожа да кости.
Умрешь, брат. (А. Чехов. Мечта) 9. Он на мгновение потерял
сознание, но то же ощущение близкой опасности привело его в
себя. (Б. Полевой. Повесть о настоящем чеювекё) Ю. Он был
болен неизлечимо, и дни его были сочтены, но он этого не знал.
(Л. Андреев. Жили-были) II. Сегодня он явно был не в себе,
поэтому она промолчала. (Клещенко. Д ею прекратить
нельзя) 12. Завтра я покажу тебя врачам и быстро поставлю
тебя на ноги. (А. Степанов. Семья Звонаревых)
B. Use the idioms to make notes under the heading “Preven
tive medicine**. In pairs discuss your notes.
Jack felt very tired and ill. Besides, he was nervous. The man was
very thin. The doctor gave him a thorough examination and told him
to stay in bed and take some tablets and cough mixture. He said there
was nothing serious; Jack would get better soon. He would be com
pletely well and healthy again if he followed the doctor’s advice.
The doctor also told Jack to eat more fruit. He said that apples
were good for his health.
The doctor advised complete rest. The only way to cure Jack’s ill
ness was to rest, give up smoking and take the prescribed medicine.
Jack hoped he’d feel fine again soon. His health was more import
ant to him than money or any other thing.
1. Come (go. all to pieces. 3. Hospital bed.
2. An apple a day keeps the doctor away. 4. A bag of bones.

Proverbs: An apple a day keeps the doctor away.
Good health is above wealth.IX
.
tences.
I. So he is still alive and kicking. 2. As far as I know, she’s still
as fit as a fiddle. 3. I’m glad, he’s as right as rain now. 4. Unfor
tunately, She went all to pieces. 5. I found him between life and
death. 6. That’s why he caught a cold. 7. His days were numbered.
8. Then he breathed his last gasp. 9. She died in her boots. Ю. Thus,
he cheated death.

I. Dr Brown is on call now. 2. We hope the doctors will bring our
friend to life. 3. My aunt has nursed her friend back to health.
4. Dr Smith is going to perform the operation. 5. My friend’s illness is
responding to treatment. 6. I’m afraid, the patient looks like a death’s
head. 7. One may catch a cold, if one walks in rainy weather. 8. I’m
under the weather. 9. My brother is a picture of health. I0. The old
man is just a bag of bones.
XI. Explain and expand on the following. Use the idioms given in
Unit 15.
1. His second boy was desperately sick for months. Doc practi
cally lived at the house to pull him through.
(From The Pawn by W. Martin)
2. I say, “Stay on this diet; and no monkey business. A belly-ache
is no fun.”
3. “Listen, Doc,” he’ll say, “what are you beating around the bush
about? What’s on your mind. Doc?”
4. I’ve got an office where I practice medicine. Medicine is my
life. I do the best I can, if a patient will let me. I take pride in know
ing what I’m about.
5. You’ll live for years. Nothing wrong with your health that a
nonfat diet won’t clear up ^ just as I said.
6. “It is possible that I shall not die this time,” murmured Poirot.
Coming from a convalescent influenza patient, I hailed the remark as
showing a beneficial optimism. I myself had been the first sufferer from
the disease. Poirot in his turn had gone down. He was now sitting up in
bed, propped up with pillows, his head muflled in a woolen shawl...
(From The Mystery of Hunter s Lodge by A. Christie)
7. “He’s ill in bed with influenza.”
“Is he now? I’m sorry to hear that.”
(From The Mystery o f Hunter fs Lodge by A. Christie)
8. There’s an epidemic. I believe it’s the worst they’ve had for
years. There was a medical missionary there. He died of cholera three
days ago... The French nuns are doing what they can. They’ve turned
the orphanage into a hospital. But the people are dying like flies. I’ve
offered to go and take charge.
9. There was the weariness of death in his voice.
Ю. He’ll take a breakdown if he doesn’t take care, but he won’t
spare himself.

1. Your friend (relative)'is in the hospital. Ask the doctor how he /
she is.
2. You are in the hospital. Talk to the person in the bed next to
yours.
3. Your best friend needs to have an operation. He/she does not
want it.-Talk to him/her about it.
XIII. A. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.

Compose a story about Kitty's mother (Mrs Garstin) and her
illness. Use the idioms given in Unit 15.
Two letters were handed to Kitty. One of them was from Doris:
Kitty darting
i expect Father has written to you. Mother has got to have an oper
ation. It appears that she has been rotten for the 1ёst year, but you know
she hates doctors and she's been taking all sorts of patent medicines. I
don’t quite know what’s the matter with her as she insists on making a
secret of the whole thing and flies Into a passion if you ask her ques
tions. She has been looking simply awful and if I were you I think I'd get
off at Marseilles and come back as quick as you can. But don’t let on that
I told you to come as she pretends there's nothing much the matter with
her and she doesn't want you to get here till she’s back at home. She's
made the doctors promise that she shall be moved in a week. Best love.
Doris
Kitty could not imagine her mother ill. She never remembered to
have seen her other than active and resolute; she had always been
impatient of other people’s ailments. Then a steward came up to her
with a telegram.
Deeply regret to inform you that your mother died this morning.
Father

Comment upon the cause of Walter’s death. Tell the story as
if you were Waiter’s doctor. Use the idioms given in Unit 15.
“Your husband’s been taken ill. We want you to come at once.”
“Walter? I shall be ready in two minutes. Is it cholera?”
“I’m afraid so, I think you ought to come as quickly as you can.
He was taken ill this afternoon, the afternoon of yesterday that is.”
“Why wasn’t l sent for at once?”
“Your husband knew that you had never seen anyone with
cholera. It’s a terrible and revolting sight. He didn’t want you to see it.”
“Why am I allowed to come now?”
“My dear, you must be Very brave. You must be prepared for the
worst.”
“Is he dying?”
“As far as I can judge collapse has set in.”
“Is there no hope at all?”
“I’m dreadfully sorry, I’m afraid that if we don’t get there quick
ly we shan’t find him alive. You see, he’s been overworking, he has
no powers of resistance. Being a bacteriologist he’s dying a martyr to
science and to his duty.”

Compose a story about A l’s visit to the doctor. Say what At
complained of and what advice the doctor gave Af. Prove that
the doctor examined him thoroughly. Use the idioms given in
Unit 15.
Al thought Doc looked a little worried, so why not divert him.
give him something to do?
Al hadn’t been feeling up to scratch, and since he was here in
the office, why not? He said, “Doc, I get a pain here in my side
every now and then. Usually after I eat. Would you have a quick
look?”
Doc’s eyes twinkled. “ ‘Bout time you gave me some trade. Take
your shirt off, Al, and sit there on the table. I’ll operate without an
anesthetic.” Doc chuckled and went over to the basin and washed and
dried his hands. When he came back he said, “Turn around toward
the light, Al. Don’t see as well as I did a hundred years ago.”
Doc tapped and thumped and moved his hands expertly over APs
side, watching Al for signs of wincing.
“Go ahead,” Doc said, “and tell me when I hurt.”
When Doc found a tender spot he started the questions. When had
Al first noticed the pain? Any nausea? Any dizziness? Drink much
water? Sleep at night?
Finally Doc said, “Liver’s out of whack.” Then, “Come on in here
a minute, Al. I’ve got this fancy equipment and may as well use it on
you so I can send you a big bill.” Al followed Doc into the dark room
to the new fluoroscope.
“Uh-huh,” Doc said after a few minutes, pursing his lips and nod
ding in the shadows.
When they went back Doc washed his hands again, shaking the
water into the basin. He yanked a paper towel off the roll, and care
fully dried his hands. Without looking around he said, “I’ve finished,
Al. Put on your shirt. It’s a little chilly in here. Nothing wrong, Al,”
he said, “except Margaret’s cooking is too rich for you. May have to
put you on a little diet. Take you off fats and oils for a while. Maybe
by March you can get back on your regular feed.”

Comment on PauTs pastime, his state of mind. Describe his
illness. Was his position trying? Describe what the boy
looked like. Which of the lost benefits of his childhood did
Paul regret most?
Paul had never risen from his little bed. He lay there, listening to
the noises in the street; not caring much how the time went, but
watching it and watching everything about him with observing eyes.
h
When the sunbeams struck into his room through the rustling
blinds, and quivered on the opposite wall like golden water, he knew
that evening was coming on, and that the sky was red and beautiful.
As the reflection died away, and a gloom went creeping up the wall,
he watched it deepen, deepen, deepen, into night. Then he thought
how the long streets were dotted with lamps, and how the peaceful
Stars were shining overhead.
As it grew later in the night, and footsteps in the street became so
rare that he could hear them coming, count them as they paused, and
lose them in the hollow distance, he would lie and watch the many-
coloured ring about the candle, and wait patiently for day.
When day began to dawn again, he watched for the sun; and when
its cheerful light began to sparkle in the room, he pictured to himself
the high church towers rising up into the morning sky, the town
waking, starting into life once more, and the country bright with dew.
By little and little, he got tired of the bustle of the day, the noise
of carriages, and people passing; and would fall asleep.
(From Dombey and Son by Ch. Dickens)
E. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.

Say what might have happened to Paul if his mother hadn't
followed her sister's advice. Was Paul's illness essential to
the development of his character? How are Martha's bad
qualities revealed to the reader?
Owing to his adenoids Paul looked and almost was an imbecile.
Martha (his mother) disbelieved in doctors; more particularly she dis
liked surgeons, perhaps because they were so expensive. She left
Paul’s adenoids unextirpated; they grew and festered in his throat.
From November to May he was never without a cold, a quinsy, an
earache. The winter of 1921 was a particularly bad one for Paul. He
began by getting influenza which turned into pneumonia, caught
measles during his convalescence and developed at the New Year an
Infection of the middle ear which threatened to leave him perma
nently deaf. The doctor peremptorily advised an operation, treatment,
ft convalescence in Switzerland, at an altitude and in the sun. Martha
hesitated to follow his advice. She had come to be so firmly con
vinced of her poverty that she did not see how she could possibly
afford to do what the doctor ordered. In her perplexity she wrote to
her sister, Judith. Two days later Judith arrived in person.
“But do you want to kill the boy?” she asked her sister fiercely.
“Why don’t you get him out of this filthy dank hole weeks ago?”
In a few hours she had arranged everything. Hurbert and Martha
were to start at once with the boy.
(From The Claxtom by A. Huxley)
F. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.

Describe the doctor's visit Use some idioms given in Unit 15.
Say in what way the girl's reaction is characteristic of young
children under such circumstances.
The girl had a fever for three days, began the father, and we don’t
know what it comes from... So we tho’t you’d better look her over
and tell us what is the matter...
As it happens we had been having a number of cases of diph
theria in the school to which this child went during that month and
we were, all, quite apparently, thinking of that, though no one had as
yet spoken of the thing.
Well, I said, suppose we take a look at the throat first. I smiled in
my best professional manner and asking for the child’s first name I
said, come on, Mathilda, open your mouth and let’s take a look at
your throat.
Nothing doing.
Aw, come on, I coaxed, just open your mouth wide and let me
take a look. Look, I said, opening both hands wide, I haven’t any
thing in my hands. Just open up and let me see...
Not a move. Even her expression hadn’t changed. Her breaths
however were coming faster and faster. Then the battle began...
I grasped the child’s head with my left hand and tried to get the
wooden tongue depressor between her teeth. She fought, with
clenched teeth, desperately!
Perhaps I should have desisted and come back in an hour or
more. No doubt it would have been better. But I have seen at least
two children lying dead in bed of neglect in such cases, and feeling
that l must get a diagnosis now or never I went at it again... In a final
unreasoning assault I overpowered the child’s neck and jaws. I
forced the heavy silver spoon back of her teeth and down her throat
till she gagged. And there it was - both tonsils covered with mem
brane. She had Idught valiantly to keep me from knowing her secret.
She had been hiding that sore throat for three days at least and lying
to her parents in order to escape just such an outcome as this.
(From The Use o f Force by W. C. Williams)
XIV. Speak on one of the following topics. Use the idioms given
in Unit 15.
1. A touch of flu. 2. A visit to the doctor. 3. Visiting a sick friend.
4. Curing a patient. 5. Never say die.
PROJECT
Passages 1-2 come from The Weeping Fig by J. Wright; Passages
3-4 are from The Painted Veil by W. S. Maugham; Passages 5-9 are
from The Sandcastle by I. Murdoch; Passage 10 is from Rain by
W. S. Maugham; Passage 11 is from The Lion's Skin by W. S. Mau
gham; Passage 12 is from The End o f the Party by Gr. Greene;
Passages 13-14 are from The Second Death by Gr. Greene.
1. in the passages quoted below substitute the phraseologi
cal units for words and word combinations which will express
the same denotational meaning. (Make whatever structural
changes the substitution may call for.)
2. Compare the passages you have got with the original text
units add to the bits of text you've analysed.
I. He went on working hoping against hope that one day he
would make good. 2. When John Condon left, Mrs Hastings was all
to pieces. 3. The people are dying like flies. 4. I should he frightened
out o f my wits. 5. He felt as if he were under an intolerable physical
strain, as if his body were likely at any moment tofly to pieces. 6 . Mor’s
blood turned to ice. 7. He leaned his head back wearily against the
wall and lost his consciousness, half fainting and half falling into an
exhausted sleep. 8. Jimmy Garde had had a miraculous escape from
death. He was saved largely by Mr Everard’s pile of blankets; and
was now in hospital with broken ribs, two broken legs, and a frac
tured skull. He was declared to be in no immediate danger, and like
ly to recover. Two of the boys who had tried to break his fall were
also in hospital with concussion. 9. The old man looked ashy grey
with his sleepless night. 10. He’ll take a breakdown if doesn’t take
care, but he won’t spare himself. 11. The doctors reported him fit for
duty. 12. Anything might happen. He might cut himself or break his
leg or really catch a bad cold. 13. He’s conscious, but he’s going.
There is nothing 1 can do. If you want him to die in peace, better let
his friend go up. He’s frightened about something. 14. When / came
round that other time, I thought that I’d been dead.
3. Compose a story of about 100 words using the following

ideas.
Title: A Doctor’s Visit.
Introduction: Your friend is aching all over. His (her) mother calls
in a doctor.
Development: Your friend is making complaints. The doctor is giv
ing him (her) a thorough examination. The doctor gives him (her) advice.
Conclusion: Your friend follows the doctor’s advice and is quite
well again.
SPORT
IDIOMS

1. Spectator sport
2. Reigning champion
3. Be in / out of training
4. Be at one’s best
5. Beat smb hollow
6. Beat (defeat) smb on points (win on points)
7. Have the advantage over smb
8. Win by a mile / 10 points
9. Win hands down
10. Break a record
11. Set a record
12. Hold a record
13. A close contest
14. Get one’s revenge
15. Excell at / in sport
16. Make the finals
17. Work (perform) miracles
18. Stick to the rules
19. Break the rules
20. Lose on points
\2 1. Lose a game
'22. A bad loser
'23. A good loser
■24. (As) quick as a flash (as lightning)
25. Muscles of steel
[26. Of great (high) promise
27. Fan club
28. You never know what you can do till your try (it)
1. Spectator sport - one which is watched by large groups of
people.
E.g.: Football is one o f the most popular spectator sports.
2. Reigning champion - the champion at the present time.
E.g.: / think he is the reigning heavyweight boxing champion.
3. Be in / out of training - to be fit or not fit for a sport.
E.g.: The heavyweight boxing champion is in training for his next
fight.
4. Be at one’s best - performing as well or effectively as one can.
E.g.: He is at his best in swimming.
5. Beat smb hollow - to defeat them easily.
E.g.: They admitted that you had beaten them hollow.
6. Beat (defeat) smb on points (win on points) - to win a boxing
match by gaining more points than your opponent rather than by
defeating them completely.
E.g.: He defeated his opponent on points in a ten-round contest.
7. Have the advantage over smb - to be in a better position than
another person.
E.g.: His strength gives him the advantage over his opponent.
He has the advantage over his opponent.
8. Win by a mile / 10 points - to be the best or first in a competi
tion, game.
E.g.: He won the game by 2 points.
9. Win hands down - to win very easily..
E.g.: They would win hands down.
10. Break a record - to do something faster, better, etc than the pre
vious record (the fastest speed, longest distance that has ever
been reached in sport).
E.g.: He could break world records in the 100 and 200 metres.
11. Set a record - to achieve a new record.
E.g.: The runner set a new world record in the 100 metres.
12. Hold a record - to be the person who has achieved the fastest
speed, the greatest distance, etc.
E.g.. She held the record for running 500 metres.
13. A close contest - a contest that is won or lost by a very small
amount.
E.g.: It was a close contest, ft is close but w e’re going to win.
14. Get one’s revenge - to defeat someone who has previously
defeated you in a sport.
E.g.: I ’ve beaten him at chess, but he hopes to get his revenge
(by beating me).
15. Excell at / in sport - to do something very well, or much better
than most people.
E.g.: My brother never excelled at sport.
16. Make the finals - to take part in the last and most important
game, race, etc in a set of games or races.
E.g.: They hope to make the finals.
17. Work (perform) miracles - to have a very good effect or result.
E.g.: Figure skating worked miracles for us.
18. Stick to the rules - to obey.
E.g.: Everyone must stick to the rules.
19. Break the rules - to disobey.
E.g.: We’ll stop playing if you break the rides.
20. Lose on points; point - a unit used to show the score in a game
or sport.
21. Lose a game - to not win a game.
E.g.: Are they in danger o f losing this game?
22. A bad loser - someone who behaves badly after losing.
E.g.: H e’s vety upset. H e’s a bad loser.
23. A good loser - someone who behaves well after losing.
E.g.: Don’t worry. He s a good loser
24. (As) quick as a flash (as lightning) very quickly.
E.g.: She can really run. She is as quick as lightning.
25. Muscles of steel firm muscles.
E.g.: The boys couldn i help admiring his muscles o f steel.
26. Of great (high) promise to be likely to become veiy good.
Show promise.
E.g.: The boy shows great promise as a football play’er.
27. Fan club - an organization for people who support a team, a
famous person etc.
E.g.: Hes a member o f our localfan dub.
28. You never know what you can do till you try (it) (proverb).
CULTURE CONTEXT
Polo - a game played between two teams of players on horse
back, who hit a small ball with long-handled wooden hammers. Polo
is a game which is played and watched esp by very rich and fashio
nable people, including the Prince of Wales.
Rugby - there are two forms of rugby football played in Britain,
rugby union and rugby league.
Rugby union is played by amateurs (they are not paid). There are
15 players on each team.
Rugby league is a professional game, played mainly in the north
of England. There are 13 players on each team, and the rules are
slightly different from rugby union. It is thought to be a rough, hard
game in which the ball can be handled, played with an oval (egg-
shaped) ball.
Cricket - an outdoor game, played in summer with a small ball
covered with red leather, a bat and wickets, by two teams of 11
players each, usu. dressed in white. One team tries to get runs while
the other team fields.
Professional cricket is controlled by the MCC (the Marylebone
Cricket Club). The main competition is the county championship, in
which the 18 county cricket clubs play against one another during the
season. Each match takes 3-4 days to complete.
Golf - a game in which people hit small hard white balls into
holes in the ground with a set of special sticks (golf clubs), trying to
do so with as few strokes as possible.
D arts- any of several games in which darts (small sharp-pointed
objects) are thrown at a circular board. The game is played by work
ing class men in pubs and working men’s clubs.
Bingo - a game played for money or prizes, in which numbers
chosen by chance are called out and players cross out these numbers
if they appear on their own cards. The first player to cross out all the
numbers on his or her card shouts out "‘Bingo!” or “House” In
Britain, bingo is generally thought of as a game played by working-
class women in the evening.
Snooker - a game played on a table covered in green cloth with
15 red balls, six balls of other colours, and a white ball. One hits the
white ball with a cue (a long stick) onto the coloured balls, in a par
ticular order, so that they fall into any of six pockets (holes) round the
table in order to make points.
Fishing - a sport where what is caught determines the class of a
fisherman. If it is a salmon or trout it is upper-class, but if it is the sort
of fish found in canals, ponds or the sea, than the angler (fisherman )
is almost sure to be working-class.
TESTING VOCABULARY
tionary definitions
♦ Reigning champion ♦ To win very easily

Beat smb hollow ♦ To achieve a new record
♦ Win hands down ♦ To obey
♦ Excell at (sport) ♦ To not win a game
♦ Be in training ♦ Someone who behaves well
after losing
♦ (As) quick as a flash ♦ Very quickly
♦ A good loser ♦ The champion at the present
time
♦ Lose a game ♦ To do smth better than most
people
♦ Stick to the rules ♦ To defeat smb easily
♦ Set a record ♦ To be fit for a sport
♦ Work miracles ♦ To be likely to become good
♦ Show promise ♦ To have a very good result

with "Figure skating is one of the most popular spectator
sports”. Other students should take turns building upon this
sentence, turn by turn.
English.
□ Model: John is a young sportsman o f great prom is. He's very
gifted. / think he 'll go far.
I. John is a young sportsman of great prom ise. 2. Г т afraid, Don
is a bad loser. 3. To our great disappointment they lost the game. 4. If
you break the rules, I’ll stop playing. 5. This exercise works miracles.
6. I don’t think they’ll make the finals. 7. I admit, me friend excells
at sport. 8. Don’t be upset. You’ll get your revenge. 9. To my mind,
Jonson is able to set a new record. Ю. It was a dull game. They won
hands down. 11. As far as I know, Smith won by 6 points. 12. I’m sure,
Brown will beat his opponent hollow.
plete the idiom.
1. It’s a spectator__ (sport, spot, spat, spurt). 2. They have beaten
them __ (holy, wholly, hollow, hollowly). 3. It was quite easy. We
w on___(hats, hands, heads, hearts) down. 4. My sister is as quick
as a ___(flush, flesh, flash, flock). 5. My brother is proud of his
muscles o f___(stone, straw, steel, string). 6. I’d like to be a member
of th is__ (fern, fdm, fun, fan) club. 7. The footballers lost th e ___
(dame, fame, game, lame) and they were upset.IV .
(Passage 1 comes from Arms and the Man by B. Show; Passages
2-9 are from The G u a rd ia n , 6 9, 1996).
1. Be generous: you've beaten us___(whole I hollow). 2. "it was
nice to get a little__ (revenge / revenue) f said Brown, whose 6 4,
7-5, 6-l victory took him into the second round for the first time in
a Wimbledon career that started in 1982. 3. Only Jeus Carlowit/
is ___(fat /fit) to run. 4. They have never failed to reach a World Cup
semi-final, but it is hard to be optimistic about the retention of
th e___(recording/record). 5. It’s the first time 1 have been proper
ly ___(fitted / fit), playing or training every day. 6. The all-time
attendance record w as___(bitten / beaten) by the 12,386-strong
7. The strength of the teams left in the HA Cup was bound to produce
a tight draw, and two quarter-finals that would have made excellent _
(finals / finales) ~ Guildford v Reading and Old Loughtonians \
Southgate - have come out of the hat. 8. The despondent team cap
tain revealed that his faulty change-over with Marcus Adam, which
led to their disqualification had been caused by the desire t o _
(gain / get) revenge over their French rivals. 9. John Mayock oi
Britain, a journey-man middle-distance runner who risked losing hi'
job as a sports development officer to compete, scored the biggest
win of his career in the 2,000 meters when he__ (beat / heat) 2,000
meter world record-holder Salah Hissou of Morocco.V .

A. V. Kunin.
1. Последний год он начал выходить в тираж. Если он не
возобновит сейчас свою репутацию самым шумным образом, я
не поручусь для него в дальнейшем и за пятьсот долларов. (К. Си
монов. Русский вопрос) 2. ...Я его опережаю, можно сказать, кла
ду его на обе лопатки. (С. Бабаевский. Свет над земчей) 3. Вы, если
бы захотели, могли бы пойти очень далеко. (А. Куприн. Молох)
4. Прекрасный молодой человек... Он далеко пойдет. (И. Тургенев
Холостяк) 5. Там он развернется и покажет себя. (А. Чехов. Хоро
шие люди) 6. Одно мгновение лицо ее дрогнуло, но она овла
дела собой. (А. Эртель. Смена) 7. ...Я не упаду духом я буд\
бороться! (А. Морозов. Повести моей жизни) 8. ...Пальма
первенства принадлежала Рязанцеву... (П. Каратыгин. Записки)
9. ...В своей отрасли он был звездой первой величины.
(В. Кетлинская. Иначе жить не стоит) 10. Парень как парень.
Силы особой в нем незаметно... Звезд с неба не хватал. (Гущин.
Курс, проложенный оенем)
VI. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you
goes..."
Proverb: You never know what you can do till you try (it).
1. (As) quick as a flash (as lightning). 3. Fan club.
2. Reigning champion. 4. Muscles of steel.
VIII. Rewrite the following bit of text in idiomatic English.
Nicky goes in for sports. He is very strong and healthy. His
muscles are firm. Nicky plays tennis much better than his opponents.
He is young but the boy is likely to become an excellent tennis player.
Nicky wins very easily. He has a very good coach. So the boy is in a
better position than his opponents. They admit that Nicky can defeat
them easily. He performs as well as one can. He is fit for the forth
coming competition. He hopes to take part in the most important
game of it. Though it is not easy to do. But as the proverb goes, “You
never know what you can do till you try it”.
IX. Build up bits of text with the following as initial sentences.
I. The runner was as quick as lightning. 2. Everyone knows,
Jack is a bad loser. 3. Bob has the advantage over his opponent.
4. John is at his best today. 5. The boys are in training. 6. Everyone
must stick to the rules. 7. Ben is the reigning heavyweight boxing
champion. 8. Figure skating is one of the most popular spectator
sports. 9. Helen excells at sport. 10. Dick held the record for running
100 metres.
X. Use the following as concluding sentences, build up bits of
text with them.
1. This young sportsman is of great promise. 2. That’s why 1
joined that fan club. 3. Of course, he is a good loser. 4. They lost on
points. 5. It was his fault, lie broke the rules. 6. They won hands
down. 7. It was a close contest. 8. Let’s hope you’ll get your revenge.
9. That’s why they made the finals. 10. They worked miracles.
XI. Explain and expand on the following. Use the idioms given in
Unit 16. (Passages 1-3 come from The Painted Veil by
W. S. Maugham; Passages 4-10 are from The Outstation by
W. S. Maugham).
I. She made a hash of things. 2. He was full of accomplishments.
3. He plays a winning hand very well, but when he has bad cards he
goes all to pieces. 4. He was a first-rate sportsman. 5. What does it
amount to that a man can play golf and tennis better than other
people? 6. He lost all control of himself. 7. It was a test of endur
ance. 8. Sooner or later Cooper would deliver himself into his hand.
9. He lost all caution. 10. He was a great success.
1. Your friend and you are discussing what games the Englishmen
like to play.
2. You’ve always been drawn by tennis (football...). Tell your
friend why you find it interesting and exciting.
3. Your friend and you are discussing the football match (some
competition or game, you watched together.
4. You are interested in the lives of great sportsmen. Have a talk
about your favourite sportsmen.
5. You are an ice-hockey (football, figure-skating...) fan. Have a talk
about the last football match (figure-skating competitions.... you liked.
6. Build up a dialogue using the proverb “All’s well that ends
well”
7. Build up a dialogue taking parts of a sports reporter and a
famous sportsman.
XIII. A. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.
Describe a lesson of Physical Education at a comprehensive
school, the facilities which are at the disposal of pupils. Use
They entered the Gymnasium. It was full of juniors, who were
dangling on ropes, curling over bars, springing over the horse, or other
wise bouncing about on the floor after the ratter frog-like manner of
small boys. Mr Hensman, the gym instructor, smiled and waved to
Мог. Mor liked him. He was one of his son’s well-wishers.
(From The Sandcastie by l. Murdoch)
В. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.
Say if Bobby is a good player or not and why. Describe the
game. Use the idioms given in Unit 16.
Bobby Jones teed up his ball, gave a short preliminary waggle,
took the club back slowly, then brought it down and through with the
rapidity of lightning.
Did the ball fly down the fairway straight and true, rising as it
went, and soaring over the bunker to land within an easy mashie shot
of the fourteenth green?
No, it did not. Badly topped, it scudded along the ground and
embedded itself firmly in the bunker!
There were no eager crowds to groan with dismay. The solitary
witness of the shot manifested no surprise. And that is easily
explained - for it was not the American - bom master of the game
who had played the shot but merely the fourth son of the Vicar of
Marchbolt, a small seaside town on the coast of Wales.
“I get worse every day,” Bobby muttered dejectedly.
“You press,” said his companion, Dr Thomas. He himself never
took a full swing. He played short, straight shots down the middle
and usually beat more brilliant but more erratic players.
Bobby attacked his ball fiercely with a niblick. The third time was
successful. The ball lay a short distance from the green which
Dr Thomas had reached with two creditable iron shots.
“Your hole,” said Bobby.
They proceeded to the next tee. The doctor drove first - a nice
straight shot, but with no great distance about it. Bobby sighed, teed
his ball, reteed it, waggled his club a long time, took back stiffly, shut
his eyes, raised his head, depressed his right shoulder, did everything
he ought not to have done - and hit a screamer down the middle of
the course!
He drew a deep breath of satisfaction. I he well-known golfer’s
gloom passed from his eloquent lace to he succeeded by the equally
well-known golfer’s exultation.
“I know now what I’ve been doing/' said Bobby - quite untruthfully.
A perfect iron shot, a little chip with a mashie, and Bobby lay dead.
He achieved a birdie four, and !)r Thomas was reduced to one up.
Full of confidence, Bobby stepped onto the sixteenth tee. He
again did everything he should not have done, and this time no mir
acle occurred. A terrific, a magnificent, an almost superhuman slice
happened! The ball went round at right angles.
“If that had been straight - whew!” said Dr Thomas.
“I f - ” said Bobby bitterly.
He went after his ball. He had some difficulty in finding it, but ran
it to earth at last. It was practically unplayable-embedded in a furze
bush.
(From Why didn't they ask Evans? by A. Christie)

Speak on Charlie's accomplishments. Why did Kitty make so
much of them? What do you think of them? Use some idioms
given in Unit 16.
Charlie was splendid, in his smart top boots and his white breeches,
when he played polo. In tennis clothes he looked a mere boy. Of
course he was proud of his figure. He took pains to keep it. He never
ate bread or potatoes or butter. And he took a great deal of exercise.
He was a wonderful athlete arid the year before he had won the local
tennis championship. No one would think he was forty.
He was full of accomplishments. Kitty did not believe there was
anything he could not do.

Prove that the giri was not in the least interested in the game.
Say how she managed to prevent the boy from watching the
game. Prove that Jake was a football-fan. Comment on the
boy's last remark. Say if he realized the irony of the situation
or not. Use the idioms given in Unit 16.
“It’s cold in this stadium,” said the girl behind me.
She had just arrived at her seat, escorted by a long-legged under
graduate. They were late. The game had begun some moments
before.
“Cold?” he repeated in instantaneous alarm.
"Wait!” he said. “Wait’ll I get this old robe unfolded. You won’t
be cold with this old robe around you.”
"My face will be,” she said.
On the Held a halfback made a gain of thirteen yards.
‘‘Lift your feet a minute,” said the boy, “while 1 tuck it under.
There! How’s that? Okay?”
“I guess so. What’s the score?”
“Nothing to nothing.”
“Oh,” said the girl, “then we’re not really late. You kept saying we
were going to be late.”
“Well, we were, a little.”
“I’m never late,” the girl said dreamily.
The boy did not answer. “Watch that pass!” he shouted hoarsely
instead. “Watch it!”
“Look,” said the girl. “Before you get all excited may I please
have one of your cigarettes?”
“Ye-e-eah!” the boy was yelling. “Get’im! Nail’im! Ye-e-eah!
What’s trouble, baby?” he added softly.
“I want a cigarette.”
“Oh, gosh,” said the boy, “now where did I - Wait a minute.”
“Ye-e-eah!” he cried again, but faintly now.
The cigarettes were finally found. Matches were borrowed, and
many were scratched in succession. This took some time, and a
touchdown was meanwhile made by the visiting team.
The first quarter ended shortly.
“Say,” the boy said, “it’s the quarter already.”
“Oh look, now they’re all playing down our end of the field,” the
girl said.
“You bet they are!” said the boy. “And we’re going to score -
we’re gonna sco-o-o-re. There you GO!” he howled.
“There YOU - Oh, tough. Tough. Hard luck, Red, old boy! Next
time!” He beat his hollowed gloved palms together once, making a
loud report. “Come on, TEAM!”
The girl’s next remark was about a cheerleader. It was her most
enthusiastic remark so far, though it was brief. “Oh, looky! Who's he?”
“Who?”
“That cheerleader!”
“Oh, him,” said the boy. “I believe his name is Adams or some
thing. Or maybe it’s Andrews. Something like that.”
“But 1 want to know, Jake!”
“What for?” Jake asked suspiciously.
“I just do. Listen, wouldn't he be in the programme somewhere?”
The search for the ringleader occupied the boy for quite a while
Somewhat later the girl said suddenly and pitifully, “I’m hungry."
“Well,” said the boy, “can you wait till between the halves? I can
get you a hot dog or something then.”
“I suppose l can if I have to,” the girl said. “But I’m awfully hungry."
The intermitten hissing of matches began again.
“Look at that child,” she observed, in the midst of it.
“Imagine bringing a child that age to a football game!” the girl
said. “Imagine bothering!”
The youth agreed with her. It was plain from his tone that he
wagged his head.
“Can you beat it?”* he demanded solemnly.
(From Football Girl by K. Brush)
E. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.

Describe the Monte Carlo tournament and Nicky's success.
Say if Nicky liked roulette, trente et quarante, baccara or not
and why. Use some idioms given in Unit 16.
Nicky beat neither Austin nor van Cramm in the Monte Carlo
tournament, but he did not disgrace himself. He snatched an unex
pected victory over a Spanish player and gave one of the Austrians a
closer match than anyone had thought possible. In the mixed doubles
he got into the semifinals. His charm conquered everyone and he
vastly enjoyed himself. It was generally allowed that he showed
promise, and Colonel Brabazon told him that when he was a little
older and had more practice with first-class players he would be a
credit to his father. The tournament came to an end and the day fol
lowing he was to fly back to London. Anxious to play his best he had
lived very carefully, smoking little and drinking nothing, and going
to bed early, but on his last evening he thought he would like to see
something of the life in Monte Carlo of which he had heard so much.
An official dinner was given to the tennis-players and after dinner
with the rest of them he went into the sporting club. It was the first
time he had been there. Monte Carlo was very full and the rooms
were crowded. Nicky had never before seen roulette played except in
the pictures; in a maze he stopped at the first table he came to; chips
of different sizes were scattered over the green cloth in what looked
* Can you imagine ;in\ihmg like that?

like a hopeless muddle; the croupier gave the wheel a sharp turn and
with a flick threw in the little white ball. After what seemed an end
less time the ball stopped and another croupier with a broad, indif
ferent gesture raked in the chips of those who had lost.
Presently Nicky wandered over to where they were playing trente
et quarante, but he couldn’t understand what it was all about and he
thought it dull. He saw a crowd in another room and sauntered in. A
big game of baccara was in progress and he was immediately con
scious of the tension. The players were protected from the thronging
by-standers by a brass rail; they sat round the table, nine on each side,
with the dealer in the middle and the croupier facing him. Big money
was changing hands. The dealer was a member of the Greek
Syndicate. Nicky looked at his impassive face. His eyes were watch
ful, but his expression never changed whether he won or lost. It was
a terrifying, strangely impressive sight. It gave Nicky, who had been
thriftily brought up, a peculiar thrill to see someone risk a thousand
pounds on the turn of a card and when he lost make a little joke and
laugh. It was all terribly exciting.
(From The Facts o f Life by W. S. Maugham)
in Unit 16.
I. My favourite game / kind of sport. 2. English popular games
and sports. 3. Revenge. 4. A sports event l will never forget. 5. A
sound mind in a sound body.
PROJECT
1. Identify each kind of sport (or game) mentioned in the follow
ing jokes. Describe the sport (game), qualities it requires
from the sportsmen (players), its advantages and attractive
features. Use some idioms given in Unit 16. Use the following
prompts:
ice hockey, cycling, athletics (track and f ield), football, shooting.
I. A coach to another: What do you do that your boys run so fast?
Some special training method?
- No, we just put live cartridges in the starter’s pistol.
2. - I always worry when you ride your bicycle so fast.
- You need not worry, it has brakes.
- Maybe it has, but you haven’t!
3. - Why do you refuse to go to the football match?
- Because no team can repeat the best parts of the game like it is
done on the TV!
4. - A clever fellow was the inventor of ice hockey.
- Why do you say so?
- Because a hockey stick may be used both as a weapon in the
game, and as a crutch after the game is over.
5. - Hey, how do you shoot so well?
- Easily. I shoot first, and then draw a bull’s eye.
2. Pick out from an English new spaper briefs on sporting

news. Be ready to com m ent on them .
3. Pick ou t briefs on sporting new s from a Russian newspaper.

B e ready to render them in English using the idiom s given in Unit
16.
4. Find the common sem antic component for the following

groups o f phraseological units.
1. On the spur of the moment; in ajiffy; no sooner said than done;
in less than no time; before you can say Jack Robinson; at one go; in
the twinkling of an eye.
2. All his geese are swans; to make a mountain out of a molehill;
to make much of; to praise to the skies; a tower of strength.
3. Juda’s kiss; crocodile tears; double dealing; pie in the sky.
5. Supply the proverbs from which the following phraseological
units have been derived.
I. A bird in the hand. 2. The last straw. 3. A new broom. 4. Spilt
milk. 5. Birds of a feather. 6. The best policy. 7. The mother of inven
tion. 8. The proof of the pudding. 9. Better late. Ю. Second thoughts.
POLITICS
IDIOMS

1. On good authority
2. Rivet one’s attention on (to)
3. Make arrangements
4. Take action
5. Get a new angle on smth
6. Agree to differ
7. Be on the agenda
8. Hardy annual
9. Drive into the background
10. Keep in the background
11. Parliamentary agent
12. On (upon) the anvil
13. A wrecking amendment
14. Kill the bill
15. The balance of power
16. Hold the balance
17. The armaments race / the arms race
18. Lay down (one’s) arms
19. Rise in arms (take up arms against)
20. Under arms
21. Up in arms
22. Gunboat diplomacy
23. Big stick policy / the big stick
24. A carrot and stick policy / the carrot and the stick
25. The policy of strength
26. Power politics
27. Shuttle diplomacy
28. Shirtsleeve diplomacy
29. A round table conference
30. Political prisoner
31. Political asylum
32. Be at peace with smb
33. Go into politics
34. Party politics
35. Form a government
36. Under a government
37. Be in government
38. The inner cabinet
39. The shadow cabinet
40. Lean compromise is better than a fat lawsuit
41. Honesty is the best policy
1. On good authority - if you have it on good authority that smth is

true, you are fairly certain that it is true because you trust the per
son who told you about it.
E.g.: The president - we have it on good authority - authorized
the bombings.
2. Rivet [Yivit] one’s attention on (to) - when things rivet smb, they
fascinate smb and hold smb’s interest firmly and completely.
E.g.: World attention was riveted on the talks in Geneva.
3. Make arrangements - to make plans and preparations so that
smth will happen or be possible.
E.g.: They've made all the arrangements for the conference.
4. Take action - to do things in order to deal with or achieve some
thing.
E.g.: The government is already taking action to stop the strike.
5. Get a new angle on smth - to consider a problem or situation, to
change one’s point of view of smth.
E.g.: He got a new angle on the problem.
6. Agree to differ - to agree to accept the fact that they will never
have the same opinion about smth and so stop arguing about it.
L.g.: Sometimes, where important matters are concerned, people
agree to differ
7. Be on the agenda - if smth is on the agenda, you're planning to
do smth about it.
E.g.: Health care was on top o f President Clinton's agenda.
8. Hardy annual - a question (problem) discussed every year.
E.g.: Readers are once more filling the columns o f that newspa
per with "Is the government's policy a Failure? " The hardy
annual attracts everybody's attention this time.
9. Drive into the background - not to pay much attention to smth,
to find smth unimportant.
E.g.: The missile crisis drove again into the background, for a
time, the social and political aspirations o f the people.
10. Keep in the background - to try not to be noticed.
E.g.: He keeps himself very much in the background.
11. Parliamentary agent - a person who tries to persuade a Member
of Parliament, a member of Congress, or public official to support
or oppose certain actions; lobby.
E.g.: The minister was met by a lobby o f industrialists (some par
liamentary agents).
12. On (upon) the anvil [’aenvil] - under discussion; smth which is
still being considered and talked about.
E.g.: The new immigration laws are on the anvil.
13. A wrecking amendment - a passage that is added to a law in
order to frustrate it (block / defeat).
E.g.: It was a wrecking amendment. И didn Уimprove the law.
14. Kill the bill - to defeat a proposed new law.
E.g.: The bill was killed (defeated) bv 230 votes to 150.
15. The balance of power a state in which opposite forces (influ
ences) have equal importance.
E.g.: The balance of power was interrupted by challenges from
that country
16. Hold the balance to control, to rule; to have the power to take
all the important decisions.
E.g.: He held the balance with a strong hand.
17. The armaments race / the arms race - the attempt by powerful
countries always to have more and better weapons than their
rivals.
E.g.: The arms race is a drain on national resources.
18. Lay down (one’s) arms - to stop fighting and surrender.
E.g.: Having suffered a defeat, they laid down their arms.
19. Rise in arms (take up arms against) - to prerare to attack smb
and fight against smb.
E.g. : The people immediately took up arms against the invader.
20. Under arms - if a country has people under arms, it has people
trained to use weapons and ready to fight a war.
E.g.: At this time Britain had more forces under arms than ever
before.
21. Up in arms - to be very angry about smth and protest strongly.
E.g.: The youth is really up in arms over an unpopular war in
Yugoslavia.
22. Gunboat diplomacy - the use of a threat of armed force by a
Country to support a claim, demand, complaint, etc against
another.
E.g.: The days o f gunboat diplomacy are drawing to their dose.
23. Big stick policy / the big stick - the threat of using military or
political force to get what one wants.
E.g.: What is their policy? Is it the big stick policy o f their
President?
24. A carrot and stick policy / the carrot and the stick - promises
and threats.
E.g.: Their method o f negotiating is a combination o f the carrot
and the stick.
25. The policy of strength - the use of a threat of armed force by a
country.
E.g.: The policy o f strength suffers further defeats.
26. Power politics - the policy of strength.
E.g.. It is power politics employedfor their goal that w e’re deal
ing wtth
27. Shuttle diplomacy - international talks, e.g. to try to make
peace, carried out by someone who travels between the coun
tries concerned taking messages and suggesting answers to
problems.
E.g.: Wefind Secretary1Brown s shuttle diplomacy>very1important.
28. Shirtsleeve diplomacy - informal and direct diplomacy.
E.g.: They continue their shirtsleeve diplomacy.
29. A round table conference - a conference at which all the people
present meet in an equal way and have equal importance.
E.g.: They 7/ have / hold a round table discussion (conference) on
May 10, 2000.
30. Political prisoner - someone who is put in prison because they
oppose and criticize the government of their own country.
E.g.: The President says they have no political prisoners.
31. Political asylum - the right to remain safely in another country,
for a person who cannot live safely in their own because of the
political situation.
E.g.: He is seeking political asylum.
32. Be at peace with smb - a situation in which there is no war
between countries or in a country.
E.g.: They've been at peace with Germany for many years.
33. Go into politics - to become a politician.
E.g.: He went into politics in his early thirties.
34. Party politics - activities that are concerned with getting support
for a political party rather than with doing things to improve the
situation in a country.
35. Form a government - to become the government after an elec
tion in a parliamentary system.
E.g.: Their party will form the next government.
36. Under a government during the period of a government.
E.g.: There were some changes in policy under the last Labour
government.
37. Be in government to be governing a country.
E.g.: How long have the Tories been in government?
38. The inner cabinet - close to the centre of control. The most
important ministers of the government, who meet as a group to
make decisions or to advise the head of the government.
E.g.: The inner cabinet will meet tomorrow to discuss this prob
lem.
In Britain the cabinet has about 20 members who are chosen
by the Prime Minister
39. The shadow cabinet - a group of politicians in the opposition
party in the British Parliament who each study and speak about
the work of a particular minister in the government.
40. Lean compromise is better than a fat lawsuit (proverb) - it is
better to be at peace with everybody.
41. Honesty is the best policy (saying) - it is better to be honest and
tell people the truth.
CULTURE CONTEXT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- \
P O L IT IC S
Conservative Conservative Conservative
Labour
SDP
Liberals
Green Party
V________________________________________________ /
The Conservative Party , Tory Party - one of the two main

British political parties, also known as the Conservatives or the
Tories. It is right wing, tending to be opposed to great or sudden
changes in the established order of society. It is against state control
of industry.
The Labour Party, a political party trying to obtain social improve
ment, esp. for workers and less wealthy people. The British Labour
Party, sometimes called the Socialists, is one of the two main politi
cal parties and has a close association with the trade unions, although
it is not now as leftwing as it used to be.
The Liberal Party - a British political party which held power for
many years in the 19th and early 20th centuries. With the rise of the
Labour Party it lost much of its support.
SDP - the Social Democratic Party, Social Democrats - a British
political party formed in 1981 and sharing many of the opinions of
the Liberal Party. It was led for most of its existence by David Owen.
In 1988 most of its members joined with the Liberal Party to form the
Social and Liberal Democrats, although the Social Democratic Party
still officially existed for several years.
Liberal Democrats, Lib Dents, the Social and Liberal Demo
crats - a British political party of the centre formed in 1988 from the
Liberal Party and the Social Democrats. It is the third largest party,
but it is quite small.
The Green Party - a British political party started in 1973 which
wants a nuclear-free society and whose ideas centre around caring for
the environment. Originally it was called the Ecology Party, chang
ing its name in 1985 in order to get closer to similar European par
ties.
Elections in Britain
Britain is divided into 650 political areas, known as constitu
encies or seats. Each constituency is represented in the House of
Commons by an MP (Member of Parliament), elected by the people
in the constituency. At a general election, the people of Britain who
are aged over 18 vote to choose who will serve in the House of
Commons and which party will form the government.
The main political parties choose a candidate to fight for a seat in
each constituency. So, in each constituency people usually have four
or five candidates to choose from, each representing a different politi
cal party. People vote by putting a cross by the name of one of the
candidates on the ballot paper. The person who is elected for each
constituency is the one who gains the most votes within that con
stituency.
When voting is completed, the political party that has won the
most seats is asked to form a government, and that party’s leader
becomes Prime Minister, which means that they hold more seats than
all the other parties together, and so cannot easily be defeated in votes
in the House of Commons. Sometimes there is a minority govern
ment in which one party has more seats than any other party and can
form a government, but does not have more seats than all the other
parties together, so can easily be defeated in votes in the House of
Commons. This situation is also called a hung parliament. In this situ
ation, the ruling party may join with another party to form a coalition
so that it can pass laws in the House of Commons. The longest time
that a parliament can run is five years, but the Prime Minister has the
power to call an election at any point within this period, usually on
the government’s opinion of whether they have a good chance of
being re-elected.
A Ballot Paper
Catherine Smith Green
Jane Brown Conservative
Peter Johnson Liberal Democrat X
Helen Falcon Labour
TESTING VOCABULARY
♦ Make arrangements ♦ Defeat a proposed new law

♦ Get a new angle on smth ♦ Control, rule
♦ Ilardy annual ♦ Promises and threats
♦ Keep in the background ♦ Under discussion
♦ Rise in arms against ♦ During the period of a gov
ernment
♦ Gunboat diplomacy ♦ Make plans and preparations
♦ Shirtsleeve diplomacy ♦ Become a politician
♦ Be in government ♦ Change one’s point of view
♦ Up in arms ♦ A question discussed every
year
♦ Under a government ♦ The use of a threat of armed
force by a country
♦ Go into politics ♦ Informal and direct diplomacy
♦ The carrot and the stick ♦ Be governing a country
♦ On the anvil ♦ Have an unimportant role
♦ Hold the balance ♦ Protest strongly
♦ Kill the bill ♦ Prepare fight against smb

with “It's better to be at peace with neighbouring countries".
Other students should take turns building upon this sen-
fence, turn by turn.I.

English.
B. Expand on these sentences.
□ Model: The President will soon resign. I hove it on good authority.

I. I have it on good authority. 2. Let's stop arguing. We'd better
agree to differ. 3. Try to get a new angle on the problem. 4. They've
made arrangements lor an interview with the leader of the party.
5. What action arc you taking to help the refugees streaming across
the border? 6. They defeated the bill. 7. We’re against the arms race.
8. The members of the party held a round table discussion last week.
9. There are not any political prisoners in this country. 10. My aim is
to go into politics. 11. What party is going to form the next govern
ment? 12. Honesty is the best policy.
plete the idiom.
I. The citizens of the country are__ (making, taking, baking,
waking) action to stop the war. 2. The war drives many problems into
the__ (underground, background, backwardness, backwater). 3. I’m
afraid, they’l l __ (fill, kill, mill, till) the bill. 4. We’re against the
arms__ (pace, mace, race, case). 5. The big___ (stack, stock, stick,
stuck) policy must be defeated. 6. He’s famous for his__ (shutter,
shuttle, shuttered, shut) diplomacy. 7. Who belongs to the __
(shade, shadowy, shadow, shady) cabinet? 8. We’ll hold a __
(rounded, roundabout, round, ground) table discussion next week.
IV. Bead the following passages and choose the correct key word
to complete the idioms. Use your dictionary to check your
answers. Translate the passages into Russian. (Passages
come from Time, 1999, The Economist, 1999).
1. Prominent on the Bundestag__ (programme / agenda) is an
oft-postponed “dual nationality” bill that would grant 2.1 million
Turkish “guest workers” the right to acquire German citizenship
without renouncing Turkish citizenship.
2. We confronted Moscow with the Truman Doctrine and the
Marshall Plan, thus reviving Western Europe and establishing the
balance of__ (force / power) that stabilized the world and yielded a
“long peace” between the superpowers.
3. He is clearly at his__ (rest / best), and his narrative is at its
most compelling, when describing the lives of his relatives.
4. The Great Depression was partly an aftershock of the First
World War, which destroyed the Romanov and Habsburg empires
and left an unstable balance of__ (power / strength) in Europe.
5. US policymakers regularly speak of “the credible__ (threat /
thread) of force”, as if they were convinced that words will make
Milosevic give in. But the calculus of Clinton’s __ (carrot / stick)
diplomacy means that sometimes diplomats have to go to the stick.
6. In March she flew to what she hoped would be refuge in
Belgium, onl\ to have her request f o r __(shelter/ asylum) rejected
7. Mr Schrdder has been careful to point out that the campaign
line-up did not constitute a “__ (shade /shadow) cabinet”
8. After an election victory, with the Greens clamouring for jobs
in the__ (government / cabinetЛ the left may again find its voice.
9. California uses__ (direct / directive) diplomacy more vigor
ously than any other American state, which puts it second only to
Switzerland as an exponent of this way of running politics.
Ю. The Hindu-nationalist Party won the biggest number of seats
in the Indian general election but was short of the 272 needed to__
(form / found) a government.

A. V: Kunin.
I. Болезни, голод, наступающий с юга враг - все это накали
ло атмосферу собрания. (Бахметьев. Преступление Мартына)
2. Они избегали касаться больших вопросов, разногласий в не
официальной обстановке. (А. Фадеев. Последнгтга Удэге) 3. Он не
вошел в историю как выдающийся государственный деятель.
(Архив братьев Тургеневых. Предисловие ко 2 т.) 4. Всякую меч
ту она сейчас же стремилась воплотить в жизнь. (В. Вересаев. В
юные годы) 5. Эти события совпали с приездом в Петербург
французского президента, явившегося нащупать почву для
использования военных сил России в надвигавшейся тогда
войне. (Д. Самойлов. По следам минувшего) 6. О нем и не вспоми
нали, - в конце концов это была мелкая сошка. (Э. Казакевич. Весна
на Одере) 7. Ты имеешь верные сведения? - Вернейшие... из
первых рук! (И. Тургенев. П о а е смерти) 8. Только тот понимает ее
вполне, кто смотрит на нее с этой точки зрения. (Д. Писарев.
Реалисты) 9. Дебу был молчалив и старался держаться в тени...
(С. Сергеев-Ценский. Севастопольская страда) Ю. Если мы сло
жим оружие, мы будем преступниками... (К. Федин. Необыкновен
ное лето) П. Война поставила под ружье огромное количество
Людей... (М. Горький. Жить Клима Сангина) 12. Все войска стояли
Под ружьем (А. Толстой. Петр Первый) 13. Возникла необхо
димость сесть за круглый стол переговоров. (А. Игнатьев. 50 лет в
Строю) I4. Даже он остался в тени рядом с господами диплома
тами. (Л. Никулин. России верные сыны)
VI. Rewrite the following bit of text in idiomatic English.
Thomas Brown became a politician in his early thirties. Now he
is fifty years old. Tom is a member of the Labour Party. His party is
governing the country now. Thomas Brown is one of the most import
ant ministers of the government. They have the power to take all the
important decisions. The ministers of the government try to obtain
social improvement. Their motto is: “To be honest and tell people the
truth.” During the period of their government there have been some
important changes in policy. They have a lot of urgent problems
under discussion. From time to time they have a conference at which
some representatives of different political parties meet in an equal
way. Sometimes they agree to accept the fact that they will never
have the same opinion about some issue. Then they stop arguing
about it. The government works hard to make their country wealthy
and strong.

have read that will lead you to say "So as the proverb
goes..."
Proverbs: Honesty is the best policy.
Lean compromise is better than a fat lawsuit.
VIII. Link each of the pictures (pp. 303-304) with one of the
1. Political asylum. 3. Big stick policy.
2. Shirtsleeve diplomacy. 4. Л round table conference.IX
.

tences.
I. We had it on good authority. 2. They've made all the arrange
ments for the congress. 3. Unfortunately, they got a new angle on the
question. 4. So they had to agree to differ. 5. That's why they kept
themselves in the background. 6. He became a parliamentary agent.
7. It turned out to be a wrecking amendment. 8. That's why they
killed the bill. 9. He managed to hold the balance. Ю. They had to lay
down their arms.
1. Try and get a new angle on the problem. 2. There are a lot of
important questions on the agenda. 3. We’re against the arms race.
4, They couldn’t but take up arms against their enemy. 5. A lot of
young people are up in arms over their policy. 6. They have to give
up their policy of strength. 7. There are a lot of political prisoners in
this country. 8. His dream is to go into politics. 9. They’ve been in
government for some months. 10. They’re at peace with their neigh
bours.
XI. Explain and expand on the following.

(Passages 1-3 come from The Painted Veil by W. S. Maugham;
Passages 4-9 come from The Devil's Dictionary by A. Bierce).
1. It was enough for her to realize, and she did this quite distinct
ly, that to be the government bacteriologist was no great fry.
2. He was always ready to do any one a good turn. He never let
red tape interfere with him.
3 .1 don’t want to say anything disagreeable about him, but when
you come down to brass tacks a bacteriologist is no great shakes. The
chances are that I shall be Colonial Secretary when Simmons goes
home, and it’s to Walter’s interest to keep on the right side of me.
He’s got his bread and butter to think of, like the rest of us: do you
think the Colonial office are going to do much for a fellow who
makes a scandal? Believe me, he’s got everything to gain by holding
his tongue and everything to lose by kicking up a row.
4. Alliance (n). In international politics, the union of two thieves
who have their hands so deeply inserted in each other’s pocket that
they cannot separately plunder a third.
5. Congress (n). A body of men who meet to repeal laws.
6. Conservative (n). A statesman who is enamored of existing
evils, as distinguished from the Liberal, who wishes to replace them
with others.
7. Diplomacy (n). The patriotic art of lying for one’s country.
8. Politics (n). A strife of interests masquerading as a contest of
principles. The conduct of public affairs for private advantage.
9. In time of peace prepare for war.
1. Choose one of the famous Russian / British political leaders
and have an interview with him, as if you were a reporter.
2. Discuss the latest news you and your friend heard over the
radio.
Xlil. A. Read and translate the follouing passage into Russian.

Give the gist of NanTs speech. Comment on her husband's
hopes and his political ambitions. Use some idioms given in
Unit 17.
Ladies and gentlemen, I am privileged and pleased that such a
gathering as this should be the occasion of my very first public
speech.
St Bride’s has always been distinguished for its tradition of pub
lic service. Our great democracy has not looked towards St Bride’s in
vain - and public servants in all ranks of honourable employment are
numbered among our old boys.
\ trust then that you will not think it unsuitable if, before ending
my speech, I strike a more personal note. The windows of St Bride’s
have never, as we know, been closed upon the world of commerce
and of politics. Enriched by contact with the School, many have gone
out, boys and masters alike, into the world beyond the classroom and
the library. And here I am sure you will pardon me if I speak to you
of something which has long been known to many of you - the ambi
tions of my husband.
It has been for many years the dear wish and ambition of my hus
band, myself and our children that he should serve his country in the
highest role to which a democratic society can call its citizens - that
of a member of Parliament. After a long period of patient work, my
husband has now a great happiness of being able to realize his life
long ambition. The nearby borough of Marsington have decided to
adopt him as their Labour candidate - and as we know, Marsington,
with all respect to those present who are of the other party, is a safe
Labour scat.
As Shakespeare says, there is a tide in the affairs of men that
taken at the Hood leads on to fortune. This tide now runs for my hus
band, and for myself, and for our children. We have discussed the
matter fully, and we are at last agreed that there is no other bond or
tie which can prevent us from adventuring forward together. Courage
is needed to make the great step. To delay would be fatal. Such a
chance comes but once in a lifetime. Courage he has never lacked -
nor is it likely that he will hesitate now when all his deepest and most
cherished wishes are about to find so complete a fulfilment.
B. Read and translate the following bit of text into Russian.

Describe the Ministry of Propaganda, its members and their
duties. Comment on the following sentence: “Time outside the
Ministry went at quite a different pace." Say how the following
phrase can be applied to this bit of text: "By the way a man
does his work his character can be told." Use some idioms given
in Unit 17.
Skate had a permanent job, he was a Civil Servant. His whole
world now was the Ministry of Propaganda.
Propaganda was a means of passing the time: work was not done
for its usefulness but for its own sake - simply as an occupation. The
official explanation and defence of the Ministry's existence was “A
negative action may have positive results."
The book committee as usual lasted about an hour - it was
always, to Skate, an agreeable meeting with men from other div
isions, the Religious Division, the Empire Division and so on.
Sometimes they co-opted another man they thought was nice. It
gave an opportunity for all sorts of interesting discussions - on
books and authors and artists and plays and films. The agenda
didn’t really matter: it was quite easy to invent one at the last
moment.
Today everybody was in a good temper: there hadn’t been any
bad news for a week, and as the policy of the latest Permanent
Secretary was that the Ministry should not do anything to attract
attention, there was no reason to fear a purge in the immediate future.
(From Men at Work by Gr. Greene)
307
C. Read and translate the following bit of text into Russian.
Say what Mr Thriplow and the hotelkeeper understand by
democracy. Give evidence from the text for saying the fol
lowing: Individuals dropped and shrivelled in the enomrious con
flagration of the internecine war. ” Use some idioms given in
Unit 17.
Thriplow said, “After all it is a democracy here you have a
vote. If you want reaction, you can vote for it." He went on explain
ing democracy to the hotel-keeper. Suddenly the old man began
speaking. It was confusing and a little disturbing. Thriplow felt that
he had probably not understood correctly. The word “lottery ticket"
came in, and once Thriplow was convinced that he had been called a
fool. The idea that Thriplow got - it was probably an inaccurate one -
was this: the Governor's position, in spite of the police and the fed
eral troops and the trade union, was shaky. It was difficult to believe,
but it had really seemed that he might lose the election. Because the
wages of the police and the soldiers had not been paid for months.
The word “gold teeth" came in, but that could hardly have been the
Governor’s only extravagance. His opponent had been placarding the
town .with accusations - and the police had not tom them down. But
now to-night everybody had been paid - in full - because of the lot
tery ticket.
Mr Thriplow tried to suggest in English and French that the vic
tory of progress ought not to be endangered by the loss of a few
weeks’ wages.
The hotel-keeper suddenly and unexpectedly lost his tem per-the
noise now was so great that he shouted at Mr Thriplow, “Progress."
He screamed, “Pistoleros. Asesinos."* There was some cheerful cry
ing in the street out-side.
Thriplow went out on the balcony. A group of soldiers was going
by: they were a little drunk.
"Where are they going?" Thriplow said. The hotel-keeper
answered that they were probably going for the other candidate - to
arrest him. This time Thriplow felt sure he understood because he had
guessed the answer.
“Why?"
* Наемные убийцы УпнНиы (ш п )

The hotel-keeper laughed with amusement and answered, to
make sure, in French and Spanish. “Trahison, defamacion.”*
(From The Lottery Ticket by Gr. Greene)

Comment on the basic message of i t Describe the author's
attitude to war. Say how governments get the support of the
people for wars. Use some idioms given in Unit 17.
The death of a hero! What mockery, what bloody cant! What sick
ening putrid cant! George's death is a symbol to me of the whole
sickening bloody waste of it, the damnable stupid waste and torture
of it. You’ve seen how George’s own people - the makers of his body
were affected by his death. The Army did its bit, but how could the
Army individually mourn a million ‘'heroes'’? How could the little bit
of Army, which knew George mourn him? At dawn next morning we
were hotfoot after the retreating enemy, and did not pause until the
Armistice - and then we had our own lives to struggle with and dis
entangle.
That night in Venice, George and his death became a symbol to
me - and still remain a symbol. Somehow or other we have to make
these dead acceptable, we have to atone for them, we have to appease
them. How, l don’t quite know. I know there’s the Two Minutes’
Silence. But after all, a Two Minutes’ Silence once a year isn’t doing
much - in fact, it’s doing nothing. Atonement - how can we atone?
How can we atone for the lost millions and millions of years of life,
how atone for those lakes and seas of blood? Something is unful
filled, and that is poisoning us. It is poisoning me, at any rate, though
I have agonized over it, as I now agonize over poor George, for
whose death no other human being has agonized. What can we do?
Headstones and wreaths and memorials and speeches and the
Cenotaph - no, no, it has got to be something in us. Somehow we
must atone to the dead the dead, murdered, violently - dead sol
diers. The reproach is not from them, but in ourselves. Most of us
don’t know it, but it is there, and poisons us. It is the poison that
* П шена (ф р.). клеве i а (иен.)

makes us heartless and hopeless and lifeless - us the war generation,
and the new generation too. The whole world is blood-guilty, cursed
like Orestes*, and mad, and destroying itself, as if pursued by an infi
nite legion of Eumenides**. Somehow we must atone, somehow wc
must free ourselves from the curse - the blood-guiltiness. We must
find - where? How? - the greater Pallas*** who will absolve us on
some Acropolis o f Justice****. But meanwhile the dead poison us
and those who come after us.
(From Death o f a Hero by R. Aldington)
in Unit 17.
I. Russian (British, U.S.. politics. 2. Big stick policy. 3. Is nuclear
energy advisable? 4. The most common causes of war. 5. A round
table conference.
PROJECT
1. Pick out from an English newspaper briefs on political
news. Be ready to comment on them.
2. Pick out briefs on political news from a Russian newspaper.
Be ready to render them in English using the idioms given in
Unit 17.
3. Read an interview with Britain’s Labour Prime Minister.
Give the gist of it.
Time: Britain has voted for political change, but isn’t this coun
try also searching for something more?
* O re ste s [oTcsli:z] - a son o f Agamemnon and Clytcmncstra who avenges his

father’s murder by slaying his mother and Aegistluis Agamemnon [aego’memnan] -
leader o f the Greeks in the Trojan War.
** E u m en ides [jui'mena.di.z] - Erinyes [I'rini:/.]. the Furies in Greek mythology,
the avenging spirits.
*** P a th s [’paeUs] - Athena [э'вкпэ|. the Greek goddess o f war wisdom and the
arts, called also Pallas Athena.
* * * * . h r o p o lis o f Ju stice - it is a reference to the trial at which Orestes was not found
guilts due to Athena's support.
Tony Blair: Absolutely. I thought that the minimum that people wanted
was a change in government. But in fact people were
on to something far bigger than that. The victory is an
expression of the fact that a new generation has come on
that doesn’t have the outdated attitudes of the past. There
is a curious mixture of optimism about the future mixed
with a realization that the old British ways of getting
things done are not going to be enough. There is a
tremendous sense of confidence in the countrytoday, and
it comes from having found out what our role in the
world is.
Time: And what is that role?
Tony Blair: It is to be creative and innovative. The British feel a very
strong sense of compassion and social unity. My gener
ation says that we need an enterprising, highly creative
economy but we also want to bring up our kids within a
community with strong social bonds between people and
where we recognize a sense of duty and obligation to
ward others.
I want a society where women feel absolutely equal with
men. If you like, the cultural change in the country has
found expression in politics.
Time: And what about the British role in the world?
Tony Blair: A great British characteristic is to be open and outward
looking. British foreign policy is about being pivotal. We
are not going to have the largest army in the world any
more. We’ve not got an empire, but we have a series of
relationships, which, if we use them correctly, will make
us a pivotal country - whether it is our relations with the
United States, or inside Europe or within the Common
wealth and the U.N. All these things come under the
rubric of using the strengths of our history to build the
future. We cannot pretend that the Empire is back be
cause it isn't. My generation has moved on beyond all that.
My generation has come to terms with its history. When
I see the pageantry in Britain I think that’s great, but it
does not define where Britain is today. The whole idea of
a modern British identity is not to displace the past, but
to honor it by applying its best characteristics to today’s
world.
Time: What is Britain’s position now on participation in Euro
pean Economic and Monetary Union?
Tony Blair: Our position is very clear: there is no unsuperable con
stitutional barrier to our joining a monetary union, but we
think it is a question of whether our economic interest is
served. Because the British position in the economic
cycle is different from that of other European economies,
it’s unlikely that we will gojnto the first wave, but we
will keep our options open. That freedom is best for us,
but 1 understand why other countries see joining the
single currency as a huge priority for them.
Time: Do you think that the West in general is fulfilling its
responsibility in easing Russia into the new world order?
Tony Blair: Yes, I believe so. We are strongly encouraging the pro
cess of economic reform. I would like to see stronger
trade and investment links - not just between Britain and
Russia but between Europe and Russia. In the end the
key to this is lifting the economy in Russia because the
people there are convinced of the political necessity of
change and reform, but they have to be convinced of the
economic benefits that reform will bring.
(From Compassion and "Hard choices ”
An interview with Britain’s Prime Minister.
Time, October 27, 1997)
LAW
IDIOMS
1. Read law
2. Go to law
3. Law and order
4. Accessory after the fact
5. Accessory before the fact
6. Prisoner at the bar
7. Jury service
8. Innocent till proven guilty
9. Give smb the benefit of the doubt
10. Hardened criminals
11. Bring / call smb to account (for)
12. Bring / take an action against smb
13. Be called to the Bar
14. Take someone to court
15. Commit crimes
16. Scene of the crime
17. Crime doesn’t pay
18. Be on trial (for)
19. Stand trial
20. Stand accused of
21. Behind bars
22. Add insult to injury
23. Aid and abet
24. Assault and battery
25. Bear testimony / witness (to); testimony
26. Take the law into one's own hands
27. Settled out of court
28. Break jail
29. The (long) arm of the law
30. The greater the crime, the higher the gallows
3 1. Ignorance of the law excuses no man
32. Law-makers should not be law-breakers
***
1. Read law - to study the whole system of rules that citizens of a
country or place must obey.
E.g.: He reads law:
2. Go to law - to go to court in order to deal with a dispute, or
arrange to do this.
Have (take) the law of (on) smb.
E.g.: I f he doesn’t agree to oar terms, we ’ll have to go to law.
3. Law and order - respect and obedience for the law in society.
E.g.: They managed to restore law and order after the riots.
4. Accessory after the fact - a person who is not present at a crime
but who helps someone else in doing it after the crime.
E.g.: We’re accessory after the fact. The thing might come out at
any time.
5. Accessory before the fact - a person who is not present at a crime
but who helps someone else in doing it before the crime.
6. Prisoner at the bar - the person being tried. Bar - (in a court of
law) a division between the part in which the business of the court
is carried on and the part intended for the prisoner or the public.
E.g.: The prisoner at the bar looked worried.
7. Jury service - service as a member of a jury, a duty which every
adult is supposed to do if called, except when there are reasons
why they cannot (by itself, work is not a good enough reason).
(Culture Context - 1).
E.g.: H e’s been called up to do jury service.
8. Innocent till proven guilty - (of a person) not guilty of a crime or
sin; blameless.
E.g.: In the British legal system, an accused person is innocent till
proven guilty.
9. Give smb the benefit of the doubt - the right to favourable con
sideration until wc know whether it is good or bad; to acquit smb
for lack of evidence, to give a decision that (someone) is not
guilty of a crime.
E.g.: Your duty is to give the defendant the benefit o f the doubt.
10. Hardened criminals - men who have been guilty of many
crimes.
E.g.: Putting this young man into prison alongside hardened
criminals is the surest way to make him reoffend.
11. Bring / call smb to account (for) - to punish smb (for).
E.g.: They couldn 'l be brought to account because o f their power.
12. Bring / take an action against smb - a charge or a matter for
consideration by a court of law.
E.g.: Vm afraid, we must bring an action against him.
13. Be called to the Bar - to become a barrister, a lawyer who has
the right of speaking in the higher courts of law.
Advocate (Scot E) - a lawyer who speaks in defence of or in
favour of another person in court.
Solicitor (esp. in England) - a lawyer who gives advice, does the
necessary work when property is bought and sold, and speaks esp.
in the lower courts of law. In 1992 it was decided that solicitors
could also argue cases in the higher courts, which formerly only
barristers were able to do. (Culture Context - 2).
14. Take someone to court - to start an action in law against some
one. Go to court.
E.g.: We told him we could take him to court.
They were forced to go to court.
15. Commit crimes - to do something illegal.
C rim e - a n offence, which is punishable by law.
E.g.: They committed some violent crimes.
16. The scene of the crime, scene a place where an event or
action happens.
E.g.: They say that murderers always return to the scene o f the
crime.
17. Crime doesn’t pay (saying) - people who commit crimes will not
become rich, but will be caught and punished.
18. Be on trial (for) - to be judged in a court of law.
E.g.: He is on trial for armed robbery.
19. Stand trial - to be tried in court.
E.g.: He stood trial for murder.
20. Stand accused of - charged with doing something wrong, a
crime...
E.g.: He stands accused o f armed robbery.
21. Behind bars - in prison.
E.g.: He is behind bars now.
22. Add insult to injury - to make matters even worse, esp. by caus
ing annoyance as well as harm.
E.g.: To add insult to injury, he offended the judge.
23. Aid and abet - to help smb in criminal activities.
E.g.: He was accused o f aiding and abetting the murderer.
24. Assault and battery - an attack which includes not only threats
but the actual use of violence.
E.g.: He is being charged with assault and battery.
25. *Bear testimony / witness (to) - to formally state that smth is true
or happened.
Testimony - a formal statement that smth is true, as made by a
witness in a court of law.
E.g.: Some witnesses bore'testimony against the accused.
26. Take the law into one’s own hands - to take no notice of so
ciety’s rules and act alone, usually by force.
E.g.: He took the law into his own hands and shot the burglar.
27. Settled out of court - without having to be heard by a judge.
E.g.: The case was settled out o f court.
28. Break jail - to escape. Jail (gaol [djeil]) - a place where crimi
nals are kept as part of their punishment; prison.
E.g.: He was jailed for life for murder. The prisoners have broken
jail (have escaped).
29. The (long) arm of the law - pomp., humor, - justice, esp. in the
form of the police, considered as something that criminals cannot
escape from.
E.g.: They were beyond the arm o f the law.
30. The greater the crime, the higher the gallows (proverb) - seri
ous crimes must be punished severely.
32. Ignorance of the law excuses no man - lack of knowledge of
the law excuses no person's actions / behaviour.
32. Law-makers should not be law-breakers (proverb) - lawyers
must not violate / break laws. (Culture Context - 3)
CULTURE CONTEXT
1. In Mainland Britain anyone between the ages of 18 and 65 who
has lived in Britain for five years since the age of 13 can be called on
for jury service, except people such as judges and priests, and anyone
from Northern Ireland.
2. Lawyer is the general word for someone whose business is the
law. In England and Wales there are two kinds of lawyer who have
different training and perform different jobs. A solicitor advises
people on legal matters such as contracts, wills, and the buying and
selling of property. A barrister may represent a person in any court,
but usually only does so in the higher courts. A person's solicitor
advises the barrister about the facts of the case, but does not tell the
barrister what to say.
3. Law. In Britain when a person is accused of a crime it must be
shown that (s)he is guilty “beyond reasonable doubt” A person is
always innocent in the eyes of the law until (s)he has been proved to
be guilty. If the person is found guilty by a court (s)he can sometimes
isk for permission to appeal to a higher court in the hope that it will
change this decision.
The Appeals System. (The diagram shows the courts in order o f
importance, with arrows representing the appeals system.)
Г" N
Criminal Courts in England and Wales
Ф
House of Lords
14
Court of Appeal (Criminal Division)
Crown Court
*
Magistrates’ Court
V.___________________ ____________________/
Criminal law in England. When someone is arrested by the
police, a magistrate (an official who judges cases in some types of
courts) decides whether there is enough evidence against the person
for the case to go to court. If there is enough evidence and the case is
a serious one, the person accused of the crime (called “the accused”)
is sent to a crown court for a trial with a judge and jury (12 members
of the public who have to decide if the accused is innocent or guilty).
If the verdict (decision) of the jury is that the accused is guilty, then
the judge decides the sentence (punishment). If there is enough evi
dence against the accused but the crime is not a serious one (e.g., a
traffic offence) then the case is heard in a magistrates’ court.
If found guilty in the Crown Court the accused may apply to the
Court of Appeal (Criminal Division) where he or she will be heard by
a judge. Sometimes a High Court judge from the Queen’s Bench
Division assists in dealing with criminal matters in the Court of
Appeal or Crown Court.
TESTING VOCABULARY
♦ Law and order ♦ Become a barrister

♦ The prisoner at the bar ♦ Start an action in law against
someone
♦ Hardened criminals ♦ Justice
♦ Call smb to account ♦ Without having to be heard
by a judge
♦ Behind bars ♦ A place where a crime
happened
♦ Aid and abet ♦ An attack which includes
threats and violence
♦ Break jail ♦ Make matters even worse
♦ Be called to the Bar ♦ Respect and obedience for
the law
♦ The scene of the crime ♦ In prison
♦ Add insult to injury ♦ Escape
♦ Assault and battery ♦ The person being tried
♦ Settled out of court ♦ Witness
♦ The arm of the law ♦ Men who have been guilty
of many crimes
♦ Bear testimony ♦ Punish somebody
♦ Take someone to court ♦ Help smb in criminal activ
ities

with “People must not do anything illegal”. Other students

English.
□ Model: Ben borrowed a big sum o f moneyfrom his colleagues two
years ago, but he couldn’t return it by the time fixed. Then Ben
promised to pay off his debt. He kept his word and returned all the
money. So his colleagues didn’t go to law.
1. Ben kept his word and returned all the money. So his colleagues
didn’t go to law. 2. The prisoner at the bar looked indifferent. 3. At the
age of twenty Jack was called up to do Jury service. 4. The young
man shouldn’t be sent to prison with hardened criminals. 5. Ben’s
duty is to bring them to account. 6. The Smiths took an action against
their neighbour. 7. At the age of thirty Peter was called to the Bar.
8. We can’t but take the thief to court. 9. Don has been to the scene of
the crime. 10. Crime doesn’t pay. 11. Mary was accused of aiding and
abetting the thieves. 12. Ignorance of the law excuses no manI.
plete the idiom.
1. If he doesn’t repay his debts, we’ll have to go to ___(war, mar,
law, saw). 2. He was accessory after th e ___(act, pact, fact, tact).
3. Everybody looked at the prisoner at th e ___(car, jar, par, bar).
4. They became (hard, hardy, hardened, hard-bitten) criminals.
5. Crime doesn’t ___(say, pay, bay, lay). 6. Yesterday they broke___
(bail, fail, jail, mail). 7. We had to take the law into our o w n ___
(heads, hearts, hats, hands).
1. “Are you George Elephant?” asked the clerk.
“I am.”
“You a r e ___(chargeable / charged) with murder; that you at
Golders Green on the 19th day of January 1948, murdered Jane
Elephant.”
(From The Name by H. Cecil)
2. The doctors are ready to say that, in their opinion, the mind of
th e ___(accused / amused) man may have been in such a state that
he was not, at the time when he killed his wife, fully responsible for
his actions.
(From The Name by H. Cecil)
3. “I want you to plead guilty. Believe me, it’s the only sensible
thing to do. You put this case to a ___(Jury / Fury), I swear you’ll be
spending the rest of your life in a cage. Plead guilty, and the worst
you’ll get is twenty years. That’s not so bad as it sounds; you’ll be eli
gible for parole in five.”
“I won’t do it!” Benjy screamed. “I’m innocent! I’m not goin’ to___
(jail/ gaol) for something I didn’t do!”
(From Thicker Than Water by H. Slesar)
4 .1 glanced through the messages on my call spike, saw there was
nothing important, then started leafing through the arrest flimsies,
reports of unusual occurrences, and complain reports which had
accumulated in my IN basket, hoping to find some happening in the
precinct that might in some way tie in with our homicide.
There wasn’t much - the normal number of larcenies and assaults,
a couple of narcotic busts, and several family fracases, including one
stemming from the theft of a bowling ball by two nine-year-old boys
on the sidewalk only half a block from th e___(scenery / scene) of
the murder which hail precipitated a free-for-all by the entire families
of both boys over the question of ownership, and still another family
squabble half a block away which had ended in trips to the hospital
for a man, his wife, and four in-laws. It seemed to have been a fairly
slow night; at least there hadn’t been anything I could reasonably
relate to our homicide. , ry , .. ¥ _ . ,
(From The Late Unlamented by J. Craig)
5. There isn’t such a thing as a murderer who__(commits / per

mits) crimes at random. Either he removes people who stand in his
path, or else he kills by conviction.

A. V. Kunin.
I. Договор их уже вступил в силу. (В. Ажаев. Далеко от Моск
вы) 2. Теперь надо было замести все следы происшедшего.
(Линьков. Война в тылу врага) 3. Вокзал с толпами своих при
езжих представлял прекрасное место, чтобы замести за собой
следы. (А. Морозов. Повести моей жизни) 4. Не приплели бы толь
ко тебе политику! Тогда вместо заграницы придется ехать в мес
та не столь отдаленные. (А. Степанов. Семья Звонаревых) 5. Корон
ный суд, с участием присяжных заседателей, признал меня в
состоянии невменяемости и отпустил на свободу. (А. Куприн. С
улицы) 6. Он страшно смутился и, точно пойманный на месте
преступления, растерянно смотрел на Мейера и не знал, что ска
зать. (А. Чехов. В усадьбе) 7. Да разве для них закон какой писан?
(А. Островский. Шутники) 8. Тюрьма плачет по этому типу, а он
мечтает о деньгах. (В. Ажаев. Далеко от Москвы)V I.
VI. Rewrite the following bit of text in idiomatic English. Use the
Idioms given in Unit 18.
U.S. prosecutors announced Wednesday the indictment of a gang
of robbers that preyed on Miami tourists, saying they could be
responsible for more than 200 crimes that have darkened Florida’s
reputation as a holiday destination.
A 23-count indictment charged 12 residents with tourist rob
beries. The gang preyed on women, the elderly and foreigners who
were unlikely to speak English. Officials said the 12 suspects wer
members of a ring that operated at Miami International Airpo*
Among them there were some men who had been guilty of mat’
crimes. The criminals couldn’t escape from the police. They must t*
tried in court now.
The saying says, people who commit crimes will not become ric!
but will be caught and punished.
1. The long arm of the law. 3. Read law.
2. Break jail. 4. Behind bars.
VIII. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book yo<

have read that will lead you to say "So as the proverb / say
ing goes..."
Saying: Crime doesn’t pay.-
Proverbs: The greater the crime, the higher the gallows.
Law-makers should not be law-breakers.IX .

fences.
1. That’s why they went to law. 2. So he became accessory afte;
the fact. 3. They managed to bring him to account. 4. And in his iai
twenties he was called to the Bar. 5. So he added insult to injur
6. They took the law into their own hands. 7. Ignorance of the lav
excuses no man. 8. It was the long arm of the law.

1. Our friend reads law. 2. The police must restore law and order
3,' Jury service is a duty which every adult is supposed to do. 4. An\
accused person is innocent till proven guilty. 5. If people don’t obe\
the law, the police will take an action against them. 6. Dick stood triai
for robbery. 7. Ben bore testimony against the accused. 8. The men
were charged with assault and battery. 9. Some criminals broke jail
yesterday. 10. The men were accused of aiding and abetting some
hardened criminals.
XI. Make up short conversations in the foliowing situation. Use
You and your friend have read a detective story / novel by
A. Christie. Say what makes it a typical detective story / novel.
Discuss Hercule Poirot or Miss Marple’s methods of crime detection.
Say if there is any reason to think that they could be successfully
applied in solving real crimes.
XII. A. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.
Write up the story as it might have appeared in the news
papers. Think of a logical end to the story. Write in idiomatic
English. Use the idioms given in Unit 18.
The police are doing their utmost to track down the criminal. Here
we have three murders - an old woman, a young girl, an elderly man.
Only one thing links these three people together - the fact that the
same person killed them. That means that the same person was pres
ent in three different localities and was seen necessarily by a large
number of people. That he is a madman in an advanced stage of
mania goes without saying. That his appearance and behaviour give
no suggestion of such a fact is equally certain. This person - and
though l say he, it may be a man or a woman - has all the devilish
cunning of insanity. He has succeeded so far in covering his traces
completely. The police have certain vague indications but nothing
upon which they can act.
Nevertheless, there must exist indications, which are not vague
but certain.
Describe the trial, the murderer. Try and explain how such a
miscarriage of justice could have occurred. Give your under
standing of the phrase “Divine vengeance". Answer the
author’s question: “Was Adams punished or not?" Use some
It was the strangest murder trial I ever attended. This was not one
of those cases of circumstantial evidence, in which you feel the jury
men’s anxiety - because mistakes have been made. No, this mur
derer was all but found with the body; no one who was present when
the Crown counsel outlined his case believed that the man in the dock
stood any chance at all.
He was a heavy stout man with bulging bloodshot eyes. Yes, an
ugly man, one you wouldn’t forget in a hurry - and that was an
important point because the Crown proposed to call four witnesses
who hadn’t forgotten him, who had seen him hurrying away from the
little red villa in Northwood Street.
It was all over, you would have said, but the hanging. Then
Counsel for the defence rose to cross-examine. He asked the wit
nesses to examine again the people in court. There at the back of the
court, with thick stout body and muscular legs and a pair of bulging
eyes, was the exact copy of the man in the dock.
There the big man sat in the dock with his legs crossed, and there
he stood too at the back of the court.
What we saw then was the end of the case. There wasn’t a witness
prepared to swear that it was the prisoner he’d seen. And the twin
brother? He had his alibi too; he was with his wife.
And so the man was acquitted for lack of evidence. But whether
if he did the murder and not his brother - he was punished or not, l
don’t know. That extraordinary day had an extraordinary end.
The twins left the building. The crowd, waiting for them moved
and somehow one of the twins got pushed on to the road right in front
of a bus.
He gave a cry like a rabbit and that was all; he was dead. Divine
vengeance? I wish I knew. There was the other Adams standing
beside the body. He was crying, but whether he was the murderer or
the innocent man, nobody will ever be able to tell.
(From The Case for the Defence by Gr. Greene)
,{Law-makers should not be law-breakers." Say whether you
think the proverb can be applied to the situation described in
HTen Little Niggers". Say what to your mind appears to be the
most horrifying thing about i t Say whether you think that trial
by jury can ensure a fairer administration of justice. Use the
I was bom with other traits besides my romantic fancy. I have a
definite sadistic delight in seeing or causing death.
But side by side with this went a contradictory trait - a strong
sense of justice. It is abhorrent to me that an innocent person or crea
ture should sutler or die by any act of mine.
It may be understood that with my mental make-up being what it
was, I adopted the law as a profession. The legal profession satisfied
nearly all my instincts.
Crime and its punishment has always fascinated me. I enjoy read
ing every kind of detective story and thriller. I have devised for my
own private amusement the most ingenious ways of carrying out a
murder.
When in due course I came to preside over a court of law, that
other secret instinct of mine was encouraged to develop. To see a
wretched criminal squirming in the dock, suffering the tortures of the
damned, as his doom came slowly and slowly nearer, was to me an
exquisite pleasure. Mind you, I took no pleasure in seeing an inno
cent man there. On at least two occasions I stopped cases where to
my mind the accused was palpably innocent, directing the jury that
there was no case. Thanks, however, to the fairness and efficiency of
our police force, the majority of the accused persons who have come
before me to be tried for murder have been guilty.
I have a reputation as a hanging judge, but that is unfair. I have
always been strictly just and scrupulous in my summing-up of a case.
All I have done is to protect the jury against the emotional effect
of emotional appeals by some of our more emotional counsel. I have
drawn their attention to the actual evidence.
For some years I have been aware of a change within myself, a
lessening of control - a desire to act instead of to judge.
I have wanted - let me admit it frankly - to commit a murder
myself. I wanted to kill...
But - incongruous as it may seem to some - l was restrained and
hampered by my innate sense of justice. The innocent must not suffer.
(From Ten Little Niggers by A. Christie)

How did it happen that Johnny Palica was identified as the
murderer? Capital punishment is believed by some people to
be the only true deterrent to vicious crime. What do you
think? Answer the question. Use some idioms given in Unit 18.
Item One, the grimmest and most important item, was the body of
a respectable middle-aged pharmacist named Carl Sawyer. Item Two,
the usual emotional item, was an attractive blonde woman, apparent
ly his widow, who was sobbing hysterically over him when Cochran
and McReynolds arrived from the precinct house. Item Three -
which, to Cochran and McReynolds, explained everything at first
glance and completely - was a rifled cash register. Item Four, the
familiar professional headache, was a store crowded with excited and
talkative neighbours.
Mrs Sawyer and a chance customer named Ellen Morison had
witnessed the shooting; two others - a husband and wife - glimpsed
a man who sprinted out of the drugstore immediately afterward, and
raced away in a car which he had parked thirty or forty feet distant,
in heavy shadow; and Ellen Morison described the man.
Cochran and McReynolds set out to locate this man. They
checked pictures and records downtown; they settled on a few poss
ible suspects. Two days later, Mrs Sawyer picked one of the four
immediately from a line-up. The married couple supported Mrs Sawyer’s
identification, even though in Cochran’s opinion they could not
be half so sure of it as they insisted they were. Ellen Morison
would not corroborate. She was the only witness who had impressed
Cochran to any extent, and she admitted now that the man they
showed her looked something, not too much, like the man who had
shot the druggist. She was not prepared to swear that he was the
man... or that he was not. She told Cochran uncomfortably that she
remembered the other man as being older and taller.
The man Mrs Sawyer had identified, named Johnny Palica, had a
couple of minor arrests to his discredit. There were some more
people who identified Palica. Ellen Morison could not seem to make
up her mind definitely about him. It was a shaky defence, very badly
handled, and the jury convicted. The conviction made the death sen
tence mandatory.
Some time later Ellen Morison saw the man who had actually
murdered Carl Sawyer. She was positive about him. When she came
back five or ten minutes afterwards with a policeman, he was gone.
It was decided that the first thing to do, if they wanted a reason
able standard of comparison, was to give Ellen Morison another and
longer look at Johnny Palica.
Johnny Palica was whiter, quieter and much more nervous than
Cochran remembered. There was no more toughness or defiance in
him. He was well broken. Not by a couple of months’ imprisonment,
but by a certain date which Cochran and McReynolds had arranged
for him.
Ellen Morison was sure they had the wrong man there.
In some days the police caught the real killer. He was Mrs Sawyer’s
friend. They had thought up a perfectly simple and effective
method through which to rid themselves of a husband who was getting
along in years, and who owned a profitable business. Mrs Sawyer
identified Johnny Palica to cover herself and to keep the police busy
on another angle. And Johnny Palica was unable to prove his
whereabouts. Hadn’t it been for Ellen Morison, the real criminals
would have escaped justice.
(From Sentence o f Death by Th. Walsh)
XIII. Speak on one of the following topics. Use the idioms given
in Unit 18.
I. My favourite detective story / detective. 2. Juvenile delin
quency. 3. Should there be gun control laws? 4. Is the death penalty
advisable?
PROJECT
1. Read the accounts of some court cases. In each one, the
sentence imposed by the judge has been blanked out Say what
you think the sentence should have been.
2. The sentences imposed were as follows: five years; 18 years
(5; 12; 12); disciplinary action.
In your opinion, which sentence goes with which court case?
Was anyone treated unduly harshly or leniently?
A. Ten police officers have faced for racist attitudes, it was
disclosed yesterday.
Nottinghamshire Police took the action after an industrial tribunal
ruling that the l() had acted in a racist way towards PC Surrinder
Singh, an Asian officer. He was awarded £20,000 compensation last
October after winning his light to prove he was barred from joining
Nottinghamshire Cll) because of his colour.
(From The Independent, July 13, 1991)
B. Darius Guppy, the Old Etonian convicted of a £1.8 million
insurance swindle, was released from prison yesterday after paying
£227,000 in compensation to Lloyd’s of London.
Guppy, aged 30, had served three years of a five year sentence for
staging a bogus gems robbery in New York in 1990, then fraudulent
ly claiming insurance damages. He was sent back to prison in
December after failing to obey an order to compensate the insurers.
Guppy, who was best man at the wedding of the Princess of
Wales’s brother,. Earl Spencer, had been freed pending an appeal
against a second, three-year prison term, but his bail order was
revoked by a High Court judge and he spent Christmas in Ford open
prison in Sussex.
Guppy set up the fraud with Benedict Marsh, his partner in a jew
ellery firm. They paid an associate £10,000 to tie them up and sup
posedly rob them at gunpoint. Their false invoices for £1.8 million
worth of stones were paid by underwriting syndicates. Both were
jailed fo r_____in March 1993.
In April 1994, Guppy lost an appeal against the length of his jail
term, but his £535,000 fine was replaced with a £227,000 compensa
tion order.
(From The Guardian, February 6, 1996)
C. A man who killed his violent, bullying father while he was a

teenager and buried the body in the cellar was jailed fo r_____yes
terday at the Old Bailey.
Stephen French, aged 32, was given____ for manslaughter,_____
for a string of robberies and an additional_____for escaping from
custody.
Passing sentence, the Recorder of London, Sir Lawrence Vemey,
accepted French’s “childhood of staggering evil” but said it did not
justify the solution.
The court was told after the killing, French, then only 14, wanted
to tell police but his mother discouraged him and made him promise
to remain silent while she was alive.
It was not until he was in prison on remand for robberies that he
called police to his cell and described how he shot his father, Peter
Leslie, in the head as he slept, and eventually buried the remains in a
house in Forest Gate, east London, where it remained for 17 years.
French denied murdering his 53-year-old father but admitted
manslaughter. He also pleaded guilty to several robberies, attempted
robberies and escaping from custody in 1992.
It was a childhood of “staggering evil” which had affected French
throughout his adult life, said Rock Tansey QC, defending.
The court heard how Mr Leslie would knock out the children’s
teeth, crack their ribs and point shotguns at their heads and threaten
to shoot them.
In his confession to police, French explained: “All my life he had
bullied, hit and abused the family. I just snapped, I didn’t want the
pain and the continual harassment.
“He was just one evil person.”
(From The Guardian, February 6, 1996)
3. in the passages quoted below substitute the phraseological

the substitution may call for.)
units add to the bits of text you've analysed.
(Passage (a) comes from The Painted Veil by W. S. Maugham;
Passages (b-e) are from Ten Little Niggers by A. Christie; Passages (f-j)
are from The ABC Murders by A. Christie)
a) There was a photograph of her mother in the room and Kitty’s
harassed eyes fell on it. She did not know why she kept it there, for
she was not very fond of her mother; there was one of her father too,
but that was downstairs on the grand piano. It had been done when he
took silk and it represented him in a wig and gown.
b) I warn everybody to be upon his or her guard. So far the mur
derer has had an easy task, since his victims have been unsuspicious.
From now on, it is our task to suspect each and every one amongst
us. Forewarned is fo rearm ed . Гаке no risks and be alert to danger.
That is all.
c) I believe now that / /// in the same boat as the rest of you. That
hundred guineas was just Mr Owen’s little bit of cheese to get me into
the trap along with the rest of you.
d) I sent Richmond to his death. I suppose, in a way, it was mur
der. Curious. Murder - and I’ve always been such a law-abiding
man! But it didn’t seem like that at the time. I had no regrets. “Serves
him damned well right! ” - that’s what I thought.
e) “You’ll think I’m crazy, sir. You’ll say it isn’t anything. But it’s
got to be explained, sir. It’s got to be explained. Because it doesn’t
make any sense.”
“Well, man, tell me what it is? Don’t go on talking in riddles.”
f) “Is it possible to commit a crime and be unaware of it?” I asked.
“His denials seem to have a ring o f truth in them.”
g) “Good heavens,” I cried, “this is a matter o f life and death."
h) “We’ve got to get to the bottom o f this"
“I wish to God l could give you some help - but the plain fact is
I know nothing - nothing at all that can help you to find the dastard
ly scoundrel who did this.”
i) Turning the matter over in my mind, I found it difficult to give
an answer. Nevertheless I felt convinced that something ought to be
done and that we should not allow the grass to grow under our feet.
j) If I had asked those people for information they would have
shut up like oysters. But by making a statement and by your contra
diction of it, tongues are immediately loosened.
mm is
BUSINESS
IDIOMS

1. Big business
2. Business is business
3. Drum up business
4. A captain of industry
5. Cutthroat competition
6. Bubble company
7. Plain dealing
8. Enter into an agreement
9. In breach of contract
10. Go bankrupt
11. Drive a hard bargain
12. Be in the market for smth
13. A buyer’s / seller’s market
14. The bottom has fallen out of the market
15. Black market
16. Run into debt
17. Out of debt, out of danger
18. Creditors have better memories than debtors
19. Coin money / coin it
20. Make money
21. Sink money (into)
22. Roll in money / have money to burn
23. Put (some) money (into)
24. There is money in it (in that, in this)
25. Money for jam / for old rope
26. Money makes the world go round
27. (The love of) money is the root of all evil
1. Big business - very large companies as a group, especially in
connection with their power and influence in politics and eco
nomic matters.
E.g.: He wrote about the great world o f industry and big business.
2. Business is business - profit is the most important thing to con
sider.
E.g.: We cannot help them. Business is business.
3. Drum up business - to increase it.
E.g.: They advertised widely to drum up business.
4. A captain of industry - the leader of a group; the owner of an
important company.
E.g. : Mr Ponard is a well-known captain o f industry
5. Cutthroat competition - very fierce, cruel, or unprincipled com
petition.
E.g.: Cutthroat competition in business led to a lot o f bank
ruptcies.
6. Bubble company - unsteady, risky, or unlikely to last.
E.g.: Vm afraid your money has been invested in a bubble com
pany
7. Plain dealing - honest methods in business,
E.g.: We believe in plain dealing.
8. Enter into an agreement - to make an arrangement between
some people, businesses.
E.g.: They made up their minds to enter into an agreement with
each other.
9. In breach of contract - an action that breaks an agreement
between people, groups.
E.g.: I f they fail to deliver the goods, w ell be breaking the con
tract / in breach o f contract.
10. Go bankrupt - to be unable to pay one’s debts. When people
declare that they are bankrupt lawyers take charge of all their
money and goods and sell them in order to pay their debts.
E.g.: They started a small business, but went bankrupt during the
1933 crisis
11. Drive a hard bargain - tend to make agreements that are very
much in one’s favour.
E.g.: Be careful if you*re doing business with him; he drives a
hard bargain.
12. Be in the market for smth - to want to buy something.
E.g.: Are you in the market for a second-hand car?
13. A buyer’s market - prices are favourable for those wishing to buy.
A seller’s market - prices are better for sellers because they are
high.
E.g.: It's a buyers market. Well keep our shares until itfs a sel
ler s market.
14. The bottom has fallen out of the market - prices and demand
for products have fallen to a very low level.
15. Black market - the buying and selling of goods, foreign money
when such trade is not legal.
E.g.: He bought dollars on the black market.
16. Run into debt - to begin to owe money.
E.g.: Don’t spend much money. You 7/ run into debt.
17. Out of debt, out of danger (proverb) - one has no reason to
worry after he’s paid his debts.
18. Creditors have better memories than debtors (proverb) - people
to whom money is owed are more anxious than people that owe
money.
19. Coin money / coin it - to earn a lot of money very quickly.
E.g.: He must be coining money his cafe is always full.
20. Make money - to earn money.
E.g.: H e made a lot o f money last year.
21. Sink money (into) to put money into; invent.
E.g.: They ve sunk all their money into small business.
22. Roll in money / have money to burn - to be very rich.
E.g.: He must be rolling in money.
23. Put (some) money (into) - to invest in.
E.g.: We want to put (some) money into his business.
24. There is money in it (in that, in this) - to earn some money.
E.g.: He has a patent o f a new machine. There is money in it.
25. Money for jam / for old rope - money obtained or earned for
very little effort.
26. Money makes the world go round ( saying) - money is the most
important thing in the world because most human activity
depends on it.
27. (The love of) money is the root of all evil (sayingfrom the Bible) -
the desire to have a lot of money is the cause of all crimes.
CULTURE CONTEXT
Business studies - a course of study at a school or college cover
ing economic and financial subjects.
Business park - an area where a lot of companies and businesses
have buildings.
Business Expansion Scheme - a system in Britain of giving tax
allowances on money used in small new businesses.
M oney market - banks, and other financial institutions taking
part in buying, selling, lending, and borrowing money, esp. foreign
money, for profit.
The B ank o f England - the central bank in Britain which acts as
banker to the government and to the high street banks, which provide
services to ordinary people and small companies. Branches of high
street banks, e.g. NatWest, Midlands, Barclays, can be found in most
towns and cities in Britain.
Economic climate - the national or international economic situ
ation.
Economic growth - the growth and deveJopment of a country’s
economy as shown in increased production and investment, a higher
standard of living, etc.
The Economist - a British weekly magazine which discusses cur
rent world affairs from a financial angle, read esp. by business people.
The Financial Times (FT) - a serious British daily newspaper
which contains a lot of business and financial news. It is printed on
pink paper.
Small business - a business which usually employs fewer than
50 people and has a quite small financial turnover.
TESTING VOCABULARY
I. A. Match the follow ing English idiom s to their respective die ■
♦ Cutthroat competition ♦ Begin to owe money

♦ Big business ♦ Increase business
♦ Plain dealing ♦ Invest
♦ Be in the market for smth ♦ Earn money quickly
♦ Business is business ♦ Break an agreement
♦ Sink money ♦ Very large companies as a
group
♦ Drum up business ♦ Want to buy something
♦ Coin money ♦ Honest methods in business
♦ Run into debt ♦ A serious matter
♦ In breach of contract ♦ Very cruel competition
♦ Roll in money ♦ Earn money
♦ Make money ♦ Be very rich
B. Use som e idiom s to m ake up a story. A student starts it

with “it's n o t easy to be a good b usinessm an”. O ther s tu
dents should take turns building upon this sentence, turn by
turn.I.
II. A. In the following sentences, there is an idiom. Decide w hat

yo u think is the key word, then look in y o u r dictionary to see
if you are rig h t R ew rite the sentences in non-idiom atic
English .
□ Model: There is money in this patent. It gives us the right to sell

a new invention.
I. There is money in this patent. 2. I’d you like to put some
money into our business. V I am in the market for a small cot
tage. 4. You must be rolling in money. 5. How much money do you
make per month? 6. I don’t want to run into debt. 7. We must econ
omize on everything. ()ut of debt, out of danger. 8. He bought the car
on the black market. l) I don’t believe them. It’s a bubble company.
10. They went bankrupt last year. 11.1 like to read about the great
world of big business. 12. They opened a new cafe to drum up busi
ness. 13.1 hate cutthroat competition in business. 14. We are for plain
dealing.
III. A. The follow ing sentences a ll contain an idiom with one key
word missing. Choose one o f the four alternatives to com -
p lete the idiom.
B. Use these sentences in som e m eaningful context.
1. My brother is interested i n __(hag, bug, big, bog) business.
2. I’m afraid, it’s a __(babble, bobble, bubble, bubbly) company. 3. Our
frien d s__(bake, cake, make, take) much money every month.
4. We’d like to __(link, sink, wink, pink) money into this business.
5. I’ve got some money fo r__(ham, jam, cam, dam). 6. Money is
th e__(root, boot, foot, hoot) of all evil.
IV. R ead the following passages and choose the correct key
w ord to com plete the idioms. Use your dictionary to check
y o u r answers. Translate the passages into Russian.
1. The authorities are also desperate to stimulate bank credit.
Companies find banks less willing to lend than before. If banks felt
fitter, the argument goes, they would lend, and companies would___
(pop / put) money into business, more freely. This is probably wrong
too. As the economy slows, banks are rightly worried about their bor
rowers’ health. For their part, many firms have no desire to borrow
more. Out o f ___(debit / debt), out of danger.
2. Western arms companies are batting for the business. Because
o f___(cutthroat / cutting) competition no western firm is yet assured
of victory.
3. No longer allowed under EU rules t o __ (sag / sink) state
money into Air France, the French government plans to raise $500m
by selling up to 20% of the airline. A further chunk is to be sold later,
but the airline will remain firmly under state control. The sale should
help Air France to expand its fleet, gain better access to capital as it
comes under stockmarket scrutiny.
4. Indian business has consistently failed to live up to expecta
tions. Even Mr Welch is not doing well: analysts say none of GE’s
(America's General Electric) businesses in India is___(taking/mak-
ing) money. And this despite India’s many advantages over its neigh
bours. India has a strong, English-speaking middle class and a
British legal system and civil service. Some old India hands conclude
that it may take years or even decades to become something re
sembling a modem___(competing/ competitive) economy.
(From The Economist, 1998)
5. The money was the difficulty. They discussed how much was
the least they could start on. Michael thought five thousand pounds
was the minimum. But how in heaven’s name could they raise a sum
like that? Of course some of those Middlepool manufacturers were___
(lolling/rolling) in money, but you could hardly expect them to fork
out five thousand pounds to start a couple of young actors who had
only a local reputation.
V. The following sentences a ll contain som e idiom s . R ead and

translate them into English . Use a Russian dictionary and the
English-Russian Phraseological D ictionary b y A. V. Kunin.
I. Учителем музыки он не сделался, но начал занимать и во

шел в огромные для него долги. (Ф. Достоевский. Униженные и
оскорбленные) 2. Записался он адвокатом - пошли дела, и по
шли, и пошли, огребай деньги лопатой. (А. Островский. Поздняя
любовь) 3. Без выгоды для себя они ведь не могут. Миллионные
заказы хватают... Заводы свои государству втридорога продают...
Значит, руки греют на миллионах. (С. Голубов. Когда крепости не
сдаются) 4. Он-то бывал миллионером, то сидел без копейки
денег, в долгах. (А. Куприн. Памяти Михайловского) 5. Он получил
изрядное воспитание, учился в университете, но, рожденный в
сословии бедном, рано понял необходимость проложить себе
дорогу и набить деньгу. (И. Тургенев. Дворянское гнездо) 6 . Деды
наши не были скопидомы и нс тряслись над каждой копейкой.
(М. Салтыков-Щедрин. Дневник провинциаш а Петербурге) 7. Заве
дите питомник, сад, огород... Тут золотое дно. (В. Кожевников.
Живая вода) 8. Вдруг все заговорили, что он вылетел в трубу с
дефицитом в два миллиона. (П. Боборыкин. Китай-город) 9. Что он
богат или только дутый пузырь? (А. Писемский. Мещане) Ю. Года
через три или я сделаю миллионы, или лопну, как мыльный пу
зырь. (А. Толстой. Эмигранты)
VI. R ew rite the following b it o f text in idiom atic English. Use the
idiom s given in Unit 18.
Jack Brown is a businessman. He earns much money. Jack invests
in an oil company. It's a very profitable big business. And Jack earns
a lot of money very quickly. He stands for honest methods in busi
ness, and he has an arrangement with people whom he trusts. He
never makes an arrangement with an unsteady company. If his part
ners fail to do their duties, he breaks their agreement, because it's a
serious matter, and the competition is very fierce in business.
Jack Brown is a successful businessman, and he does everything
possible to increase his business. He never borrows money.
Jack is very rich. He is shrewd and resourceful. He thinks that
money is the most important thing in the world because most human
activity depends on it.
VII. Link each o f the pictures (pp .34 1-34 2) with one o f the idiom s
listed below. Com m ent on the m eaning o f each o f them. Use
them in situations o f yo u r own.
1. Bubble company. 3. Make money.
2. A captain of industry. 4. Roll in money.
VIII. Tell an episode o r reconstruct a situation from a book you

have read that will lead you to s a y “So as the pro verb / say
ing g o es... ”
Proverbs: Out of debt, out of danger.
Creditors have better memories than debtors.
Sayings: Money makes the world go round.
Money is the root of all evil.
IX. B uild up bits o f text with the following as concluding sen

tences.
I. Business is business. 2. It turned out to be a bubble company.
3. That’s why they entered into an agreement with each other. 4. They
decided to break the contract. 5. Unfortunately, he went bankrupt.
6. The bottom has fallen out of the market. 7. That’s why he made a
lot of'money. 8. So they made up their minds to sink their money into
small business. c). There is money in it. Ю. He put money into his
friend’s business.
X. Use the following as initial sentences an d expand on them .
1. The company decided to drum up business. 2. The company
believes in plain dealing. 3. Usually Mr Brown drives a hard bargain.
4. My friend is in the market for a small country house. 5. It’s a
buyer’s market. 6. We never buy anything in the black market. 7. John
has run into debt. 8. The Johnsons must be coining money. 9. Our
neighbour has money to burn. 10. We’ve got some money for jam.
XI. Provide a natural conversational context fo r each o f the fol
low ing remarks. Use the idioms given in U n it 19.
1. Foreign investors see fertile soil in Britain.
2. Investment is attracting more investment.
3. Success has fed on success. The more international banks and
other institutions come here, the more want to be here, the more busi
ness is done.
4. Competition is good for us. We have big market shares every
where you look. Our major rivals see this and want more. But this
does encourage greater flexibility and competitiveness, which is the
basis of our success.
5. The strategy forced him to borrow to the teeth.
6. Making a profit is only one side of the coin. Without its other
side - generosity - the entire enterprise is unbalanced.
(From Time, October 27, 1997)
7. It will be one of the great businesses of the next century.
8. His recipe for success is to take small companies, make them
big and then sell them off as soon as they’re financially hot.
9. He is a financier, a very smart and shrewd operator who sees
possibilities where other don’t.
Ю. Successful people always find ways of being successful. He is
a shrewd individual who hasn’t put all his eggs in one basket. He
never stops looking for opportunity.
(f rom Time, October 19, 1998)
XII. Explain and expand on the following. Use the idiom s given in
U n it 19.
I. Even for a company that is building its business on managing
risk, it is quite a gamble. 2. After years of losing money, the corn-
рапу is at least regaining health. 3. Outside investors just have to take
their chances. 4. They want to make Russian firms behave fairly
towards outside shareholders, and to make financial markets treat
investors well. 5. Any given borrower may default. 6. Confidence is
so weak that firms and households are unwilling to borrow even at
record low interest rates. 7. These firms are being kept alive by banks
continuing to feed them credit - just as many of Japan's sick com
panies have been kept on endless life support, sucking vitality from
the rest of the economy. 8. They try to boost the role of small and
medium-sized firms in the economy. 9. Todd Cohen, the editor of
Philanthropy Journal, points out that many rich baby-boomers will
eventually have two fortunes to spend: the money they have managed
to make themselves and the money that they stand to inherit from
their parents. 10. Smaller firms are soaring. 11. A year ago he was
selling a hundred cars a week. Now he can go a month without a
single deal. 12. They are seeking to improve their competitive position.
13. To* sell they must advertise widely. 14. The country has rich min
eral deposits, in which Australian and Canadian companies are now
investing.
(From The Economist, May 30th, 1998)
XIII. M ake up short conversations in the following situations. Use

the idiom s given in Unit 19.
1. You want to sell your old car. Discuss the price with a friend
who might want to buy it.
2. You want to start a business but you need money. Talk to your
friend about becoming a partner and investing in your company
XIV. R ead the following extracts from “A Chance for M r Lever” by

Gr. Greene , ‘The Forsyte Saga ” by J. Galsworthy, "Success
Story” b y G Cozzens. Decide which was written b y who. When
d id the events described take p lace? Sum m arize the them e o f
each extract in som e sentences. Use the id io m s given in
U nit 19.
I. Richards was a short, sharp-faced, agreeable chap, then about
twenty-two. He was from some not very good state university engin
eering school. 1 couldn't then imagine how he had managed to get
his job. 1 have an idea now. It came to me when I happened to read a
few weeks ago that Richards had been made a vice-president and
director of Panamerica Steel when the Prossert interests bought the
old firm.
Then the firm had a contract for the construction of a private rail
road to give United Sugar a sea terminal at a small deep-water
Caribbean port. In January several directors of the United Sugar
Company came down on their annual jaunt - nominally business, but
mostly pleasure.
Mr Joseph Prossert, who was, I think, chairman of United Sugar’s
board then, asked me a number of questions. When I’d said for per
haps the third time, “I’m afraid I wouldn’t know, sir. We haven’t any
calculations on that”, Richards suddenly spoke up. He knew every
thing. He knew the load limits of every bridge; he knew the average
rainfall for the last twenty years; he knew the population of the vari
ous straggling villages we passed through; he knew the heights of the
distant blue peaks to the west. He had made himself familiar with
local labor costs and wage scales. He had the statistics on accidents
and unavoidable delays.
“I suppose you think you’re smart,” I told him. “What’s he going
to think when he looks up the figures or asks somebody who does
know?”
“Listen, my son,” said Richards kindly. “He wasn’t asking for any
information he was going to use. He doesn’t want to know those fig
ures. If he ever does, he has plenty of people to get him the right ones.
He won’t remember these. What he is going to remember is you and
me. He’s going to remember that Panamerica Steel and Structure has
a bright young man named Richards who could tell him everything
he wanted to know when he wanted to know it - just the sort of chap
he can use; not like that other fellow who took no interest in his job,
couldn’t answer the simplest question, and who's going to be doing
small-time contracting all his life.”
“Oh, yes?" I said. But it is true that I am still working for the
Company still doing a little work in the construction line.
2. The baby of the family, a publisher by profession, Timothy had
some years before, when business was at full tide, scented out the
stagnation which, indeed, had not yet come, but which ultimately, as
all agreed, was bound to set in, and, selling his share in a firm
engaged mainly in the production of religious books, had invested the
quite conspicuous proceeds in three per cent. Consols. By this act he
had at once assumed an isolated position, no other member of the
family being content with less than four per cent for his money; and
this isolation had slowly and surely underminded a spirit perhaps bet
ter than commonly endowed with caution. He had become almost a
myth - a kind of incarnation of security haunting the background of
their universe. He had never committed the imprudence of marrying,
or encumbering himself in any way with children.
3. It wasn’t fair, that a man after thirty years’ commercial trav
elling should need to go from door to door asking for a job. He
had been a good traveller, he had made money for many people,
his references were excellent, but the world had changed since his
day. He was not streamlined; he certainly was not streamlined. He
had been ten years retired when he lost his money in the depres
sion.
He walked up and down Victoria Street showing his references.
Many of the men knew him, gave him cigars, laughed at him in a
friendly way for wanting to take on a job at his age.
It was in the little office off Leadenhall Street that he met his
chance. It called itself an engineering firm, but there were only two
rooms, a typewriter and Mr Lucas, a thin narrow man.
Mr Lucas seemed to him to be reasonably honest. He put “all his
cards on the table”. He hadn’t got any money, but he had expecta
tions; he had the handling of a patent. It was a new crusher. There was
money in it. But you couldn’t expect the big trusts to change over
their machinery now. Things were too bad. You’d got to get in at the
start, and that was where this company came in which had slipped
agents over the border of some far-away country and grabbed a con
cession: gold and diamonds. Now an enterprising man could just slip
across and introduce this new crusher to them: it would save them
thousands when they started work, and afterwards, with that start...
There was a fortune for them all.
XV. Speak on one o f the following topics. Use the idiom s given in
Unit 19.
I. My get rich quick plan. 2. Personality traits that help a person

to win a top job. 3. Knowledge plus hard work equals success.
PROJECT
units fo r words and w ord com binations which w ill express the
sam e denotational m eaning. (Make w hatever structural changes
the substitution m ay call for.)
Com pare the passages you have got with the original text and
say w hat connotational im plications the phraseological units
add to the bits o f text you 've analysed.
1. This “Elite” has been made up of the procurers of great wealth,

known at various times as the “Propertied Interests,” the “Monied
Aristocracy”, the “Trusts”, the “Monopolists” and more recently as
just plain “Big Business ”
(From The Enemy Forgotten by G. Greene)
2. But it was the mass selling of a pizza that made his reputation
and serious money.
3. Another eight international franchises do lively business in
cities like New Delhi and Paris, and the group is valued at more than
$755 million, about 25 times the price at which it was bought five
years ago.
4. I see myself as an investor who, in some cases, might get
involved in running businesses, particularly restaurant businesses. If
you get it right, you can make a lot of money that's interesting, too.
5. In between business deals, he writes a weekly business column
for the Sunday Telegraph, goes to the gym, plays tennis and squash,
and reads.
6. If it were in the bubble economy, good pearls would be price
less.
7. “Men are shopping more and more like women,” explains
Comeliani, head of the family owned clothing firm, which paid
more than $5 million key money just to get a lease on the store.
8. It is not the only company trying to get a foothold in the
Chinese market.
9. Last week, friendly talks between the two companies broke off
in acrimony, reportedly over an inability to agree on a power-sharing
arrangement between the chief executives. The deal fell apart.
Ю. Only big businesses are likely to see an immediate payoff.
(Passages 2-10 are from Time, November 19, 1998)
2. R ead the following article a n d translate it into Russian. Say

w hat the key to success is in m odern business. C om m ent on the
phrase “the custom er is k in g ” Use som e idioms given in U nit 19.
SOVEREIGN CONSUMERS
In business these days the key to success is to understand your
customer. Or so managers say.
It is nearly 40 years since Theodore Levitt, a professor at Harvard,
coined one of the great management cliches: “the customer is king”
Only now, you could argue, are businesses taking the idea seriously.
Making good products is all very well, eager young managers will
tell you, but it is no longer enough. What counts today is getting closer
to your customers, so that you can sell them exactly what they require
in just the way that suits them best. The new secret of success is dis
tribution, distribution, distribution. A lot of money and effort is being
staked on this idea, so it had better make sense.
“Get closer to your customer” seems fine, if vague. To bolster the
case, managers offer other arguments as well. These days profits in
pure manufacturing are harder to make, they emphasise. The best
widget-making technologies are available to every producer: any old
factory can make top-quality goods. That is why other sources of
income must be found - and where better than in distribution?
Firms do well to concentrate on “core competences”. How many
manufacturers can regard distribution as one of those? True, pro
ducers may prove to be efficient distributors if they can gather and use
information about consumers that would otherwise have gone to
waste, but this will be easier said than done.
The greatest danger of all is that if greater effort and resources are
applied to distribution, the product itself will be neglected.
A lot of manufacturers will rue the day their attention shifted from
production line to shop window.
(From The Economist, February 28th, 1998)
у ю т so
MISCELLANY
IDIOMS

1. Put on airs
2. Kick up a row
3. Make a fuss (over someone or something)
4. Get / touch someone on the raw
5. Laugh at somebody behind his back
6. Take liberties with someone or something
7. Love somebody with all one’s heart and soul
8. Take somebody under one’s wing
9. Drink in somebody’s words
10. Read somebody’s thoughts
11. Set one’s hopes on someone / something
12. Be in the air
13. Be frightened out of one's wits
14. Pull oneself together
15. Take somebody / something for granted
16. Surpass someone's expectations
17. Keep up appearances
18. Do something of one's own free will
19. Take pains to do something
20. Cry for the moon
21. Beat about the bush
22. Come down to brass tacks
23. Have one’s tongue in one’s cheek
24. Have one’s head screwed on one’s shoulders
25. Know which side one’s bread is buttered
26. Keep one’s nose above water
27. Wash one’s dirty linen in public
28. Bum the candle at both ends
29. Bum one’s bridges (behind oneself)
1. Put on airs - to act superior.

E.g.: She is always putting on airs.
2. Kick up a row - to misbehave and disturb someone: to make <i
scandal.
E.g.: He's a small fry: He won ft kick up a row.
3. Make a fuss (over someone or something) - to worry about; to
be helpful toward a person or a pet; to argue about someone or
something.
E.g.: Don’t make a fuss. There s nothing to worry about.
Why do you make a fuss over your cat?
Don't make a fuss over who makes the report.
4. Get / touch someone on the raw - to hurt smb’s feelings by talk
ing about something which is painful to him / her.
E.g.: Her words got him on the raw.
5. Laugh at somebody behind his back - to laugh at smb without
him / her knowing.
E.g.: Its vulgar to laugh at a person behind his back.
6. Take liberties with someone or something - to use or abuse
someone or something; to behave in a rude, too friendly way:
make unreasonable changes.
E.g.: He does often take liberties with her.
7. Love somebody with all one’s heart and soul - to love someone
dearly, passionately.
E.g.: He loved his wife with all his heart and soul.
8. Take somebody under one’s wing - to protect, help somebody.
E.g.: He took his younger brother under his wing.
9. Drink in somebody’s words - to pay a lot of attention to or enjoy
something.
E.g.: They drank in their teacher s words.
10. Read somebody’s thoughts - to guess what someone is thinking.
E.g.: Tell us the truth We can t read your thoughts.
11. Set one’s hopes on someone / something m rely on someone
or something/
E.g.: She set her hopes on her daughter.
12. Be in the air - something, which is felt to be present, but it is not
talked about; a decision, which has not yet been fully planned or
settled.
E.g.: The matter is still in the air
13. Be frightened out of one’s wits - to be so afraid that one can no
longer think clearly.
E.g.: She was frightened out o f her wits by the terrible noise.
14. Pull oneself together - to bring one’s emotions under control so
that one can behave calmly and reasonably and think clearly.
E.g. : Don't be afraid. Try to pull yourself together
15. Take somebody / something for granted - to benefit from a per
son or situation without showing that you’re grateful.
E.g.: She took her parents* help for granted.
16. Surpass someone’s expectations - to go beyond in amount,
quality, or degree.
E.g.: The results o f their work surpassed our expectations.
17. Keep up appearances - to continue to dress and behave in the
way that people have come to expect of this person, especially
when he can ho longer afford it, but he is too proud to admit it.
E.g.: It was very expensive to arrange a party. Hut they kept up
appearances.
18. Do something of one’s own free will to do something because
you want to do it, you’re not forced to do it.
E.g.: H e went to the p a rty of his own fre e will.
19. Take pains to do something to make a great effort to do some
thing.
E.g.: She took pains to conceal the truth.
20. Cry for the moon - to want something impossible to have.
E.g.: It’s no use crying for the moon.
21. Beat about the bush - to try to avoid answering a question or
saying something immediately and directly.
E.g.: Stop beating about the bush. Come straight to the point.
22. Come down to brass tacks - to discuss the basic and most
important facts.
E.g.: Now we ’re going to come down to brass tacks.
23. Have one’s tongue in one’s cheek - not to be sincere or serious
about what you say, although you may appear to be.
E.g.: / think she had her tongue in her cheek when she said that.
24. Have one’s head screwed on one’s shoulders - to be sensible,
to have common sense.
E.g.: He has his head screwed on his shoulders. He can give you
a good piece o f advice.
25. Know which side one’s bread is buttered - to know how to
make oneself liked by people in power or how to gain their
approval; know what is to one’s advantage.
26. Keep one’s nose above water - to be out of serious difficulty.
E.g.-: He's spent his life keeping his nose above water.
27. Wash one’s dirty linen in public - to make unpleasant subjects
public which ought to be kept private.
E.g.: You shouldn’t wash your dirty linen in public.
28. Burn the candle at both ends - to work or be active from very
early until very late; use up all one’s strength by trying to do too
many different things; get too little rest.
E.g.: He's working very hard. He's burning the candle at both ends.
29. Burn one’s bridges (behind one) - to destroy all means of going
back, so that one must go forward.
E.g.: He decided to break off with his old friends and burn his
bridges behind him.
TESTING VOCABULARY
I. A. Match the following English idioms to their respective die-
♦ Put on airs ♦ To discuss the most import
ant facts
♦ Take liberties with some ♦ To hurt someone’s feelings
thing
♦ Turn a deaf ear to something ♦ Not to be sincere
♦ Kick up a row ♦ To make a great effort to do
something
♦ Surpass someone’s expecta ♦ To make unreasonable changes
tions
Take smb under one’s wing ♦ To act superior
♦ Make a fuss ♦ To do smth because you
want to do it
♦ Take pains to do something ♦ To go beyond in amount
♦ Read somebody’s thoughts ♦ To misbehave
♦ Come down to brass tacks ♦ To want something imposs
ible to have
♦ Touch someone on the raw ♦ To guess what someone’s
thinking
♦ Cry for the moon ♦ To ignore what someone says
♦ Have one’s tongue in one’s ♦ To worry about
cheek
♦ Do smth of one’s own free ♦ To protect somebody
will

with “John and Mary were good friends". Other students
shouid take turns building upon this sentence, turn by turn.

English.
□ Model: l dislike her. She s putt ing on airs. There is no reason for
her to do this.
1) I dislike her She's putting on airs. 2) Let him kick up a row if
he chose. 3) She set her hopes on her child. 4) She spoke with her
tongue in her cheek. 5) 1le kicked up a great fuss. 6) There’s no reason
for him to put on airs. 7) She took pains to keep her figure. 8) He
doesn’t like to wash a lot of dirty linen in public. 9) She suggested
that he knew which side his bread was buttered. 10) I went there of
my own free will. 11) He should be frightened out of his wits. 12) He
loves me with all his heart and soul. 13) You’ve surpassed my expec
tations. 14) Try to pull yourself together. 15) He liked his young col
league and took him under his wing.
plete the idiom.
I. I don’t think you should ___ (turn, burn, turf, burst) your
bridges. 2. Our friend has been keeping h is ___(nose, rose, moss,
hose) above water all his life. 3. The father was angry with the child
ren and kicked up a ___(roar, rout, rage, row). 4. Why are you
making a ___(bustle, fuss, gust, hustle) over it? 5. The old lady took
the boy under h e r___(wig, will, wing, wit). 6. The student turned
a ___(dead, deafening, deaf dear) ear to the teacher’s words.
7. Don’t __(bit, beat, bite, bitch) about the bush. 8. Come down to
brass__ (tacks, tabs, tags, taps).
(Passages 1-3,5,7-11 come from The Painted Veil by W. S. Maugham;
Passage 4 is from The Taipan by W. S. Maugham; Passage 6 comes
from The Three Fat Women o f Antibes by W. S. Maugham; Passages
12-17 are from The Sandcastle by 1. Murdoch)
1. Kitty wondered whether Mrs. Tounsend thought her a little
common. She flushed. After all there was no reason for her to put
o n __ (airs / air).
2. Charlie had said that he would stand by her, and if the worse
came to the worse, well... Let Walter__ (pick/kick) up a row if he
chose. She had Charlie; what did she care? Perhaps it would be the
best thing for him to know.
3. But it was on her daughters that she set her___(ropes / hopes).
By arranging good marriages for them she expected to make up for
all the disappointments of her career.
4. He could feel his heart beating. But h e ___(pulled/ pooled)
himself together. It was all nonsense. The best thing he could do was
to go to the club, and if he ran across the doctor he would ask him to
give him a look over
5. “Walter doesn’t give me the impression of a fellow who’d care
to ___(wash / watch) a lot of dirty linen in public.’' - “1 don’t think
he would,” she answered reflectively. “He’s very sensitive, I’ve dis
covered that.”
6. “Really I hate women,” Beatrice said. “They’re so unreliable;
they’re so malicious.” By the time Lena’s fortnight drew to its close
the three fat women were barely on speaking terms. They kept up___
(appearances / apprentices) before Lena, but when she was not there
made no pretences. They ignored one another.
7. Then she wondered whether by any possibility Charlie was
right when he suggested that Walter knew which___(side / site) his
bread was buttered.
8. “You’re not obliged to go, are you?” - “No, I go of my own
free___(wish / will)” - “Please don’t, Walter. It would be too awful
if something happened.”
9. Dr Hayward said: “I must get out of Hong Kong on account of
the heat. I could never stand the heat up there. And cholera: I should
be frightened out of m y___(wigs/wits). It’s just asking for trouble.
There’s no reason for me to go.”
10. He loves me with all his___(heart / head) and soul. He loves
me as passionately as I love him.
11. Waddington was shrewd; for all his grave sympathy she had
a feeling that - how should she put it? - that he had his tongue in
h is___(chin / cheek).
12. The greengrocer who had made the remark that surely free
dom was the chief virtue, and wasn’t it thinking so that differenti
ated us from the Middle Ages? Stared intently at Mor as i f __
(drinking / linking) in his words.
13. They had met through Labour Party activities, when Mor had
been teaching in a school on the south side of London, and Mor and
Nan had to some extent taken lim, who was a bachelor, under
their___(wing / ling).
14. Do stop it, there’s absolutely nothing to cry about. Just___
(pool / pull) yourself together and do something practical.
15. “Oh, cut it out. 1ella “ said Donald, “why are you___(fuss
ing / bustling) about promises? You never keep any!”
16. “Fella, darling, he said, “just don’t ___(make / take) a fuss.
If there’s one thing I can not stand it’s women___(making / taking)
a fuss.”
17. “Miss Carter, my expectations were high, but you have__
(surpassed/ passed) them. I congratulate you.” - “It’s a remarkable
picture.”
A. V. Kunin.
1. Он успел снискать себе всеобщее уважение в городе тем,
что не задирал носа и не гордился. (М. Салтыков-Щедрин. Пом
падуры и помпадурши) 2. Я вовсе не хочу упрекать тебя, или
делать сцену. Довольно было и сцен и попреков. (А. Чехов. Супру
га) 3. Обсуждать статью будут. Задела их за живое! (Г. Марков.
Соль земли) 4. Я... люблю вас крепко, сильно, всем сердцем.
(Ф.Достоевский. Бедные люди) 5. Я беру тебя под свое крылышко.
(И. Тургенев. Отцы и дети) 6. Он вычитывал из книг разные сло
вечки, в надежде произвести эффект и... ноль внимания. Моло
дая женщина не замечала его оригинальности. (К. Станюкович.
Пассажирка) 7. Остановились все мои дела. Поездка в Москву
повисла в воздухе. (В. Инбер. Почти три года) 8. Ну, я еду. Дер
жите себя в руках, милый! Завтра - увидимся. (М. Горький.
Старик) 9. Она из кожи лезла, чтобы лучше сготовить обед, и
превосходила самое себя в изобретении отменно приятных вку
су соусов. (М. Шолохов. Тихий Дон) 10. Мы все ходим вокруг да
около и никак не договоримся до настоящей сути. Вся суть в том,
что вы ошиблись и не хотите в этом сознаться вслух. (А. Чехов.
Рассказ неизвестного человека) 11. Ты большой парень, и голова
у тебя на плечах есть. (Вигдорова. Это .мой дам) 12. Держи нос
По ветру, и все пойдет как по маслу!.. Если это еще не народная
пословица, то станет ею. (Г. Данилевский. Девятый вал) 13. Зачем
выносить сор из избы? Мы с вамп поругались, мы и помиримся.
(В. Ажаев. Дачеко от Москвы) 14. “Какая же нынче злая”, - сказал
я ей, смеясь. “Жгу корабли.” (А. Майков. Княжна)

Betty is young and pretty. But she has no friends. She thinks she
is better than other people. Betty has a superior attitude. Her mother
tells her to be polite and friendly. But the girl ignores what she says.
Betty’s parents work hard to provide her with money, but she doesn’t
show that she’s grateful.
Betty makes a great effort to become an actress though she is not
very gifted. Betty’s father thinks she wants something impossible to
be realized. But he is afraid of saying it directly. He knows that his
words will hurt her feelings. He loves his daughter dearly and he
doesn’t want to make a scandal. He thinks she is too young. So
Betty’s parents rely on her good sense.
1. Wash one’s dirty linen in public.
2. Be in the air.
3. Keep one’s nose above water.
4. Bum the candle at both ends.
Vlli. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen

tences.
1. So it got him on the raw. 2. It’s no good laughing at somebody
behind his back. 3. That’s why he took them under his wing. 4. I’m
afraid, he turned a deaf ear to my words. 5. So the question is still in the
air. 6. Of course, she was frightened out of her wits. 7. She managed to
pull herself together. 8. They took his help for granted. 9. Her book sur
passed their expectations. 10. They did it of their own free will.
IX. Use the following as initial sentences and expand on them.

1. 1 don’t understand why Mary puts on airs. 2. My brother loves
his wife with all his heart and soul. 3. The students drank in the lec
turer’s words. 4. I think my mother can read my thoughts. 5. My
friend’s parents set their hopes on her. 6. My friend takes pains to look
attractive. 7. Don't believe Helen. She keeps her tongue in her cheek.
8. Jack knows which side his bread is buttered. 9. Care has spent all
his life keeping his nose above water. 10. Don has a bad habit. He
usually beats about the bush instead of coming straight to the point.
X. Comment upon the following proverbs and illustrate their
meaning by little stories of your own invention. Use the
1. Still waters run deep. 2. New brooms sweep clean. 3. He is not
laughed at that laughs at himself first. 4. He laughs best who laughs
last. 5. What we do willingly is easy. 6. Faint heart never won fair
lady. 7. A little body often harbours a great soul. 8. You cannot judge
a tree by its bark.
XI. Speak on one of the following topics. Use the idioms given in
Unit 20.
1. My pet owns me. 2. My biggest fear. 3. An exciting trip you
would like to have. 4. My neighbours. 5. My best friend.

1. Your friend is sick and you think he / she should go to the hos
pital. Convince your friend to go.
2. Your friend has been accepted to the school of his / her choice.
You were rejected. Tell him / her how you feel.
3. A good friend of yours just cut her hair. You think she looks
awful. What do you tell her?
4. Find out the things which frighten your friend. Ask him / her
what he / she does when they are afraid.
XIII. Read and translate the following passages into Russian. Use
as many expressions of the new vocabulary as possible to
describe: a heated discussion between some people which
ends in a quarrel; a talented painter; the characteristics of a
pessimist; a shrewd person; a young promising actress.
I. The Blands were discussing a garden party to which they had
been asked for one day of the following week. George said pleasant
ly: “Don’t count on me. I shan’t be here.” “Oh, George, why not?”
asked his mother. “I must get back to my work. I’m leaving for
Munich on Monday.” He had made up his mind and if his father didn’t
like it he could lump it. Freddy forbade his son to go back to Ger
many. George answered that he was twenty-one and his own master.
I le would go where he chose. Freddy swore he would not give him a
penny. “All right, I’ll earn money.” “You’ve never done a stroke of
work in your life. What do you expect to do to earn money?” “Sell
old clothes, grinned George. Then a very dreadful thing happened.
Freddy burst into tears. He loved his son and wept with mortification
because the great hopes he had set on him were brought to nothing
and the ambition of his life was frustrated. He cried noisily with great
loud sobs and pulled his beard and beat his breast and rocked to and
fro. Then they all began to cry.
(From The Alien Corn by W. S. Maugham)
2. ‘‘Well, come on,” said Demoyte, “come and look at the master
piece, that’s what you came for.”
The picture was at the far end of the room. The easel had been
turned round so that it faced the room. They all went forward towards
it, leaving Rain and Demoyte standing behind them with Miss
Handforth.
When Mor looked at the picture everything else went out of his
mind. Now its presence assailed him with a shock that was almost
physical. Мог had no idea whether it was a masterpiece; but it
seemed to him at first sight a most impressive work. Its authority was
indubitable. Mor scanned it. It looked as if it was finished. Fumbling
he drew a chair close to him and sat down.
Mor felt that he was really seeing Demoyte for the first time; and
with this a sudden compassion came over him. It was indeed the face
of an old man. In spite of the bright colours of the rug, the picture as
a whole was sombre. The sky was pale, with a flat melanchony pal
lor, and the trees outside the window were bunched into a dark and
slightly menacing mass.
Mor let out a sigh. He became aware of his companions. They
seemed all to have been equally struck to silence by the picture. Then
Prewett began saying something. Mor did not listen, lie got up. Rain
was a considerable painter. Mor was astonished.
(1mm The Samlcuslle by I. Murdoch)
3. There was something hard in his pocket; it hurt her side; she
put her hand in. The metal chamber was cold. She whispered fearful
ly, “Why are you carrying that?"
“Don't be scared." he said. “Don't you see? Life’s hell. There’s
nothing we can do. I haven't a penny. We can’t live on nothing. It’s
no good hoping that I'll get a job. There aren’t any more jobs any
more. And every year, you know, there’s less chance, because there
are more people younger than 1 am. It's no good hanging around
waiting for our luck to change.’'
“There must be some way..,” she said.
“Why must? I have to kill myself.” He laughed; he had reached the
climax of his argument and there was nothing more to dispute about.
She could tell that he was perfectly satisfied and perfectly happy.
She tried to think of a bitter answer, for after all there was some
thing to be said for simply going on, as her father was going on for
another fifteen years. But the next moment she felt no anger.
He said, “I’m going now.”
She wanted to say: Don’t be a fool... but she knew any thought
of hers had occurred to him and been answered already: ten shillings
a week, no job, getting older.
He suddenly began to walk fast down the hedge; she couldn’t see
where he was going. She cried out, “Fred, Fred. Don’t do it,” and
began to run in the opposite direction. She couldn’t stop him and she
wanted to be out of hearing. Then the shot came. She didn’t notice it
at first and afterwards she thought that she had never been conscious
of the exact moment when her lover ceased to exist.
(From A Drive in the Country by Gr. Greene)
4. No one knew better than he that he was an important person.
He was number one in not the least important branch of the most
important English firm in China. He had worked his way up through
solid ability. When he remembered the modest home he had come
from, a little red house in a long row of little red houses, and com
pared it with the magnificent stone mansion, with its wide verandas
and spacious rooms, he chuckled with satisfaction. He had come a
long way since then.
(From The Taipan by W. S. Maugham)
5. When Julia was sixteen and went to the Royal Academy of
Dramatic Art in Gower Street she knew already much that they could
teach her there. She won every prize that was open to her, and when
she was finished with the school her good French got her almost
immediately a small part in London as a French maid.
Jimmie l.angton was taking a short holiday which he spent in
going every night to the theatre in one town after another.
At the end of the piece he went round to see Julia. He was well
enough known in the theatrical world for her to be flattered by the
compliments he paid her, and when he asked her to lunch with him
next day she accepted.
They had no sooner sat down to table than he went straight to the
point.
“1 never slept a wink all night for thinking of you," he said. “I’ve
lived in the theatre since I was a kid just out of a board school, and
what I don’t know about acting isn’t worth knowing. I think you’re a
genius."
“It’s sweet of you to say so."
“Now let’s come down to brass tacks. Come to me and I’ll make
you the greatest actress in England. I tell you, you’ve got the makings
of a great actress. I’ve never been so sure of anything in my life."
(From Theatre by W. S. Mangham)
PROJECT
the substitution may call for)
units add to the bits of text youfve analysed.
(Passage l comes from The Watchers on the Shore by S. Barstow,
Passages 2-3 come from The Case o f the Moth Eaten Mink by
St. Gardner, Passages 4 12 are from theatre by W. S. Mangham)
1. I’d like to hang on a bit longer and make sure they won’t start
making economies such as cutting back in the number of staff to off
set a bit of what the writer has lost them in working hours. No, it’s
not likely, but if the worst did happen, l might want to come back
here and it wouldn’t do to hum our boats.
2. “If that old goat hail only told the truth in the first place, instead
of beating around the hush", he said, “we’d have been finished in fif
teen minutes.”
3. “I think you misunderstand Paul Drake, Miss Nolan. He mere
ly was referring to the fact that you could get right down to brass
tacks. He wasn’t referring to your manner but pointing out there was
no need for any verbal detours.”
4. “Michael called a rehearsal.” “I’m very glad I did. I found
little bits of business had crept in that I hadn’t given them and a good
many liberties were being taken with the text. I’m a great stickler for
saying the author’s exact words.”
5. The Colonel began to make little jokes with her and sometimes
he pinched her ear playfully.
“Now you mustn’t flirt with me, Colonel,” she cried, giving him
a roguish delicious glance. “Just because I’m an actress you think
you can take liberties with me."
6. He was a kind and affectionate lover, but in a very short while
seemed to take her a trifle for granted; by his manner, friendly but
casual, you might have thought they had been married for years.
7. She got Dolly and Charles Tamerley to ask him to luncheon.
He was fond of dancing and she got him cards for balls. For his sake
she would go to them herself for an hour, and she was conscious of
the satisfaction he got out of seeing how much fuss people made
o f her.
8. “He’ll be a nice friend for Roger,” said Michael. “Tom’s got his
head screwed on his shoulders the right way, and he’s a lot older than
Roger. He ought to have a good influence on him.”
9. She read his mind like an open book. It was true that he never
had any but a commonplace thought; on the other hand he never had
a shameful one.
10. Her heart sank. It was with the greatest difficulty that she
managed not to make a scene. But she controlled herself.
11. “I don’t think it’s so much really. I don’t see it’s anything to
make all that fuss about"
12. 1feel on the top o f the world. I feel like a million dollars. I
want to be alone and enjoy myself.
3. Quoted below are headlines in which phraseological units
are used. Study the headlines and say: a) What information
(denotational and connotational) the phraseological unit con
veys in the context of the headline; b) What it contributes to the
informative function of the headline.
I. The Bitter Truth. 2. Here and Now. 3. A lot Ventured, Nothing
Lost? 4. The Eternal Triangle. 5. Hitting a Nerve. 6. Tomahawk
Diplomacy. 7. High Seas. 8. In the Shadows.
(The headlines come from
The Economist, 1998, Time, 1997, 1998)
4. State the contextual meaning of the idioms formed from a
phrasal verb. Rely on an English-English dictionary.
1. We were at a loss to know what to do. 2. His teaching methods
are badly behind the times. 3. Don't be too hard on him. 4. Г т up to
my eyes in work. 5. Last year he came of age. 6. Please, come to the
point. 7. His dream came true. 8. The weather is going from bad to
worse. 9. Everything she says goes in one ear and out the other. 10. This
skirt went out of fashion. 11. The suits were going for a song. 12. They
kept their neighbours at a distance. 13. Keep up to date! 14. She tries
to keep the children under her thumb. 15. Keep your nose out of my
affairs! 16. Make yourself at home. 17. I can’t make head or tail of
this map. 18. They seem to be made for one another. 19. It makes me
no difference whether he comes or not. 20. They made friends with
their neighbours. 21. Try to put yourself in his shoes. 22. He put two
and two together and knew that she decided to leave. 23. The view
took our breath away. 24. What do you lake me for? 25. All right. I’ll
take you at your word.
5. Supply the proverb from which the following phraseological

units have been derived. Comment on the meaning of each of
them:
1) the best-regulated families; 2) art is long; 3) the soul of wit;
4) everybody’s business, 5) the strength of the chain; 6) a silver lin
ing; 7) the darkness hour, 8) still waters; 9) a gift horse; 10) an
Englishman’s home; 11) the spice of life; 12) a sleeping lion; 13) good
news; 14) a sinking ship; 15) a dangerous thing.
U N IT 1. F a m ily L ife
ENGLISH RUSSIAN
A
l Be / look the very picture o f one’s Вылитый отец
(father...)
2 (As) pretty as a picture Писаная красавица
3 Keep one’s looks Сохранять миловидность
4 Beauty lies in lover’s eyes Красота - в глазах глядящего
5 Appearances are deceptive Внешность обманчива
6 In the flower o f life (one’s age) / in the В расцвете лет
prime o f life
7 Bear / carry off one’s age well Хорошо выглядеть для своего воз
раста
8 You are as old as you feel Возраст определяется самочувст
вием
9 A chip off the old block Характером весь в отца
IO Like father like son Яблоко от яблони недалеко падает
ll Be a character Оригинальный человек
12 Actions speak louder than words Дела громче слов
В
1 Marriages are made in heaven Браки совершаются на небесах
2 Wedding dress / ring / breakfast / Подвенечное платье / обручальное
reception / cake кольцо / прием гостей / свадебный
пирог
3 Быть по уши влюбленным
4 Be head over ears in love Зеница ока
5 The apple of one’s eye Младший ребенок в семье
6 The baby of the family Паршивая овца
7 A black sheep Семейный круг
8 Family circle Домашний очаг
9 Family hearth / 1learth and home Растить / воспитывать детей
10 Bring up / raise a family Семейная тайна
Family skeleton = a skeleton in the
11 cupboard / closet Несчастья случаются и в самых
Accidents will happen / occur in the благополучных семьях
12 best-regulated families Быстрая женитьба - долгое раска
Marry in haste and repent at leisure яние
U N IT 2. D w e llin g
1 Set up house / home Поселиться в доме

2 Keep house Заниматься домашним хозяйством
3 Keep a good house Хорошо принимать гостей
4 Take pains to make the house / flat as Прилагать все усилия для того,
attractive as possible чтобы сделать свой дом / квартиру
как можно более привлекагельным(ой)
5 Be in apple-pie order Быть в образцовом порядке
6 Live in (grand) style, live in opulence Жить в богатстве
7 Be well / comfortably off; be well-to-do Быть состоятельным
8 Receive guests / visitors; play host to Принимать гостей
smb
9 Keep open house Принимать гостей в любое время
10 Make oneself at home Чувствовать себя как дома
11 Make smb feel at home Расположить кого-либо таким обра
зом, чтобы тот чувствовал себя как
дома
12 Home from home Домашняя атмосфера; как дома
13 Home bird Домосед
14 Within the walls of В стенах (какого-либо здания, уч р еж
дения)
15 Under the same roof Под одной крышей
16 Answer the door Открыть дверь
17 Show smb the door Указать на дверь
18 Kick downstairs Спусгить с лестницы
19 Not enough room to swing a cat Очень тесно; повернуться негде
20 Live cooped / penned up together Жить в тесноте
21 The more the merrier В тесноте, да не в обиде; чем больше
компания, тем веселее
22 Walls have ears И у стен есть уши
23 A / no roof over one’s head Крыша / Без крыши над головой
24 A condemned house Дом, предназначенный на слом
25 For domestic reason По семейным обстоятельствам
26 Home life Домашняя жизнь
27 Home sweet home Как хорошо быть дома
28 Be homesick Скучать по дому
29 An Englishman’s home is his castle Дом англичанина - его крепость
30 East or West, home is best. There’s no В гостях хорошо, а дома лучше
place like home.
U N IT 3. D a ily P ro g ra m m e
1 Go to bed with the lamb ami rise \\ ithРано ложим.ся и вставать с пету
the lark хами
2 An early bird Ранняя шашка
3 The early bird catches the worm Кю рано встает, того удача ждет
4 Keep late / regular, etc hours 11оздио ложиться / ложиться и
вставать в одно и то же время
5 Early to bed and eail\ to rise makes a Кто рано ложиться и рано встает,
man healthy, wealths and wise здоровье, богатство и ум наживет
6 Not sleep a wink / not get a wink of Не сомкнуть глаз
sleep
7 (As) regular as clockwork Точный, как часы
8 As busy as a bee Занятой как пчелка
9 Be up to one’s ears in work По горло работы
10 Have one’s hands full Иметь много дел
11 A woman’s work is never done Работе по дому конца нет
12 Working breakfast (lunch...) Деловой завтрак (обед)
13 Not have all day Не иметь много времени
14 Morning, noon and night С утра до ночи
15 Go (out) for a meal Пойти в ресторан
16 Time flies Время летит
17 Blow away the cobwebs Проветриться, прогуляться
18 Business before pleasure Делу время, потехе час
19 Never put off till tomorrow what you Никогда не откладывай на завтра,
can do today что можно сделать сегодня
20 By doing nothing we learn to do ill Безделье ведет к беде
21 The work shows the workmen Дело мастера боится
22 It’s (just) one o f those days Это один из таких дней
23 It’s your lucky day Счастливый день
24 It’s not every day (that) Не каждый день случается...
25 Not your day Сегодня не твой день
26 Have time to bum Времени некуда девать
27 Not do a stroke o f work Палец о палец не ударить
28 While away the time Коротать время
29 Have a tedious time Томиться
30 Not know what to do with oneself Не знать, чем заняться
31 All work and no play Одна работа без забавы - от нее
тупеешь, право.
32 Divide one’s time between work and play Чередовать работу и отдых
U N IT 4. M e a ls
1 Appetite comes with eating. Аппетит приходит во время еды
2 Have a huge / big / voracious appetite Иметь большой / жадный аппетит
3 Lose one’s appetite Потерять аппетит
4 Spoil / ruin one’s appetite Испортить аппетит
5 The belly has no ears Соловья баснями не кормят
6 Bread and butter Хлеб насущный
7 Eat like a bird Мало есть
8 Eat like a horse Много есть
9 I could eat a horse Я ужасно проголодался
10 I couldn’t eat another thing Я сыт
11 Big / light / fussy / picky (AmE) eater Хороший / слабый / разборчивый едок
12 Eat smb out o f house and home Проедать все запасы пищи
13 Eat smb’s bread Есть чужой хлеб
14 High tea Ранний ужин с чаем
15 Packed lunch Еда, которую берут с собой в школу,
на работу, на пикник
16 Cooked breakfast Готовый завтрак
17 1lave a snack / a bite Перекусить
18 Square meal Плотная еда
19 Home cooking Еда домашнего приготовления
20 Wine and dine smb Угощать кого-либо
21 Make one’s mouth water Вызывать слюнки
22 Melt in one’s mouth Таять во рту
23 Smack one’s lips Чмокать губами
24 To my taste На мой вкус
25 To taste По вкусу
26 Tastes differ = Everyone to his own О вкусах не спорят
taste
27 After dinner sit a while, after supper После обеда посиди, после ужина
walk a mile мимо пройди
28 You are what you eat О вас судят по тому, что вы едите
29 Eat, drink and be merry Наслаждайся жизнью
U N IT 5. S h o p p in g
1 Do the shopping Делать покупки
2 Shop around Ходить по магазинам, чтобы озна
комиться с ценами, присмотреть
вещь
3 In cash Наличными
4 Hard cash Наличные деньги
5 Pay cash Платить наличными
6 Have money on oneself Иметь при себе деньги
7 Pay by cheque (AmE) / credit card Расплачиваться чеком / кредитной
карточкой
8 Cash down Платить до получения
9 Be a good / bad buy Стоить / не стоить уплаченных денег
10 Cash and carry Магазин, в котором товары про
даются за наличный расчет, оптом
11 Pay good money for Заплати» мною денег
12 A knockdown price По ежи шибагелмюй цене
13 Dirt cheap Очень низкая цена
14 Cheap and nasty Дешево и сер ди т
15 Buy for a song ( )чень дешево
16 Above price Бесценный
17 Cost a pretty penny / C’ost an ; and Очень дорого
a leg
18 Cost the earth / Cost a fortune / a bomb Стоить целое состояние
19 Pin money / mad money Карманные деньги
20 Spend money like water Сорить деньгами
21 Spending money / pocket money Карманные деньги
22 Spendaholic / compulsive shopper Любитель мною тратить
23 Be flush with money / Have money to Иметь мною денег
burn / Have deep pockets
24 Bum a hole in one's pocket Быстро, легко тратить деньги
25 Hit smb’s pockets Бить по карману кого-либо
26 Buy smth over smb’s head Перехватить у кого-либо что-либо,
предложив более высокую цену
27 Smth costs money Это стоит денег
28 It’s not worth a farthing / penny Гроша ломаного не стоит
29 Buy a pig in a poke Купить кота в мешке
30 Penny wise and pound foolish Экономить на мелочах
31 Cut the (one’s) coat according to the По одежке протягивай ножки
(one’s) cloth
U N IT 6. S o c ia l E tiq u e tte
1 Exchange greetings Обменяться приветствиями
2 Pay smb a compliment Сделать кому-либо комплимент
3 Return the compliment Сделать ответный комплимент
4 Have smb to thank (for smth) Быть обязанным благодарить кого-
либо (за что-либо)
5 Make friends with smb Подружиться с кем-либо
6 Cause / give offence Оскорбить кого-либо
7 Take offence Оскорбиться
8 Accept smb’s apology Принять чьи-либо извинения
9 It’s good / bad manners (to do smth) Хорошо / плохо себя вести (делать
что-либо)
10 She / he has no manners У нее / него нет хороших манер
11 Where are your manners? Как вы себя ведете?
12 Behave* yourself Ведите себя прилично
13 In polite society / circles / company В хорошем обществе / кругу / компании
14 Just / only being polite Из вежливости
15 Table manners Правила поведения за столом
16 Take leave o f smb / take one’s leave Попрощаться с кем-либо
17 Play'the man Вести себя как подобает мужчине
18 Play the fool Глупо вести себя
19 Play the baby Неразумно вести себя
20 Evil communications corrupt good С кем поведешься, от того и набе
manners решься
21 Fair and softly goes far Вежливый и мягкий может многого
добиться
22 Be on one’s best behaviour Вести себя наилучшим образом
23 Civility costs nothing Вежливость в порядке вещей
24 Social life Светская жизнь
25 Do as you would be done by Поступай с другими так, как бы ты
хотел, чтобы поступали с тобой
26 Manners maketh man / Manners make Судят о людях по их манерам
the man
U N IT 7. E d u c a tio n
1 Learn smth at one’s mother’s knee Узнать что-либо с пеленок
2 Intellectual / mental food Духовная пища
1 Be very quick in / on the uptake Быстро соображать
l follow in smb’s footsteps Пойти по чьим-либо стопам
5 Cm one s own way Пойти своей дорогой
6 In doing we leam Работая, мы учимся
7 An idle brain is the devil s uoikshop Праздное п. - мап» всех пороков
8 Work in / by fits and starts Работать урывками, нерегулярно
9 Be head and / over ears in work С головой уйти в работу
10 Busy one’s brains about smth / Rack Ломать себе голову над чем-либо
one’s brains
11 Stuff smb’s head with smth Забивать кому-либо голову чем-либо
12 Stuff smb’s memory with smth Перегружать чью-либо память чем-
либо
13 From cover to cover От корки до корки
14 Hammer into smb’s head Вбивать в чью-либо голову
15 Show promise Подавать надежды
16 She / he will / should go far Она / он далеко пойдет
17 A walking dictionary / encyclopaedia Ходячий словарь, энциклопедия
18 Bear / reap the fruits of smth Пожинать плоды чего-либо
19 Under pressure Под давлением, против воли
20 Turn a deaf ear to smth Пропускать что-либо мимо ушей
21 In (at) one ear and out (at) the other В одно ухо вошло, в другое вышло
22 It’s never late to learn Учиться никогда не поздно
23 He who makes no mistake, makes Тот никогда не ошибается, кто ни
nothing чего не делает
24 Little knowledge is a dangerous thing / Малые знания вредны
A little learning is a dangerous thing
25 Knowledge is power Знание - сила
26 Live and learn Век живи - век учись
27 Better untaught than ill taught Недоученный хуже неученого
28 Like teacher, like pupil Каков учитель, таков и ученик
29 Study under smb Обучаться под руководством извест
ного преподавателя
30 Money spent on the brain is never Деньги, истраченные на образова
spent in vain ние, всегда окупаются
U N IT 8. W e e k e n d
1 A day off Выходной день
2 The daily round Круг ежедневных занятий
3 Have / take a rest Отдыхать
4 A well-earned rest Заслуженный отдых
5 Leisure time Свободное время
6 Gentleman / lady of leisure Гог кчо не должен paooian, (юмор.)
7 Have one's sleep out Hi.ieuau.iM
8 Beauty sleep ( он днем, ранний сои (до полуночи)
9 A long weekend Митина, суббога, воскресенье,
понедельник
10 Enjoy oneself Наслаждаться, хорошо проводить
время
11 Have time on one s hands / Have time Иметь массу свободного времени
to burn
12 A change of an / scene Перемена обстановки
13 A day out День, проведенный вне дома
14 (As) free as a hud Свободный, как птица
15 Free lime Свободное время
16 In one's hours of case На досуге
17 Make merry Веселиться, пировать
18 Make a day o f it Весело провести время
19 Take one’s ease Наслаждаться досугом, отдыхать
20 Have a fine time Хорошо проводить время
21 Have all the time in the world Иметь уйму времени
22 Have the time o f one’s life Весело провести время
23 Bank holiday weekend Уикенд, во время которого выпа
дают установленные неприсутст
венные дни для английских служа
щих в пятницу или понедельник
24 A busman’s holiday День отдыха, проведенный за обыч
ной работой
25 Lost time is never found again Потерянного времени не воротишь
U N IT 9. C u ltu re
1 Be on the air Передаваться по радио
2 Be otT the air Перестать передаваться по радио
3 Chat show Радио или телеинтервью (со знаме
нитостью)
4 Dumb show Пантомима, немое представление
5 A gallery play Игра на публику, рассчитанная на
аплодисменты
6 Black / dark comedy “Черная” комедия (с м ра ч н ы м ю м о
ром )
7 Lay the scene / Set the scene Устанавливать место действия (о пьесе,
р о м а н е и т. п.)
8 Play a part Играть роль
9 Principal boy Травести - актриса, исполняющая
мужскую роль
10 The leading lady Ведущая актриса, актриса на первых
ролях
11 In concert Петь в концерте
12 Set / put smth to music Переложить что-либо на музыку
13 First night Премьера
14 Soap opera “Мыльная” опера
15 Put up a good / poor show Добиться хороших результатов /
неудачно выступить
16 Live the part Прекрасно исполнять роль, вжиться
в роль
17 Good theatre Очень сценичный
18 Top one’s part Сыграть роль с большим мастер
ством
19 Walk through one’s part Играть скверно, без души
20 A blinking part Роль (почти) без слов
21 A round of applause Взрыв аплодисментов
22 Applaud to the echo Восторженно аплодировать
23 Take a curtain call Выхолить на аплодисменты
24 Steal the show Злгмшь всех
25 On show Показывать публике
26 Sing like a nightingale Петь как соловей
27 Rising star Восходящая звезда
28 Cultural activity Культурные мероприятия
29 Popular culture Попкультура
30 Cultural desert Места, где отсутствуют культурные
мероприятия
31 Man cannot live by bread alone Не хлебом единым жив человек
32 Art for art’s sake Искусство ради искусства
33 Art is long, life is short Жизнь коротка, искусство вечно
34 Every country has its customs Сколько стран, столько обычаев
U N IT 10. L ite ra tu re
l Have the makings of (a) writer Иметь задатки писателя
2 O f great (high) promise Подающий большие надежды
3 Have come to stay Утвердиться надолго
4 Out o f the common Из ряда вон выходящий
5 Break (fresh / new) ground Прокладывать новые пути, делать
первые шаги (в чем-либо)
6 Have an impact (on) Иметь влияние, воздействие (на)
7 Prove a success Иметь успех
8 Powers o f observation Наблюдательность
9 Vivid imagination Живое воображение
Ю A flight of fancy / imagination Полет фантазии
ll Brevity is the soul of wit Краткость - сестра таланта
12 Of special / particular interest Особый интерес
13 Be impressed with / by Находиться под впечатлением
I4 Capture / catch smb’s imagination Захватить чье-либо воображение
I5 Read with unflagging interest Читать с неослабевающим интере
сом
16 Be a best-seller Быть бестселлером
17 Be light reading Легко читаться
18 A fast / slow reader Быстрый / медленный читагель
19 Read between the li Читать между строк
20 Dip into a book 11ролис1 «пь книгу
21 Make good / interesting / boring reading 11рслстанля-ть собой хорошее / инте
ресное / скучное чтение
22 Chapter and verse I Ьшпл
23 Devour a book П отоп ит, книгу
24 A good / excellent read Хорошее / отличное чтение
25 A coffee-table book Красочная, иллюстрированная книга
26 A pirated book “Пиратское” издание
27 Beneath criticism Ниже всякой критики
28 Choose an author as you choose a Выбирай книгу так, как выбирают
friend друга
U N IT 11. R e lig io n
l The Book o f Books Библия, священное писание
2 Bell, book and candle Колокольный звон, чтение священ
ного писания, зажженные свечи
(аксесуары р ел и ги о зн ого об ряда)
3 Enter / go into the Church Принять духовный сан, стать свя
щенником
4 Faith, hope and charity Вера, надежда и милосердие
5 Father superior Настоятель
6 Mother superior Мать- 1\ астоятельница
7 Practise what one preaches Поступать так, как проповедуешь
8 The (straight and) narrow path Стезя добродетели
9 Cast one’s bread upon the waters Делать добро, не ожидая благодар
ности
Ю God tempers the wind to the shorn Бог по силе крест налагает
lamb
ll A cross to bear Нести свой крест
12 Peace of mind Спокойствие духа
13 The spirit is willing, but the flesh is Дух бодр, плоть же немощна
weak
14 Man proposes, God disposes Человек предполагает, а бог распо
лагает
15 Whom God would ruin, he first' Кого бог хочет сгубить, у того он
deprives o f reason сначала отнимает разум
16 All are not saints that go to church Не всяк праведник, кто ходит в
церковь
17 A deadly / morta / sin Смертный грех
18 Commit a sin Согрешить
19 You cannot serve both God and Нельзя служить богу и мамоне
Mammon одновременно
20 Sell one’s soul (to the devil) Продать душу (дьяволу)
21 He that serves God for money will Тот, кто служит богу за деньги, будет
serve the devil for better wages служить и дьяволу, если дьявол
заплатит больше
22 God willing Если будет на то божья воля; если
позволят обстоятельства
23 For Christ’s sake! Ради Бога! О Господи!
24 Get religion Удариться в религию
25 Like an angel Как ангел, божественно; бесподобно
26 An Act o f God Стихийное бедствие; то, что не
подвластно человеку
U N IT 12. G ettin g a b o u t Town

I I leavy traffic Оживленное дорожное движение
2 Л safety island / a traffic island Островок безопасности
3 Be from out of town Приезжий (из д р у го г о го р о д а )
4 Go / be out on the town Выходить вечером в ресторан, театр
и i м ради развлечения
5 Go sightseeing Осматривать достопримечатель
ности
6 Within walking / driving distance На расстоянии ходьбы / езды
7 At a snail’s pace Черепашьим шагом
8 At breakneck pace / speed Сломя голову, стремглав
9 A bird’s-eye view Вид с высоты птичьего полета
Ю Live in the street Проводить почти все время вне дома
ll Out o f curiosity Из любопытства
12 Catch / get a glimpse o f smtli Увидеть мельком что-либо
13 Be all eyes Глядеть во все глаза
I4 Burst upon the eye one’s sight Бросаться в глаза
15 Appear to one’s eyes Явиться, предстать перед чьими-
либо глазами
16 Eye appeal Внешняя привлекательность
17 Feast one’s eyes Радовать чей-либо глаз
18 Only have eyes for Хотеть видеть / посмотреть только
одно
19 Have one’s eyes glued on / to Не отрывать взгляда от , любо
ваться
20 Not to take one’s eyes from smth / smb Не отрывагь взгляда, любоваться чем-
либо
21 See smth with one’s own eyes Увидеть что-либо своими глазами
22 Answer / fit a description Соответствовать описанию
23 Defy description Не поддаваться описанию
24 Bear / stand comparison with Выдерживать сравнение с
25 Bi imprinted on smb’s memory Отпечататься в чьей-либо памяти
26 First impression Первое впечатление
27 First impressions are most lasting Первые впечагления наиболее сильные
28 Be favourably impressed with / by 11аходиться под приятным впечатле
smth нием от чего-либо
29 Attract attention Привлекать внимание
30 No end of (a time) Чудесное, прекрасное (время)
U N IT 13. Travellin g. V acation

1 Go on / take a trip Отравиться в поездку
2 Make a trip ('оперши и, поездку
3 Day trip ( )дмодпеинля поездка
4 Be off on one's travels Находи 1 ься и поездке, путешест-
nonai 1.
5 Travel the world / count! \ 1lyiciuecпитам, по миру/стране
6 Travel widely Мною п> 1С1иесзвовать
7 Travel light 1ly icuicc Iпоиазь налегке
8 Live in one's trunks Жить на чемоданах, не распаковы
вать свои вещи (из-за н едост ат ка
м ест а или врем ени)
9 Here today and gone tomorrow Сегодня здесь, а завтра там
10 All aboard Посадка окончена
11 For a change Для разнообразия
12 The ends o f the earth Край света
13 At the ends o f the earth На краю света
14 To the end(s) o f the earth На край света
15 Attract smb like a magnet Притягивать кого-либо как магнит
16 Broaden the mind Расширять кругозор
17 The chance o f a lifetime Счастливый случай, возможность,
представляющаяся только раз в жизни
18 A dream come true Осуществившаяся мечта
19 Bring back memories Вызывать воспоминания
20 Culture shock Чувство, которое испытывает ино
странец, посетивший другую страну
впервые
21 So many countries, so many customs Сколько стран, столько обычаев
22 When in Rome, do as the Romans do В чужой монастырь со своим уста
вом не ходят
23 Variety is the spice of life Разнообразие - изюминка жизни
24 The world is a small place Мир тесен
25 The seven wonders o f the world Семь чудес света
U N IT 14. N atu re . W e a th e r
I The break o f day Рассвет
2 A breath o f (fresh) air Дуновение ветерка, глоток воздуха
3 King’s (Queen’s or royal) weather Чудесная погода
4 Wind and weather Ветер и непогода
5 Fine weather for the (young) ducks Дождливая погода
6 It looks like rain Похоже, пойдет дождь
7 Pour with rain Идет проливной дождь
8 It’s raining cats and dogs Льет как из ведра
9 Rain or shine При любой погоде
Ю In all weathers В любую погоду
II A break in the weather Перемена погоды
12 Weather forecast Прогноз погоды
13 High summer Разгар лета
14 Green winter Мягкая, бесснежная зима
15 (In) the depths o f winter В середине зимы
16 In the dead o f winter В самую холодную пору зимы
17 The convulsion of nature Стихийное бедствие (зем л ет ря се
ние, изверж ение вулкана)
18 The course o f nature Закон природы
19 Holiday season Сезон отпусков
20 The call o f the wild Зов природы
2I Back to nature Назад к природе!
22 Animal welfare / rights Защита животных
23 l nvironmental friendly = environment Безвредный для окружающей среды
ally friendly
24 Protected species Виды (ж и вот н ы х...), находящиеся
под охраной
25 Endangered species Виды (ж и вот н ы х...) , находящиеся
под угрозой исчезновения
26 A thing of beauty is a joy for ever Суть красоты - быть радостью всегда
U N IT 15. M e d ic in e
I Alive and kicking Полон жизни, жив-здоров
2 Feel Fit Быть бодрым и здоровым
3 Feel quite oneself Поправиться, хорошо себя чувство
вать
4 (As) fine / fit as a fiddle В добром здравии
5 Be a picture o f health Быть воплощением здоровья
6 Be (as) right as rain Совершенно здоров
7 A bag o f bones = skin and bone Худой, мешок костей
8 Feel like a boiled wet rag Чувствовать себя совершенно разби
тым
9 Feel like death / warmed up Отвратительно себя чувствовать
to Go (all) to pieces Расшататься (о н ервах), подорвать
себе здоровье
II Go from bad to worse Становиться хуже и хуже
12 Under the weather Больной с легким недомоганием
13 Between life and death Между жизнью и смертью
14 Catch a cold Простудиться
15 Catch a disease Заразиться, заболеть
16 Catch one’s death Насквозь простыть
17 Look like a death’s head Очень плохо выглядеть
18 Cause disease Вызывай, болезнь
19 Smb’s days are numbered Чьи-либо дни сочтены
20 Breathe one’s last (breath or gasp) Умереть, и сп усти , дух
21 Die a natural death Умерен» своей смертью
22 Die in one’s boots / Die with one's Умерен, за рабоюй
boots on
23 Hope against hope Надсжься на чудо, вопреки всему
24 Be a martyr to smth C iап. мучеником чего-либо
25 Cheat death Ч\;юм и (бежим, смерш. лыжин,
26 Take one’s life in one's ow n hands P l I C k O i t a i l . ЖИ U U .I O
27 Take medicine I (р н н и м а н . iC K a p ciB o
28 The best medicine Л\чшсс лекаре ню
29 Respond to treatment 11о;|даплп,ся лечению
30 Perform an operation Делан, операцию
31 Nurse smb back to health Выходить кого-либо
32 Bring smb to life Возврагить кого-либо к жизни
33 Be on call Быть готовым явиться по вызову
34 Under the doctor (ion Лечиться у знаменитого врача
35 Hospital bed Больничная койка
36 The medical profession Медицина, медицинская профессия
37 An apple a day keeps the doctor away Кто яблоко днем съедает, у ю т
врача не бывает
38 Good health is above wealth Здоровье дороже денег
U N IT 16. S p o rt
l Spectator sport Зрелищный спорт
2 Reigning champion Действующий чемпион
3 Be in / out o f training В хорошей / плохой форме
4 Be at one’s best В лучшей форме
5 Beat smb hollow Легко победить
6 Beat (defeat) smb on points (win on Выиграть по очкам
points)
7 Have the advantage over smb Иметь преимущество над кем-либо
8 Win by a mile / 10 points Выиграть милю / Ю очков
9 Win hands down Легко выиграть
Ю Break a record Побить рекорд
ll Set a record Установить рекорд
12 Hold a record Удержать рекорд
13 A close contest Упорная борьба
14 Get one’s revenge Взять реванш
15 Excell at / in sport Быть превосходным спортсменом
16 Make the finals Попасть в финал
17 Work (perform) miracles Творить чудеса
18 Stick to the rules Придерживаться правил
19 Break the rules Нарушать правила
20 Lose on points Проиграть по очкам
21 Lose a game Проиграть игру
22 A bad loser Плохо переносить проигрыш
23 A good loser Хорошо переносить проигрыш
24 (As) quick as a flash (as lightning) Быстрый как молния
25 Muscles o f steel Стальные мускулы
26 Of great (high) promise Многообещающий
27 Fan club Клуб фанатов (болельщиков)
28 You never know what you can do till Не взявшись за дело, не узнаешь, на
your try (it) что способен
U N IT 17. P o litic s
I On good authority Из достоверных источников
2 Rivet one’s attention on (to) Сосредоточить свое внимание на
чем-либо
3 Make arrangement Вступать в соглашение
4 Take action Принимать меры
5 Get a new angle on smth Изменить свою точку зрения на что-
либо
6 Agree to differ Остаться при своем мнении
7 Ik* on the agenda Быть актуальным
X 11.inly annual Ежегодно поднимаемый вопрос
9 Drive into the background Отодвинуть на задний план
К) Keep m the background Держаться в тени, на заднем плане
II Parliamentary agent Лоббист
12 On (upon) the anvil В процессе рассмотрения, обсуж
дения
13 A wrecking amendment Поправка, имеющая целью сорвать
принятие законопроекта
I4 Kill the bill Провалить законопроект
15 The balance of power Баланс сил
16 Hold the balance Управлять, обладать властью
17 The armaments race / the arms race Гонка вооружений
18 Lay down (one’s) arms Сложить оружие
19 Rise in arms (take up arms against) Подняться с оружием в руках
20 Under arms Вооруженный
2l Up in arms Готовый к борьбе, охваченный вос
станием
22 Gunboat diplomacy “Дипломатия канонерок”
23 Big stick policy / the big stick Политика “большой дубинки”
24 A carrot and stick policy Политика “кнута и пряника”
25 The policy o f strength Политика с позиции силы
26 Power politics Политика силы
27 Shuttle diplomacy “Челночная” дипломатия
28 Shirtsleeve diplomacy “Дипломатия без пиджака”
29 A round table conference Круглый стол
30 Political prisoner Политический заключенный
31 Political asylum Политическое убежище
32 Be at peace with smb Поддерживать мирные отношения с
кем-либо
33 Go into politics Заняться политикой
34 Party politics Партийная политика
35 Form a government Сформировать правительство
36 Under a government В период работы правительства
37 Be in government В правительстве (у власги)
38 The inner cabinet Кабинег министров в узком составе
39 The shadow cabinet “Теневой кабинег”
40 Lean compromise is better than a fat Хулой мир лучше доброй ссоры
lawsuit
41 Honesty is the best policy Чес i носи» лучшая полтина
U N IT 18. L a w
I Read law IIiviati. юриспруденцию
2 Go to law Обрамт.ся н суд, начать судебный
процесс
3 Law and order Закопоиослушание, порядок
4 Accessory alter the fact Соучастник после события преступ
ления
5 Accessory before the fact Соучастник до события преступ
ления
6 Prisoner at the bar Заключенный на скамье подсудимых
7 Jury service Участие в работе присяжных
8 Innocent till proven guilty Презумпция невиновности
9 Give smb the benefit o f the doubt Оправдать кого-либо за недостатком
улик
Ю Hardened criminals Закоренелые прсскупникн
ll Bring / call smb to account (for) Привлечь кого-либо к ответствен
ности (за)
12 Bring / take an action against smb Возбудить против кого-либо судеб
ное дело
13 Be called to the Bar Получить право адвокатской прак
тики
14 Take someone to court Отправить кого-либо в суд
15 Commit crimes Совершить преступления
16 Scene o f the crime Место преступления
17 Crime doesn’t pay Зло наказуемо
18 Be on trial (for) Находиться под судом (за)
19 Stand trial Быть под судом
20 Stand accused of Быть обвиненным в чем-либо
21 Behind bars В тюрьме, за решеткой
22 Add insult to injury Усугубить свою вину
23 Aid and abet Оказывать пособничество и под
стрекать
24 Assault and battery Оскорбление действием
25 Bear testimony witness (to) Давать показания
26 Take the law into one’s own hands Расправиться без суда
27 Settled out o f court Решить (вопрос) без суда
28 Break jail Убежать из тюрьмы
29 The (long) arm o f the law Рука правосудия, сила закона
30 The greater the crime, the higher the “Чем серьезнее преступление, тем
gallows выше виселица”, возмездие соответ
ствует вине
31 Ignorance o f the law excuses no man Незнание закона не служит оправ
данием (незнание закона не может
служить оправданием)
32 Law-makers should not be law Тот, кто издает законы, не должен
breakers нарушать их
U N IT 19. B u s in e s s
1 Big business Большой бизнес, крупный капитал
2 Business is business Бизнес есть бизнес
3 Drum up business Расширять бизнес
4 A captain o f industry Промышленный магнат
5 Cutthroat competition Ожесточенная конкуренция
6 Bubble company Дутое предприятие
7 Plain dealing Честная сделка
8 Enter into an agreement Заключать соглашение
9 In breach o f contrast В нарушение договора
10 Go bankrupt Обанкротиться
11 Drive a hard bargain Много запрашивать
12 Be in the market for smth Быть готовым купить что-либо
13 A buyer’s / seller’s market Выгодные цены для покупателя /
продавца
14 The bottom has fallen out of the market Люди перестают покупать какие-
либо товары
15 Black market “Черный” рынок
16 Run into debt Влезть в долги
17 Out o f debt, out o f danger Kio tnii:iaiu;i aojim, у mm - гора c
плеч
18 Creditors have better memories than V кредитором in лучше, чем у
debtors должником
19 Coin money / coin it Быстро бога 1с 11.
20 Make money “Делать деньги"
21 Sink money (into) Невыгодно помета и. кант;
22 Roll in money / have money to burn Утопать в роскоши
23 Put (some) money (into) Вложить деньги
24 There is money in it (in that, in this) На этом можно заработан.
25 Money for jam / for old rope Легко доставшиеся деньги
26 Money makes the world go round Деньги заставляют мир вращаться
27 (The love of) money is the root o f all evil Деньги - корень всех зол
U N IT 20. M is c e lla n y
1 Put on airs Задаваться
2 Kick up a row Поднять шум, скандалить
3 Make a fuss Волноваться попусту, суетиться
4 Get / touch someone on the raw Задеть кого-либо за живое
5 Laugh at somebody behind his back Смеяться над кем-либо за его спиной
6 Take liberties with someone Допускать вольности в отношении
кого-либо
7 Love somebody with all one's heart Любить кого-либо всей душой
and soul
8 Take somebody under one’s wing Брать кого-либо под свое крыло
9 Drink in somebody’s words Упиваться чьими-либо словами
10 Read somebody’s thoughts Читать чьи-то мысли
11 Set one’s hopes on someone / some Возлагать надежды на кот-либо /
thing чт-либо
12 Be in the air Висе и. а воздухе
13 Be frightened out of one’s wits Бы м. очень iiaiiyiaiiiibiM
14 Puli oneself together В »ни. себя а р> ки
15 Take somebody / something lor granted ( чшаи. кто-либо / чю-либо само
сооой pa i\ меющнмен
16 Surpass someone's expectations 1IpeaioHni чьи ю ожидания
17 Keep up appearances ( об подам.приличия
18 Do something of one’s own free will Дедам, чю-либо добровольно
19 Take pains to do something ( )чснь стараться что-либо сделать
20 Cry for the moon Желам. невозможного
21 Beat about the bush Холить вокруг да около
22 Come down to brass tacks 11ереходить к сути дела
23 Have one's tongue in one’s cheek Быть неискренним
24 Have one's head suewed on one’s Иметь голову на плечах
shoulder
25 Know which side one's bread is buttered Знать свою выгоду
26 Keep one s nose above water Держать нос по ветру
27 Wash one's dirty linen in public Выносить сор из избы
28 Burn the candle at both ends Работать изо всех сил
29 Bum one's bridges (behind oneself) Сжигать мосты за собой
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Войнова Л. А., Жуков В. П., Молотков А. И., Федоров А. И.

Фразеологический словарь русского языка. - М.: Рус. яз.,
1986. -5 4 3 с.
2. Жуков В. П., Сидоренко М. И., Шкляров В. Т. Словарь
фразеологических синонимов русского языка. - М.: Рус. яз.,
1987. -4 4 8 с.
3. Кунин А. В. Англо-русский фразеологический словарь. - М.:
Рус. яз., 1984. - 944 с.
4. Collins COBUILD English Language Dictionary (developed and
comp, in the Engl. Dep. at the Lfniv. of Birmingham). Ed. in chief
John Sinclair. - London, Glasgow: Collins; Stuttgart: Klett, 1987. -
1703 p.
5. Dictionary o f Contemporary English. - Longman, Group Ltd,
1995.- 1668 p.
6. Dictionary o f English Language and Culture. - Longman, Group
Ltd, 1992.- 1560 p.
7. Seidl J., Me Mordie W. English Idioms and How to Use Them.
ABC Kaleidoscope, 1, Kyiv, 1993. - 36 p.
8. Spears R. A. American Idioms Dictionary. - National Textbook
Company. - Lincolnwood, Illinois, USA, 1991. -4 6 4 p.
CONTENTS
FOREWORD ................................................................................. 4
ID IO M S........................................................................................... 6
UNIT 1. Family Life....................................................................7
UNIT 2. Dwelling................................... 21
UNIT3. Daily Programme ..................................................... 37
UNIT 4. Meals ..........................................................................55
UNIT 5. Shopping ....................................................................70
UNIT 6. Social Etiquette...........................................................85
UNIT 7. Education ................................................................ 100
UNITS Weekend....................................................................119
UNIT 9. C ulture...................................................................... 138
UNIT Id Literature................................................................157
UNIT II Religion....................................................................174
UNIT 12 Cutting about Town................................................192
UNIT 13 Travelling. Vacation.............................................. 212
UNIT N Nature. Weather ................................................... 231
UNIT 13 Medicine........... ...................................................... 254
UNIT 16. Sport........................................................................273
UNIT 17. Politics ....................................................................291
UNIT IS. Law ..........................................................................313
UNIT 19. Business ..................................................................333
UNIT20. Miscellany ............................................................. 349
SUPPLEMENT........................................................................... 366
BIBLIOGRAPHY ...................................................... 382
Учебное пособие
ВИНАРЕВА Людмила Андрияновна

ЯНСОН Валентина Вадимовна
АНГЛИЙСКИЕ и д и о м ы
Ответственный за выпуск Л. Б. Р а с с о л ю х и н
Корректор В. П . Х о в х у н
Компьютерная верстка Л . П. Р о м а и к о
Худож ественное оф ормление И. Н. О р л о в а
Подписано в печать 21.05.08.

Формат 84x108/16. Гарнитура Таймс. Печать офсетная.
Бумага офсетная. Физ. печ. л. 12,0. Уч.-изд. л. 23,35.
Тираж 3000 жз. Заказ № 2288
ООО «Дом Славянской книги».
129327, г. Москва, ул. Коминтерна, 26
Издательство ООО «ИГ1 Логос-М»
Свидетельство гос. реестра издателей: ДК № 365 от 19.03.2001 г.
03057, г. Киев, ул. Вышгородская, д. 21, офис 404.
Тел. +380 44 502 3809 (многоканальный), e-mail: vp_logos@ukr.net
По вопросам оптовых закупок на территории РФ обращаться
в издательство «Айрис-пресс»: тел./факс (495) 785-15-30,
e-mail: trade@airis.ru. Адрес: Москва, пр. Мира, д. 106.
Наш сайт: www.airis.ru
Вы можете приобрести наши книги в Москве с 11.00 до 17.30,
кроме субботы, воскресенья, в киосках по адресу:
Москва, пр. Мира, д. 106, тел. 785-15-30
Отпечатано в полном соответствии с качеством
предоставленных диапозитивов в ОАО «ИГ1П «Правда Севера».
163002, г. Архангельск, пр. Новгородский, 32.
Тел./факс (8182)64-14-54, тел.: (8182) 65-37-65, 65-38-78, 29-20-81
www.ippps.ru, e-mail: zakaz@ippps.ru

Vinareva La Ianson VV English Idioms Angliiskie Idiomy

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Vinareva La Ianson VV English Idioms Angliiskie Idiomy

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ВАС ЖДЕТ УСПЕХ!

ООО «Дом Славянской книги» ООО «ИП Логос-М»

Рецензенты: Кеннет Пейн, профессор

Винарева Л . А., Янсон В. В.

Исключительные права на издание произведения принадлежат из­

ISBN 978-5-8112-3305-2 Винарева Л. А., Янсон В. В.

Dr. Kenny Payne

This textbook is intended primarily for students o f univer­

We hope the textbook will be useful for students who are

♦ (As) pretty as a picture ♦ Someone’s favourite person

B. Use some idioms to make up a story. A student starts it

Ш. A. Read the following passages and choose the correct key

VI. Rewrite the following text in idiomatic Engiish.

VIII. Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use

IX. A. Read and translate the following passage into Russian.

Study the following:

Be homesick Ask smb to leave one’s horned

В. Use some idioms to make up a story. A student starts it with

il. A. In the following sentences, there is an idiom. Decide what

yil. Rewrite the following text in idiomatic English.

VIII. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you

IX. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen­

XI. Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use

C. 1) Write about some advantages and disadvantages of living

Study the following:

♦ Keep late hours ♦ Very regular

B. Use some idioms to make up a story. A student starts it

V. The following sentences all contain some idioms. Read and

VIII. Rewrite the following text in idiomatic English.

IX. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you

X. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen-

XIL Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use

XIII. Read and translate the following passages into Russian.

A. Make up a story about Martha; write about her difficulties

B. Invent a story about Monica and her decision to have a job.

C. Make up a story about George and his daily routine. Use

E. Describe Mr Skate's working day, his duties and the

2. Look up in a dictionary the unknown idioms among those

♦ Bread and butter . ♦ Eat a lot of someone’s supply

B. Use idioms to make up a story. A student starts in with

9(11. Read and translate the following passages into Russian.

C. Sum up Julia, Michael and their guest. Comment on their

D. Make up a story about Evvy’s dinner. Use idiomatic English.

1. Do the shopping - to go shopping to buy food and other things

♦ Buy a pig in a poke ♦ Some money someone spends

II. A. In the following sentences, there is an idiom. Decide what

V. The following sentences all contain some idioms. Read and

VIII. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you

IX. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen­

XII. Read and translate the following passages into Russian.

New York, January 19

(From Simple Arithmetic by V. Moricom)

XIII. Speak on one of the following topics, using some idioms

Consult the English-Russian Phraseological Dictionary by

Study the following:

Social life Say good-bye to someone |

B. Use some idioms to make up a story. A student starts it with

II. A. In the following sentences, there is an idiom. Decide what

VIII. Tell an episode or reconstruct a situation from a book you

IX. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen­

X. Use the following as initial sentences and expand on them.

■0. Make up short conversations in the following situations. Use

В Note: Yob/ yobbo - a rude or troublesome young man.

Исключительные права на издание произведения принадлежат из

This textbook is intended primarily for students o f univer

IX. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen

IX. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen

IX. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen

V . Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen

F. Sum up the author of the article, his principles of a school

IX. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen

XI. Provide a natural conversational context for each of the fol

IX. Build up bits of text with the following as concluding sen

XI. Provide a natural conversational context for each of the fol